project manual fayetteville regional airport spec 3 of 3 final.pdfsouthwire company. 3. encore. 4....

PROJECT MANUAL

Fayetteville Regional Airport FAY 01-05-3022

A.I.P No. 3-37-0027-044-2016

AIRLINE TERMINAL

IMPROVEMENTS – Part 1

Owner:

THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE

TRANSPORTATION / CIVIL CONSULTANT:

TALBERT & BRIGHT, INC.

WILMINGTON, NC

Architect of Record:

GORDON JOHNSON ARCHITECTURE

FAYETTEVILLE, NC

Design Architect:

THE WILSON GROUP

CHARLOTTE, NC

Structural Engineer:

FLEMING & ASSOCIATES

FAYETTEVILLE, NC

Mechanical / Electrical / Plumbing Engineer:

RMF ENGINEERING

CHARLOTTE, NC

Volume Three of Three

May 8, 2017

Fayetteville Regional Airport – Airline Terminal Improvements – Part 1 Owner: City of Fayetteville

Fayetteville, North Carolina

AP#1515 Gordon Johnson Architecture May 8, 2017

Table of Contents 1 of 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Volume 3 of 3

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL: by RMF Engineering, Inc.

Section 260519 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

And Cables 260519-1 thru 11

Section 260526 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260526-1 thru 9

Section 260529 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 260529-1 thru 7

Section 260533 – Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 260533-1 thru 16

Section 260543 – Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical

Systems 260543-1 thru 16

Section 260548 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical

Systems 260548-1 thru 7

Section 260553 – Identification for Electrical Systems 260553-1 thru 8

Section 260573 – Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study 260573-1 thru 8

Section 260923 – Lighting Control Devices 260923-1 thru 9

Section 262200 – Low-Voltage Transformers 262200-1 thru 7

Section 262413 – Switchboards 262413-1 thru 12

Section 262416 – Panelboards 262416-1 thru 13

Section 262726 – Wiring Devices 262726-1 thru 10

Section 262813 – Fuses 262813-1 thru 4

Section 262816 – Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 262816-1 thru 7

Section 262923 – Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers 262923-1 thru 18

Section 263213 – Engine Generators 263213-1 thru 18

Section 263543 – 400Hz Ground Power Unit and Accessories 263543-1 thru 30

Section 263600 – Transfer Switches 263600-1 thru 11

Section 264313 – Surge Protection Devices for Low-Voltage

Electrical Power Circuits 264313-1 thru 6

Section 265100 – Interior Lighting 265100-1 thru 10

Section 265600 – Exterior Lighting 265600-1 thru 11

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS: by Vertex Technology Consultants, Inc.

Section 270100 – Telecommunications Outline of Work 270100-1 thru 1

Section 270544 – Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for

Communications Pathways 270544-1 thru 3

Section 271100 – Communications Equipment Room Fittings 271100-1 thru 9

Section 271300 – Communications Backbone Cabling 271300-1 thru 15

Section 271500 – Communications Horizontal Cabling 271500-1 thru 14

Section 275113 – Paging Systems 275113-1 thru 8

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY: by Vertex Technology Consultants, Inc.

Section 281000 – Access Control Systems 281000-1 thru 17

Section 282300 – Video Management System VMS 282300-1 thru 11

Section 283111 – Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm Systems: by RMF Engineering, Inc.

283111-1 thru 29




Table of Contents 2 of 2

DIVISION 29 – 30

NOT USED

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK: by Gordon Johnson Architecture

Section 313116 – Termite Control 313116-1 thru 3

DIVISION 32 – LANDSCAPING: by Crawford Design Company

Section 329000 – Landscaping 329000-1 thru 3

Section 329119 – Landscape Grading 329119-1 thru 2

DIVISION 33

NOT USED

DIVISION 34 – TRANSPORTATION CONSTRUCTION AND EQUIPMENT: by DK Consultants, LLC

Section 347713 – Passenger Boarding Bridges 347713-1 thru 100

APPENDIX

A – Notice to Bidders

B – Bid Proposal Form, Partial Schedule of Values Form & Bidder Information Sheet

C – DBE Program Requirements & Compliance Forms

D – Federal Contract Requirements & Iran Divestment Act Form

E – Contract for Construction & Payment & Performance Bond Forms

F – Required Forms (Post Award)

G – CSPP

* – Subsurface & Environmental Reports are referenced in Project Special Provisions

END OF DOCUMENT

Fayetteville Regional Airport – Airline Terminal Improvements – Part 1 Owner: City of Fayetteville Fayetteville, North Carolina AP#1515 RMF Engineering, Inc. July 18, 2016

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NRTL: Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory.

B. VFC: Variable-frequency controller.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. 600-Volt Building Wire Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. General Cable Corporation. 2. Southwire Company. 3. Encore. 4. Okanite 5. Tyco

B. Special Systems Wire Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Belden Cable 2. Tyco Thermal Controls (fire alarm cable)

C. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

D. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN

E. Conductor sizes: Minimum conductor size shall be #12 for feeder and branch circuits. Maximum conductor size shall be 500 kcmil. per 2008 SCO Electrical Guidelines and Policies.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp. 6. Ilsco 7. Thomas-Betts 8. Ideal

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

2.3 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE LUBRICANT

A. Manufacturers:



1. American Polywater Corporation 2. Ideal Industries 3. 3M Company

B. The cable pulling lubricant GEL shall be compatible with all cable jackets. The lubricant GEL shall be UL or CSA listed and water soluble, non-toxic and environmentally safe.

2.4 SLEEVE SEALS


1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Metraflex Co. 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to

sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THWN-2, 90°C Wet rating single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.



D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

E. Feeders Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

F. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

I. Branch Circuits Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

J. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SOJ, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

K. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

L. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

M. Fire Alarm Signaling and Notification Circuits: Refer to specifications for fire alarm system.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Unless specifically noted on the drawings, all wiring shall be installed in a raceway.

B. Surface mount devices only where specifically shown on the plans. Obtain written permission from the Engineer for all other surface mounting locations that are not specifically shown on the plans.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

F. Identify and color-code conductors according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."



G. Where the conductor length from the panel to the first outlet on a 277 volt circuit exceeds 125 feet, the branch circuit conductors from the panel to the first outlet shall not be smaller than #10 AWG.

H. Where the conductor length from the panel to the first outlet on a 120 volt circuit exceeds 50 feet, the branch circuit conductors from the panel to the first outlet shall not be smaller than #10 AWG.

I. Install no more than 3 phase wires in any feeder or branch circuit conduit.

J. Install a dedicated neutral conductor for each single phase 277-volt or 120-volt circuit.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack.

D. Joints in solid conductors shall be spliced using Ideal “wirenuts”, 3M Company “Scotchlock” in junction boxes, outlet boxes and lighting fixtures.

1. “Sta-kon” or other permanent type crimp connectors shall not be used for branch circuit connections.

E. Joints in stranded conductors shall be spliced by approved mechanical connectors and electrical vinyl tape.

1. Solderless mechanical connectors for splices and taps, provided with U/L-approved insulating covers, may be used instead of mechanical connectors plus tape.

F. Conductors, in all cases, shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no splicing shall be made except within outlet or junction boxes, troughs and gutters.

3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.



D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed unless seismic criteria require different clearance.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and conduit, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop.

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

M. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between conduit and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between conduit and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.6 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.



3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.

2. Prior to energizing feeders, sub-feeders and service conductor, cables shall be tested for electrical continuity and short circuits. A copy of these tests shall be sent to the engineer of record and the owner.

3. All current carrying phase conductors and neutrals shall be tested as installed, and before connections are made, for insulation resistance and accidental grounds. This shall be done with a DC megger. The procedures listed below shall be followed:

a. Three-phase conductor installations:

1) For each phase conductor, ground all other conductors, shields and metal conduit as applicable.

2) Apply test voltage between tested conductor and ground for sixty seconds. Repeat this procedure for other phase conductors.

3) Minimum readings shall be one million (1,000,000) or more ohms for #6 AWG wire and smaller, 250,000 ohms or more for #4 AWG wire or larger, between conductors and between conductor and ground.

b. Single-phase conductor installations:

1) Ground the neutral conductor, neutral shield and metal conduit as applicable.

2) Apply test voltage between phase conductor and ground for sixty seconds. 3) Minimum readings shall be one million (1,000,000) or more ohms for #6

AWG wire and smaller, 250,000 ohms or more for #4 AWG wire or larger, between the phase conductor and ground.

c. After all fixtures, devices and equipment are installed and all connections completed to each panel, the contractor shall disconnect the neutral feeder conductor from the neutral bar and take a megger reading between the neutral bar and the grounded enclosure.

1) Whenever this reading is less than 250,000 ohms, the contractor shall disconnect the branch circuit neutral wires from this neutral bar. The contractor shall then test each one separately to the panel and until the low readings are found.



2) The contractor shall correct troubles, reconnect and retest until at least 250,000 ohms from the neutral bar to the grounded panel can be achieved with only the neutral feeder disconnected.

d. At final inspection, the contractor shall furnish a megger and show the engineers that the panels comply with the above requirements.

1) The contractor shall also furnish a hook-on type ammeter and voltmeter to take current and voltage readings as directed by the representatives.

4. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following and complete the form at the end of this section:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.



Figure1: Example conductor-megger setup.



REPORT OF CABLE MEGGER TESTING

TESTING COMPANY: _____________________________________________________

DATE OF TEST: _________________________

CLIENT/LOCATION: _______________________________________

MANUFACTURER AND TYPE OF CABLE: _______________________________________

VOLTAGE RATING OF CABLES: _________________

TEST EQUIPMENT MFG./MODEL: __________________________________

TEST VOLTAGE (IN VDC): _________________

TEST RESULTS (IN MEGA-OHMS):

PANEL/CABLES TESTED

CABLES A-G

CABLES B-G

CABLES C-G

PANEL NEUTRAL TO ENCLOSURE

WEATHER CONDITIONS:

____________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________

COMMENTS:

_____________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________

TESTER’S SIGNATURE: _____________________________________

CONTRACTOR’S LICENSE #: ________________________________



END OF SECTION 260519


GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Test wells. 2. Ground rods. 3. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. 4. Grounding points for chilled water piping, domestic water piping, fire protection piping

and natural gas piping.

C. Qualification Data: For Exothermic-welding personnel.

D. Field quality-control test reports. Submit written test reports to include the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include the following in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals:

1. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells based on NETA MTS.

a. Tests shall be to determine if ground resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if they do not.

b. Include recommended testing intervals.




A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

C. Personnel performing Exothermic-welding must be certified by the manufacturer whose equipment will be utilized on this project and must provide a certificate indicating the manufacturer who provided the training and the date of the training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods:

a. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc. b. Boggs, Inc. c. Chance/Hubbell. d. Copperweld Corp. e. Dossert Corp. f. Encore g. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group. h. Framatome Connectors/Burndy Electrical. i. Galvan Industries, Inc. j. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc. k. Hastings Fiber Glass Products, Inc. l. Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co. m. Ideal Industries, Inc. n. ILSCO. o. Kearney/Cooper Power Systems. p. Korns: C. C. Korns Co.; Division of Robroy Industries. q. Lightning Master Corp. r. Lyncole XIT Grounding. s. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group. t. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell. u. Robbins Lightning, Inc. v. Salisbury: W. H. Salisbury & Co. w. Southwire Company x. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc. y. Thomas & Betts, Electrical.



2.2 CONDUCTORS

A. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-

5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with

copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

B. Grounding Bus: Rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 8 inches 24-inches length, unless otherwise indicated; with insulators.

2.3 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

1. Provide correct mold for type and size of conductor and termination type.

2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad, 3/4 inch in diameter and 10-feet long and shall be copper-clad steel construction.

1. Inspection Wells: Provide inspection well for each grounding electrode installed as detailed on the drawings.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 8 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install a continuous bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum unless show otherwise on the drawings.

1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade. 2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches above duct bank when indicated as

part of duct-bank installation.

C. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Install bus on insulated spacers 1 inch, minimum, from wall 6 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide a main ground bus for the service as shown on the drawings: ¾-inch minimum thick x 24-inch minimum length. Increase size if necessary to accommodate the required exothermic terminations.

3. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, down to specified height above floor, and connect to horizontal bus.

D. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Exothermic-welded connectors except and as otherwise

indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Exothermic weld. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Exothermic-welded connectors. 5. Connections to ground bus: Exothermic-welded

3.2 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches above to 6 inches below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.



C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields as recommended by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.

D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install four ground rods and ground ring around the pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for ground ring and for taps to equipment grounding terminals. Bury ground ring not less than 6 inches from the foundation. Refer to details on the drawings.

3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits raceways and cables.

B. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system ground bus to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.

1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch grounding bus.

2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.

C. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding electrode conductors #4 AWG and larger shall be installed in a raceway system.

B. Wherever grounding electrode conductors are connected/bonded to wall mounted grounding busses, all conductors shall be identified with black phenolic identification labels having ¼” high white letters indicating the equipment where the grounding electrode conductor originates from. Labels shall be wire-tied to the grounding electrode conductors at the point where the conductor is connected/bonded to the bus. The following areas apply: 1. Main Electric room grounding bus. 2. Satellite electric rooms grounding busses. 3. Emergency electric rooms grounding busses. 4. Telecommunications rooms grounding busses.



C. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

D. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if any.

2. Provide test/inspection wells for each ground rod installed. Refer to drawings for details. 3. For each electrical service on the project install at three rods spaced at least 20-ft. from

each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor and to the main ground bar. Refer to drawings for details.

4. Use exothermic welded connections for conductor connections to ground rods except at Test Wells where bolted connection shall be utilized.

E. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of Test/Inspection well as indicated on the drawings and shall be at least 12 inches deep, with cover.

1. Test Wells: Install test wells as indicated. Set top of test well flush with finished grade, surface or floor.

F. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

4. Bond cable trays and/or cable ladder sections at all section joints, tees, radius, waterfalls and 4-way intersections.

G. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Connect within 5'-0" of where pipe enters building. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.



3. Chilled Water, Hot Water and Steam Piping: Where chilled water piping and/or hot water piping and/or steam piping enter the building install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to metal pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Connect within 5'-0" of where pipe enters building. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

4. Gas Piping: Where gas is utilized for connected electrical equipment within the building having the potential of energizing the gas piping due to a failure of insulation of the connected electrical equipment the gas piping shall be bonded to the grounding system. The bonding shall occur between the gas shutoff valve and where the gas piping enters the building or in the case of underground piping entering the building below grade the gas piping shall be bonded within 5-ft of where it enters the building.

H. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

3.5 “UFER” GROUNDING SYSTEM

A. Provide one 20-ft. long, 2/0 AWG size copper grounding conductor and exothermically connect to the steel column nearest the main electrical room and exothermically connect to the horizontal foundation re-bar located nearest the bottom of the foundation footing as detailed on the drawings. The grounding conductor shall be bonded as shown on the drawing details (“Supplemental Ground Electrode Detail”).

B. Each perimeter steel column shall be exothermically welded to the horizontal re-bar located nearest the bottom of the foundation footing.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer to order of galvanic series.

2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical

clamps. 4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and

mechanical clamps. 5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future

penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.



B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.

C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors.

D. Non-contact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically non-continuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Connections at Test Wells: Use bolted connections between conductors and ground rods.

F. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

G. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.

H. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

3. Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and



their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. 4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 3 ohm(s). 5. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms. 6. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.

C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

3.8 GRADING AND PLANTING

A. Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by Work of this Section. Reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. If sod has been removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other activities to their original condition. Include application of topsoil, fertilizer, lime, seed, sod, sprig, and mulch. Maintain restored surfaces. Restore disturbed paving as indicated.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Section "Vibration And Seismic Controls For Electrical Systems" for products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.



D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 4. Equipment supports.

C. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

C. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building.

D. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies.

1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and services, including provision for electricity-metering components.

2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company providing electrical power and other services.



E. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished surfaces.

F. Coordinate installation locations of electrical switchboards, panelboards, disconnect switches, circuit breaker enclosures, control enclosures, motor control centers, raceways, lighting fixtures, junction and pull boxes with all mechanical, plumbing and fire protection trades prior to installation of equipment and systems.

1. Provide dimensioned layout drawing(s) of the proposed locations of all switchboards, panelboards, disconnect switches, circuit breaker enclosures, control enclosures, motor control centers, raceways, lighting fixtures, junction/pull boxes larger than 6” x 6” x 4” and conduit routing of all conduits over 2” diameter. The scaled drawing(s) shall indicate actual dimensions of proposed equipment, front elevations, and access door swings. Minimum scale factor shall be 1/8”= 1’-0”.

2. Coordinate the installation drawings with all other trades to assure proper and conflict free installation of electrical systems and components.

3. Submit drawings to the Engineer for review prior to commencing the installation of any electrical equipment.

4. Provide code required access and clearances to all equipment and sufficient access for maintenance.

G. Provide dimensioned layout drawing(s) of main electrical room, generator room, and electrical closet prior to commencing work in that room. The scaled drawing(s) shall indicate actual dimensions of proposed equipment, front elevations, and access door swings. Minimum scale factor shall be ¼” = 1’-0”.

1. Coordinate the installation drawings with all other trades to assure proper and conflict free installation of electrical systems and components.

2. Submit drawings to the Engineer for review prior to commencing the installation of any electrical equipment.

H. All individual motor starters for mechanical equipment (fans, pumps, etc.) shall be furnished and installed under Division 23 unless indicated as part of a motor control center.

I. Under Division 26, power wiring shall be provided up to a termination point consisting of a junction box, trough, starter or disconnect switch. Under Division 26 line side terminations shall be provided. Wiring from the termination point to the mechanical equipment, including final connections, shall be provided under Division 22 or 23.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.



1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

3. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.



2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.



3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

8. Conduits installed in the interior or exterior building walls shall be spaced off the wall surface a minimum of ¼-inch using “clamp-backs” or strut.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.



B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete.

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.


1. Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

C. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

D. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

E. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

F. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

G. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Custom enclosures and cabinets. 2. For handholes and boxes for underground wiring, including the following:



a. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. b. Frame and cover design. c. Grounding details. d. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons. e. Joint details.

C. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups with

common supports.

D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosures and cabinets and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

a. The term "withstand" means "the cabinet or enclosure will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will retain its enclosure characteristics, including its interior accessibility, after the seismic event."

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

F. Source quality-control test reports.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 4. Electri-Flex Co. 5. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 6. Maverick Tube Corporation. 7. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 8. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

D. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.

E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

F. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886. 2. Fittings for EMT: Steel compression type.

G. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 3. Arnco Corporation. 4. CANTEX Inc. 5. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 6. Condux International, Inc. 7. ElecSYS, Inc.



8. Electri-Flex Co. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 11. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fittings for RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit type and material.

2.3 OPTICAL FIBER/COMMUNICATIONS CABLE RACEWAY AND FITTINGS


1. Arnco Corporation. 2. Endot Industries Inc. 3. IPEX Inc. 4. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

B. Description: Comply with UL 2024; flexible type, approved for plenum installation.

2.4 METAL WIREWAYS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1 for indoor applications or 3R for outdoor applications, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.



2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application..

B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer’s standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. MonoSystems b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division

C. Tele-Power Poles:


a. MonoSystems, Inc. b. Panduit Corp. c. Wiremold / Legrand.

2. Material: Galvanized steel with baked-enamel finish. 3. Fittings and Accessories: Dividers, end caps, covers, cutouts, wiring harnesses, devices,

mounting materials, and other fittings shall match and mate with tele-power pole as required for complete system.

2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. EGS/Appleton Electric. 3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 4. Hoffman. 5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division. 6. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 7. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 8. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division. 9. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 11. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 12. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary. 13. Highline Products.



14. FSR for Audio/Visual system applications.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy or aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Wall outlet boxes. 1. For surface or recessed mounted receptacle, data and/or telephone boxes provide 4”

square by 2 1/8” deep box unless noted otherwise on the plans.

a. Surface mounted cast boxes for mechanical and electrical rooms. b. Recessed boxes in finished spaces.

E. Floor Boxes: Floor boxes for slab on grade:

1. Power and Telecommunications Floor Boxes: PVC, round:

a. Minimum height with adjustable base screws set in lowest position shall be 2.6-inches.

b. Floor opening shall be 4.19 inches diameter. c. Provide one (1) duplex, 125V, 15-ampere receptacle. d. Flush covers, UL listed for intended installation. e. Solid brass carpet flanges. f. Brass device cover and flaps. g. Note: Where quadplex outlets (comprised of 2-duplex receptacles) are shown on

the plans then two complete floor box assemblies will be required per outlet shown.

F. Floor Boxes: Floor boxes for elevated floors above grade where the fire rating of the floor can be maintained with the floor box installed:

1. Power Floor Boxes: Cast iron metal, fully adjustable, round:


b. Floor opening shall be 4.19 inches diameter. c. Provide one (1) duplex, 125V, 15-ampere receptacle. d. Flush covers, UL listed for intended installation. e. Solid brass carpet flanges. f. Brass device cover and flaps. g. Note: Where quadplex outlets (comprised of 2-duplex receptacles) are shown on

the plans then two complete floor box assemblies will be required per outlet shown.

2. Telecommunications Floor Boxes: Cast iron metal, fully adjustable, round:




b. Floor opening shall be 4.19 inches diameter. c. Provide 2-port duplex frame suitable for keystone type modular jacks utilizing

category 5e or category 6 wiring configuration. d. Flush covers, UL listed for intended installation. e. Solid brass carpet flanges. f. Brass device cover and flaps. g. Note: Where outlets shown on the drawings require 3 or more data cables per floor

box outlet then two complete floor box assemblies shall be required per outlet shown.

G. Floor boxes for elevated floors above grade where the fire rating of the floor cannot be maintained using traditional in-slab installed boxes:

1. Power and/or Telecommunications Floor Fire-rated poke-through (1-4 hours) to match the fire rating of the floor.

a. Three-inch diameter cored hole requirement. b. Provide two (2) duplex, 125V, 15-ampere receptacles. c. Provide 4-ports suitable for keystone type modular jacks utilizing category 5e or

category 6 wiring configuration. d. Flush covers, UL listed.

H. Audio/Visual floor boxes:

1. Refer to power, special systems, and AV drawings for information regarding AV floor boxes.

2. Coordinate with Architect/Owner for exact location of boxes prior to rough in. Coordinate location with furniture when applicable.

I. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

J. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1 cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

K. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic.

L. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.



2.7 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77.

1. Color of Frame and Cover: Green. 2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom, unless

otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." or "TELEPHONE." 6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts

for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 7. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long and larger shall have inserts for cable racks

and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two.


a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. CDR Systems Corporation. d. NewBasis.

2.8 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

C. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping.

2.9 SLEEVE SEALS


1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Metraflex Co. 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.



B. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to

sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES

A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.

1. Tests of materials shall be performed by a independent testing agency. 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing

agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.

3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit or IMC. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 6. Application of Handholes and Boxes for Underground Wiring:

a. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Polymer concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating.

b. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Polymer-concrete units SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating.

c. Handholes and Pull Boxes Subject to Light-Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, structurally tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000-lbf vertical loading.

B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:



1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. Includes

raceways in the following locations:

a. Loading dock areas from the floor to a distance of 10-ft above the floor. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units

from the floor to a distance of 10-ft. above the floor. c. Mechanical and electrical rooms from the floor to a distance of 10-ft. above the

floor.

3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

5. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit or IMC. 6. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental

Air: EMT. 7. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: EMT. 8. Raceways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical Fiber or

Communications Cable: EMT. 9. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless

steel in damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid Steel Conduit:

a. Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.

2. EMT terminations and couplings:

a. Steel-plated hexagonal compression connectors. b. Pot metal, setscrew or indented type fittings are prohibited.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."



E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Install raceways above ceilings tight to the floor structure above.

1. Group feeder and branch circuit raceways together using common trapeze supports wherever feasible.

I. Embedded raceways within concrete slabs shall not be permitted due to the potential practice of ‘blind’ drilling floor and elevated slabs for the purpose of installing fastening devices.

1. Raceways shall be routed under slab on grade or suspended to the bottom of the elevated slab supporting structure.

J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

K. Raceway Terminations at all conduit ends entering junction boxes, panel enclosures, switchboards and control enclosures:

1. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

L. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

M. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install metallic, rigid and flexible raceways as follows:

1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet. 2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. 3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway

unless Drawings show stricter requirements.

a. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.

N. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:



1. Seal raceways where they pass from warm to cold locations to prevent condensation from forming on the inside or exterior surfaces of the raceways:

a. Boundaries of refrigerated spaces. b. From exterior non-conditioned spaces to conditioned spaces.

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

O. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet.

1. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125

deg F temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.

2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change.

3. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the time of installation.

P. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

Q. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall.

R. Junction and pull box minimum size:

1. Recessed locations.

a. 4” square x 2 1/8” deep. b. Single gang plaster/mud ring.

2. Accessible locations.

a. 4” square x 2 1/8” deep.



b. For pull boxes, larger sizes may be required to meet the NEC requirements for number of conduits and orientation of conduits to the pull box.

S. Device box minimum size:

1. Single receptacle or single wall switch.

a. 4” square x 2 1/8” deep with single gang plaster/mud ring.

2. Multiple receptacles or wall switches (two devices or switches).

a. 4” square x 2 1/8” deep with double device plaster/mud ring.

3. Multiple receptacles or wall switches ( more than two devices or switches).

a. Gangable boxes x 2 1/8” deep with appropriately sized plaster/mud ring.

T. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

U. For floor boxes installed in slab-on grade concrete provide concrete ‘pour-pans’ made specifically for the floor boxes being installed.

1. Install under the floor box.

V. For floor boxes installed in fire rated elevated concrete slabs provide UL fire rated assembly and/or product to the bottom of the floor box where the floor penetration occurs to maintain the fire rating of the floor per the structural design.

W. All enclosures containing electrical devices shall be UL or third party labeled as an assembly and shall display the appropriate label on the enclosure. This shall include HVAC control enclosures whether manufactured for a specific purpose or fabricated in the field from UL or third party listed materials and/or electrical devices. The electrical devices shall include, but are not be limited to, the following:

1. Control relays 2. Control transformers 3. Fuses 4. Disconnect switches 5. Motor starting equipment 6. Contactors 7. Terminal/barrier strips

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. 2. Install backfill.



3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction.

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout the length of the elbow.

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below the frost line, below grade.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in the enclosure.

F. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.



C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials.

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

M. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.6 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway material and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.



3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.



UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260543 - 1

SECTION 260543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. SECTION 260533 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Conduit, ducts, and duct accessories for direct-buried and concrete-encased duct banks. 2. Handholes and boxes. 3. Manholes.

1.3 DEFINITION

A. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Duct-bank materials, including separators and miscellaneous components. 2. Ducts and conduits and their accessories, including elbows, end bells, bends, fittings, and

solvent cement. 3. Accessories for manholes, handholes, boxes, and other utility structures. 4. Warning tape.

B. Shop Drawings for Precast or Factory-Fabricated Underground Utility Structures: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and accessories, including the following:

1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. 2. Reinforcement details. 3. Frame and cover design and manhole frame support rings. 4. Ladder details. 5. Grounding details. 6. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling-in and lifting irons, and sumps.



7. Joint details.

C. Shop Drawings for Factory-Fabricated Handholes and Boxes Other Than Precast Concrete: Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations, and fabrication and installation details, including the following:

1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. 2. Cover design. 3. Grounding details. 4. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons.

D. Duct-Bank Coordination Drawings: Show duct profiles and coordination with other utilities and underground structures.

1. Include plans and sections, drawn to scale, and show bends and locations of expansion fittings.

2. Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

E. Product Certificates: For concrete and steel used in precast concrete manholes and handholes, as required by ASTM C 858.

F. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

G. Source quality-control test reports.

H. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

B. Comply with ANSI C2.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories (Including Ducts for Communications and Telephone Service): Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent bending, warping, and deforming.

B. Store precast concrete and other factory-fabricated underground utility structures at Project site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical damage. Arrange so identification markings are visible.

C. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points.



1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Architect's written permission.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes, handholes, and boxes with final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field.

B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into manholes, handholes, and boxes with final locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to manholes and handholes, and as approved by Architect.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

B. Furnish cable-support stanchions, arms, insulators, and associated fasteners in quantities equal to 5 percent of quantity of each item installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized. Comply with ANSI C80.1.

B. RNC: Schedule 40 PVC. Comply with NEMA TC 2, NEMA TC-18 and UL 651.

2.2 NONMETALLIC DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES


1. ARNCO Corp.



2. Beck Manufacturing. 3. Cantex, Inc. 4. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 5. Condux International, Inc. 6. ElecSys, Inc. 7. Electri-Flex Company. 8. IPEX Inc. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Manhattan/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies. 11. Spiraduct/AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 12. Southern Pipe, Inc. 13. Queen City Plastics, Inc.

B. Underground Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 2, NEMA TC-18, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC (Schedule 40 PVC), UL 651, with matching fittings by same manufacturer as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B.

C. Duct Accessories:

1. Duct Separators: Factory-fabricated rigid PVC interlocking spacers, sized for type and sizes of ducts with which used, and selected to provide minimum duct spacings indicated while supporting ducts during concreting or backfilling.

2. Warning Tape: Underground-line warning tape specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3. Duct Sealing Compound: Nonhardening, safe for human skin contact, not deleterious to cable insulation, workable at temperatures as low as 34 deg F, withstands temperature of 300 deg F without slump, and adheres to clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials, and the common metals.

2.3 PRECAST CONCRETE HANDHOLES AND BOXES


1. Carder Concrete Products. 2. Christy Concrete Products. 3. Elmhurst-Chicago Stone Co. 4. Oldcastle Precast Group. 5. Riverton Concrete Products; a division of Cretex Companies, Inc. 6. Utility Concrete Products, LLC. 7. Utility Vault Co. 8. Wausau Tile, Inc. 9. Stay-Right 10. Hanson Pipe and Precast

B. Comply with ASTM C 858 for design and manufacturing processes.



C. Description: Factory-fabricated, reinforced-concrete, monolithically poured walls and bottom unless open-bottom enclosures are indicated. Frame and cover shall form top of enclosure and shall have load rating consistent with that of handhole or box.

1. Frame and Cover: Weatherproof steel frame, with steel cover with recessed cover hook eyes and tamper-resistant, captive, cover-securing bolts.

2. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 3. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC", "TELEPHONE" or as indicated on the

drawings. 4. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have closed bottom, unless

otherwise indicated. 5. Extensions and Slabs: Designed to mate with bottom of enclosure. Same material as

enclosure.

a. Extension shall provide increased depth of 12 inches. b. Slab: Same dimensions as bottom of enclosure, and arranged to provide closure.

6. Windows: Precast openings in walls, arranged to match dimensions and elevations of approaching ducts and duct banks plus an additional 12 inches vertically and horizontally to accommodate alignment variations.

a. Windows shall be located no less than 6 inches from interior surfaces of walls, floors, or frames and covers of handholes, but close enough to corners to facilitate racking of cables on walls.

b. Window opening shall have cast-in-place, welded wire fabric reinforcement for field cutting and bending to tie in to concrete envelopes of duct banks.

c. Window openings shall be framed with at least two additional No. 4 steel reinforcing bars in concrete around each opening.

7. Duct Entrances in Handhole Walls: Cast end-bell or duct-terminating fitting in wall for each entering duct.

a. Type and size shall match fittings to duct or conduit to be terminated. b. Fittings shall align with elevations of approaching ducts and be located near

interior corners of handholes to facilitate racking of cable.

8. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long and larger shall have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

2.4 HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE

A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77.

1. Color: Manufacturer’s standard. 2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have closed bottom, unless

otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure.



4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC", "TELEPHONE" or as indicated on the

drawings. 6. Duct Entrance Provisions: Duct-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for

secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 7. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long and larger shall have factory-installed

inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons.

B. Polymer Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with a polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two.


a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. CDR Systems Corporation. d. NewBasis.

C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Frame and Cover: Sheet-molded, fiberglass-reinforced, polyester resin enclosure joined to polymer concrete top ring or frame.


a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. Christy Concrete Products. d. Synertech Moulded Products, Inc.; a division of Oldcastle Precast.

D. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with covers of polymer concrete.


a. Carson Industries LLC. b. Christy Concrete Products. c. Nordic Fiberglass, Inc.

2.5 PRECAST MANHOLES


1. Carder Concrete Products. 2. Christy Concrete Products.



3. Elmhurst-Chicago Stone Co. 4. Oldcastle Precast Group. 5. Riverton Concrete Products; a division of Cretex Companies, Inc. 6. Utility Concrete Products, LLC. 7. Utility Vault Co. 8. Wausau Tile, Inc. 9. Stay-Right 10. Hanson pipe and Precast

B. Comply with ASTM C 858, with structural design loading as specified in Part 3, Article "Underground Enclosure Application" and with interlocking mating sections, complete with accessories, hardware, and features.

1. Design structure according to details on Drawings. 2. Windows: Precast openings in walls, arranged to match dimensions and elevations of

approaching ducts and duct banks plus an additional 12 inches vertically and horizontally to accommodate alignment variations.

a. Windows shall be located no less than 6 inches from interior surfaces of walls, floors, or roofs of manholes, but close enough to corners to facilitate racking of cables on walls.

b. Window opening shall have cast-in-place, welded wire fabric reinforcement for field cutting and bending to tie in to concrete envelopes of duct banks.

c. Window openings shall be framed with at least two additional No. 4 steel reinforcing bars in concrete around each opening.

3. Duct Entrances in Manhole Walls: Cast end-bell or duct-terminating fitting in wall for each entering duct.

a. Type and size shall match fittings to duct or conduit to be terminated. b. Fittings shall align with elevations of approaching ducts and be located near

interior corners of manholes to facilitate racking of cable.

C. Concrete Knockout Panels: 1-1/2 to 2 inches thick, for future conduit entrance and sleeve for ground rod.

D. Joint Sealant: Asphaltic-butyl material with adhesion, cohesion, flexibility, and durability properties necessary to withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at the installation location with the ground-water level at grade.

E. Source Quality Control: Inspect structures according to ASTM C 1037.

2.6 CAST-IN-PLACE MANHOLES

A. Description: Underground utility structures, constructed in place, complete with accessories, hardware, and features. Include concrete knockout panels for conduit entrance and sleeve for ground rod.



B. Materials: Comply with ASTM C 858 and with Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Structural Design Loading: As specified in Part 3 "Underground Enclosure Application" Article.

D. Comply with AASHTO loading specified for manhole.

2.7 UTILITY STRUCTURE ACCESSORIES


1. Bilco Company (The). 2. Campbell Foundry Company. 3. Carder Concrete Products. 4. Christy Concrete Products. 5. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. 6. Elmhurst-Chicago Stone Co. 7. McKinley Iron Works, Inc. 8. Neenah Foundry Company. 9. NewBasis. 10. Oldcastle Precast Group. 11. Osburn Associates, Inc. 12. Pennsylvania Insert Corporation. 13. Riverton Concrete Products; a division of Cretex Companies, Inc.. 14. Strongwell Corporation; Lenoir City Division. 15. Underground Devices, Inc. 16. Utility Concrete Products, LLC. 17. Utility Vault Co. 18. Wausau Tile, Inc.

B. Manhole Frames, Covers, and Chimney Components: Comply with structural design loading specified for manhole.

1. Frame and Cover: Weatherproof, gray cast iron complying with ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30B with milled cover-to-frame bearing surfaces; diameter, 29 inches.

a. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. b. Special Covers: Recess in face of cover designed to accept finish material in

paved areas.

2. Cover Legend: Cast in. Selected to suit system.

a. Legend: "ELECTRIC-LV" for duct systems with power wires and cables for systems operating at 600 V and less.

b. Legend: "ELECTRIC-HV" for duct systems with medium-voltage cables. c. Legend: "SIGNAL" for communications, data, and telephone duct systems.



3. Manhole Chimney Components: Precast concrete rings with dimensions matched to those of roof opening.

a. Mortar for Chimney Ring and Frame and Cover Joints: Comply with ASTM C 270, Type M, except for quantities less than 2.0 cu. ft. where packaged mix complying with ASTM C 387, Type M, may be used.

C. Manhole Sump Frame and Grate: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30B, gray cast iron.

D. Pulling Eyes in Concrete Walls: Eyebolt with reinforcing-bar fastening insert, 2-inch- diameter eye, and 1-by-4-inch bolt.

1. Working Load Embedded in 6-Inch, 4000-psi Concrete: 13,000-lbf minimum tension.

E. Pulling Eyes in Nonconcrete Walls: Eyebolt with reinforced fastening, 1-1/4-inch- diameter eye, rated 2500-lbf minimum tension.

F. Pulling-In and Lifting Irons in Concrete Floors: 7/8-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized, bent steel rod; stress relieved after forming; and fastened to reinforcing rod. Exposed triangular opening.

1. Ultimate Yield Strength: 40,000-lbf shear and 60,000-lbf tension.

G. Bolting Inserts for Concrete Utility Structure Cable Racks and Other Attachments: Flared, threaded inserts of noncorrosive, chemical-resistant, nonconductive thermoplastic material; 1/2-inch ID by 2-3/4 inches deep, flared to 1-1/4 inches minimum at base.

1. Tested Ultimate Pullout Strength: 12,000 lbf minimum.

H. Expansion Anchors for Installation after Concrete Is Cast: Zinc-plated, carbon-steel-wedge type with stainless-steel expander clip with 1/2-inch bolt, 5300-lbf rated pullout strength, and minimum 6800-lbf rated shear strength.

I. Cable Rack Assembly: Steel, hot-dip galvanized, except insulators.

1. Stanchions: T-section or channel; 2-1/4-inch nominal size; punched with 14 holes on 1-1/2-inch centers for cable-arm attachment.

2. Arms: 1-1/2 inches wide, lengths ranging from 3 inches with 450-lb minimum capacity to 18 inches with 250-lb minimum capacity. Arms shall have slots along full length for cable ties and be arranged for secure mounting in horizontal position at any vertical location on stanchions.

3. Insulators: High-glaze, wet-process porcelain arranged for mounting on cable arms.

J. Cable Rack Assembly: Nonmetallic. Components fabricated from nonconductive, fiberglass-reinforced polymer.

1. Stanchions: Nominal 36 inches high by 4 inches wide, with minimum of 9 holes for arm attachment.



2. Arms: Arranged for secure, drop-in attachment in horizontal position at any location on cable stanchions, and capable of being locked in position. Arms shall be available in lengths ranging from 3 inches with 450-lb minimum capacity to 20 inches with 250-lb minimum capacity. Top of arm shall be nominally 4 inches wide, and arm shall have slots along full length for cable ties.

K. Duct-Sealing Compound: Nonhardening, safe for contact with human skin, not deleterious to cable insulation, and workable at temperatures as low as 35 deg F. Capable of withstanding temperature of 300 deg F without slump and adhering to clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials, and common metals.

L. Fixed Manhole Ladders: Arranged for attachment to roof or wall of manhole. Ladder and mounting brackets and braces shall be fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel.

2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and inspect precast concrete utility structures according to ASTM C 1037.

B. Nonconcrete Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of manholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.

1. Tests of materials shall be performed by a independent testing agency. 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing

agency or the manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.

3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.

2.9 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS

A. Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Type M, except for quantities less than 2.0 cu. ft. where packaged mix complying with ASTM C 387, Type M, may be used.

B. Brick for Manhole Chimney: Sewer and manhole brick, ASTM C 32, Grade MS.

C. Concrete: Use 3000-psi- minimum, 28-day compressive strength and 3/8-inch maximum aggregate size. Concrete and reinforcement are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION

A. Ducts for Electrical Cables Over 600 V: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Ducts for Electrical Branch Circuits: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in direct-buried duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Underground Ducts for Telephone, Communications, or Data Utility Service Cables: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURE APPLICATION

A. Handholes and Boxes for 600 V and Less, Including Telephone, Communications, and Data Wiring:

1. Units in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths: Precast concrete. AASHTO HB 17, H-20 structural load rating.

2. Units in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Precast concrete, AASHTO HB 17, H-20 structural load rating.

3. Units in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Polymer concrete units, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating.

4. Units Subject to Light-Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, structurally tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000-lbf vertical loading.

B. Manholes: Precast or cast-in-place concrete.

1. Units Located in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths by Heavy or Medium Vehicles: H-20 structural load rating according to AASHTO HB 17.

2. Units Not Located in Deliberate Traffic Paths by Heavy or Medium Vehicles: H-10 load rating according to AASHTO HB 17.

3.3 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation and Backfill: Do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.

B. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed.



C. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching.

3.4 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two manholes to drain in both directions.

B. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches, both horizontally and vertically, at other locations, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane.

D. Duct Entrances to Manholes and Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells, spaced approximately 10 inches o.c. for 5-inch ducts, and vary proportionately for other duct sizes.

1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet from the end bell without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line.

2. Direct-Buried Duct Banks: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each conduit in the area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole.

3. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.

E. Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit at least 10 feet outside the building wall without reducing duct line slope away from the building, and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for duct-to-conduit transition. Install conduit penetrations of building walls as specified in Division 26 Section "Common Work Results for Electrical”.

F. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig hydrostatic pressure.

G. Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf- test nylon cord in ducts, including spares.

H. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support ducts on duct separators.

1. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less than 4 spacers per 20 feet of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger separators approximately 6 inches between tiers. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.



2. Concreting Sequence: Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation.

a. Start at one end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and contraction of ducts as their temperature changes during and after the pour. Use expansion fittings installed according to manufacturer's written recommendations, or use other specific measures to prevent expansion-contraction damage.

b. If more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install 3/4-inch reinforcing rod dowels extending 18 inches into concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope.

3. Pouring Concrete: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Use a plank to direct concrete down sides of bank assembly to trench bottom. Allow concrete to flow to center of bank and rise up in middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank application.

4. Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct banks where they cross disturbed earth and where indicated. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.

5. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms.

6. Minimum Space between Ducts: 3 inches between ducts and exterior envelope wall, 2 inches between ducts for like services, and 4 inches between power and signal ducts.

7. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 24 inches below finished grade in areas not subject to deliberate traffic, and at least 30 inches below finished grade in deliberate traffic paths for vehicles, unless otherwise indicated.

8. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete.

b. Stub-Ups to Equipment: For equipment mounted on indoor or on outdoor concrete bases, extend rigid steel conduit vertically into the equipment. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

9. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches above all concrete-encased ducts and duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches of the centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches. Space additional tapes 12 inches apart, horizontally.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND BOXES

A. Cast-in-Place Manhole Installation:

1. Finish interior surfaces with a smooth-troweled finish. 2. Windows for Future Duct Connections: Form and pour concrete knockout panels 1-1/2

to 2 inches thick, arranged as indicated.



3. Cast-in-place concrete, formwork, and reinforcement are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Precast Concrete Handhole and Manhole Installation:

1. Comply with ASTM C 891, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting

ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel,

graded from 1-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevations:

1. Manhole Roof: Install with rooftop at least 15 inches below finished grade. 2. Manhole Frame: In paved areas and trafficways, set frames flush with finished grade.

Set other manhole frames 1 inch above finished grade. 3. Install handholes with bottom below the frost line, below grade. 4. Handhole Covers: In paved areas and trafficways, set surface flush with finished grade.

Set covers of other handholes 1 inch above finished grade. 5. Where indicated, cast handhole cover frame integrally with handhole structure.

D. Drainage: Install drains in bottom of manholes where indicated. Coordinate with drainage provisions indicated.

E. Manhole Access: Circular opening in manhole roof; sized to match cover size.

1. Manholes with Fixed Ladders: Offset access opening from manhole centerlines to align with ladder.

2. Install chimney, constructed of precast concrete collars and rings to support frame and cover and to connect cover with manhole roof opening. Provide moisture-tight masonry joints and waterproof grouting for cast-iron frame to chimney.

F. Waterproofing: Apply waterproofing to exterior surfaces of manholes and handholes after concrete has cured at least three days. Waterproofing materials and installation are specified in Division 07 Section ". After ducts have been connected and grouted, and before backfilling, waterproof joints and connections and touch up abrasions and scars. Waterproof exterior of manhole chimneys after mortar has cured at least three days.

G. Hardware: Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, and cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated.

H. Fixed Manhole Ladders: Arrange to provide for safe entry with maximum clearance from cables and other items in manholes.

I. Field-Installed Bolting Anchors in Manholes and Concrete Handholes: Do not drill deeper than 3-7/8 inches for manholes and 2 inches for handholes, for anchor bolts installed in the field. Use a minimum of two anchors for each cable stanchion.



J. Warning Sign: Install "Confined Space Hazard" warning sign on the inside surface of each manhole cover.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Use box extension if required to match depths of ducts, and seal joint between box and extension as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas and trafficways, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below the frost line, below grade.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in the enclosure.

F. Field-cut openings for ducts and conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

G. For enclosures installed in asphalt paving and subject to occasional, nondeliberate, heavy-vehicle loading, form and pour a concrete ring encircling, and in contact with, enclosure and with top surface screeded to top of box cover frame. Bottom of ring shall rest on compacted earth.

1. Concrete: 3000 psi, 28-day strength, complying with Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete," with a troweled finish.

2. Dimensions: 10 inches wide by 12 inches deep.

3.7 GROUNDING

A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:



1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground ducts and utility structures.

2. Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and test for out-of-round duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest.

3. Test manhole and handhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts.

B. Clean internal surfaces of handholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.



VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548 - 1

SECTION 260548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Channel support systems. 2. Restraint cables. 3. Hanger rod stiffeners. 4. Anchorage bushings and washers.


1. Division 26 Section "Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems" for commonly used electrical supports and installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.


A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: C. 2. Mapped Spectral Response Accelerations: Ss=20.7%g; SI=10.4%g. 3. Spectral Response Accelerations: Sms=47.7%g; Sml=24.7%g. 4. Spectral Response Coefficients: SDs=31.8%g; SD1=16.5%g. 5. Site Classification=D. 6. Building Structural System: Building Frame.



1.5 SUBMITTALS


1. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES.

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

2. Restrained-Isolation Devices: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic-restraint details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators and seismic restraints.

a. Coordinate design calculations with wind-load calculations required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 26 Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

2. Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and anchorage devices.

3. Field-fabricated supports. 4. Seismic-Restraint Details:

a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.

c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an evaluation service member of ICC-ES, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).

C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.



F. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage pre-approval by ICC-ES, or pre-approval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If pre-approved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

F. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing seismic engineering services, including the design of seismic restraints, that are similar to those indicated for this Project.


A. Project Seismic Design Category as Defined in NCSBC.

1. Seismic design category shall be determined from information. Contained in the bid documents.

2. Seismic Design Category: C

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of seismic bracing with building structural system and Engineerural features, and with mechanical, fire-protection, electrical, and other building features in the vicinity.

B. Coordinate concrete bases with building structural system.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. California Dynamics Corporation. 3. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 4. Hilti Inc. 5. Loos & Co.; Seismic Earthquake Division. 6. Mason Industries. 7. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC. 8. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and application requirements shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

C. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners to rods.

F. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchors and studs.

G. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices.

H. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.

I. Mechanical Anchor: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors with strength



required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.

J. Adhesive Anchor: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

2.2 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.

1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to indicate

capacity range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES.

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.



3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:

1. Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment. 2. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance

between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch. 3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service

member of ICC-ES providing required submittals for component.

B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

C. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

D. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.


A. Inspection Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform inspections and prepare final report.



B. Perform inspections.

C. Inspections:

1. Schedule inspection with Owner, through Engineer, with at least seven days' advance notice.

2. Inspect all seismic restraints for electrical equipment

D. Prepare inspection reports.

1. The final written, signed and sealed report shall be prepared by a professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing seismic engineering services, including the design of seismic restraints, that are similar to those indicated for this Project. The engineer shall visit the site and inspect all seismic restraints as described within the section of the specifications prior to issuing the report.

3.6 ELECTRICAL SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE SCHEDULE

A. Life safety systems:

1. Fire alarm system. 2. Emergency egress lighting system.



IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceway. 2. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable. 3. Underground-line warning tape. 4. Warning labels and signs. 5. Instruction signs. 6. Equipment identification labels. 7. Miscellaneous identification products. 8. Labeling for Fault Current Levels.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.

C. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.



1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Color for Printed Legend:

1. See Section 2.6 of this specification for color codes for use on this project.

C. Phenolic Tags: Color coded phenolic tags with wire attachment to conduit or outlet.

2.2 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

2.3 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Description: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, polyethylene tape.

1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. 2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core installed to allow detection from above grade

without disturbing surface. 4. Printed legend shall indicate type of underground line.



2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70, 70E and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Custom warning labels indicating the available Fault Current level shall meet National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) 110.24, NFPA 70E and applicable OSHA requirements.

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. Screw mount with four (4) self-tapping stainless steel screws. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.

D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."

2.5 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting using a minimum of two (2) self-tapping stainless steel screws. Minimum letter height shall be 1/2 inch.

B. Nameplate material colors shall be:

1. Blue surface with white core for 120/208 volt equipment. 2. Black surface with white core for 277/480 volt equipment. 3. Bright red surface with white core for all equipment related to fire alarm system. 4. Dark red (burgundy) surface with white core for all equipment related to security. 5. Green surface with white core for all equipment related to “emergency” systems. 6. Orange surface with white core for all equipment related to telephone systems. 7. Brown surface with white core for all equipment related to data systems.



8. White surface with black core for all equipment related to paging systems. 9. Purple surface with white core for all equipment related to TV systems.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb, minimum. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws; provide measures to prevent hazard from sharp end of screws.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Accessible Raceways, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A and all empty (spare) conduit runs and conduits with conductors or cables for future use shall be identified and shall indicate where they terminate: Identify with color coded (see Section 2.6) snap-around label.

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables of Auxiliary Systems: Identify the following systems with color-coded, snap-around, color-coding bands:

1. See Section 2.6 for color codes.

C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification: For primary and secondary conductors No. 1/0 AWG and larger in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes use color-coding conductor tape. Identify source and circuit number of each set of conductors. For single conductor cables, identify phase in addition to the above.

D. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use color-coding conductor tape. Identify each ungrounded conductor according to source and circuit number.

E. Cable Labels: Each branch circuit and each feeder shall be tagged in each panelboard gutter and in all pull or junction boxes, wire trough, etc. Tags in panelboard gutters shall indicate circuit. Tags in junction boxes and pull boxes shall indicate the circuit or feeder numbers and its point of origin. Tags for branch circuits shall be printed cloth or vinyl plastic with self-stick pressure adhesive.

F. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source and circuit number.



G. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and Operation and Maintenance Manual.

H. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.

I. Available Fault Current Warning labels:

1. Where shown on this project, whether new or existing equipment, the following equipment shall be provided with warning labels indicating the available fault current level:

a. Switchboards b. Pad mounted transformers c. Dry type transformers d. Distribution panels e. Panelboards

2. Available Fault Current level warning labels shall be:

a. Provided by the contractor and shall include the information as shown on the draw-ings. The contractor shall install the labels.

J. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply baked-enamel warning signs. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections.

2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

K. Instruction Signs:

1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction



signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

2. Emergency Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 1/2-inch- high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer.

L. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate

for viewing from the floor or finished surface level.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled (All may not apply to this project):

a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. c. Electrical switchboards. d. Transformers. e. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. f. Disconnect switches. g. Enclosed circuit breakers. h. Motor starters. i. Push-button stations. j. Power transfer equipment. k. Contactors. l. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. m. Battery inverter units. n. Battery racks. o. Power-generating units. p. Voice and data cable terminal equipment. q. Master clock and program equipment. r. Intercommunication and call system master and staff stations. s. Television/audio components, racks, and controls. t. Fire-alarm control panel and annunciators. u. Security and intrusion-detection control stations, control panels, terminal

cabinets, and racks. v. Monitoring and control equipment. w. Uninterruptible power supply equipment.



x. Terminals, racks, and patch panels for voice and data communication and for signal and control functions.

y. Dimmers. z. Inverters. aa. Frequency converters.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

G. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.

1. Color shall be factory applied or, for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG if authorities having jurisdiction permit, field applied.

2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. d. Neutral: White e. Ground: Green

3. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Orange. c. Phase C: Yellow. d. Neutral: Neutral Gray e. Ground: Green



4. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

I. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench exceeds 16 inches overall.

J. Raceway Boxes: All outlet boxes, junction boxes and pull boxes shall have their covers and exterior visible surfaces painted with colors to match the surface color scheme outlined in section 2.6. This includes covers on boxes above lift-out and other type accessible ceilings. For emergency circuits, paint one half of box green and other half blue or black depending on voltage.

1. The Contractor shall blank-off the center portion of the cover plate with 2” wide tape prior to painting. After painting with the tape removed, the circuit labeling shall be indicated on the non-painted surface of the cover plate using permanent black marker.

K. Empty Conduit: All empty conduit runs and conduit with conductors for future use shall be identified for use and shall indicate where they terminate. Identification shall be by tags with string or wire attached to conduit or outlet.



OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260573 - 1

SECTION 260573 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes computer-based, fault-current, overcurrent protective device coordination and Arc-Flash hazard studies.

1. Protective devices shall be set based on results of the protective device coordination study and shall be coordinated with the electrical distribution equipment (circuit breakers, panel boards, switchboards, switchgear) prior to the contractor ordering the equipment.

2. The electrical equipment overcurrent protections devices shall be revised in order to provide a completely coordinated system as recommended by the coordination study. The coordination study shall be revised to reflect the changes required to coordinate the system overcurrent protection devices.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Other Action Submittals: The following submittals shall be made after the approval process for system protective devices has been completed. Submittals shall be in digital form.

1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets. 2. Study and Equipment Evaluation Reports. 3. Coordination-Study Report; signed, dated, and sealed by a qualified professional

engineer.

a. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selectin of devices and associated characteristics is satisfactory.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist.



B. Product Certificates: For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer software programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.


A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.

B. Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application of computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.

1. Professional engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, shall be responsible for the study and shall seal and sign the study, associated supporting documents and drawings. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this engineer.

C. Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.

D. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. CGI CYME. 2. EDSA Micro Corporation. 3. ESA Inc. 4. Operation Technology, Inc. 5. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.

2.2 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with IEEE 242 and IEEE 399.

B. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456803037&mf=04&src=wd







settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.

1. Features:

a. Arcing faults. b. Simultaneous faults. c. Explicit negative sequence.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.

1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to coordination study may not be used in study.

3.2 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:

1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other electrical Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Impedance of utility service entrance. 3. Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard-copy and electronic-copy formats,

showing the following:

a. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types. b. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios. c. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, and X/R ratios. d. Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance. e. Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material,

insulation, and length. f. Busway ampacity and impedance. g. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.

4. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:



a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting and stopping.

b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush current, and overload capability.

c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of start, and thermal-damage curve.

d. Generator thermal-damage curve. e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices. f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility

company. g. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated. h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere

or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.

i. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for overcurrent relays.

j. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical.

3.3 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY

A. Calculate the maximum available short-circuit current in amperes rms symmetrical at circuit-breaker positions of the electrical power distribution system. The calculation shall be for a current immediately after initiation and for a three-phase bolted short circuit at each of the following:

1. Switchboard bus. 2. Transformers. 3. Distribution panelboard. 4. Branch circuit panelboard.

B. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

C. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current.

D. Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply with IEEE 241 and IEEE 242.

1. Transformers:

a. IEEE C57.96.

2. Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015.

E. Study Report:



1. Show calculated X/R ratios and equipment interrupting rating (1/2-cycle) fault currents on electrical distribution system diagram.

2. Show interrupting (5-cycle) and time-delayed currents (6 cycles and above) on medium-voltage breakers as needed to set relays and assess the sensitivity of overcurrent relays.

F. Equipment Evaluation Report:

1. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

2. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

3. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents; verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

3.4 COORDINATION STUDY

A. Perform coordination study using approved computer software program. Prepare a written report using results of fault-current study. Comply with IEEE 399.

1. Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short-circuit currents. 2. Calculate the maximum and minimum interrupting duty (5 cycles to 2 seconds) short-

circuit currents. 3. Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents.

B. Comply with IEEE 241, IEEE 242 recommendations for fault currents and time intervals.

C. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:

1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:

a. Inrush current when first energized. b. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is

specified for that transformer. c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by

unusual loading or emergency conditions.

2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault currents.

D. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.



E. Coordination-Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of coordination study:

1. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices:

a. Device tag. b. Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-pickup

values. c. Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous

settings. d. Fuse-current rating and type. e. Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings.

2. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices. Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods where the power source is local generation. Show the following information:

a. Device tag. b. Voltage and current ratio for curves. c. Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer. d. No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses. e. Cable damage curves. f. Transformer inrush points. g. Maximum fault-current cutoff point.

F. Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.

3.5 ARC FLASH HAZZARD STUDY

A. The analysis will identify the system operating modes including all possible 600-volt tie-breaker positions, utility source contributions, and in-plant motor and generator contributions.

B. The analysis will determine the time required to clear the arcing fault current using the protective device settings and associated trip curves.

C. Working distances will be selected based on system voltage and equipment class.

D. Wherever feasible, recommendations for reducing arc flash energy levels at high risk locations will be included.

E. The arc flash hazard analysis will be performed according to the IEEE 1584 equations that are presented in NFPA70E-2015, Annex D.

1. Calculations for the incident energy at each fault location will be included. 2. Calculations for the flash protection boundary at each fault location will be included.



F. The flash protection boundary and the incident energy will be calculated at all significant locations in the electrical distribution system that will be required to be adjusted or maintained.

1. Switchboards, panelboards and circuit breakers within. 2. Transformer primary and secondary terminals.

G. Safe working distances will be based upon the calculated arc flash boundary considering an incident energy of 1.2 cal/cm2.

H. When appropriate, the short circuit calculations and the clearing times of the phase overcurrent devices will be retrieved from the short-circuit and coordination study model and used in the arc flash analysis.

I. Ground overcurrent relays should not be taken into consideration when determining the clearing time when performing incident energy calculations

J. The short-circuit calculations and the corresponding incident energy calculations for multiple system scenarios will be compared and the greatest incident energy must be uniquely reported for each equipment location.

1. The calculations will be performed to represent the maximum and minimum contributions of fault current magnitude for all normal and emergency operating conditions.

2. The minimum calculation will assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum and will assume a minimum motor contribution (all motors off).

3. Conversely, the maximum calculation will assume a maximum contribution from the utility and will assume the maximum amount of motors to be operating.

4. The calculations will take into consideration the parallel operation of synchronous generators with the electric utility, where applicable.

K. The incident energy calculations must consider the accumulation of energy over time when performing arc flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations must take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors and generators will be decremented as follows:

1. Fault contribution from induction motors will not be considered beyond 3-5 cycles. 2. Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators should be decayed to match

the actual decrement of each as closely as possible (e.g. contributions from permanent magnet generators will typically decay from 10 per unit to 3 per unit after 10 cycles).

L. For each equipment location with a separately enclosed main device (where there is adequate separation between the line side terminals of the main protective device and the work location), calculations for incident energy and flash protection boundary will include both the line and load side of the main breaker.

1. When performing incident energy calculations on the line side of a main breaker (as required per above), the line side and load side contributions will be included in the fault calculation.



M. Coordination will be checked between all devices within the branch containing the immediate protective device upstream of the calculation location. The calculation will utilize the fastest device to compute the incident energy for the corresponding location.

N. Arc Flash calculations will be based on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time.

1. Maximum clearing time will be capped at 2 seconds based on IEEE 1584 section.

O. Where it is not physically possible to move outside of the flash protection boundary in less than 2 seconds during an arc flash event, a maximum clearing time based on the specific location will be utilized.



LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 1

SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices:

1. Time switches. 2. Outdoor photoelectric switches and indoor photoelectric sensors. 3. Indoor photoelectric sensors. 4. Lighting contactors.


1. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers and manual light switches.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. PIR: Passive infrared.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors.

1. Provide scaled plan layouts of all occupancy sensor locations based upon the manufacturer’s suggested layout for their equipment in full compliance with these specifications.

a. Show sensor type being supplied for each sensor location and the area of coverage for each sensor.

2. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.

C. Field quality-control test reports.



D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TIME SWITCHES


1. Intermatic, Inc. 2. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 3. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 4. Paragon Electric Co.; Invensys Climate Controls. 5. Square D; Schneider Electric. 6. TORK. 7. Touch-Plate, Inc. 8. Watt Stopper (The). 9. Bodine 10. Sensor Switch 11. Crestron

B. Electronic Time Switches: Electronic, solid-state programmable units with alphanumeric display; complying with UL 917.

1. Contact Configuration: SPST. 2. Contact Rating: 20-A ballast load, 120/240-V ac. 3. Program: 2 on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set points for each

day of the week and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation on holidays.

4. Battery Backup: For schedules and time clock.



2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES


1. Intermatic, Inc. 2. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 3. Paragon Electric Co.; Invensys Climate Controls. 4. Square D; Schneider Electric. 5. TORK. 6. Touch-Plate, Inc. 7. Watt Stopper (The). 8. Sensor Switch. 9. Crestron.

B. Description: Solid state, with DPST dry contacts rated for 1800-VA tungsten or 1000-VA inductive, to operate connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input; complying with UL 773A.

1. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range, and a directional lens in front of photocell to prevent fixed light sources from causing turn-off.

2. Time Delay: 15-second minimum, to prevent false operation. 3. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor, complying with IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE C62.41.2,

and IEEE 62.45 for Category A1 locations. 4. Mounting: Twist lock complying with IEEE C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or

stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky exposure.

5. Contact voltage rating: Suitable for the circuit being controlled.

2.3 INDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SENSORS


1. Intermatic, Inc. 2. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 3. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 4. Paragon Electric Co.; Invensys Climate Controls. 5. Square D; Schneider Electric. 6. TORK. 7. Touch-Plate, Inc. 8. Watt Stopper (The). 9. Sensor Switch. 10. Crestron.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Photoelectric Sensor: Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, with communications with dimmers or lighting drivers, to detect changes in lighting levels that are



perceived by the eye and adjust lighting fixture dimming level to maintain a target (setpoint) lighting level. Arrange photoelectric sensors to provide closed-loop or semi-open-loop daylighting control of lighting fixture rows near exterior windows.

2.4 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS


1. Hubbell Lighting. 2. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 3. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 4. TORK. 5. Watt Stopper (The). 6. Sensor Switch. 7. Crestron.

B. General Description: Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay unit.

1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.

3. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.

4. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical

enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged

door.

5. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation of the sensor.

6. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure. 7. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; keep lighting off when

selected lighting level is present.

C. PIR Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a combination of heat and movement in area of coverage.

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in..

2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.



3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet when mounted on a 10-foot- high ceiling.

D. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a change in pattern of reflected ultrasonic energy in area of coverage.

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.

2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 600 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 2000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet when mounted on a 10-foot- high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet.

E. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by using a combination of PIR and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular technology or combination of technologies that controls on-off functions shall be selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion

of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

2.5 WALL OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Wall-Switch Sensors:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 6111 for 120 V, 6117 for 277 V. b. Hubbell; WS1277. c. Leviton; ODS 10-ID. d. Pass & Seymour; WS3000. e. Watt Stopper (The); WS-200. f. Lutron; g. Lithonia;

2. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 180-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft..

B. Wall-Switch Sensors:




a. Hubbell; AT120 for 120 V, AT277 for 277 V. b. Leviton; ODS 15-ID. c. Lutron; d. Lithonia;

2. Description: Adaptive-technology type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 20 minutes, 180-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft..

C. Long-Range Wall-Switch Sensors:


a. Hubbell; ATP1600WRP. b. Leviton; ODWWV-IRW. c. Pass & Seymour; WA1001. d. Watt Stopper (The); CX-100. e. Lutron; f. Lithonia;


D. Long-Range Wall-Switch Sensors:


a. Hubbell; ATD1600WRP. b. Leviton; ODW12-MRW. c. Watt Stopper (The); DT-200. d. Lutron; e. Lithonia;

2. Description: Dual technology, with both passive-infrared- and ultrasonic-type sensing, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 110-degree field of view, and a minimum coverage area of 1200 sq. ft..

E. Wide-Range Wall-Switch Sensors:


a. Hubbell; ATP120HBRP. b. Leviton; ODWHB-IRW. c. Pass & Seymour; HS1001. d. Watt Stopper (The); CX-100-3. e. Lutron; f. Lithonia;




2.6 LIGHTING CONTACTORS


1. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a division of Emerson Electric Co. 2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products. 3. GE Industrial Systems; Total Lighting Control. 4. Hubbell Lighting. 5. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 6. Square D; Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Electrically operated and electrically held, combination type with fusible switch, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.

1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current).

2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the point of installation.

3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250. 4. Provide with control and pilot devices as indicated on Drawings, matching the NEMA

type specified for the enclosure.

2.7 EMERGENCY INVERTER FOR LIGHTING

2.8 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION

A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads, to eliminate structure-borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators.

3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch.

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

F. Complete wiring systems shall be color coded according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and conductors must be tagged or identified at terminals.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each

sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.




A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements.

2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays.

B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work.

C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor’s expense, will be performed to determine compliance or replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 90 days of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."



LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 1

SECTION 262200 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1000 kVA:

1. Distribution transformers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:


a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."





D. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

E. Source quality-control test reports.


G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."

D. Energy-Efficient Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger: Certified as meeting NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels when tested according to NEMA TP2.


A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp.; a division of Eaton Corp. 2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products. 3. Federal Pacific Transformer Company; Division of Electro-Mechanical Corp. 4. General Electric Company. 5. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 6. Sola/Hevi-Duty. 7. Square D; Schneider Electric.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.

B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.

C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 2. Coil Material: Copper.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B. Comply with NEMA TP-1 Energy Efficient @ 35% average loading.

C. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. Cores: One leg per phase.

E. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.

1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.

F. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.

1. Finish Color: ANSI 61 gray.



G. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and four 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity.

H. Insulation Class: Installation shall conform with NEMA ST 20 standards for 220 degree C UL system. Transformers shall be rated for 115 degree C temperature rise over 40 degree C ambient, provided case temperature rise shall not exceed 45 degree C over 40 degree C ambient. Transformer overload capability shall be in accordance with IEEE C57. 96 for standard transformers.

I. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:

1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels. 2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2.

J. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561 requirements for nonsinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by designated K-factor.

1. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion corresponding to designated K-factor.

2. Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate.

K. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.

1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and output terminals.

2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield. 3. Shield Effectiveness:

a. Capacitance between Primary and Secondary Windings: Not to exceed 33 picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz.

b. Common-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 120 dBA at 0.5 to 1.5 kHz; minimum of minus 65 dBA at 1.5 to 100 kHz.

c. Normal-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 52 dBA at 1.5 to 10 kHz.

L. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.

M. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for coil and core.

N. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91.

2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."




A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.

B. Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct sound-level tests on equipment for this Project.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer.

1. Brace wall-mounting transformers as specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.

B. Construct concrete bases and anchor floor-mounting transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions, seismic codes applicable to Project, and requirements in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Construct concrete bases not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit and 4 inches high. Paint bases OSHA approved yellow.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."



1. Transformer secondary is the source for a separately derived system as defined in the NEC. As such, secondary neutral shall be bonded to the main service ground bus or electrode in accordance with NEC requirements.

2. Where transformer is located at a remote location from the main service ground bus or electrode, grounding conductor shall be run in feeder raceway back to primary source enclosure ground.

3. All transformers shall be provided with a secondary local grounding electrode as required by the NEC; this may consist of a UL listed grounding clamp on a local 3/4” (minimum) copper cold water pipe or grounded structural steel member.

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.4 CONDUIT CONNECTIONS

A. No non-flexible conduits shall be attached directly to transformer housing.

B. Where construction permits, stub conduits up into transformer housing from beneath. Stub-ups shall be fitted with fiber-throated grounding bushing with suitable lug. Stub-ups shall be bonded together and to transformer case with ground wire of size required by N.E.C.

C. Where connection must be made to housing, provide vibration dampening assembly consisting of:

1. Female hub-type liquid-tight connector. 2. Male hub-type liquid-tight connector. 3. Short length (approximately 6”) liquid-tight flexible conduit. 4. Bonding jumper of NEC size on inside of assembly. Bond from lug to grounded

transformer case.





C. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.

D. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each transformer’s primary and secondary terminations. Remove all access panels so terminations and connections are visible to portable scanner.



1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each transformer 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

2. A thermographic imaging survey shall be required for the following equipment installations:

a. Concrete Pad Mount Transformer connections (primary and secondary).

3. Thermographic imaging survey shall be performed by a thermographic imaging contractor who is a Level III Certified Thermographer and who has received accreditation through a NETA accredited thermography training program.

4. Imaging contractor shall utilize equipment that has been calibrated with the previous six months of test; calibration shall be part of an ongoing calibration program that is traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).

5. Imaging equipment shall include a Forward Looking Infrared Camera able to detect emitted thermal infrared radiation and convert the detected emissions into a visual image.

6. Electrical contractor shall correct deficiencies and retesting shall be repeated until no deficiencies are detected.

7. The Imaging contractor shall provide a certified test report to the engineer and the owner; report shall include efficiencies detected, corrective measures taken and resulting final outcome of analysis.

E. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results.

B. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.



SWITCHBOARDS 262413 - 1

SECTION 262413 - SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less. 2. Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. 3. Accessory components and features. 4. Identification.


A. Seismic Performance: Switchboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of switchboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, ground-fault protector, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment.

1. Scaled layout of equipment within the project electric room. 2. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required

clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

3. Detail enclosure types for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 4. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 5. Detail short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices.



6. Include descriptive documentation of optional barriers specified for electrical insulation and isolation.

7. Detail utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility company.

8. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.

9. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in switchboards.

10. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified installer.

D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:




E. Field Quality-Control Reports:


requirements.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices. 3. Time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective

device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers qualified as defined in NEMA PB 2.1 and trained in electrical safety as required by NFPA 70E.



B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

D. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchboards including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

F. Sub metering equipment shall be factory installed, wired and tested prior to shipment to the job site.

G. Comply with NEMA PB 2.

H. Comply with NFPA 70.

I. Comply with UL 891.


A. Deliver switchboards in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.

B. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside switchboards and install temporary electric heating (250 W per section) to prevent condensation.

C. Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NEMA PB 2.1.


A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and structures to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place.

B. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install switchboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above switchboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:



a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F. b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

C. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 2, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.

D. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 18-months from date of Substantial Completion. 2. fewer than one of each size and type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS




1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboards:

1. Main Devices: Fixed, individually mounted. 2. Branch Devices: Panel mounted. 3. Sections front and rear aligned.

C. Nominal System Voltage: 480Y/277 V.

D. Main-Bus Continuous: 4000 A.

E. Seismic Requirements: Fabricate and test switchboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

F. Indoor Enclosures: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 5.

G. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.

H. Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections.

I. Insulation and isolation for main bus of main section and main and vertical buses of feeder sections.

J. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic switchboard.

K. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank compartments.

L. Pull Box on Top of Switchboard:

1. Adequate ventilation to maintain temperature in pull box within same limits as switchboard.

2. Set back from front to clear circuit-breaker removal mechanism. 3. Removable covers shall form top, front, and sides. Top covers at rear shall be easily

removable for drilling and cutting. 4. Bottom shall be insulating, fire-resistive material with separate holes for cable drops into

switchboard. 5. Cable supports shall be arranged to facilitate cabling and adequate to support cables

indicated, including those for future installation.

M. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated.



1. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, silver-plated, with tin-plated copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections.

2. Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch-hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with mechanical connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors. For busway feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway ground connection and support cable at intervals in vertical run.

3. Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends.

4. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated, equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Brace bus extensions for busway feeder neutral bus.

5. Isolation Barrier Access Provisions: Permit checking of bus-bolt tightness. 6. Service Entrance switchboards shall be UL rated for 900 C for terminating 900C rated

service entrance cables, including circuit breakers. Switchboard enclosure shall be vented.

N. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment.

2.2 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): For Feeder Breakers comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. Series ratings are not acceptable.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

3. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

4. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

material. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.



e. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function.

f. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit.

B. Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker (ICCB): For main circuit breaker, 100 percent rated, sealed, insulated-case power circuit breaker with interrupting capacity rating to meet available fault current.

1. Circuit Breakers shall be UL rated for 900 C for terminating 900C rated service entrance cables.

2. Drawout circuit-breaker mounting. 3. Two-step, stored-energy closing. 4. Full-function, microprocessor-based trip units with interchangeable rating plug, trip

indicators, and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time time adjustments. c. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

5. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function.

6. Remote trip indication and control.

C. System Coordination: Overcurrent protection devices provided by the manufacturer on this project shall provide adequate time separation between devices installed in series so that the closest device upstream of a fault condition will open and clear the fault prior to any other upstream overcurrent protection device operating.

1. This includes but is not limited to providing overcurrent protection devices with the same trip rating as shown on the drawings and equipped adjustable time current curve characteristics, shown or not shown on the drawings, that coordinate with other overcurrent protection devices that are in the same series circuit.

2. When installed all series connect overcurrent protection devices shall be coordinated in this manner.

a. Exceptions: Selective coordination is not required between protective devices with the same trip rating or protective devices in series where the operation of either device would affect the same load.

3. Whenever trip ratings are required to be increased or decreased in order to coordinate with overcurrent devices that are in the same series circuit the cost of the adjusted trip rating/circuit breaker shall be included in the bid. This shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer prior to ordering the equipment.

a. The engineer shall issue any required changes to feeder conductors due to trip rating adjustments for coordination purposes.

D. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.



E. Fuses are specified in Division 26 Section "Fuses."

2.3 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from switchboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchboard meters and switchboard class relays.

C. Portable Circuit-Breaker Lifting Device: Floor-supported, roller-based, elevating carriage arranged for movement of circuit breakers in and out of compartments for present and future circuit breakers.

2.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for switchboards with one or more service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

B. Single Line Diagram: Upon completion of installation and prior to final inspection, the contractor shall obtain from the electrical engineer of record the “as-built” single line diagram or riser diagram, frame same under glass, and mount in a conspicuous place adjacent to the main switchboard.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards according to NEMA PB 2.1.

B. Examine switchboards before installation. Reject switchboards that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install switchboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 2.1.



B. Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete base, 4-inch nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.

D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

E. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of switchboards.

F. Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections.

G. Install overcurrent protective devices, transient voltage suppression devices, and instrumentation.

1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

H. Comply with NECA 1.

I. Switchboards identified for use as service equipment shall be so labeled.

J. Upon completion of installation, and prior to final inspection, the contractor shall provide a reduced-size “as-built” single line diagram, framed under glass, and mounted in a conspicuous place adjacent to the main service switchboard.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Bond conduits entering underneath the switchboard to the equipment ground bus with a bonding conductor sized per NFPA 70.

B. Support and secure conductors within the switchboard according to NFPA 70.



3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

C. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each meter and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

C. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

D. Tests and Inspections:


2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each switchboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment:



1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

5. For services 1000 amperes or larger, the following tests shall be performed on the service circuit breakers and the distribution circuit breakers. Testing shall be performed by a qualified factory technician at the job site. Prior to testing the contractor shall verify all circuit breaker settings with the Engineer of Record. All readings shall be tabulated.

a. Phase tripping tolerance (within 20% of UL requirements). b. Trip time (per phase) in seconds. c. Instantaneous trip (amps) per phase. d. Insulation resistance (in megaohms) at 100 volts (phase to phase, and line to load).

6. The ground fault protection on the new circuit breakers (if provided) shall be performance tested in the filed and properly calibrated and set in accordance with the Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study

E. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies switchboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat, to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions, until switchboard is ready to be energized and placed into service.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, instrumentation, and accessories.


PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NRTL: Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory.

B. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

C. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.


A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Scaled layout of equipment within the project electric room.



2. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

3. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 4. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 5. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 6. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 7. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components. 8. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between

manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 9. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:




D. Field Quality-Control Reports:


requirements.

E. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.



B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.



A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 18-months from date of Final Acceptance of the Work.


A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F. b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.



C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. 3. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 18-months from date of Substantial Completion.

1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types:

Two spares for each panelboard.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."



B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. c. Kitchen or Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless steel. d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. e. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive

Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover.

4. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.

5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.

6. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel. c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective

devices and other components.

7. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent protective cover.

C. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.

D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box 100% rated. 3. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as

suitable for nonlinear loads. 4. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections.

E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate

at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.



5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

6. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

7. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra-capacity neutral bus.

F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. Series rated panelboard are not acceptable.

H. Service entrance equipment must be third party SE rated.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS



B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers or plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

G. System Coordination: Overcurrent protection devices provided by the manufacturer on this project shall provide adequate time separation between devices installed in series so that the closest device upstream of a fault condition will open and clear the fault prior to any other upstream overcurrent protection device operating.

1. This includes but is not limited to providing overcurrent protection devices with the same trip rating as shown on the drawings and equipped adjustable time current curve



characteristics, shown or not shown on the drawings, that coordinate with other overcurrent protection devices that are in the same series circuit.

2. When installed all series connect overcurrent protection devices shall be coordinated in this manner.

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS



B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

E. System Coordination: Overcurrent protection devices provided by the manufacturer on this project shall provide adequate time separation between devices installed in series so that the closest device upstream of a fault condition will open and clear the fault prior to any other upstream overcurrent protection device operating.

1. This includes but is not limited to providing overcurrent protection devices with the same trip rating as shown on the drawings and equipped adjustable time current curve characteristics, shown or not shown on the drawings, that coordinate with other overcurrent protection devices that are in the same series circuit.

a. When installed all series connect overcurrent protection devices shall be coordinated in this manner. Exceptions: Selective coordination is not required between protective devices with the same trip rating or protective devices in series where the operation of either device would affect the same load.

2. Whenever trip ratings are required to be increased or decreased in order to coordinate with overcurrent devices that are in the same series circuit the cost of the adjusted trip rating/circuit breaker shall be included in the bid. This shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer prior to ordering the equipment.

a. The engineer shall issue any required changes to feeder conductors due to trip rating adjustments for coordination purposes.

F. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.



G. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.

2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES



B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. Series ratings are not acceptable.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

3. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

4. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Where shown on the drawings for receptacle circuits, provide Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

5. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Where shown on the drawings for mechanical equipment provide Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

6. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

e. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated voltage.

f. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with field-adjustable 0.1- to 0.6-second time delay.



g. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit.

h. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in off position.

7. System Coordination: Overcurrent protection devices provided by the manufacturer on this project shall provide adequate time separation between devices installed in series so that the closest device upstream of a fault condition will open and clear the fault prior to any other upstream overcurrent protection device operating.

a. This includes but is not limited to providing overcurrent protection devices with the same trip rating as shown on the drawings and equipped adjustable time current curve characteristics, shown or not shown on the drawings, that coordinate with other overcurrent protection devices that are in the same series circuit.

b. When installed all series connect overcurrent protection devices shall be coordinated in this manner.

2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install panelboards on concrete bases, 4-inch nominal thickness.



1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of base.

2. For panelboards, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.


4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards. 5. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

E. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

F. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

G. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

H. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

I. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Provide pull wire and cap each spare conduit.

J. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.

K. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."



D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."




1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.


1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.


D. Tests and Inspections:



3. For services 1000 amperes or larger, the following tests shall be performed on the service circuit breakers and the distribution circuit breakers. Testing shall be performed by a qualified factory technician at the job site. Prior to testing the contractor shall verify the circuit breaker settings with the Engineer of record. All readings shall be tabulated:

a. Phase tripping tolerance (within 20% of UL requirements). b. Trip time (per phase) in seconds. c. Instantaneous trip (amps) per phase. d. Insulation resistance (in megaohms) at 100 volts (phase to phase, and line to load).

4. The ground fault protection on the new circuit breakers (if provided) shall be performance tested in the field and properly calibrated and set in accordance with the Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study.

5. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard’s terminations. Remove all access panels so terminations and connections are visible to portable scanner.

6. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

7. A thermographic imaging survey shall be required for the following equipment installations:



a. Distribution panelboard conductor terminations.

8. Thermographic imaging survey shall be performed by a thermographic imaging contractor who is a Level III Certified Thermographer and who has received accreditation through a NETA accredited thermography training program.

9. Imaging contractor shall utilized equipment that has been calibrated within the previous six months of test; calibration shall be part of an ongoing calibration program that is traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).

10. Imaging equipment shall include a Forward Looking Infrared Camera able to detect emitted thermal infrared radiation and convert the detected emissions into a visual image.

11. Electrical contractor shall correct deficiencies and retesting shall be repeated until no deficiencies are detectable.

12. The Imaging contractor shall provide a certified test report to the engineer and the owner; report shall include deficiencies detected, corrective measures taken and resulting final outcome of analysis.

E. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of

the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.


WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Twist-locking receptacles. 3. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. 4. Communications outlets. 5. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet assemblies.


1. Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for workstation outlets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.



D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.


C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described in subparagraphs below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Service/Power Poles: One for every 10, but no fewer than one. 2. Floor Service Outlet Assemblies: One for every 10, but no fewer than one. 3. Poke-Through, Fire-Rated Closure Plugs: One for every five floor service outlets

installed, but no fewer than two.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).



2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, Heavy-Duty, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.


a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex). c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex).

2. Receptacles shall have side wired terminals with brass screws and hex ground screw.

B. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, Heavy-Duty, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.


a. Cooper; TR8300. b. Hubbell; HBL8300SG. c. Leviton; 8300-SGG. d. Pass & Seymour; 63H.

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Straight blade, non-feed through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, Heavy-Duty, 125 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; GF20. b. Pass & Seymour; 2084. c. Leviton; W7899 d. Hubbell; GFR5362

2.4 HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATION RECEPTACLES

A. Wiring Devices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with NEMA FB 11 and UL 1010.


a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds. b. EGS/Appleton Electric.



c. Killark; a division of Hubbell Inc.

2.5 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES

A. Single Convenience Receptacles, Heavy-Duty, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.


a. Cooper; L520R. b. Hubbell; HBL2310. c. Leviton; 2310. d. Pass & Seymour; L520-R.

2.6 SNAP SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.

B. All switches shall have quiet operating mechanisms without the use of mercury switches. All switches shall be listed by an “approved” third-party agency, approved for the voltage and amperage indicated. Self ground type is not acceptable. Switches shall have side wired terminals with brass screws and hex ground screw.

C. Switches, Heavy-Duty, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way). b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224

(four way). c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four

way). d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way),

20AC4 (four way).

D. Pilot Light Switches, 20 A:


a. Cooper; 2221PL for 120 V and 277 V. b. Hubbell; HPL1221PL for 120 V and 277 V. c. Leviton; 1221-PLR for 120 V, 1221-7PLR for 277 V. d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-PLR for 120 V.

2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "ON."

E. Key-Operated Switches, Heavy-Duty, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:



a. Cooper; 2221L. b. Hubbell; HBL1221L. c. Leviton; 1221-2L. d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.

2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

F. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors.


a. Cooper; 1995. b. Hubbell; HBL1557. c. Leviton; 1257. d. Pass & Seymour; 1251.

2.7 WALL-BOX DIMMERS

A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.

B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL 1472.

C. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.

2.8 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS

A. Data/Communications Outlet:


a. Cooper; 3560-6. b. Leviton; 40649.

2. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863.

B. Combination TV and Data Outlet:


a. Cooper; 3562. b. Leviton; 40595.



2. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 5e; and one Type F coaxial cable connector.

2.9 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and

labeled for use in "wet locations."

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-resistant , die-cast aluminum or thermoplastic with lockable cover.

2.10 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.

B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.

C. Service Plate: Round, die-cast aluminum with satin finish.

D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Two modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 Category 5e jacks for UTP cable.

2.11 FLOOR SERVICE FITINGS (SLAB ON GRADE)

A. Type I: Round PVC Multi-Service power and low voltage floor box with two (2) 1 ½” hubs for low voltage and two (2) 1” hubs for power.

1. Minimum depth of concrete pour 3.00”. 2. 5.75” external diameter X 6” height. 3. Accepts ¾”, 1”, 1 ¼”, 1 ½” schedule 40 or 80 PVC conduit and ENT tubing. 4. Products as manufactured by Hubbell: S1PFB 5. Equal products by: Wiremold

2.12 POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES




1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. 2. MonoSystems. 3. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 4. Wiremold Company (The).

B. Description: Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box with multi-channeled, through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor service outlet assembly.

1. Service Outlet Assembly: Flush type with four simplex receptacles and space for four RJ-45 jacks.

2. Size: Selected to fit cored holes in floor and matched to floor thickness. 3. Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly. 4. Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused cored openings and reestablish fire rating of

floor. 5. Wiring Raceways and Compartments: For a minimum of four No. 12 AWG conductors

and a minimum of four, 4-pair, Category 5e voice and data communication cables.

2.13 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES


1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. 2. Wiremold Company (The).

B. Components of Assemblies: Products from a single manufacturer designed for use as a complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.

C. Raceway Material: Metal, with manufacturer's standard finish.

D. Wire: No. 12 AWG.

2.14 SERVICE POLES

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -wired units to extend power and voice and data communication from distribution wiring concealed in ceiling to devices or outlets in adjacent casework.

1. Poles: Sized to accommodate all power wiring and communications cabling required in adjacent casework, with height adequate to extend from floor to at least 6 inches above ceiling, and with separate channels for power wiring and voice and data communication cabling.

2. Mounting: Ceiling trim flange with concealed bracing arranged for positive connection to ceiling supports; with pole foot and carpet pad attachment.

3. Finishes: Manufacturer's standard painted finish and trim combination (color selected by architect).



4. Wiring: Sized for minimum of eleven No. 10 AWG power and ground conductors and a minimum of ten, 4-pair, Category 5 voice and data communication cables.

2.15 FINISHES

A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:



1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Wall switches and Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served.

a. Label all cover plates using adhesive film label with clear protective overlay.



1) Labels shall include the power source panelboard name and circuit number. Example: “Panel 1NL2-24”

2) Labels shall be placed below the toggle on wall switches and below the lower duplex receptacle on receptacles.

b. For wall switches and/or receptacles connected to generator circuits provide engraved stainless steel cover plate with the text “EMERGENCY” using ¼” high red filled letters.

1) Engraved text shall be located above toggle on wall switches and above the upper receptacle for receptacles.

c. Durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.



1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital

readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.



FUSES 262813 - 1

SECTION 262813 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in control circuits, enclosed switches, and enclosed controllers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material, dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.

a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.

b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment calculations are based.

2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings.

3. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 4. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. 5. Coordination charts and tables and related data. 6. Fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Ambient temperature adjustment information. 2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.


FUSES 262813 - 2

3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves (instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse.

4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F or more than 100 deg F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Edison Fuse, Inc.


FUSES 262813 - 3

3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 4. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 600 VOLT AND LESS FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses:

1. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay. 2. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay. 3. Control Circuits: Class CC, fast acting.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.


FUSES 262813 - 4

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.



ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1

SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following individually mounted, enclosed switches and circuit breakers:

1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Molded-case circuit breakers. 4. Molded-case switches. 5. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GD: General duty.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. HD: Heavy duty.

D. RMS: Root mean square.

E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current rating. 4. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective

devices and auxiliary components.



B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" Include the following:

1. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.




D. Field quality-control test reports including the following:


requirements.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker. 3. Routine maintenance requirements for components.



B. Comply with NFPA 70. Comply with NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.




A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Spares: For the following:

a. Potential Transformer Fuses: At least 10% of each size installed for project, but not less than 2 of each size.

b. Control-Power Fuses: At least 10% of each size installed for project, but not less than 2 of each size.

c. Fuses for Fusible Switches: At least 10% of each size installed for project, but not less than 2 of each size.

d. Fuses for Fused Power Circuit Devices: At least 10% of each size installed for project, but not less than 2 of each size.

2. Spare Indicating Lights: Six of each type installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.



2.2 FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. 2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D/Group Schneider.

B. Fusible Switch, 600 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Nonfusible Switch, 600 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded, and bonded; and labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Auxiliary set of contacts arranged to open before switch blades open.

2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. 2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. 3. Moeller Electric Corporation. 4. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 5. Square D/Group Schneider.

B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic Trip-Unit Circuit Breakers: RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug; with the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.



c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 5-mA trip sensitivity.

C. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical style suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR

for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. 4. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup

and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. 5. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit. 6. Auxiliary Switch: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic

circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.

D. Molded-Case Switches: Molded-case circuit breaker with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only, and short-circuit withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating.

E. Molded-Case Switch Accessories:

1. Lugs: Mechanical style suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material of conductors.

2. Application Listing: Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.

3. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit. Provide "dummy" trip unit where required for proper operation.

4. Auxiliary Switch: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location.

1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 2. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. 3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

2.5 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested enclosures before shipping



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with applicable portions of NECA 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA PB 2.1 for installation of enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

B. Mount individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor floor-mounted switches to concrete base.

C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

E. Provide 2#12, 1#12 ground, ½”C minimum from elevator disconnect switch auxiliary contact to the elevator controller. Coordinate with elevator installer and terminate the conductors at the disconnect switch on either the Normally Open or Normally Closed contact as instructed by the elevator installer.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Prepare for acceptance testing as follows:

1. Inspect mechanical and electrical connections. 2. Verify switch and relay type and labeling verification. 3. Verify rating of installed fuses. 4. Inspect proper installation of type, size, quantity, and arrangement of mounting or

anchorage devices complying with manufacturer's certification.



5. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch, circuit breaker, component, and control circuit.

6. Test continuity of each line- and load-side circuit

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Test mounting and anchorage devices according to requirements in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters.


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges. Verify settings with Engineer of record.

3.6 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, vacuum dirt and debris from interiors; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.

B. Inspect exposed surfaces and repair damaged finishes.



VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262923 - 1

SECTION 262923 - VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes separately enclosed, pre-assembled, combination VFCs, rated 600 V and less, for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BAS: Building automation system.

B. CE: Conformite Europeene (European Compliance).

C. CPT: Control power transformer.

D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

E. IGBT: Insulated-gate bipolar transistor.

F. LAN: Local area network.

G. LED: Light-emitting diode.

H. MCP: Motor-circuit protector.

I. NC: Normally closed.

J. NO: Normally open.

K. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

L. PCC: Point of common coupling.

M. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative.

N. PWM: Pulse-width modulated.

O. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.



P. TDD: Total demand (harmonic current) distortion.

Q. THD(V): Total harmonic distortion (voltage).

R. VFC: Variable-frequency motor controller.

S. VFD: Variable-frequency drive. Used interchangeably with VFC.


A. Seismic Performance: VFCs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.



A. Product Data: For each type and rating of VFC indicated. Include features, performance, electrical ratings, operating characteristics, shipping and operating weights, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For each VFC indicated. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections; and conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment.

1. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:

a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Factory-installed devices. c. Enclosure types and details. d. Nameplate legends. e. Short-circuit current (withstand) rating of enclosed unit. f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each VFC and installed

devices. g. Specified modifications.

2. Schematic and Connection Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around VFCs. Show VFC layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements.



Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For VFCs, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.



3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based, and their installation requirements.

C. Product Certificates: For each VFC, from manufacturer.

D. Harmonic Analysis Study and Report: Comply with IEEE 399 and NETA Acceptance Testing Specification; identify the effects of nonlinear loads and their associated harmonic contributions on the voltages and currents throughout the electrical system. Analyze possible operating scenarios, including recommendations for VFC input filtering to limit TDD and THD(V) at each VFC to specified levels at the point of common coupling as defined by IEEE-519-1992.

E. Source quality-control reports.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor-running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFCs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting thermal-magnetic circuit breaker and MCP trip settings.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. 3. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming

microprocessor control modules. 4. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and status

and alarm points.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS




1. Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.

3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed. 4. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish two spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller

installed. 5. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor

installed.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


C. IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test VFC according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 26 0548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."


A. If stored in space that is not permanently enclosed and environmentally controlled, remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside controllers and install temporary electric heating, with at least 250 W per controller.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation, capable of driving full load without derating, under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg F and not exceeding 140 deg F 2. Humidity: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing). 3. Altitude: Not exceeding 3300 feet.

B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Systems: Do not interrupt electrical systems in facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than 14 days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical systems.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electrical service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical systems without Owner's written

permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E.



C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFCs, including clearances between VFCs, and adjacent surfaces and other items.

1.12 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, load characteristics, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 2. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 3. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.

C. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.

1.13 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace VFCs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS


1. ABB. 2. Danfoss Inc.; Danfoss Drives Div. 3. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 4. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 5. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. General Requirements for VFCs: Comply with NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 61800-2, and UL 508C.

C. Application: Constant torque and/or variable torque units shall be supplied for the specific equipment usage. This may include one or both types of VFCs. The manufacturer shall be








consulted for each specific VFC application to determine the recommended type of VFC to be used.

D. VFC Description: Variable-frequency power converter (rectifier, dc bus, and IGBT, PWM inverter) factory packaged in an enclosure, with integral disconnecting means and overcurrent and overload protection; listed and labeled by an NRTL as a complete unit; arranged to provide self-protection, protection, and variable-speed control of one or more three-phase induction motors by adjusting output voltage and frequency.

1. Units suitable for operation of inverter-duty motors as defined by NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 31, “Definite-Purpose Inverter-Fed Polyphase Motors.”

2. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Design and Rating: Match load type, such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection.

1. Variable Frequency Controllers shall be of 6-pulse or 12-pulse design with sufficient harmonic distortion mitigation to limit TDD and THD (V) to 2.5% at the defined PCC or per IEEE 519 if more stringent.

F. Output Rating: Three-phase; 10 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage range.

G. Unit Operating Requirements:

1. Input AC Voltage Tolerance: Plus 10 and minus 10 percent of VFC input voltage rating. 2. Input AC Voltage Unbalance: Not exceeding 3 percent. 3. Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 percent of VFC frequency rating. 4. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load. 5. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent under any load or speed

condition. 6. Minimum Short-Circuit Current (Withstand) Rating: 65 kA. 7. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 14 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 8. Ambient Storage Temperature Rating: Not less than minus 4 deg F and not exceeding

140 deg F 9. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing). 10. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 3300 feet. 11. Vibration Withstand: Comply with IEC 60068-2-6. 12. Overload Capability: 1.5 times the base load current for 60 seconds; minimum of 1.8

times the base load current for three seconds. 13. Starting Torque: Minimum 100 percent of rated torque from 3 to 60 Hz. 14. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 5 percent. 15. Output Carrier Frequency: Selectable; 0.5 to 15 kHz. 16. Stop Modes: Programmable; includes fast, free-wheel, and dc injection braking.

H. Inverter Logic: Microprocessor based, 32 bit, isolated from all power circuits.



I. Isolated Control Interface: Allows VFCs to follow remote-control signal over a minimum 40:1 speed range.

1. Signal: Electrical.

J. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:

1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm. 2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm. 3. Acceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds. 4. Deceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds. 5. Current Limit: 30 to minimum of 150 percent of maximum rating.

K. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:

1. Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors to provide three-phase protection against damage from supply voltage surges 10 percent or more above nominal line voltage.

2. Loss of Input Signal Protection: Selectable response strategy, including speed default to a percent of the most recent speed, a preset speed, or stop; with alarm.

3. Under- and overvoltage trips. 4. Inverter overcurrent trips. 5. VFC and Motor Overload/Overtemperature Protection: Microprocessor-based thermal

protection system for monitoring VFCs and motor thermal characteristics, and for providing VFC overtemperature and motor overload alarm and trip; settings selectable via the keypad; NRTL approved.

6. Critical frequency rejection, with three (minimum) selectable, adjustable deadbands. 7. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips. 8. Loss-of-phase protection. 9. Reverse-phase protection. 10. Short-circuit protection. 11. Motor overtemperature fault. 12. Interlocking of motor disconnect switches to prevent VFC damage.

L. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempt three restarts after drive fault or on return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction; adjustable delay time between restart attempts.

M. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power interruption until motor has stopped, unless "Bidirectional Autospeed Search" feature is available and engaged.

N. Bidirectional Autospeed Search: Capable of starting VFC into rotating loads spinning in either direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without causing damage to drive, motor, or load.

O. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds.



P. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds.

Q. Integral Input Disconnecting Means and OCPD: NEMA AB 1, instantaneous-trip circuit breaker; NEMA AB 1, molded-case switch, with power fuse block and current-limiting fuses; NEMA AB 1, thermal-magnetic circuit breaker; NEMA KS 1, nonfusible switch, with power fuse block and current-limiting fuses; or NEMA KS 1, fusible switch with pad-lockable, door-mounted handle mechanism.

1. Disconnect Rating: Not less than 115 percent of NFPA 70 motor full-load current rating or VFC input current rating, whichever is larger.

2. Auxiliary Contacts: NO/NC, arranged to activate before switch blades open. 3. Lockable in the OFF position. 4. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with circuit-breaker handle. 5. Form ‘C’ NC and NO alarm contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped.

2.2 CONTROLS AND INDICATION

A. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators displaying the following conditions:

1. Power on. 2. Run. 3. Overvoltage. 4. Line fault. 5. Overcurrent. 6. External fault.

B. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Manufacturer's standard front-accessible, sealed keypad and plain-English language digital display; allows complete programming, program copying, operating, monitoring, and diagnostic capability.

1. Keypad: In addition to required programming and control keys, include keys for HAND, OFF, and AUTO modes.

2. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and password with at least three levels of access: View only; view and operate; and view, operate, and service.

a. Control Authority: Supports at least four conditions: Off, local manual control at VFC, local automatic control at VFC, and automatic control through a remote source.

C. Historical Logging Information and Displays:

1. Real-time clock with current time and date. 2. Running log of total power versus time. 3. Total run time. 4. Fault log, maintaining last four faults with time and date stamp for each.



D. Indicating Devices: Digital display and additional readout devices as required, mounted flush in VFC door and connected to display VFC parameters including, but not limited to:

1. Output frequency (Hz). 2. Motor speed (rpm). 3. Motor status (running, stop, fault). 4. Motor current (amperes). 5. Motor torque (percent). 6. Fault or alarming status (code). 7. PID feedback signal (percent). 8. DC-link voltage (V dc). 9. Set point frequency (Hz). 10. Motor output voltage (V ac).

E. Control Signal Interfaces:

1. Electric Input Signal Interface:

a. A minimum of two programmable analog inputs: 0- to 10-V dc and 4- to 20-mA dc.

b. A minimum of six multifunction programmable digital inputs.

2. Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed-setting input signals from the BAS or other control systems:

a. 0- to 10-V dc. b. 4- to 20-mA dc. c. Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs. d. Fixed frequencies using digital inputs.

3. Output Signal Interface: A minimum of two programmable analog output signal(s) (0- to 10-V dc and 4- to 20-mA dc, which can be configured for any of the following:

a. Output frequency (Hz). b. Output current (load). c. DC-link voltage (V dc). d. Motor torque (percent). e. Motor speed (rpm). f. Set point frequency (Hz).

4. Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of two programmable dry-circuit relay outputs (120-V ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following:

a. Motor running. b. Set point speed reached. c. Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent). d. PID high- or low-speed limits reached.



F. PID Control Interface: Provides closed-loop set point, differential feedback control in response to dual feedback signals. Allows for closed-loop control of fans and pumps for pressure, flow, or temperature regulation.

1. Number of Loops: Two.

G. BAS Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable the BAS to monitor, control, and display VFC status and alarms and energy usage. Data available to the BAS must include all commands (on, off, speed) and status control setpoints, zone process variables and controller alarms. Allows VFC to be used with an external system within a multidrop LAN configuration; settings retained within VFC's nonvolatile memory.

1. Network Communications Ports: Ethernet and RS-422/485. 2. Embedded BAS Protocols for Network Communications: ASHRAE 135 BACnet,

Echelon LonWorks, Johnson Metasys N2 and Modbus/Memobus protocols accessible via the communications ports.

2.3 LINE CONDITIONING AND FILTERING

A. Input Line Conditioning: Based on the harmonic analysis study and report, provide input filtering, as required, to limit TDD and THD(V) to 2.5% at the defined PCC or per IEEE 519 if more stringent.

1. In addition to limits defined above, limit worst case THD(V) on source panelboards feeding multiple VFCs to 5% or per IEEE 519 if more stringent.

B. EMI/RFI Filtering: CE marked; certify compliance with IEC 61800-3 for Category C2.

2.4 BYPASS SYSTEMS

A. Bypass Operation: Safely transfers motor between power converter output and bypass circuit, manually, automatically, or both. Selector switches set modes and indicator lights indicate mode selected. Unit is capable of stable operation (starting, stopping, and running) with motor completely disconnected from power converter.

B. Bypass Mode: Manual operation only; requires local operator selection at VFC. Transfer between power converter and bypass contactor and retransfer shall only be allowed with the motor at zero speed.

C. Bypass Controller: Three-contactor-style bypass allows motor operation via the power converter or the bypass controller; with input isolating switch and barrier arranged to isolate the power converter input and output and permit safe testing and troubleshooting of the power converter, both energized and de-energized, while motor is operating in bypass mode.

1. Bypass Contactor: Load-break, IEC-rated contactor. 2. Input and Output Isolating Contactors: Non-load-break, IEC-rated contactors.



3. Isolating Switch: Provide manual bypass consisting of a door interlocked main fused disconnect padlockable in the off position.

D. Bypass Contactor Configuration: Full-voltage (across-the-line) type.

1. Provide four position AUTO/OFF/LINE/TEST selector switch: Which allows normal automatic VFC operation of the motor in “AUTO” position; de-energizing of the motor in “OFF” position; bypass, full-voltage (across-the-line), starting and operation of motor in the “LINE” position; and bypass operation of the motor while allowing testing and adjusting of VFC in the “TEST” position.

2. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors.

a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor IEC size and line-voltage rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.

b. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double break, and silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.

3. Overload Relays: NEMA ICS 2.

a. Solid-State Overload Relays:

1) Switch or dial selectable for motor-running overload protection. 2) Sensors in each phase. 3) Class 10/20 selectable tripping characteristic selected to protect motor

against voltage and current unbalance and single phasing. 4) Class II ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent

nuisance trip on starting. 5) Analog communication module.

b. Form ‘C’ NC and NO isolated overload alarm contact. c. External overload reset push button.

2.5 OPTIONAL FEATURES

A. Multiple-Motor Capability: VFC suitable for variable-speed service to multiple motors. Overload protection shuts down VFC and motors served by it, and generates fault indications, when overload protection activates.

1. Configure to allow two or more motors to operate simultaneously at the same speed; separate overload relay for each controlled motor.

B. Damper control circuit with end of travel feedback capability.

C. Motor Preheat Function: Preheats motor when idle to prevent moisture accumulation in the motor.



D. Firefighter's Override (Smoke Purge) Input: On a remote contact closure from the firefighter's control station or the smoke-control fan controller, whichever is applicable on this project, this password-protected input:

1. Overrides all other local and external inputs (analog/digital, serial communication, and all keypad commands).

2. Forces VFC to operate motor, without any other run or speed command, at a field-adjustable, preset speed.

3. Forces VFC to transfer to Bypass Mode and operate motor at full speed. 4. Causes display of Override Mode on the VFC display. 5. Reset VFC to normal operation on removal of override signal automatically.

E. Communication Port: RS-232 port, USB 2.0 port, or equivalent connection capable of connecting a printer and a notebook computer.

2.6 ENCLOSURES

A. Variable frequency drives shall be located indoors, unless approved by the University.

B. VFC Enclosures: NEMA 250, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: Type 4X (only allowed with wr5itten approval from University). 3. Kitchen and/or Wash-Down Areas: Type 4X, stainless steel. 4. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4X. 5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

Type 12.

C. Plenum Rating: UL 1995; NRTL certification label on enclosure, clearly identifying VFC as "Plenum Rated."

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control-Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in VFC enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, oiltight type.

a. Push Buttons: Recessed or shielded types. b. Pilot Lights: LED types; push to test. c. Selector Switches: Rotary type. d. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station

with a factory-applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed position with control circuit open.

B. Reversible NC/NO bypass contactor auxiliary contact(s).



C. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays.

D. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings.

1. Current Transformers: Continuous current rating, basic impulse insulating level (BIL) rating, burden, and accuracy class suitable for connected circuitry. Comply with IEEE C57.13.

E. Supplemental Digital Meters:

1. Elapsed-time meter. 2. Kilowatt meter. 3. Kilowatt-hour meter.

F. Breather and drain assemblies, to maintain interior pressure and release condensation in NEMA Type 4 and 4X enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.

G. Space heaters, with NC auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in NEMA Type 4 and 4X enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.

H. Cooling Fan and Exhaust System: For NEMA 250, Type 1, 4 and 4X; UL 508 component recognized: Supply fan, with stainless steel intake and exhaust grills and filters; 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT.

I. Sun shields installed on fronts, sides, and tops of enclosures installed outdoors and subject to direct and extended sun exposure.

J. Spare control-wiring terminal blocks; wired.

2.8 MOTORS

A. Motors to be used with Variable Frequency Controllers shall be inverter duty motors.

B. Cabling from VFCs to motors shall be enclosed in appropriate raceway system; exposed cabling is unacceptable.

C. Motors to be used with Variable Frequency Controllers shall be equipped with shaft grounding rings bonded to the building grounding system to dissipate any voltages on shafts and extend the life of the motors.


A. Testing: Test and inspect VFCs according to requirements in NEMA ICS 61800-2.



1. Test each VFC while connected to its specified motor. 2. Verification of Performance: Rate VFCs according to operation of functions and features

specified.

B. VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFCs, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine VFC before installation. Reject VFCs that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before VFC installation.


3.2 HARMONIC ANALYSIS STUDY

A. Prepare a harmonic analysis study and report complying with IEEE 519 and NETA Acceptance Testing Specification.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of VFCs with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Wall-Mounting Controllers: Install VFCs on walls with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 26 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

C. Floor-Mounting Controllers: Install VFCs on 4-inch nominal thickness concrete base.

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.



2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.


4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

D. Roof-Mounting Controllers: Install VFC on roofs with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches above finished roof surface unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to curbs or mounting on freestanding, lightweight, structural-steel channels bolted to curbs. Seal roof penetrations after raceways are installed.

1. Structural-steel channels are specified in Section 26 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

E. Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Section 26 0548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

F. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

G. Install fuses in each fusible-switch VFC.

H. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed.

I. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment.

J. Comply with NECA 1.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify VFCs, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each VFC with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.

B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFCs, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFC units.

3.5 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between VFCs and remote devices and facility's central-control system.



B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

C. Connect selector switches and other automatic control devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic control devices that have no safety functions when switches are in manual-control position.

2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.


A. Control System Integrator: Engage a control system integrator to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.


1. Control System Integrator: Engage a control system integrator to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.


1. Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.


D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect VFC, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. 2. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment. 3. Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, component, connecting motor supply,

feeder, and control circuits. 4. Test continuity of each circuit. 5. Verify that voltages at VFC locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated

voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Construction Manager and the Engineer of Record before starting the motor(s).

6. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 7. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in

NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 8. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

9. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.



F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies the VFC. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations made after remedial action.

3.7 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a Control Systems Integrator to perform control integration of all data communications to/from the BAS and all other startup services. Control Systems Integrator shall be responsible for proper interfacing of VFCs to the BAS and verification of proper setting of all protective features and elements of the system.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to Substantial Completion.

B. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.

C. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load amperes and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify the Construction manager and the Engineer of Record before increasing settings.

D. Set field-adjustable pressure switches.

3.9 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.

B. Replace VFCs whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, reprogram, and maintain VFCs.

Fayetteville Regional Airport – Airline Terminal Improvements – Part 1 Owner: City of Fayetteville Fayetteville, North Carolina

AP#1515 RMF Engineering, Inc. May 17, 2017

ENGINE GENERATORS 263213 - 1

SECTION 263213 - ENGINE GENERATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for emergency standby power supply with

the following features:

1. Diesel engine.

2. Unit-mounted cooling system.

3. Unit-mounted control and monitoring.

4. Fuel system.

5. Outdoor enclosure.


1. Division 26 Section "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and

relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter

over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the

parameter.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator indicated. Include rated capacities,

operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. In addition, include the

following:

1. Thermal damage curve for generator.

2. Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.




1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-generator set and other

components specified. Indicate access requirements affected by height of subbase fuel

tank.

2. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Calculate

requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing

vibration isolation bases.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported

equipment. Include base weights.

4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

5. Maintenance platform detailed construction.

6. Circuit breakers installed at the generator.

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that subbase-mounted

fuel-tank, engine-generator set, batteries, battery racks, accessories, and components will

withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for

Electrical Systems." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation.

a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of

any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the

unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.

D. Qualification Data: For installer and manufacturer.

E. Source quality-control test reports.

1. Certified summary of prototype-unit test report.

2. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not

identical, to those tested on prototype unit.

3. Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Certify compliance with specified requirement

to meet performance criteria for sensitive loads.

4. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of

compliance with specified requirements.

5. Report of sound generation.

6. Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations, including

EPA requirements.

7. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110.





G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section

"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready access.

Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.

H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved

for installation of units required for this Project.

1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than four hours' normal travel time from Installer's

place of business to Project site.

2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for vibration isolators and seismic

restraints of engine skid mounts, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and

engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those

indicated for this Project.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 200 miles of Project

site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one

source from a single manufacturer.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for

intended use.

E. Comply with ASME B15.1.

F. Comply with NFPA 37.

G. Comply with NFPA 70.

H. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 emergency power supply system.

I. Comply with UL 2200.

J. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements.

K. Noise Emission: Comply with a maximum sound pressure of 85 dB at 23 feet from the unit due

to sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling-air intake

and discharge, and other components of installation and taking noise reflected from the building

into account.





A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only

after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than fourteen (14) days in advance of proposed interruption of

electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Architect's written

permission.

B. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the following

environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of

performance capability:

1. Ambient Temperature: Minus 15 to plus 40 deg C.

2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent.

3. Altitude: Sea level to 1000 feet.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for package engine generators. Cast anchor-bolt

inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in

Division 03.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of final inspection and acceptance..

1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full

maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include

quarterly exercising to check for proper starting, load transfer, and running under load. Include

routine preventive maintenance as recommended by manufacturer and adjusting as required for

proper operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and

installation of original equipment.





A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged

with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but no fewer than three of each.

2. Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but no fewer than two of each.

3. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air filters.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Caterpillar; Engine Div.

2. Generac Power Systems, Inc.

3. Kohler Co.; Generator Division.

4. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group.

2.2 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET

A. Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set.

B. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete

foundation; and have lifting attachments.

1. Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to mounting frame to

indicate location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and generator-set center

of gravity.

C. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated herein, with capacity as required to

operate as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing.

2. Output Connections: Three-phase, four wire.

3. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and

address, and model and serial number of component.

D. Generator-Set Performance:

1. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 3 percent of rated output voltage from no

load to full load.




2. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent step-

load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state

operating band within three seconds.

3. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency from no

load to full load.

4. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within

the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state

operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.

5. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5 percent variation for 50 percent step-load

increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state

operating band within five seconds.

6. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral

shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics. Telephone influence

factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.

7. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output

terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 250 percent of rated full-load current for not

less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to generator

system components.

8. Below requires 10-second maximum start time under specific conditions and includes

startup only, not load assumption.

9. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements.

a. This generator will be used to provide emergency standby power for egress

lighting. The transfer switch and generator system shall provide rated voltage and

frequency to the egress lighting system within 10-seconds from the time the

normal power source to the transfer switch has been de-energized.

2.3 ENGINE

A. Fuel: #2 Diesel.

B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.

C. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid:

1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller

while passing full flow.

2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil

temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.

3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable

container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or

appliances.

D. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system.

Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity.

E. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing.




F. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine-

generator-set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump.

1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water,

with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.

2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start

to 110 percent load condition.

3. Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maximum

closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gage glass and petcock.

4. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow

automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by

engine manufacturer.

5. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer

covering of aging-, ultraviolet-, and abrasion-resistant fabric.

a. Rating: 50-psig maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F, and

noncollapsible under vacuum.

b. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and

equipment connections.

G. Muffler/Silencer: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected

with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure

requirements.

1. Minimum sound attenuation of 25 dB at 500 Hz.

2. Sound level measured at a distance of 23 feet from exhaust discharge (and including

engine, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other components of installation)

after installation is complete shall be 85 dBA or less.

H. Air-Intake Filter: Heavy-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element

and "blocked filter" indicator.

I. Starting System: 24-V electric, with negative ground.

1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with

ambient temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article.

2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine

flywheel without binding.

3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified.

4. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in Part 1 "Project

Conditions" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least three times without

recharging.

5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length indicated.

Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories.

6. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish and thermal

insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater shall be arranged to maintain battery above

10 deg C regardless of external ambient temperature within range specified in Part 1

"Project Conditions" Article. Include accessories required to support and fasten batteries

in place.




7. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage

regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating.

8. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type. Unit

shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following features:

a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically after

battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery

terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float-charging

mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again.

b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for

variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent

overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures.

c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of

input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.

d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate charging

rates.

e. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts

providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense

high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either

condition shall close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication

at system control and monitoring panel.

f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet.

2.4 FUEL OIL STORAGE

A. Subbase-Mounted Fuel Tank.

1. Tank:

a. The diesel fuel storage system shall be in accordance with North Carolina Fire

Prevention Code. The unit shall be equipped with a UL labeled subbase-mounted

fuel tank that shall have a storage capacity of 2000 gallons (minimum) and shall be

supplied with a low fuel level alarm float switch and a lockable, exterior located

vandal resistant fill cap.

b. Subbase-mounted fuel tank shall be of double wall construction or shall be

equipped with a fuel containment basin with a normal capacity of 120% of the tank

capacity. Leak detection with alarm function shall be provided within secondary

containment.

c. Unit shall be provided with all necessary fuel vent lines for proper engine

performance as well as a means to readily detect the fuel level in the tank without

the use of a measuring stick.


C. Maintenance/Repair Platform: Provide elevated maintenance/repair platform around sides and

electrical alternator end of generator set; platform shall be equipped with handrails and steps

and shall be at a height to allow access to all components that may require maintenance or

repair and will depend on the height added to the generator set height by the subbase-mounted




fuel tank. Platform shall be sized to allow full swing of generator doors and replacement of all

internal replaceable components and shall meet all required clearances recommended by the

manufacturer, required by applicable codes or required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

2.5 CONTROL AND MONITORING

A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control

and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more

separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode-

selector switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same

switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or

equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms.

Operation of a remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set.

B. Manual Starting System Sequence of Operation: Switching on-off switch on the generator

control panel to the on position starts generator set. The off position of same switch initiates

generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures

or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a

remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set.

C. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and

engine gages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the

generator set. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator-set vibration.

D. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls as required by NFPA 110 for Level 1 system,

and the following:

1. AC voltmeter.

2. AC ammeter.

3. AC frequency meter.

4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging).

5. Engine-coolant temperature gage.

6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage.

7. Running-time meter.

8. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es).

9. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat.

10. Start-stop switch.

11. Overspeed shutdown device.

12. Coolant high-temperature shutdown device.

13. Coolant low-level shutdown device.

14. Oil low-pressure shutdown device.

15. Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm.

16. Generator overload.

E. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include

wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine

or generator, unless otherwise indicated.




F. Connection to Data Link: A separate terminal block, factory wired to Form C dry contacts, for

each alarm and status indication is reserved for connections for data-link transmission of

indications to remote data terminals. Data system connections to terminals are covered in

Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

G. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 systems.

Include necessary contacts and terminals in control and monitoring panel.

1. Overcrank shutdown.

2. Coolant low-temperature alarm.

3. Control switch not in auto position.

4. Battery-charger malfunction alarm.

5. Battery low-voltage alarm.

H. Remote Alarm Annunciator: An LED labeled with proper alarm conditions shall identify each

alarm event and a common audible signal shall sound for each alarm condition. Silencing

switch in face of panel shall silence signal without altering visual indication. Connect so that

after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing

switch is reset. Cabinet and faceplate are surface- or flush-mounting type to suit mounting

conditions indicated.

I. Remote Emergency-Stop Switch: Flush; wall mounted, unless otherwise indicated; and labeled.

Push button shall be protected from accidental operation.

2.6 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION

A. Generator Circuit Breakers shall be suitable for use as service equipment per the National

Electrical Code requirements.

B. Generator Circuit Breaker: Insulated-case, electronic-trip type; 100 percent rated; complying

with UL 489.

1. Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time delay and instantaneous.

2. Trip Settings: Selected to coordinate with generator thermal damage curve.

3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other

protective devices.

4. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel.

C. LOAD SHED CONTROL: Upon generator overload, generator shall signal the lowest priority

automatic transfer switch to switch to the neutral position.

1. Provide the necessary control panel and internal logic circuit boards to monitor the

generator load and/or frequency.

2. Provide the necessary connections to the Automatic Transfer Switch(es) to perform the

load shed based upon the generator overload condition.

3. Provide all necessary conduit and wiring for this control function.




2.7 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1.

B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated

integrally with generator rotor.

C. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F.

D. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other

voltages if required.

E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration,

overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated

capacity.

F. Enclosure: Weatherproof.

G. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure.

H. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified.

1. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus or minus 5 percent

adjustment of output-voltage operating band.

I. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew

point.

J. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding.

K. Subtransient Reactance: 12 percent, maximum.

2.8 LOAD BANK

A. Resistive Load Elements: Corrosion-resistant chromium alloy with ceramic and steel supports.

Elements shall be double insulated and designed for repetitive on-off cycling. Elements shall be

mounted in removable aluminized-steel heater cases.

B. Reactive Load Elements: Epoxy-encapsulated reactor coils.

C. tumbler locks.

D. Contactor Enclosures: Heated by thermostatically controlled strip heaters to prevent

condensation.

E. Protective Devices: Power input circuits to load banks shall be fused, and fuses shall be

selected to coordinate with generator circuit breaker. Fuse blocks shall be located in contactor

enclosure. Cooling airflow and overtemperature sensors shall automatically shut down and lock




out load bank until manually reset. Safety interlocks on access panels and doors shall

disconnect load power, control, and heater circuits. Fan motor shall be separately protected by

overload and short-circuit devices. Short-circuit devices shall be noninterchangeable fuses with

200,000-A interrupting capacity.

F. Remote-Control Panel: Separate from load bank in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure with a

control power switch and pilot light, and switches controlling groups of load elements.

G. Control Sequence: Control panel may be preset for adjustable single-step loading of generator

during automatic exercising.

2.9 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE

A. Description: Vandal-resistant, weatherproof steel housing, wind resistant up to 100 mph.

Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring

maintenance. Panels shall be removable by one person without tools. Instruments and control

shall be mounted within enclosure.

B. Description: Prefabricated or pre-engineered reach-in enclosure with the following features:

1. Construction: Galvanized-steel, metal-clad, integral structural-steel-framed building

erected on concrete foundation.

2. Structural Design and Anchorage: Comply with ASCE 7 for wind loads.

3. Space Heater: Thermostatically controlled and sized to prevent condensation.

4. Louvers: Equipped with bird screen and filter arranged to permit air circulation when

engine is not running while excluding exterior dust, birds, and rodents.

5. Hinged Doors: With padlocking provisions.

6. Ventilation: Louvers equipped with bird screen and filter arranged to permit air

circulation while excluding exterior dust, birds, and rodents.

7. Thermal Insulation: Manufacturer's standard materials and thickness selected in

coordination with space heater to maintain winter interior temperature within operating

limits required by engine-generator-set components.

8. Muffler Location: Within enclosure.

9. Sound attenuated to 85 dBA or less as measured 23-ft. from any exterior wall surface of

the generator set enclosure.

C. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system components

within required limits when unit operates at standby rating with ambient temperature at top of

range specified in system service conditions.

1. Louvers: Fixed-engine, cooling-air inlet and discharge. Storm-proof and drainable

louvers prevent entry of rain and snow.

D. Convenience Outlets: Provide a minimum of 4 factory wired, GFCI receptacles.

E. Sound attenuation:




1. The entire enclosure except for the louvered openings shall have sound attenuation

material mechanically attached to the interior surfaces of the unit.

2. The sound absorption material shall be held in place by a perforated galvanized metal

sheeting to form a removable section easily inspected by maintenance personnel.

3. The sound attenuation material and fastening system shall apply to the enclosure roof as

well as the side panels and doors.

4. The enclosure package shall be designed to achieve an 85dBa sound rating when

measured at a distance of 23 feet, including sound reflected from the adjacent building.

F. Base and mounting:

1. The generator set and enclosure shall be mounted and shipped to the jobsite on a common

structural steel sub-base. Provisions for crane unloading of the complete package shall be

designed into the base of the unit.

2. The base and enclosure assembly shall allow room within the package to mount and

maintain the specified battery charger, engine starting batteries, racks, and cables,

generator mounted mainline circuit breaker(s), an engine/generator control panel, and

other items as specified or as shown on the drawings.

3. The entire unit consisting of generator set, base, enclosure, and all other specified items

including all liquids (i.e., fuel oil, lube oil and cooling water) shall be calculated by the

manufacturer. The base of the unit shall be engineered, designed, and manufactured as a

heavy duty, welded steel construction with four (4) point lifting provisions as used on

heavy duty construction installations.

4. Details and manufacturer’s certification of the base construction shall be included with

the drawings submitted for approval.

G. Enclosure flooring:

1. The floor of the enclosure shall be designed and constructed in such a manner as to

prevent the entrance of rodents. This may be accomplished with solid metal or expanded

metal grating but, in any event, shall be capable of supporting any ancillary equipment

specified which may be secured to it (such as batteries, subbase tanks, etc.) plus the

anticipated weight of maintenance personnel and their tools.

2. Under no circumstances shall the floor area or any of its parts be considered for cooling

air intake or discharge requirements of the generator set or its associated equipment, nor

shall its properties as a “heat sink” or heat dissipating medium be utilized in any manner

whatsoever in this application.

2.10 FINISHES

A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over

corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer.


A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of

identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories.




1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115.

B. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine-generator set and other

system components and accessories manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at

rated load and power factor. Include the following tests:

1. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical to

those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability.

2. Full load run.

3. Maximum power.

4. Voltage regulation.

5. Transient and steady-state governing.

6. Single-step load pickup.

7. Safety shutdown.

8. Provide 14 days' advance notice of tests and opportunity for observation of tests by

Owner's representative.

9. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-generator

performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of

connections before packaged engine-generator installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment

instructions and with NFPA 110.

B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or

accessories, for periodic maintenance.

C. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not

specified to be factory mounted.




3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged engine generator

to allow service and maintenance.

B. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector.

C. Connect fuel piping to engines with a gate valve and union and flexible connector.

D. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."

3.4 FUEL

A. Provide the specified fuel for the generator fuel storage tank(s). Fill the fuel storage tank(s) to

100% full prior to testing and demonstration of the generator system to the Owner and

Engineer. Refill the fuel storage tank(s) to 100% full after acceptance by the Owner and

Engineer.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical

Systems."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,

test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

Report results in writing.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and

to assist in testing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visual and

mechanical inspection for "AC Generators and for Emergency Systems" specified in

NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 as specified here

including, but not limited to:




a. 100% load test of the generator. This test is designed to determine that the

generator system will deliver full load output as connected at the site. Typically

this test is performed prior to the building load testing and before final

terminations of the emergency system conductors. The test shall be as follows:

1) Generator load Bank Test:

a) The generator shall be subjected to a three-hour test using resistive

load bank with a 1.0 power factor. This test shall be performed at the

job site in the presence of the Engineer. The contractor shall provide

the resistive load bank to test the generator.

b) One hour at 50% load.

c) One hour at 75% load.

d) One hour at 100% load.

e) Upon completion of the three-hour load test, the generator shall be

shutdown after the cooling period. The generator shall be started and

immediately upon reaching rated rpm, 100% load shall be applied to

demonstrate one-step full load capability. The capability of the

system to pick up full standby service load within 10 seconds of

power outage shall be demonstrated.

2) The following shall be recorded every thirty minutes during the load bank

testing:

a) Engine water temperature.

b) Oil pressure.

c) Voltage per phase and neutral.

d) Amperes per phases and neutral.

e) Frequency, KW, KVA, and power factor.

f) Room or outdoor ambient temperature.

b. Building load test. This test typically occurs after the Owner has effectively moved

into the building and equipment such as refrigerators, freezers, testing equipment,

fume hoods and computer equipment is operational. The test essentially

determines that the generator system will automatically detect a power loss,

automatically start, automatically switch the designated load to the generator in the

specified time frame and power the building load for two hours. The load test

utilizing the actual building loads and the observation and recording of load

changes and the resultant effect on the voltage and frequency shall be a minimum

duration of 2 hours of generator run time. A total time of 3-hours shall be allotted

for the testing period. The tests shall be shall be as follows:

1) With the prime mover in a “cold start” condition and the emergency load at

standard operating level, a primary power failure shall be initiated by

opening the switch or breaker supplying the primary power to the building

or facility. The test load shall be the load that the emergency generator

serves.

2) Observe and record the following during building load testing of the

generator:




a) If the facility is equipped with a fire pump, the pump shall be

energized and running for the initial 5-minute period of the load test,

then the pump can be de-energized while the testing is in progress.

b) The time delay starting of the generator.

c) The cranking time until the prime mover starts and run.

d) The time that the generator reach the operating speed.

e) The time that the generator achieved steady-condition after the

transfer switches transferred to the emergency position.

f) The generator voltage, frequency, amperes, prime mover oil pressure,

and water temperature.

g) The battery charge rate shall be recorded at 5-minute intervals for the

first 15 minutes and at 15-minute intervals thereafter.

h) When primary power is returned to the building or facility, the time

delay on retransfer to the primary power for the transfer switch with a

minimum setting of 5 minutes shall be recorded.

i) The time delay on the prime mover cool down period and shutdown

shall be recorded.

c. Phase loss test shall be performed to test the generator start circuit upon loss of any

individual primary electrical phase serving the building. This may require a

building power outage for the purpose of removing and then replacing individual

primary fuses serving the building transformer. 600V main circuit breakers

feeding the building loads should be opened for this test to prevent a single phase

condition from occurring for the building motor loads. Starting of the generator

during this test is optional provided the start circuits from the ATS(s) to the

generator have already been previously tested and were found to be acceptable.

d. Battery Tests: Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery

terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions.

e. Check electrolyte level (if applicable) and specific gravity under both conditions.

Test for contact integrity of all connectors.

f. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of battery after discharge. Verify

measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.

g. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and

float-charging conditions.

h. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and

integrity of each element of engine generator system before and during system

operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.

i. A full tank of fuel shall be provided, replacing any fuel used for testing (N/A for

natural gas).

j. Diesel fuel shall be treated with an alcohol-free additive to disperse water and

clean injectors.

k. Copy of the generator’s load test report shall be sent to the owner, and any state

agency involved.

l. Noise Level Tests: Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from generator-

set installation, including engine exhaust and cooling-air intake and discharge, at

four locations, and compare measured levels with required values.

D. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.




E. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to standards of

NIST, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration records

available for examination on request.

F. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no

leaks exist.

G. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper

motor rotation and unit operation.

H. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

I. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

J. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified

requirements are met.

K. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured

insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to

each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

L. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final

Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each power wiring termination and each bus

connection. Remove all access panels so terminations and connections are accessible to

portable scanner.

1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan 11 months

after date of Substantial Completion.

2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to

detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies terminations and

connections checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies

detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. Refer to Division 01 Section

"Demonstration and Training."


Fayetteville Regional Airport – Airline Terminal Improvements – Part 1 Owner: City of Fayetteville Fayetteville, North Carolina AP#1515 DK Consultants, LLC March 23, 2016

400Hz GROUND POWER UNIT AND ACCESSORIES 263543 - 1

SECTION 263543 – 400Hz GROUND POWER UNIT AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. The City of Fayetteville, North Carolina (Owner) proposes to add two (2) new Passenger Boarding Bridges (PBB’s) and associated equipment for the new “A” terminal at the Fayetteville Regional Airport (FAY).

B. The Owner also wishes to receive bids for two (2) Add Alternates.

1. Add Alternate 1 - The Contractor shall supply and install one (1) new PBB, GPU and PCAir

at new “A” terminal Gate A1, as indicated on the Drawings and in these Specifications, including all structural, support, mechanical, electrical, and finish requirements to serve the aircraft mix indicated on the Drawings and in these Specifications

2. Add Alternate 2 - The Contractor shall supply and install one (1) new PBB, GPU and PCAir

at new “A” terminal Gate A2, as indicated on the Drawings and in these Specifications, including all structural, support, mechanical, electrical, and finish requirements to serve the aircraft mix indicated on the Drawings and in these Specifications

C. The Contractor and GPU manufacturer shall provide the necessary information, product data,

project management, coordination and installation support to the PBB manufacturer so that the GPU supplied fully integrates and functions with the PBB and meets all of the GPU requirements of Section 347713 – PASSENGER BOARDING BRIDGES.

D. The GPU manufacturer shall also be required to fully coordinate with the Contractor performing

the other parts of this Project.

H. Related Work Specified Elsewhere.

1. GENERAL PROVISIONS 2. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

3. DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 4. SECTION 238121 - PRECONDITIONED AIR UNIT AND ACCESSORIES 5. SECTION 347713 - PASSENGER BOARDING BRIDGES

1.1 REFERENCES

A. The latest edition of the publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent



referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

1. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC): a. IEC 158-1 - Rating and Testing for Contactors.

2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

a. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code (ANSI). b. IEEE Std 519 - Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems. c. IEEE Std 1100 - Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment (IEEE Emerald Book). d. IEEE Std 1159 - Monitoring Electric Power Quality. e. IEEE C62.41 - Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits (ANSI).

3. U.S. Department of Defense (DOD):

a. MIL-STD-461 - Control of Electromagnetic Interference Characteristics of Subsystems and Equipment.

b. MIL-STD-704 - Aircraft Electric Power Characteristics. c. MIL-PRF-24021K - Electric Power Monitors, External Aircraft.

4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

a. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. NEMA ST 20 - Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications.

5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 6. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

a. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures Ninth Edition.

b. UL 506 - Specialty Transformers Twelfth Edition. c. UL 1012 - Safety Power Units Other Than Class 2 Sixth Edition. d. UL 1449 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors Second Edition.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. The City of Fayetteville, North Carolina shall be the Owner and contracting entity for this project. B. The Owner shall appoint a Project Manager (Owner PM) as the Owner representative for this

Project. All project correspondence, submittals, RFI’s, questions, etc. shall be directed to the Owner PM. The Owner shall notify the Contractor of the Owner PM’s contact information when the contract is awarded.

C. The term “Day” or “Days” shall refer to work days not calendar days.

D. The terms "400Hz Ground Power Unit”, or “GPU” and specified components of these, whether

referred to in singular or plural form, apply to each unit provided for this Project. E. PBB Tunnels "A," "B," and "C", if referred to, are referred to in the order from closest to the



terminal to closest to the aircraft. E. The terms "right" and "left" refer to directions looking down the PBB tunnels toward the aircraft.

F. The term “Contractor” shall refer jointly to the General Contractor who is awarded the contract

and the GPU manufacturer who designs, manufactures and installs the new GPU.

G. The term “Manufacturer” shall mean the GPU and / or GPU accessory manufacturer(s).

H. Any Specification language that is lined through shall not be considered requirements for this Project.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings, Samples and Required Documentation (Submittals) shall be supplied in accordance with the requirements of this Specification and DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

1. All Shop Drawings, Samples and Required Documentation submitted in English language

and in Inch-Pound units, including dimensions, volumes, weights, and forces.

2. The Owner’s review, comment, approval or rejection of the Contractor’s Submittals shall not be considered a prerequisite for the Contractor to undertake the design, procurement of materials and manufacturing of the GPU and accessories. a. If the Contractor is required to undertake the design, procurement of materials and

manufacturing of the GPU and accessories prior to the Owner’s review and approval of the Contractor’s submittals, the Contractor shall undertake these activities at its own risk and shall modify the design, material procurement and manufacturing based on the Owner’s review, comment, approval or rejection of the Contractor’s Submittals.

b. Any such modification shall be at the cost of the Contractor and shall not impact the Project schedule.

B. Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, test reports, certifications, cut

sheets, calculations and other data or information which are specifically prepared and submitted by the Contractor to demonstrate that the Contractor will provide a GPU and accessories which meets the requirements of the Project Specifications and Drawings. 1. Shop Drawing submittals shall show sufficient detail to indicate conformance to the

requirements of the Project Specifications and Drawings. 2. Shop Drawing submittals shall be organized in a manor so that compliance to Project

Specifications and Drawings can be easily determined by the Owner.

3. Before submitting each Shop Drawing package, the Contractor shall have determined and verified that the Shop Drawing submittal does in fact demonstrate compliance to the Project Specifications and Drawings.



a. Shop Drawing packages that contain information that is not in compliance with the Project Specifications and Drawings will be rejected and will require re-submittal.

4. Manufacturer's assembly or fabrication drawings that do not provide information needed to

determine compliance with requirements of the Project Specifications and Drawings are not acceptable and shall not be submitted.

C. Samples - Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of

some portion or all of the GPU or its components and accessories and which establish the standards by which certain portions of the GPU, its components, accessories or installation will be judged.

D. Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings, Samples and Required Other Documentation for Owner’s review and approval in accordance with the schedule required in approved Progress Schedule and APPENDIX I – SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE. 1. All submittals will be identified as required and furnished in the number of copies specified

in the Contract Documents. 2. The data shown on the Shop Drawings and Required Documentation will be complete with

respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show Owner the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide.

E. Shop Drawings and Samples shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. An index prepared in sequential order listing all drawings, sketches, details, and material

submitted. 2. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical product data, including specifications. Include data

substantiating that materials comply with requirements. 3. GPU Unit Data: Manufacturer's technical product data, including but not limited to the

following: a. General arrangement of GPU and its components b. Electrical and electronic components c. Circuit board details and mounting details d. Details of controls on exterior and interior of unit. e. Error messages and method of display f. Transformers performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. g. Access doors and panels. h. Materials, gauges, and finishes. i. Filters j. Pendant Control k. Electrical / Controls schematics.



l. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.

m. Interface details / information to PBB HMI display n. Methods of field assembly, components, and locations and size of each field

connection. Detail mounting and securing to passenger boarding bridges, including brackets.

4. Accessory Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for:

a Output cable and cable head b Cable Hoist(s)

(1) General arrangement of cable hoist and components (2) Electrical / Controls schematics (3) Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power, signal, and control systems and

differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.

(4) Bird screen protection (5) Anti-rewind feature (6) Cable and banana clips (7) Hinged access cover (8) Mounting details to PBB, including mounting location.

5. Provide drawings and procedures that will be provided to installation subcontractor the

required details and information for the removal, scrap or storage of GPU and ancillary equipment and the installation of the new or existing GPU and new ancillary equipment. a. Drawings and procedures shall provide sufficient detail so that the installation

subcontractor can successfully complete the removal, scrap or storage of the existing GPU and ancillary equipment and install the new or existing GPU and new ancillary equipment.

F. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for compliance to the requirements of the

Project Drawings and Specifications by the Owner’s approval of Shop or working drawings, product data, samples or similar submittals. Deviations from the requirements of the Project Drawings and Specifications shall not be approved unless:

1. the Contractor has specifically submitted a formal deviation or substitution request to the

Owner in writing, per the requirements of the Contract Documents. This DOES NOT include information in the submittal document or making notes on submittal documents that such deviation is included within the Contractor’s submittal, and;

2. the Owner has given written approval of each such deviation by specific written response to

the Contractor. G. If deviations from the Project Drawings and Specification requirements are included in approved

Shop Drawings or other submittals documents and they are NOT identified and approved per paragraph F above, these deviations shall NOT be considered approved



H. Certifications 1. The GPU shall be certified by an NRTL for compliance to Power Units Other than Class 2 –

UL1012, latest edition and General Use Power Supplies – CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 107.1.95, latest edition. Evidence of such certification from the NRTL (e.g. the Authorization to Mark) must be supplied with the Contractor’s Proposal OR prior to Contract award.

2. Components shall be certified by an NRTL for compliance with UL 1012 and CSA C22.2.107.1-M91. Evidence of this compliance shall be submitted to the Owner PM for review and approval.

3. Independent 3rd Party Labeling from an NRTL, such as UL or ETL, shall be affixed to the

name plate of the GPU prior to shipment, either by permission or by inspection of the Independent 3rd Party NRTL. This labeling shall indicate compliance to the requirements of Power Units Other than Class 2 –UL1012, latest edition and General Use Power Supplies – CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 107.1.95, latest edition.

I. Contractor shall supply documentation of coordination with the PBB manufacturer indicating

coordination efforts, including mounting requirements, loads, power, communication, control, interlock, precool control, and condensate coordination.

J. Spare Parts: In addition to the manufacturer’s complete illustrated parts manual, the Contractor

shall supply a list of the GPU manufacturer’s recommended stocking levels of critical repair parts to include the manufacturer’s item description, part number, assemblies per unit, the recommended on-hand stocking level, and a firm list price for a period of two (2) years from the date of Final Acceptance of the GPU by the Owner. 1. The total value of this recommended spare parts list shall be equal to the GPU Spare Parts

Allowance in the Bid Documents. K. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

a. Proposed format and content of the O&M manuals shall be submitted to the Owner for

review and approval thirty (30) days prior to shipment of the first GPU. b. Supply, upon delivery of the first GPU unit, ten (10) copies of the GPU Operations and

Maintenance (O&M) Manuals for the GPU units.

c. O&M Manuals shall not be generic in nature and shall reflect the exact construction of the GPU units furnished.

d. Non-applicable items and drawings shall not be included in the manuals.

e. Manuals may have descriptive type photographs.

f. Pages shall have reinforced edges.



g. Manuals shall be compact in size and bound.

h. Manufacturer shall also provide three (3) CD-ROM copies of the O&M Manual. Each

section of this electronic O&M manual shall be directly accessible via an index provided with the electronic O&M manual.

8. O&M manuals shall contain the following information:

a. Description and operation of all systems and components. b. Electrical drawings specific for each unit furnished. Provide two sets of bound, laminated

electrical drawings for each unit, to be placed inside an access door to the unit controls. c. Copies of any component layout documentation that is provided in any cabinet doors of

the unit. d. Maintenance instructions including troubleshooting/diagnostics guidelines. e. GPU PLC Control Documentation f. Instructions for software access, programming upload and download and system

diagnostics. g. Overhaul instructions. h. List of parts and part numbers. i. Illustrated parts list of all components. j. Recommended spare parts list and sources. k. Complete and detailed Preventive Maintenance Program for each type of GPU furnished

under this Contract.

L. Quality Assurance, Inspections, Testing and Commissioning – See APPENDIX I – SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE.

M. Training: See APPENDIX I – SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE.

N. Other Documentation: See APPENDIX I – SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE.

O. As Built Drawings: The Contractor shall supply the Owner with an As Built set of Shop

Drawings within thirty (30) days of Final Acceptance by the Owner of the work at the first gate. 1. Quantity and submittal of the As Built drawings shall be per the requirements of the Contract

Documents.

P. Project Schedule: Contractor shall develop and submit a Project Schedule, per the Contract Requirements, within thirty (30) days of the NTP. 1. Project Schedule shall include, but is not limited to the following:

a. Complete list and schedule for of all required submittal documentation b. Contract Review activities c. Design and Engineering activities d. Material Procurement activities e. Manufacturing activities



f. Shipment activities g. Installation activities h. Quality Assurance activities, included all inspection and hold points, factory inspections

and testing, onsite inspections and testing, substantial completion and final acceptance. i. Training activities

2. Schedule should be on a gate by gate basis 3. Schedule should include activities for GPU design, manufacturing, factory testing,

installation and field testing and commission. 4. Schedule should include a one (1) week for tenant Airline “familiarization period” Airline

employees to become familiar with the equipment at each gate. This familiarization process will utilize aircraft to “test” all equipment.

5. Schedule shall be coordinated with PBB manufacturer and the overall Project schedule.

Q. Software and Laptop: Contractor will supply at Substantial Completion of the first gate, copies of

any and all software and the required interface cables so that the Authorities maintenance personnel can reload the GPU’s control software and make any necessary adjustments, as allowed by the manufacturer, to the GPU control software. 1. If any software licenses are required to use this software, the Contractor shall supply any and

all required licenses. 2. GPU manufacturer shall coordinated with the PBB Contractor, who is to supply one (1)

laptop computer for the Project with the latest Windows Operating System and all of the necessary software that would be required to access and use the GPU software.


A. GPU units shall be products of a single manufacturer.

B. GPU Unit Manufacturer's Qualifications: The GPU manufacturer shall be in the specific business to design and manufacture the specially constructed GPU required by this Specification. 1. The GPU manufacturer must have a minimum of ten (10) years’ experience in producing the

GPU design proposed. 2. The GPU design being proposed MUST have been in continuous use for a minimum of five

(5) years. 3. Specific design features included in this five (5) year requirement shall be the:

a. Method of power conversion - PWM



b. Modular / Card Rack - Control Board Design c. Unit Operator Controls and Displays

C. If a Hobart GPU is proposed and supplied, it shall be the Hobart ADV model. Other Hobart

models are not acceptable.

D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NFPA 70 and 79, for components and installation of GPU units.

E. Factory and On-Site functional testing shall be conducted as Specified in Section 4 of this Specification and in SECTION 347713 – PASSENGER BOARDING BRIDGES.

F. Certifications

1. The GPU shall be certified by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) for

compliance to Power Units Other than Class 2 –UL1012, latest edition and General Use Power Supplies – CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 107.1.95, latest edition.

2. The GPU shall also have an NRTL certification name plate affixed to the GPU.

3. Components shall be certified by an NRTL for compliance with UL 1012 and CSA C22.2.107.1-M91.

G. Prior to the Owner and their designated representatives scheduling the first Factory Inspection

visit, the GPU manufacture shall submit a Certificate of Compliance that the equipment supplied under this contract fully comply with the Contract Specifications and Drawings.

1. This Certificate of Compliance shall be signed by the GPU manufacturer’s Engineering

Manager, Quality Assurance Manager and General Manager.


A. Factory and Field Storage. 1. Store GPU units at the factory and on site during installation process, and protect equipment

and material against rust, debris, water and other damage, including the covering of all openings.

2. The Contractor shall have the flexibility to produce the GPU units to facilitate their

production schedule if the production schedule does not match the requirements for the GPU units to be in FAY for installation.

3. The on-site installation schedule shall be coordinated with the Owner PM.

a. The two (2) A gates should be able to be installed at the same time. b. Only one (1) of the B2 or B3 gates shall be taken out of service at any one time. c. Therefore, the Contractor shall make the necessary provisions to store the GPU’s and



accessories at the manufacturing location and deliver the GPU’s and accessories to meet the on-site installation schedule.

4. The Contractor shall coordinate all deliveries with the Owner PM so that the GPU units and

accessories are delivered to FAY to correspond to their scheduled installation. a. It is the objective of the delivery and installation process to NOT have any GPU units

stored on-site at FAY. B. Lift and support GPU’s with the manufacturer's designated lifting brackets or supporting points

on the units frame.

C. Deliver GPU’s as a factory-assembled unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.

D. Deliver and store the GPU accessories (e.g cable hoist, output cable, mounting brackets, PBB interface cables) to the jobsite in original unopened containers with labels informing about manufacturer, product name, and other pertinent information.

E. The shipment, unloading and checking of equipment shall be coordinated with the Owner PM. Under no circumstances will the equipment be released for shipment or delivered to jobsite without prior approval.

F. Examine all equipment and material delivered to the jobsite for concealed damage. The Contractor shall be responsible for loss or damage until equipment is off loaded at FAY. Report any damage to the Owner PM.

G. Protect all equipment and material so that it may be stored at job site prior to installation and start-up. Include the coverings of all openings, protection against rust and other damage.

1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Working Area: Coordinate location of GPU staging area, storage area and erection area with the Owner PM.

B. Coordinate with the Contractor performing the installation of the PBB, GPU units, PCAir

units and bag slides. C. Electrical power. Coordinate with the contractor performing the terminal building electrical

power upgrades and with the PBB manufacturer for power supplied on the PBB to the GPU mounted under the PBB cab.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Project Warranty: Provide special project warranty, signed by Contractor, PBB

Installation subcontractor and the GPU Manufacturer, agreeing to replace, repair, or restore



defective materials and workmanship of any product, materials or work provide pursuant to this Specification during a warranty period of 2 years from final acceptance of the Owner.

B. GPU Manufacturer shall also provide directly to the Owner, a 5-year warranty form the date of

final acceptance by the Owner, to replace defective: 1. GPU bus capacitors 2. Transformers

A. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have

against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.

D. "Defective" is defined to include, but not by way of limitation, operation or control system failures, performances below required minimums, excessive wear, unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes, unsafe conditions, the need for excessive maintenance, abnormal noise or vibration and similar unusual, unexpected and unsatisfactory conditions.

E. Warranty Claim Response Time: The manufacturer shall ship repair parts and send a qualified

service technician (if requested), to the Owner within 24 hours of being notified of an equipment failure while under warranty and parts shall be deliver at the applicable Owner facility within 48 hours from the time the order was placed by the Owner. If the manufacturer is unable to obtain the parts to restore the equipment to service, the Owner reserves the right to obtain the replacement parts or service elsewhere and charge the total cost to the manufacturer, including labor and administrative fees. The manufacturer shall pay all Customs fees, taxes and freight for warranty parts during the warranty period.

F. In the event of a significant, complex, or catastrophic failure of an integrated component of the

GPU and at the Owner’s request, the manufacturer will provide freight and logistics to ship a failed ground power unit back to the manufacturer for factory testing and repairs while the unit is still under warranty and to return the repaired and tested component back to the Owner for installation. Alternately, the GPU manufacture can opt to provide a qualified technician at FAY to trouble shoot and repair such significant, complex or catastrophic failure

1.8 MAINTENANCE

A. Additions to Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Include the following in the actual

GPU provided.

1. A "one-line diagram" from service entrance to 400 Hz utilization panel or point. 2. A weatherproof, tear resistant plastic data sheet with operating instructions for each unit

including startup and shutdown procedures.

1.9 SUPPLY OF RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS



A. The Owner shall determine which parts and the quantities of each part, the Contractor shall

supply from the Recommended Spare Parts List submitted per paragraph 1.4.J.

1. The Owner shall advise the Contractor of the selected GPU Spare parts and quantities, equal to the GPU Spare Parts Allowance, within sixty (60) days of the Owner’s approval of the GPU Manufacturer’s Recommended Spare Parts list.

2. The Contractor shall deliver these spare parts to the Owner no later than the Substantial

Completion date of the Scope of Work at the first gate.

SPECIFICATION CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

A. In this Specification, the term “or Owner approved equal” may be used to indicate that the

Contractor shall have the option of proposing an alternative to what has been specified. The Contractor’s alternative must be equal to or exceed the performance, functionality and safety requirements of the Specification.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements of this Specification, the Contractor shall make every

effort to supply materials that match the existing equipment in use at FAY so as to minimize the spare parts requirements for the Owner’s Maintenance group. In addition, the Owner has established a minimum standard of quality and reliability for certain parts and components that are routinely purchased to maintain the Owner’s equipment. The list below reflects this standard and is in support of the Owner’s spare parts objectives. The manufacturers on this list shall not be perceived or construed as favored or preferred. This list shall, in no way, preclude other manufacturers, provided that their equipment and components have been reviewed by the Owner’s PM and determined to be of equivalent or similar quality, functionality, and reliability. The Owner’s decision in this regard shall be final. The use of specific product manufacturers or models on previous Owner’s projects does not constitute pre-approval on this Project.

1. Ground Power Units:

a. JBT Aerotech Jetway. b. ITW GSE – Hobart – ADV unit only

2. GPU Output Cables a. J&B Aviation

3. Cable Hoist

a. JBT Aerotech Jetway. b. Ameribridge Services

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Where components are not otherwise indicated

1. Provide standard components published by manufacturer as included in standard pre-engineered Ground Power Unit and as required for a complete system.

2. All equipment and parts furnished shall be the manufacturer's latest listed and published stock

models, except as permitted or required by the Owner PM. 3. The equipment and parts shall meet all the applicable requirements of the specifications.



B. Material Specifications:

Component Applicable Standard

Structural Plate/Steel/Shapes ASTM-A36 or ASTM A572 Grade 50 Structural Tube ASTM-A500 Grade B Steel Pipe ASTM-A53 Grade b Steel Sheet ASTM-A570, ASTM A569 or ASTM A653 Steel Plate ASTM-A514, ASTM 517 Bolts-Standard ASTM A307 Bolts-High Strength ASTM A325, SAE-J429 Grade 5 or 8, or

ASTM A490

Electrical and Electronic Components NFPA 70, NFPA 79, UL listed 2.4 400Hz GROUND POWER UNIT (GPU)

A. Input Power 1. Input Voltage: The GPU shall operate with input voltages not varying more than plus 10% or

minus 15% of nominal voltage rating. 2. Input Frequency: The GPU shall operate on 50/60 Hz input power frequencies. 3. Input Current Requirements at Rated Load: The nominal input current at rated load shall be

480 Vac and a maximum of 125 amps. 4. Input Inrush Current: On start up the GPU shall withstand inrush current of up to 100% of

that input current required when the GPU is operating at rated load output. 5. Input Power Factor: The GPU shall operate with an input power factor to .95 or greater at

loads of 25% to 100% of the nominal rated load for the unit. 6. Input Phase Rotation: The GPU shall be input phase rotation independent, allowing the GPU

to be connected to the incoming power without regard for phase rotation. 7. Input Harmonic Distortion: shall be a maximum of 10% at full rated load and a maximum of

13% at 50% load. 8. Efficiency: The overall efficiency of the GPU shall not be less than 91% at 50% or greater

load. 9. Input Power Break: The GPU shall be capable of supplying uninterrupted power to the

aircraft during a micro break on the input power.



10. Input Circuit Breaker: The GPU will contain an internally mounted circuit breaker on the input power line(s) to allow the input power to be removed in the case of a fault or for maintenance.

11. Input Power Disconnect: A separate GPU circuit breaker shall be incorporated into the PBB

disconnect cabinet or shall be in a separate GPU disconnect mounted at the PBB rotunda. Power shall be supplied from this disconnect to the GPU via separate cabling integrated with the PBB cable conveyance system.

12. Unit Disconnect Breaker:

a. The GPU shall be equipped with either (1) a fixed mounted shunt trip breaker, or (2) a switch; that: (1) shuts off power to the output cables (2) shuts down the SCR’ (3) discharges lethal power from the DC Bus

i) going from 650 vdc to 50 vdc in ≤ 4 seconds and ii) totally discharged in 15 to 20 seconds.

(4) This breaker or switch shall also serve as a door or panel interlock which will activate when the main panel door is opened.

b. A bypass door interlock switch shall be provided to allow testing and repair of the unit with the doors opened.

B. Output Power – 400Hz AC

1. The GPU shall have a self-balancing feature for the output power. 2. Output Voltage: Shall be adjustable by plus or minus 10% of 115 Volts. 3. Output Voltage Drift: The output voltage shall not change by more than 1% of its originally

set value with the unit operating at a constant load, a change in ambient temperature up to 55 degrees C in an eight hour period or as the unit stabilized from a cold condition at any load.

4. Output Voltage Regulation: Voltage regulation shall not exceed ± 1% from no load to full

load and from rated load to no load with ± 10% input voltage. a. Output voltage shall recover to the steady state condition less than 50 ms after any load

change up to 100%. b. The voltage shall not exceed the limits of MIL-STD-704E during transient recovery.

5. Output Voltage Distortion (Total Harmonic Distortion): Total harmonic distortion on the

output voltage waveform shall not exceed 3% (line to line/line to neutral) with any rated load up to 100% load. a. Any single harmonic will not exceed 2%.

6. Output Voltage DC Content: The DC voltage at the output terminals will not exceed 0.1

volts under any rated load conditions. 7. Output Voltage Modulation: The modulation of the voltage waveform shall not exceed 0.5%



RMS, rated load conditions. 8. Output Voltage Balance: The maximum output voltage deviation of any of the three output

phases will not exceed 2% from the average of the three output phase voltages under balanced load conditions. a. Voltage unbalance shall not exceed 3 volts, with 10% unbalanced load on 1 phase and

shall meet MIL-STD-704E, figure 1 and ARP1940, 3.1.5.10. 9. Output Frequency Regulation: Shall be 400 Hz plus or minus 0.1% at any rated load

condition. 10. Output Frequency Modulation: Shall be less than ± 0.25% of the period of output voltage

wave. 11. Output Phase Displacement: The phase angle between each of the three output phases will be

120 degrees plus or minus 1.5 degrees under all rated, balanced load conditions. a. The phase angle displacement with an unbalanced load of 15% the unit’s rated current

shall be 120 degrees plus or minus 4 degrees. 12. Output Current: 90Kva (260 amps) at .8 power factor load continuous and simultaneous on

both output cables. 13. Bus Capacitors: Bus capacitors shall be either polypropylene or electrolytic. 14. No Break Power Transfer: The GPU must be capable of continuous operation during a

switch from the Aircraft APU to the GPU. 15. Line Drop Compensation: The GPU shall have a built-in automatic line drop compensation,

which shall be adjustable from 1% to 8% of rated voltage at rated load. 16. Power Factor: The GPU will be capable of operating with an output power factor of 0.0 to

1.0.

C. OUTPUT POWER – 28 VOLT DC 1. Output Voltage: The output voltage is rated at 28 Vdc. 2. Output Voltage Drift: With the GPU operating at a constant load, a change in ambient

temperature up to 55 degrees C in an eight hour period or as the unit stabilizes from a cold condition at any load, the output voltage shall not change by more than 1% of its originally set value.

3. Output Voltage Regulation: Output voltage shall recover to the steady state condition in

accordance with ISO Specification 6858.



4. Output Voltage Modulation: The modulation of the voltage waveform shall not exceed the limits set forth in ISO Specification 6858.

5. Output Current: a. 0 to 600 amps continuous b. Up to 2000 amps starting current

D. Overload

1. Overload Capacity: The GPU shall be capable of supplying overloads of up to 125% for 10

minutes, 150% for 3 seconds and 200% for 1 second. 2. Short Circuit Capability: The GPU shall withstand an output short and the short shall be

cleared by internal solid-state circuitry.

E. Fault Systems 1. The GPU will be capable of monitoring the following items and shutting down in the event

they are out of tolerance. The faults listed below will be displayed or indicated. a. Input power phase rotation b. Input voltage 10% higher than nominal rating c. Input voltage 15% less than nominal rating d. Output voltage less than 100 Vac per MIL-STD-704E e. Output voltage greater than 125 Vac per MIL-STD-704E f. Output overload g. No 28vdc returned on EF wires h. DC bus faults i. Over temperature of heat sink j. Output frequency fault

2. The GPU shall be capable of performing a “self-check” of the output power quality before

allowing power to be supplied to the aircraft.

F. Indicators 1. The GPU shall display operating information of the GPU using:

a. an LCD or b. LED or c. via downloading to the Owner’s laptop PC via an RS232 port.

(1) If the use of an RS232 port interface is required, the Contractor shall supply the necessary cables and software to connect to the laptop of the Owner’s maintenance contractor to the GPU, retrieve and display the required data.

d. Information displayed shall include, but not limited to: (1) Input voltage – each phase and average (2) Input current – 3 phase average (3) Output voltage – each phase and average (4) Output current – each phase and average



(5) Output Kva (total) or Vdc (total) (6) Output frequency (7) Event History. (8) Unit Settings

2. Front panel lights will indicate the following:

a. Fault occurred b. Input voltage applied to unit c. 28Vdc bypass switch in bypass position d. Output voltage present, unit is connected to aircraft and operating e. 28Vdc EF voltage missing

G. Switches And Controls

1. The GPU and Cable Hoist shall be controlled by a single Pendant Control mounted near the

wheel bogie of the PBB. a. The Pendant Control shall NOT be mounted on any part of the PBB that elevates or in a

location that which would pose a safety hazard to ramp personnel using the pendant control.

b. Pendant control for the GPU / Cable Hoist shall be mounted on a plate attached to the wheel bogie cross tube and the plate shall be painted per the same process and exterior color as the PBB.

2. All voltages in the Pendant Control shall be low voltage – 28 volts maximum. 3. The Pendant Control electrical construction and wiring shall comply with the requirements

paragraph 2.4.I.8 of this Specification. 4. Pendant control enclosures shall;

a. be SST b. be NEMA 3R or 4 rated c. have a SST cover with piano style SST hinge and be retained by SST latch(s) or SST

self-retaining screws. d. shall have a drain device for condensate

5. The Pendant Control shall have push buttons and indicators for the 400Hz GPU and Cable

Hoist functions. a. The push buttons and indicators shall be oriented from top to bottom in the pendant

control in the order listed below. (1) Up push button – for retracting the Cable Hoist (2) Down push button - for extending the Cable Hoist (3) Green LED indicating light, with clear lens, which indicates the unit is connected to

aircraft and operating. (4) Start push button – for starting the unit (5) Stop push button – for stopping / resetting the unit.

b. Each button on the Pendant control or indicator shall be labeled with an engraved, weather resistant placard identifying the button or indicator function.



6. The Pendant Control shall also have an engraved placard identifying it as the 400Hz GPU and

Cable Hoist pendant control. 7. The following controls and indicators shall be located on the outside of the GPU unit:

a. Start / Stop / Reset push buttons for 400Hz output. b. 400Hz operate light – green LED lamp with clear lens c. 28Vdc Bypass switch and flashing indicator light. d. Red Fault Light e. Error message displays f. LCD contrast, if LCD screen is supplied

8. The following controls and indicators shall be located on the inside of the GPU unit:

a. Line drop compensation adjustment b. Voltage adjustment ( ± 10%) c. Hour meter (99,999 hours)

H. External Interface

1. Connections between the GPU and the Pendant Control and GPU interlock shall be heavy

duty Quick Disconnect type. 2. Quick Disconnect fittings shall be UL or ETL approved.

a. Quick Disconnect receptacles and plugs shall be labeled with a permanent type label to indicate which receptacle goes with which plug.

3. Internally mounted terminal blocks shall be used for connecting the GPU output cable and

any control functions from the GPU output cable, pendant control or PBB interlock. a. All connection points shall be clearly labeled as to the function that will connect to them

from the GPU output cable, pendant control and PBB interlock. b. The terminal blocks for the GPU output cables shall be “stud” type.

4. Any “knockout” penetrations that are required in the case of the GPU for the input power

cable, output cable(s) or control cables shall be done in the factory, by the GPU manufacturer.

5. The GPU shall be mounted under the PBB Cab Bubble within 4” – 6” of the PBB Cab

Bubble floor. 6. The GPU shall have yellow and black safety tape applied to the bottom circumference of the

GPU. 7. The GPU shall provide information to the PBB HMI so that the PBB HMI can display status

and error messages that will include, but not limited to: a. A graphic representation of the GPU and its major components b. Status of inverters / IGBT’s c. Status of transformers



d. Status of cooling fans e. Input voltage f. Output voltage / amps g. Output frequency h. E&F bypass setting i. Any faults or error messages.

I. Physical Characteristics

1. Weight: The GPU shall weigh no more than 2,000 pounds 2. Cabinet Dimensions: The GPU shall be mountable either under the Cab of the PBB or on the

side of the PBB 3. Cabinet Material: The cabinet will be constructed from painted anodized aluminum. 4. Weather Rating: The GPU’s cabinet / enclosure shall be rated as NEMA 3R or IEC IP54. 5. Acoustical Noise: The GPU shall not emit more than 70 dBA at 1.5 meter height and 1.0

meter distant. 6. Temperature Rating: The GPU shall be capable of operating temperature of -40 to +50C.

J. Other Design Requirements

1. The GPU shall be sectional in design.

a. Transformer section shall be isolated and separate from the front and back sections of the unit.

b. There shall be a drain device for condensate in the front and back sections of the unit. 2. Vertical cooling towers or heat sink shall be utilized to cool sensitive internal electronic

components. 3. Cooling Fans shall cool the cooling tower or heat sinks.

a. Any fans that circulate air into the interior of the GPU must utilize input air that is filtered.

b. The filters shall be easily accessible and removable for cleaning. The filters shall be a washable mesh type.

4. Interior of the unit shall be sealed so that contaminates brought into the unit by cooling fans

will not enter the control sections of the unit. 5. The GPU shall be designed so that the all maintenance, including removal and installation of

all components can be accomplished without removing the GPU from the Passenger Boarding Bridge.

6. GPU shall be interlocked with the PBB to prevent horizontal movement of the PBB if the



GPU unit is powered on. 7. Control Boards.

a. All control boards must be mounted in a card rack OR a board specific location. b. All connection to the boards shall be accomplished by plug in connectors c. Each connector set must be labeled, along with all of its wire connections, to eliminate

misconnections. 8. Wiring and Terminal Blocks

a. Wires shall not be pulled tight in the GPU unit or subjected to chafing or damage by vibration of the GPU or by the operation of the PBB.

b. Wires shall not droop or sag in their routing. c. All wiring shall be brought to mounted terminal blocks.

(1) Wire splices or wire nuts of any type shall NOT be used. (2) Terminal blocks shall NOT be allowed to hang free in air. (3) In junction boxes where space does not allow for the use of terminal blocks, mounted

Wago type connectors are acceptable. d. Wiring in all enclosures and junction boxes shall comply with the NEC requirement in

Table 314.16 for the wiring fill capacity for the enclosure or junction box. e. Wiring shall be formed and restrained to give a neat appearance. f. All wires, including spares, within junction boxes, control cabinets, disconnects, other

electrical enclosures shall be neatly secured and routed. (1) Wire routing trays shall be used when space permits.

g. Grommets and suitable anti-chafe material shall be used where wires are required to pass through structure or similar relief or opening which exposes the wire to possible chafing.

h. All wiring shall be identified using stamped labels or other Owner approved wire labels. (1) Labels shall be visible and located within 1 in. of their termination point. (2) Wires are to be numbered in a logical sequence (3) All wire numbers are to be indicated on wiring diagrams.

i. Spare wires shall be numbered and also labeled as “SPARE”. j. Spare wires shall be indicated on the wiring diagrams. k. Wires must meet the bend radius requirements of NEC.

(1) Ninety degree bends shall not be allowed. l. Ferrules or insulated ring terminals shall be used on any fine stranded wire, depending on

the terminal block connection. (1) Fork or Spade terminals shall ONLY be allowed to make connections to purchased

components that have ring terminals and are assembled into the GPU. No other use of fork or spade terminals shall be allowed.

(2) Direct connection of fine stranded wire to a terminal block shall NOT be allowed. m. Terminal blocks shall be either:

(1) Finger proof or tamper proof design (2) Stud or open style design with a protective cover supplied by the terminal block

manufacturer. (3) Other terminal block designs shall not be accepted.

n. Terminal blocks must meet the applicable requirements of SAE J561, J858 and J928. o. Wire ties SHALL NOT be used to secure and support any wiring. p. NEC / UL approved clamps and methods must be used to secure and support wiring.



(1) Clamps used shall be specifically designed for the wiring being clamped (e.g. clamps for flat pack cable are not the same as clamps for SO cable).

q. Wire ties shall only be used to keep wires together for appearance and routing to various components.

9. The front and rear door of GPU shall be hinged to allow for maintenance and equipped with a

door interlock switch that trips the unit’s main shunt trip breaker when opened. a. The door interlock must be able to be by-passed for maintenance access to the unit.

10. The front and rear door of GPU shall be lockable to prevent unauthorized access into the unit.

There shall be two lockable latches on each door, on either side of the door. 11. The GPU shall be able to provide the required signal to the PBB and provide a suitable

connection for the interlock wiring. 12. Attached to the interior of the GPU’s front door shall be a:

a. laminated drawing which provides an elevation view of the front internal compartment of the GPU and identifies each component’s location, as well as the component description and manufacture’s part number.

b. wiring schematic showing the all wires by wire number and termination point for connections visible from the front of the unit.

13. Attached to the interior of the GPU’s rear door shall be a:

a. laminated drawing which provides an elevation view of the rear internal compartment of the GPU and identifies each component’s location, as well as the component description and manufacture’s part number.

b. wiring schematic showing the all wires by wire number and termination point for connections visible from the rear of the unit.

14. Drawings and schematics for #12 and #13 above shall be laminated or be printed on weather

proof material. 15. If the GPU’s front and / or rear doors are equipped with electrical controls or components, the

doors shall be equipped with grounding straps. a. Grounding straps used on the GPU shall be braided. b. Wire type straps shall not be allowed.

16. An unused holes or penetrations in the exterior of the GPU shall be plugged. If the holes are

threaded, SST bolts shall be used to plug the hole. 17. The GPU shall have an exterior paint system that provides superior corrosion protection.

a. Exterior casing surfaces, doors, and panels shall be primed and have a baked polyurethane enamel or powder finish coat.

b. Color shall match the color selected by the Owner for the PBB and PCAir. 18. Mounting brackets used to attach the GPU to the PBB shall be painted per the exterior paint

process specified in SECTION 347713 – PASSENGER BOARDING BRIDGES. The color



shall match the PBB color.

2.5 Output Cables

A. Contractor shall provide one (1) 400Hz output cable and (1) 28Vdc output cable, with connectors, of sufficient length to service the required Aircraft mix.

1. The Contractor shall be responsible to determine mounting location of the GPU on the PBB

and the length of the GPU Output Cables in order to service the required aircraft mix. 2. GPU output cable shall be supported at the entrance to the GPU by wire type strain reliefs 3. 90KVa 400Hz output cable shall be solid. 4. 28Vdc output cable can be banded or solid. 5. The 400Hz or 28Vdc cable head nose end shall be “detachable” for ease of maintenance and

replacement and shall be equipped with thermal overload protection. 6. The 400Hz or 28Vdc cable head shall have replaceable buttons the GPU On / Off and Cable

Hoist Up / Down. 7. The 400Hz or 28Vdc output cable wires shall be labeled on the unit connection end with the

phase and function of the wire. 2.6 CABLE HOISTS

A. Mechanical Design

1. Contractor shall supply one (1) PBB C Tunnel mounted cable hoist for the 400 Hz output cable and one (1) PBB C Tunnel mounted cable hoist for the 28Vdc output cable.

2. Cable hoist shall be interlocked with the PBB to prevent horizontal movement of the PBB if

the Cables Hoist is lowered. 3. GPU cable hoist mounting.

a. GPU cable hoist(s) shall be mounted on the PBB C tunnel, forward of the lift columns b. Cable hoist shall be mounted on the left side of the Cab bubble roof. c. If a 2nd cable hoist is required, it shall be mounted on the PBB C tunnel, forward of the

lift columns.

4. Three (3) “banana” clips shall be supplied with each cable hoist to stow the GPU output cable.

5. Cable hoist and mounting brackets shall be painted with the same exterior paint process and



color as the PBB. 6. Cable hoist shall have an aluminum perforated bottom cover that prevents birds from gaining

access to the interior of the hoist box. a. Perforated metal shall be 10 ga. with holes less than 0.50 in. b. Long sides of cover shall be bent up 90° so cover can be retained inside the hoist box by

perimeter screws. 7. Cable hoist shall be equipped with anti-rewind switch.

8. Cable hoist access cover on top of the unit shall meet the following requirements.

a. The access cover shall be permanently attached with by stainless steel hinges b. Stainless steel self-retaining fasteners or stainless steel latches shall be used to secure the

cover. c. Any rev-nut or nut-cert used shall be stainless steel. d. Cover shall be painted per the approved PBB exterior paint process and be painted the

same color as the PBB exterior. B. Electrical Design and Construction

1. All control voltages in the cable hoist shall be low voltage - 28 volts maximum.

2. The Cable Hoist electrical construction and wiring shall comply with the requirements paragraph 2.4.I.8 of this Specification.

3. Quick Disconnect fittings shall be UL or ETL approved.

a. Quick Disconnect receptacles and plugs shall be labeled with a permanent type label to indicate which receptacle goes with which plug.

4. The Cable Hoist shall be UL listed or otherwise certified by the 3rd party Nationally

Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL), such as ETL, for compliance to the applicable UL codes. a. A name plate with the UL listing or other listing shall be affixed to the unit.




PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SITE EXAMINATION

A. The Contractor shall coordinate with and provide assistance as needed to the PBB Manufacturer in the performance of the Site Examination requirements specified in PART 3 – EXECUTION of Specification 347713 – PASSENGER BOARDING BRIDGES.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. GPU shall be mounted underneath the PBB cab, as far forward and as close as possible to the

floor of the PBB cab.

1. Connections from the GPU to the GPU pendant control and PBB interlock circuits shall be run through rigid conduit tor aluminum or SST cable trays to the entry points of the PBB console or PBB cable scissor at the wheel bogie.

B. The GPU manufacturer shall supply the necessary drawings, instructions, manuals and all

materials, accessories, components, etc., required to fully assemble, commission and test the GPU and accessories.

C. All such materials shall be packaged as an Installation “Kit” with clearly labeled and indexed

containers and materials within containers. These Installation Kits shall be packaged and protected so that they may be stored in an exterior uncovered environment for several months.

D. The GPU manufacturer shall provide qualified manufacturer's technical representative / service

personnel during the GPU installation, testing and commissioning process AT EACH GATE to assure a proper installation, and to provide adequate and reliable field service support to correct any and all equipment failures that may occur during the commissioning and testing and during the initial operating period. This representation shall be available at GPU for the first 15 days after the first GPU is installed and accepted by the Owner. The manufacturer's field service representative shall monitor and ensure that the approved PBB Installation Subcontractor follows:

1. The manufacturer's field installation manual.

2. Compliance with all safety requirements.

3. Accurate and complete reports and records maintenance 4. Applicable requirements of the Project Specifications and Drawings

E. Refer to SECTION 347713 – PASSENGER BOARDING BRIDGES for additional installation

information, requirements and specifications.



3.3 TRAINING

A. Contractor shall provide Operations and Maintenance classes for the GPU’s supplied on this Project.

1. The training shall be specific to the GPU’s supplied to FAY. A “standard” training class is

not acceptable.

2. Training shall utilize prepared texts, power point presentations and other instructional aids as appropriate. Contractor shall supply whatever equipment is required to present training materials.

3. The Contractor shall conduct two (2) Operations Training Classes during each group to

facilitate the scheduling of Owner and Tenant Airline personnel. a. Operations training classes shall be a minimum of 4 hours and shall consist of both class

room and hands on training. b. Operator training shall include, at a minimum, the proper demonstration as well as actual

use of correct GPU operations to avoid damaging the equipment or aircraft or personal injury, by improper use of the GPU and its controls.

c. The anticipated class size shall be 10. 5. The Contractor shall conduct two (2) Maintenance Training Classes during each group to

facilitate the scheduling of Owner and Owner maintenance contractor personnel. a. Maintenance training classes shall be a minimum of 8 hours and shall consist of both

class room and hands on training. b. Maintenance training shall include, at a minimum:

(1) proper demonstration of cut-away models of critical parts, full instruction of proper maintenance and troubleshooting, and instructions on proper use of manuals.

(2) Instruction in proper use, operation, and daily maintenance of the GPU. (3) Emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed at

time of failure in operation and other building emergencies. (4) Normal procedures to be followed in checking for sources of operational failures or

malfunctions. (5) Use of the hardware / software tools required to upload and download control

programs, trouble shoot the GPU control software, perform equipment diagnostics and review data flow.

(6) Requirements for a complete GPU PM Maintenance program, including monthly, quarterly, semiannual and annual checks.

(7) Warranty, technical support and parts ordering procedures. c. The anticipated class size shall be 5.

6. The Contractor shall video tape one complete Operations training session and one complete Maintenance training session and provide these recordings to the Owner.

7. Training dates and times shall be coordinated with the Owner PM.



8. The Owner, Owner’s Maintenance Contractor and tenant Airline shall assign their respective

employees to be trained. 9. Contractor shall submit a Training Syllabus for all training classes to be conducted at FAY

within sixty (60) days of the Notice to Proceed. Format and content of Contractor’s proposed Training classes shall be subject to approval of the Owner.

10. The Contractor’s GPU operator and maintenance training classes shall be conducted

concurrent with the PBB and PCAir training classes. 11. The Contractor’s GPU training program must meet the requirements of this Specification and

be done within the allowance for the GPU, PCAir and PBB operator and maintenance training classes, as stated in the Project Bid Documents.




PART 4 - CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS 4.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The Contractor shall comply with, and perform all of the quality control, inspections, factory

testing and on-site testing requirements as specified in PART 4 – CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS in Specification 347713 – PASSENGER BOARDING BRIDGES.

4.2 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE

A. The following shall replace the requirements of Specification 347713 – 4.6 FACTORY

ACCEPTANCE TESTING

B. Factory testing shall meet the following requirements.

1. The Contractor shall develop a comprehensive Factory Test Plan, identifying the specifics of the tests to be carried out, and the acceptance criteria of such test, to ensure the GPU’s comply with the requirements of the Specification and Contract Documents.

2. The Factory Test Plan shall be submitted to the Owner PM 60 days prior to the factory tests

being conducted.

3. Routine Factory Tests: Test every GPU to assure compliance with the specifications as follows: a. Load Bank Test: Test for one hour at 50% kW and one hour at approximately 100% kW

capacity. Monitor voltage, frequency, and current at 15-minute intervals during testing. b. Efficiency Test: Test efficiency for 25, 50, 75, 90 and 100% loading. c. Burn-in test: Before delivery, operate each GPU for a minimum of 16 hours.

4. Special Factory Test: Test one 90kVA GPU to assure compliance with the specifications as

follows: a. Harmonic Distortion: Provide test results of input harmonic currents and voltages. The

test data shall include total harmonic distortion and amplitudes of individual harmonics in graphic representation for no load, 25, 50, 75, and 100% load factors.

b. No Load Losses: Operate at no load and nominal input voltage. Measure and record input voltage, output voltage, and output frequency.

c. Voltage balance (output) and (input). d. Transient voltage dip and response at 0.8 pf (output). e. Frequency regulation (output). f. Overload. g. Line drop compensation circuit. h. Input current harmonics.

5. The results of the Factory Testing shall be supplied to the Owner PM prior to shipment. The

Owner will NOT approve shipment of the GPU’s without the Owner PM’s review and approval of the Factory Test Results



APPENDIX I – SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES

Description Due Date Index of Shop Drawings, Samples and Required Documentation that will be submitted by Contractor

Per Contractor’s Submittal Schedule

Product Data / Cut Sheets Per Contractor’s Submittal Schedule

GPU Unit Design Drawings and Data Per Contractor’s Submittal Schedule

Accessory Product Data Per Contractor’s Submittal Schedule

Installation Drawings and Information Per Contractor’s Submittal Schedule

As Built Drawings 30 Days from Final Acceptance of first Gate

Software, as required by Specifications Substantial Completion of First Gate

REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Description Due Date Certification by Third Party agency or NRTL to UL1012, latest edition and CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 107.1.95, latest edition. Evidence of such certification from the NRTL (e.g. the Authorization to Mark).

With Contractor Proposal or prior to Contract Award.

Documentation of GPU components certified to UL-1012 and CSA C22.2.107.1-M91.

Per Contractor’s Submittal Schedule

Certificate of Compliance – Signed by QA, Engineering and General Managers

Prior to First Factory Inspection

Documentation of coordination with PBB manufacturer Per Contractor’s Submittal Schedule

Recommended Spare Parts List w/ Pricing With Shop Drawing Submittal

Project Progress Schedule 30 Days from NTP Written notification of Start of Fabrication for 1st unit 30 Days prior to start of

Fabrication Written Notification of completion of assembly and readiness for factory inspection and testing – each unit.

15 Days prior to completion of assembly.

Training plan and class syllabus for all training

60 Days from NTP

Proposed content and format of O&M Manuals 60 Days from NTP Final O&M Manuals With shipment of



Equipment for 1st Gate Special GPU Warranty Document Final Acceptance of 1st

Gate QUALITY ASSURANCE / TESTING

Description Due Date Quality Plan, specific to the Project and including at a minimum, the following

Review, Inspection, Hold and Witness points, with acceptance criterial, that will be performed during the contract review, design, manufacturing, factory testing, installation and field testing / commission.

Scope of inspections and tests to be performed, with acceptance criteria

Test plans, procedures, methods, techniques for Factory Acceptance Testing.

Test plans, procedures, methods, techniques for Onsite Functional Testing and Commissioning

60 Days from NTP

Contractor’s Factory Test results and records – Each piece of equipment Prior to Shipment of each piece of equipment

Contractor’s On-Site Functional Test Results and Records – Gate by Gate With Final Acceptance of a Gate

INSTALLATION See Specification 347713 – PASSENGER BOARDING BRIDGES for submittal requirements for the installation of the GPU’s. MAINTENANCE AND SPARE PARTS

Description Due Date Owner selected spare parts At Substantial

Completion of 1st gate.


Fayetteville Regional Airport – Airline Terminal Improvements – Part 1 Owner: City of Fayetteville Fayetteville, North Carolina AP#1515 Gordon Johnson Architecture July 18, 2016

TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - 1

SECTION 263600 - TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:

1. Automatic transfer switches. 2. Bypass/isolation switches.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each switch specified.

1. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, bypass/isolation switch, power sources, and load; and show interlocking provisions for each combined transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for transfer switches and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Show both power and control wiring.

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transfer switches accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:







D. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. 2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instructions,

including software, where applicable.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of notification.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switches and bypass/isolation through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.


F. Comply with NFPA 110.

G. Listed as compliant with UL 1008; comply with UL 1008 requirements unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.


A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than fourteen (14) days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Architect's written permission.



1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Contactor Transfer Switches:

a. Caterpillar; Engine Div. b. Emerson; ASCO Power Technologies, LP. c. Generac Power Systems, Inc. d. GE Zenith Controls. e. Kohler Power Systems; Generator Division. f. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group. g. Russelectric, Inc. h. Spectrum Detroit Diesel.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008.

1. Where transfer switch includes internal fault-current protection, rating of switch and trip unit combination shall exceed indicated fault-current value at installation location.

C. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.

D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41. Components shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.

E. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric-motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions.



F. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated current between active power sources.

1. Limitation: Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers or insulated-case circuit-breaker components are not acceptable.

2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions. 3. Contacts: Silver plated copper. Conventional automatic transfer-switch units, rated

225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing contacts.

G. Neutral Switching. Where four-pole switches are indicated, provide neutral pole switched simultaneously with phase poles.

H. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Heater: Equip switches exposed to outdoor temperatures and humidity, and other units indicated, with an internal heater. Provide thermostat within enclosure to control heater.

J. Annunciation, Control, and Programming Interface Components: Devices at transfer switches for communicating with remote programming devices, annunciators, or annunciator and control panels shall have communication capability matched with remote device or available devices for future capabilities.

K. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings, either by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations. Color-coding and wire and cable tape markers are specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring indicated.

2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.

3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.

L. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508, unless otherwise indicated.

M. All feeders lugs, relays, timers, control wiring and accessories shall be front accessible.

N. All transfer switch coils, springs, and control elements shall be easily inspectable and conveniently removable from the front of the transfer switch without major disassembly or disconnection of power conductors.

O. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a non-fused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric-motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions.

P. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit equal to Square D PM650 suitable for three-or four-wire systems and with the following features:



1. Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with maximum accuracy tolerances as indicated:

a. Phase Current: A, B, C, N b. Volts, Line to Line: A-C, C-B, C-A c. Volts, Line to Neutral: A-N, B-N, C-N d. Real Power (kW): A, B, C, Total e. Reactive Power (kVar): A, B, C, Total f. Apparent Power (kVA): A, B, C, Total g. Power Factor (True): A, B, C, Toal h. Frequency i. Real Energy (kWh): Three Phase Total j. Reactive Energy (kVARh): Three Phase Total k. Apparent Energy (KVah): Three Phase Total l. Energy Accumulation Modes: Signed, Absolute, Energy In, Energy Out m. KYZ Output n. Communications o. Front Display p. THD, Voltage & Current: A, B, C q. Current Demand: A, B, C, Present & Past r. Power Demand (kWd, kVARd, kVAd): Three Phase Total, Present & Past s. Date/Time Sampling: Peak Demands, Power Up/Restart, Resets t. Predicted Power Demand: kW, kVAR, kVA u. Advance Demand Options: Synch to Communications, Sliding Block Calculation v. Onboard alarms: Over/Under Conditions. Phase Unbalance Conditions w. Min/Max Readings: Frequency, Current, Voltage, Power, Power Factor, THD x. Data and Event Logs y. Downloadable Firmware z. Revenue Accuracy, ANSI: C12.16 aa. Accuracy (of reading): Power/Energy – 5%, Current/Voltage – 2.5% bb. Harmonic Response (Based on Sample Rate): 31 cc. UL Listed

2. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semi-flush mounted in instrument compartment door.

2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.

B. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, with time adjustable intermediate switching position where load is disconnected from both power sources during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Manual Switch Operation: Under load, with door closed and with either or both sources energized. Transfer time is same as for electrical operation. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation.



D. Manual Switch Operation: Unloaded. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation.

E. Digital Communication Interface: To provide the capability to add remote annunciation or remote annunciation and control in the future.

F. Transfer Switch Control System:

1. The control module shall direct the operation of the transfer switch. The module’s sensing and logic shall be microprocessor-based. The control settings shall be stored in non-volatile memory.

2. The control module shall have a three-position, key-operated, programming control switch. The key shall be removable in any position. The positions shall be:

a. Off – Allows all enabled accessories to be monitored only. Settings cannot be changed while in this position.

b. Local – Allows all enabled accessory settings to be changed locally at the transfer switch control panel.

c. Remote – Allows all enabled accessories to be altered via the remote communications port.

G. Automatic Transfer-Switch Features:

1. Under-voltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase-to-ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.

2. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delay transfer and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second.

3. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 95 percent.

4. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and factory set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.

5. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure. 6. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected. 7. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and

emergency-source sensing circuits.

a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source Available."

b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency Source Available."

8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two sets of timed normally open/normally closed (Form C), single-pole, double-throw contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.



9. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic transfer switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot light indicates override status.

10. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum.

11. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to thirty minutes, and factory set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.

12. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable-time switch starts engine generator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers and shuts down engine after a preset cool-down period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running periods are adjustable from 10 to 30 minutes. Factory settings are for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and 5-minute cool-down period. Exerciser features include the following:

a. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise with and without load transfer.

b. Push-button programming control with digital LCD display of settings. c. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is not

available.

13. Anti single phasing protection shall detect regenerative voltage as failed source condition. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes; factory set for 5 minutes. Provides automatic defeat of delay on loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored. If emergency power source should fail during the time delay period, the time delay shall be by passed and the switch shall return, immediately, to the normal source.

14. Signal-Before-Transfer Contacts: A set of Form C dry contacts operates in advance of retransfer to normal source.

a. Interval is adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds, set from the factory at 1 second.

15. Auxiliary Contacts: Two sets of timed Form C, dry contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac for elevator pre-transfer signal.

2.4 BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCHES

A. Comply with requirements for Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.

B. Description: Manual type, arranged to select and connect either source of power directly to load, isolating transfer switch from load and from both power sources. Include the following features for each combined automatic transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch:

1. Means to lock bypass/isolation switch in the position that isolates transfer switch with an arrangement that permits complete electrical testing of transfer switch while isolated. While isolated, interlocks prevent transfer-switch operation, except for testing or maintenance.



2. Drawout Arrangement for Transfer Switch: Provide physical separation from live parts and accessibility for testing and maintenance operations.

3. Bypass/Isolation Switch Current, Voltage, Closing, and Short-Circuit Withstand Ratings: Equal to or greater than those of associated automatic transfer switch, and with same phase arrangement and number of poles.

4. Contact temperatures of bypass/isolation switches shall not exceed those of automatic transfer-switch contacts when they are carrying rated load.

5. Operability: Constructed so load bypass and transfer-switch isolation can be performed by 1 person in no more than 2 operations in 15 seconds or less.

6. Legend: Manufacturer's standard legend for control labels and instruction signs shall describe operating instructions.

7. Maintainability: Fabricate to allow convenient removal of major components from front without removing other parts or main power conductors.

C. Interconnection of Bypass/Isolation Switches with Automatic Transfer Switches: Factory-installed copper bus bars; plated at connection points and braced for the indicated available short-circuit current.


A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Four-Pole Switches: Four-pole switches are required, install neutral switching.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements and according to seismic-restraint details. See Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting.

1. Concrete Bases: 4 inches high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no more than 4 inches in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switch, unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic support. Construct concrete bases according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

C. Annunciator and Control Panel Mounting: Flush in wall, unless otherwise indicated.



D. Identify components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

E. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.

F. When load shed circuits are specified the Automatic Transfer Switches shall be arranged to be switched to the neutral (no load) position unless otherwise shown on the drawings:

1. Emergency (Life Safety) Standby Systems as defined by the National Electrical Code shall be the highest priority and shall be first to be connected to the emergency power source. This transfer switch shall not be load shed.

2. Optional Standby Systems as defined by the National Electrical Code shall be the lowest priority and shall be the last load to be connected to the emergency power source and the first to be load shed during a generator overload condition.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in testing.

2. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.


4. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.



a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of

barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation.

5. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available.

b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c. Verify time-delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control

settings. e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch

operations. f. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding

500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles.

g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown.

6. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power delivery from both sources.

a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors. b. Assist in verifying grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors. c. Assist in observing reaction of circuit-interrupting devices when simulated fault

current is applied at sensors.

C. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.

D. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

F. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switch. Remove all access panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each switch 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.



3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.



SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR LOW-VOLTAGE 264313 - 1 ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS

SECTION 264313 - SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes field-mounted SPD for low-voltage (120 to 600 V) power distribution and control equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.

B. VPR: Voltage Protective rating.

C. SPD: Surge Protective Device(s), both singular and plural; also, transient voltage surge suppression.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating weights, electrical characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.


A. Product Certificates: For SPD devices, from manufacturer.

B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For SPD devices to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS


1. Replaceable Protection Modules: One of each size and type installed.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with IEEE C62.41.2 and test devices according to IEEE C62.45.

C. Listed to UL 1283 and UL 1449 3rd Edition by an OSHA approved NRTL.



A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than 14-days in advance of proposed electrical service interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written permission.

B. Service Conditions: Rate SPD devices for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage(MCOV): Not less than 115 percent of nominal system operating voltage. The MCOV shall be a tested value per UL1449 3rd Edition, section 37.7.3. MCOV values submitted based solely on the MCOV of the surge components used in the SPD will not be accepted.

2. Operating Temperature: 30 to 120 deg F. 3. Humidity: 0 to 95 percent, noncondensing. 4. Altitude: Less than 20,000 feet above sea level.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of field-mounted SPD devices to allow adequate clearances for maintenance.



1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of surge suppressors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Fifteen years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS

A. Service Entrance SPD shall be listed as a Type 1 SPD per UL1449 3rd Edition.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Current Technology Inc.; Thomas & Betts Power Solutions 2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 3. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson Network Power.

C. Surge Protection Devices:

1. Listed to UL 1449 3rd Edition by an OSHA approved NRTL. 2. Modular design (with field-replaceable module(s). 3. Individual, electrically isolated fusing per MOV, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. 4. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 5. Integral disconnect switch (make the integral disconnect an option). 6. Redundant suppression circuits. 7. Arrangement with copper bus bars and for bolted connections to phase buses, neutral bus,

and ground bus. 8. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. 9. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 10. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 11. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed,

for remote monitoring of protection status. Contacts shall reverse on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system.

D. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 300 kA per mode/600 kA per phase.

E. Minimum single impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20-mic.sec waveform described in IEEE C62.41.2

1. Line to Neutral: 70,000A. 2. Line to Ground: 70,000A. 3. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A.



F. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR, based on 6kV,3kA per UL1449 3rd Edition for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V or 208Y/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V, 700 V for 208Y/120 V. 2. Line to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V, 700 V for 208Y/120 V. 3. Neutral to Ground: 1500 V for 480Y/277 V, 1000 V for 208Y/120 V.

2.2 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS

A. Panelboard suppressors shall be Type1 or Type2 listed per UL1449 3rd Edition.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Current Technology Inc.; Thomas & Betts Power Solutions. 2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 3. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson Network Power.

C. Surge Protection Devices:

1. Comply with UL 1449 3rd Edition. 2. Modular design (with field-replaceable module(s). 3. Short-circuit current rating complying with UL 1449, and matching or exceeding the

panelboard short-circuit rating and redundant suppression circuits; with individually fused metal-oxide varistors.

4. Individual, electrically isolated fusing per MOV, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. 5. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 6. Integral disconnect switch. 7. Redundant suppression circuits. 8. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. 9. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 10. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 11. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed,

for remote monitoring of protection status. Contacts shall reverse on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system.

D. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 150 kA per mode/300 kA per phase.

E. Minimum single impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20-mic.sec waveform described in IEEE C62.41.2:

1. Line to Neutral: 70,000A. 2. Line to Ground: 70,000A. 3. Neutral to Ground: 50,000A.

F. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR, based on 6kV,3kA per UL1449 3rd Edition for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V or 208Y/120 V, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows:



1. Line to Neutral: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V, 700 V for 208Y/120 V. 2. Line to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V, 700 V for 208Y/120 V. 3. Neutral to Ground: 1500 V for 480Y/277 V, 1000 V for 208Y/120 V.

G. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for 240 V, 480 V, or 600 V, 3-phase, 3-wire, delta circuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Line: 1800 V for 480 V, 1200 V for 240 V. 2. Line to Ground: 1800 V for 480 V, 1200 V for 240 V.

2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. Indoor Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 1.

B. Outdoor Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 3R.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Install an OCPD or disconnect as required to comply with the UL listing of the SPD.

C. Install SPDs with conductors between suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight as possible, and adjust circuit-breaker positions to achieve shortest and straightest leads. Do not splice and extend SPD leads unless specifically permitted by manufacturer. Do not exceed manufacturer’s recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground.



1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written installation requirements.


1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. Testing shall include the integrity of the upstream Neutral-Ground bond, as well as a performance clamping voltage test of the installed SPD.

C. Tests and Inspections:



1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, "Surge Arresters, Low-Voltage Surge Protection Devices" Section. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. After installing SPD devices but before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

3. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. SPD device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment, panelboards, control terminals or data terminals to their sources until SPD devices are installed and connected.

B. Do not perform insulation resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with the SPD installed. Disconnect before conducting insulation resistance tests, and reconnect immediately after the testing is over.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to maintain SPD devices.



INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 1

SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior lighting fixtures, LED array boards and electronic drivers. 2. Emergency lighting units. 3. Exit signs. 4. Lighting fixture supports.


1. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.

2. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CRI: Color-rendering index.

B. CU: Coefficient of utilization.

C. HID: High-intensity discharge.

D. LED: Light Emitting Diode.

E. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including driver housing if provided.

F. RCR: Room cavity ratio.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Partial submittals are not acceptable. Submittals that are incomplete shall be cause for rejection for the entire submittal. For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units. 3. Lamp data shall include the following:

a. Average rated life @ 3 hours per start. b. Color temperature in Kelvin. c. Color Rendering Index. d. Approximate Lumens initial @250C. e. Nominal Wattage. f. Operating ambient temperature range.

4. Driver data for each different type used on the project. The submittal must include the following information:

a. Input power ratings (watts) for the driver and fixture (where multiple drivers are required) as submitted.

5. Energy-efficiency data. 6. Life, output, and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 7. Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests of each lighting fixture

type, outfitted with LEDs, drivers, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring.

C. The lighting design was based on the lighting fixture type and manufacturers as specified. Only those fixtures specified are approved for installation. If the Contractor elects to substitute an alternative fixture they shall submit in detail complete catalog information on the proposed substitution as well as the specified fixture and provide lighting calculations of areas affected by the proposed substitutions. The proposed substitution shall be in all details completely equal to or better than the specified fixture. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide, at no cost, a sample of each proposed substitution and each specified fixture for evaluation. In all cases, all requests for substitutions shall be completed not less than ten (10) days prior to bid date. Request received less than ten (10) days prior to bid will not be evaluated and will be returned “NOT ACCEPTABLE”.

D. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:



1. Lighting fixtures. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached. 4. Other items in finished ceiling including the following:

a. Air outlets and inlets. b. Speakers. c. Sprinklers. d. Smoke and fire detectors. e. Occupancy sensors. f. Photo electric sensors for daylighting control. g. Location of proposed access doors for non-accessible electrical equipment located

above non-accessible ceilings.

1) Junction boxes. 2) Lighting fixtures equipped with junction boxes that are non-accessible

through the bottom of the fixture.

5. Perimeter moldings.

E. Product Certificates: For each type of driver for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed by product manufacturer.

F. Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

G. Field quality-control test reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.




1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Drivers and LED Array Boards: Manufacturer's standard form in which drivers and LED array board manufacturer agrees to repair or replace drivers or LED array boards that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Drivers and LED Array Boards: Ten (10) years from date of Final Acceptance of the Work.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. LED Array Boards: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

3. Drivers: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

4. Globes and Guards: 1 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


B. On the Lighting Fixture Schedule located on the drawings or where titles within this specification section that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each lighting fixture is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified on the Lighting Fixture Schedule or as listed herein for LED array boards and electronic drivers.



2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. A UL listing shall be provided for each fixture type, and the appropriate label or labels shall be affixed to each fixture in a position concealing it from normal view. UL labels shall not be installed on reflectors. Fixtures shall be listed according to their exposure in respective environments, e.g. wet location, damp location, shower light, etc.

B. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit replacement of LED array boards or electronic drivers. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during maintenance and when secured in operating position.

F. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.

G. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless different thickness is indicated.

b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: Factory installed to suppress conducted electromagnetic-interference as required by MIL-STD-461E. Fabricate lighting fixtures with one filter on each electronic driver indicated to require a filter.

2.3 LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. See lighting fixture schedule drawing for lighting fixture specifications.

B. Miscellaneous

1. All fixtures shall be completely wired at the factory.



2. All fixtures shall be listed on the LED Lighting Facts website (www.lightingfacts.com), the Energy Star website (www.energystar.gov), or the Design Light Consortium website (www.designlights.org).

3. Light fixtures shall meet NEMA Standard 410-2011 for flicker. 4. Each recessed and semi-recessed fixture shall be finished with a mounting frame or ring

compatible with the ceiling in which they are to be installed. The frames and rings shall be one (1) piece or constructed with electrically welded butt joints, and of sufficient size and strength to sustain the weight of the fixture.

5. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make certain that all recessed fixtures have trims and mounting components compatible with the ceiling in which they are to be installed. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate the compatibility of the fixture to the ceiling.

6. The contractor shall use factory accessories for mounting and supporting the lighting fixtures in the ceilings.

a. Conduit sections installed and wired horizontally across ceiling grids and used for supporting lighting fixtures will not be accepted.

7. All materials, accessories, and other related fixture parts herein mentioned shall conform to the requirements of the drawings, specifications, and the agencies heretofore mentioned. They shall be new and free from defects which in any manner may impair their character, appearance, strength, durability and function, and shall be of prime quality intended for their respective purpose, and effectively protected from any damage or injury from the time of fabrication to the time of delivery and until final acceptance of the work. The above items shall meet with the approval of the Architect and Engineer who reserves the right of rejection prior to or after installation if found to be not in strict accordance with the true intent of the Contract.

8. All sheet metal work shall be free from tool marks and dents, and shall have accurate angles bent as sharp as compatible with the gauges of the required metal. All intersections and joints shall be formed true of adequate strength and structural rigidity to prevent any distortion after assembly. All sheet metal shall be void of light leaks. All edges shall be finished so there are no sharp edges exposed. All miters shall be in accurate alignment with abutting intersection members. Piecing of plates in individual runs on single plans, and the use of spliced pieces of filler materials to cover defective workmanship, will not be tolerated. Sheet metal work shall be properly fabricated in order that planes will not deform, that is, become concave or convex, due to normal expected ambient and operating conditions.

9. All lighting fixtures shall include a disconnecting means either internal or external to each luminaire to disconnect simultaneously from the supply source all conductors of the electronic driver, including the grounded conductor if any. The line side terminals of the disconnecting means shall be guarded. The disconnecting means shall be readily accessible and mounted either directly on the external housing or on the interior of the housing, so that no fixture parts, ceiling tiles or other building components are required be removed to access and operate the disconnect. The disconnect switch shall be in full compliance with the NEC 410.130 (G).

http://www.lightingfacts.com/

http://www.energystar.gov/

http://www.designlights.org/



2.4 ELECTRONIC LED DRIVERS

A. Characteristics:

1. Inrush Current: Meet NEMA 410-2011 standard for maximum inrush current. 2. Power Factor: 90% (minimum). 3. Total Harmonic Distortion: 10% (maximum). 4. Integral Surge Suppression: 2.5V (minimum).

2.5 EXIT SIGNS

A. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction and with fixture specified.

1. Emergency Exit Sign: It shall be completely self-contained. Fixture must be third-party listed as emergency lighting equipment, and meet or exceed the following standards; NEC, N.C. Building Code, North Carolina Energy Code, NFPA-101, and NEMA Standards. LED: The use of LED is required due to their reliable performance, low power consumption, and limited maintenance requirements. Maximum LED failure rate shall be 25% within a seven (7) year period; otherwise, if exceeded, manufacturer shall replace the complete unit at no charge to the owner.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.

2.6 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage.

F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.



H. Aircraft Cable Support: Use cable, anchorages, and intermediate supports recommended by fixture manufacturer.

2.7 REQUIREMENTS FOR INDIVIDUAL LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. See Lighting Fixture Schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture. Lamp and socket orientations for similar fixtures shall be identical within each individual space.

B. Support for Lighting Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Do not use grid as a support element.

1. Where a recessed or downlight fixture replaces a section or a part of a ceiling tile, the fixture is to be supported:

a. At the two (2) opposite ends to the steel frame of the building with the same type of wire as used to support the lay-in ceiling track. Attach one end of the wire to one corner of the luminaire and the other end to the building’s structural system.

b. The lay-in luminaire shall then be screwed to the main runners of the lay-in ceiling track at all four (4) corners using sheet metal screws.

c. For fire rated suspended ceiling, luminaire shall be supported to the Building Structure as per the Ceiling Design Criteria.

2. Light leaks between ceiling trims of recessed lighting equipment and the ceiling will not be tolerated. Locate not more than 6 inches from fixture corners.

3. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

4. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees with listed clips installed per manufacturer's instructions.

5. Install at least two independent support rods or wires from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.

C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. Pendant rods shall be all-thread, minimum of 3/8” diameter Galvanized carbon steel.

2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures:



a. Common and office areas with non-industrial type fixtures:

1) Suspend with single pendant or aircraft cable as indicated on the drawings. 2) Provide swivel plate/connection at top of stem for stem hangers.

b. Mechanical, Electrical Storage, Misc. rooms with industrial type fixtures:

1) Suspend with twin-stem hangers or provide steel strut attached along the length of the fixture and a single stem attached to the strut.

2) Provide swivel plate/connection at top of stem for stem hangers.

3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.

4. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary channels, support wires or rods, etc. to provide a structurally sound system.

D. Provide adjustments to lighting fixtures that are designed to be modified in the field for light intensity aiming purposes.

1. This shall be directed in the field by the engineer. The contractor shall notify the engineer in writing fourteen (14) days in advance to arrange a date and time for the adjustments.

2. Lighting fixtures installed exterior to the building and/or in interior areas with exterior glass shall be adjusted after sunset.

E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

F. Yokes, brackets and supplementary supporting members needed to mounting lighting fixtures to two (2) inch carrier channels or other suitable ceiling members shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.

3.2 ACCESS DOORS

A. Provide access doors for all electrical equipment that requires accessibility where installed concealed in non-accessible walls or ceilings.

1. Minimum size door shall be 8” x 8”. 2. Suitable for installation in wall or ceiling type as specified on the architectural drawings. 3. Where equipment is located more than 16” from the access door the door size must be

increase to a minimum of 24” x 24”. 4. Coordinate all access door locations with the architect and Owner prior to installing any

equipment in non-accessible walls and/or ceilings.



3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.


A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation.

C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

D. Corroded Fixtures: During warranty period, replace fixtures that show any signs of corrosion.

E. Reflectors, reflector cones and visible trim of all lighting fixtures shall not be installed until completion of plastering, ceiling tile work, painting and general cleanup. They shall be carefully handled to avoid scratching or fingerprinting and shall be, at the time of acceptance by the Owner, completely clean. All Alzak parabolic cones shall be guaranteed against discoloration for a minimum of two (2) years, and, in the event of premature discoloration, shall be replaced by the manufacturer, including both materials and the cost of labor.

F. Upon completion of the installation, all lighting fixtures shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

G. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.



EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 1

SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. 2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays. 3. Poles and accessories.


1. Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CRI: Color-rendering index.

B. HID: High-intensity discharge.

C. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

D. Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination.

E. Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above.

1.4 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION

A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.

B. Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf, distributed as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.

C. Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft., applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.



D. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire, calculated and applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.

1. Wind speed for calculating wind load for poles 50 feet or less in height is 110 mph.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area, and verification of indicated parameters.

2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories. 3. Details of installation and construction. 4. Luminaire materials. 5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with

indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories.

a. For indicated luminaires, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.

b. Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

6. Photoelectric relays. 7. Ballasts, including energy-efficiency data. 8. Lamps, including life, output, and energy-efficiency data. 9. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles. 10. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for

components involved. 11. Anchor bolts for poles. 12. Manufactured pole foundations.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer. 2. Design calculations, certified by a qualified professional engineer, indicating strength of

screw foundations and soil conditions on which they are based. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring.

C. Samples for Verification: For products designated for sample submission in Exterior Lighting Device Schedule. Each sample shall include lamps and ballasts.

D. Pole and Support Component Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of poles, certifying that products are designed for indicated load requirements in AASHTO LTS-4 and that load imposed by luminaire has been included in design.



E. Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.


G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and poles to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.


C. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."



A. Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B 660.

B. Store poles on decay-resistant-treated skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation. Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.

C. Handle wood poles so they will not be damaged. Do not use pointed tools that can indent pole surface more than 1/4 inch deep. Do not apply tools to section of pole to be installed below ground line.

D. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on fiberglass and laminated wood poles until right before pole installation. Handle poles with web fabric straps.

E. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain, perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty



period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage.

1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: Five years from date of Final Acceptance of the Work. 2. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: Five years from date of Final Acceptance of the

Work. 3. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Final Acceptance of the

Work. 4. Warranty Period for Lamps: Replace lamps and fuses that fail within 12 months from

date of Substantial Completion; furnish replacement lamps and fuses that fail within the second 12 months from date of Final Acceptance of the Work.

5. Warranty Period for Poles: Repair or replace lighting poles and standards that fail in finish, materials, and workmanship within manufacturer's standard warranty period, but not less than three years from date of Final Acceptance of the Work.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Lamps/LED Array Boards: Two (2) for every ten (10) of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least two (2) of each type.

2. Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: One (1) for every ten (10) of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least two (2) of each type.

3. Ballasts Driver Modules: Two (2) for every ten (10) of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

4. Globes and Guards: Five (5) for every ten (10) of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least five (5) of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


B. In Exterior Lighting Device Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.



2.2 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.

G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.

H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.

J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials.

M. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind



welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

N. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax.

3. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

4. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

a. Color: Dark bronze or Black as selected by the Architect.

2.3 LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS

A. Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A.

B. Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc and off at 4.5 to 10 fc with 15-second minimum time delay. Relay shall have directional lens in front of photocell to prevent artificial light sources from causing false turnoff.

1. Relay with locking-type receptacle shall comply with NEMA C136.10. 2. Adjustable window slide for adjusting on-off set points.

2.4 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS

A. Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open-circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F. 3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F.



4. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer.

B. Auxiliary, Instant-On, Quartz System: Factory-installed feature automatically switches quartz lamp on when fixture is initially energized and when momentary power outages occur. System automatically turns quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately 60 percent of light output.

2.5 HID LAMPS

A. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.

B. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 4000 K.

2.6 POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4.

1. Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure, permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in Part 1 "Structural Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article, with a gust factor of 1.3.

2. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be used in pole selection strength analysis.

B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components.

1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. 2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication, unless stainless-steel items are indicated. 3. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.

D. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

E. Power-Installed Screw Foundations: Factory fabricated by pole manufacturer, with structural steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M; and with top-plate and mounting bolts to match pole base flange and strength required to support pole, luminaire, and accessories.



2.7 STEEL POLES

A. Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000 psig; 1-piece construction up to 40 feet in height with access handhole in pole wall.

1. Shape: Round, tapered. 2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway

support.

B. Steel Mast Arms: Single-arm Truss or Davit (to match existing unless otherwise directed by Architect) type, continuously welded to pole attachment plate. Material and finish same as pole.

C. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, cantilever, without underbrace.

1. Adapter fitting welded to pole and bracket, then bolted together with stainless-steel bolts. 2. Cross Section: Tapered oval, with straight tubular end section to accommodate

luminaire. 3. Match pole material and finish.

D. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and securely fastened to pole top.

E. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole.

F. Cable Support Grip: Wire-mesh type with rotating attachment eye, sized for diameter of cable and rated for a minimum load equal to weight of supported cable times a 5.0 safety factor.

G. Factory-Painted Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

2. Interior Surfaces of Pole: One coat of bituminous paint, or otherwise treat for equal corrosion protection.

3. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.



2.8 POLE ACCESSORIES

A. Base Covers: Manufacturers' standard metal units, arranged to cover pole's mounting bolts and nuts. Finish same as pole.

2.9 REQUIREMENTS FOR INDIVIDUAL EXTERIOR LIGHTING DEVICES

A. See Lighting Fixture Schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION

A. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.

1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer.

C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources.

3.2 POLE INSTALLATION

A. Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their mounting provisions on the pole.

B. Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and underground features, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:

1. Fire Hydrants and Storm Drainage Piping: 60 inches. 2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet.

C. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in Section 033000 “Cast-in-Place Concrete”.

D. Poles and Pole Foundations Set in Concrete Paved Areas: Install poles with minimum of 6-inch- wide, unpaved gap between the pole or pole foundation and the edge of adjacent concrete slab. Fill unpaved ring with pea gravel to a level 1 inch below top of concrete slab.

E. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable).



3.3 BOLLARD LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION

A. Align units for optimum directional alignment of light distribution.

B. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at bollard location. Cast conduit into base, and shape base to match shape of bollard base. Finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF INDIVIDUAL GROUND-MOUNTING LUMINAIRES

A. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at luminaire location. Cast conduit into base, and finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.5 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.

B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

1. Install grounding electrode for each pole, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding

system.


A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source.

1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.



3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain luminaire lowering devices. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."



AP#1515 Vertex Technology Consultants, Inc. May 8, 2017

TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLINE OF WORK 270100-1

SECTION 27 01 00 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLINE OF WORK

PART 1 – GENERAL

SCOPE OF WORK:

The work included in Division 27 Communications includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following

items and systems:

1. New backbone cabling consisting of 12F OM3 multimode fiber as well as 25-pair copper cable from

the new main telecom room B130 in the existing Main Terminal to the existing telecom room.


the new main telecom room B130 in the existing Main Terminal to the existing airline telecom room.


the new main telecom room B130 in the New Concourse A telecom room. Copper cable to include

surge suppression with solid state protection modules at both ends.

4. New 42U cabinets, 19” relay racks, vertical wire management, ladder rack, wire management, patch

panels, and associated cable support components in main telecom room B130.

5. New 19” relay racks, vertical wire management, ladder rack, wire management, patch panels, and

associated cable support components in Concourse A telecom room H109.

6. New overhead support system and j-hooks installed to provide support for the horizontal cabling

system.

7. New Category 6 structured cabling system to provide connectivity from each outlet, access point, wall

phone, security camera and other connection points to support the new horizontal cabling system.

8. Copper cables to be terminated and tested according to the specifications.

9. Other work as described throughout the Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION 27 01 00




SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMM PATHWAYS 270544-1

SECTION 27 05 44 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS

AND CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL


Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves.

2. Sleeve-seal Systems.

3. Sleeve-seal Products.

4. Silicone Sealants.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-resistance-

rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends.

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with

plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet;

0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for

screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

C. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing

flange for attaching to wooden forms.

D. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:

1. Material: Galvanized-steel sheet.

2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and with no side

larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more and one or more sides

larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS





A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between

sleeve and pathway or cable.


2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on

Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Specified Technologies Inc. (STI)

b. Hilti Fire Stop Products

c. 3M Firestop Products

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL PRODUCTS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in

concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match

piping OD.


2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on

Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Specified Technologies Inc. (STI)

b. Hilti Fire Stop Products

c. 3M Firestop Products

2.4 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade

indicated below.

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that

are not fire rated.

2. Sealant shall have VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart

D (EPA Method 24).

B. Silicone Foams: Multi-component, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and

cure in place to produce a flexible, non-shrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED COMMUNICATION PENETRATIONS

A. Comply with NEMA and UL for cable tray and cable penetrations.

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size,

depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and

wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved

opening.





3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 3/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and pathway

or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.

4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install

sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. De-

burr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above

finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board

assemblies.

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pathway or cable

material and size. Position the pathway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and

install in annular space between pathway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that

cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls.

Position the waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.

END OF SECTION 2705 44




COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 271100 - 1

SECTION 27 11 00 - COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary


1.2 SUMMARY


1. Telecommunications mounting elements.

2. Backboards.

3. Telecommunications equipment racks and cabinets.

4. Telecommunications service entrance pathways.

5. Grounding.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 27 15 00 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for voice and data cabling

associated with system panels and devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

B. IDF: Intermediate Distribution Frame.

C. ITS: Information Transport System.

D. Ladder Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of two longitudinal side rails

connected by individual transverse members (rungs).

E. LAN: Local area network.

F. NRTL: The term "nationally recognized testing laboratory" (NRTL) means an organization

which is recognized by OSHA which tests for safety, and lists or labels or accepts, equipment or

materials.

G. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

H. RMU: Rack Mount Unit

I. Solid-Bottom or Non-ventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of a bottom

without ventilation openings within integral or separate longitudinal side rails.

J. Trough or Ventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of integral or separate





longitudinal rails and a bottom having openings sufficient for the passage of air and using 75

percent or less of the plan area of the surface to support cables.

K. TR: Telecommunications Room – See IDF

L. MCR: Main Communications Room or Server Room

1.4 PERFORMANCE COMPLIANCE

Design, manufacture, test, and install telecommunications cabling networks per manufacture’s

requirements and in accordance with NFPA-70 (National Electric Code), state codes, local codes,

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, and particularly the following standards:

A. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 -- Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard,

Part 1: General Requirements

B. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 -- Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard,

Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components

C. ANSI/J-STD-607-A-2002 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements

for Telecommunications

D. ANSI/TIA/EIA - 569 -A: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunication

Pathways and Spaces

E. ANSI/TIA/EIA - 606 -A: The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications

Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings

F. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 607-A: Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for

Telecommunications

G. ANSI/TIA/EIA - 758: Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling

Standard

H. IEEE 802.3 (series): Local Area Network Ethernet Standard, including the IEEE 802.3z

Gigabit Ethernet Standard

I. ISO/IEC IS 11801: Generic Cabling for Customer Premises

J. BICSI: BICSI Telecommunications Cabling Installation Manual

K. BICSI: BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM)

L. U.S. Department of Homeland Security, TSA Structured Cabling System Guidelines

Dated – July 2012

M. Planning Guidelines and Design Standards for Checked Baggage Inspection Systems

Version 4.2 – Dated May 2014

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for equipment

racks and cabinets. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics,

and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room fittings. Include plans, elevations,





sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.

2. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access for

cable connections.

3. Grounding: Indicate location of grounding bus bar and its mounting detail showing

standoff insulators and wall mounting brackets.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and

field inspector.


A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.

1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings shall be under the direct

supervision of a RCDD.

2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of a BICSI-

Registered RCDD or Technician, who shall be present at all, times when work of this

section is performed at project site.

3. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as RCDD to perform the on-site

inspection.

B. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

C. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install equipment frames and cable trays

until spaces are enclosed and weather-tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and

work above ceilings is complete.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment with Owner's

telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service entrance

arrangement with local exchange carrier/service provider.

1. Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers, local exchange

carrier/service provider representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on

details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces.

2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other participants.

3. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch





panels in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space

requirements of telephone/voice system and LAN/data equipment.

4. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross-

connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, electronic safety

and security, and related systems that share space in the equipment room.

B. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications

equipment requiring electrical power to operate.

C. Exact locations and mounting heights of outlets shall be coordinated with the architect and

the construction manager (CM).

D. The contractor shall be responsible for surveying the building and locating all back boxes,

conduits, stub-ups designated for the sequence of work with the construction manager.

E. The contractor shall be responsible for coordination with other trades and drawings.

Furthermore, the contractor shall coordinate the sequence of work with the construction manager.

F. The telecommunications contractor must review the drawings of all other trades and obtain

pertinent information that pertains to the telecom work and is shown or indicated on other trade

drawings. No extras will be permitted due to the failure of contractor to comply with this

requirement. After review of all documents if the contractor feels something is not in his scope of

work, he must take exception during his bid submission and clearly indicate the scope for which

he is taking exception.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PATHWAYS

A. Cable Support: NRTL labeled. Cable support brackets or hooks shall be designed to prevent

degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. Cable tie slots fasten

cable ties to brackets.

1. Comply with NFPA 70 and UL 2043 for fire-resistant and low-smoke-producing

characteristics.

2. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets.

3. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings.

4. Straps and other devices.

B. Cable Ladder Trays:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are

not limited to, the following:

a. Chatsworth Products, Inc.

b. Wiremold-legrand

c. COOPER B-Line





2. Used in B130 telecom room and TR H109 to support the incoming

Horizontal Cabling Backbone, and other cables within the rooms.

3. Cable Tray Materials: Tubular Metal, suitable for indoors

a. Ladder Cable Trays: 12 inches wide and 2 inches deep, and a rung

spacing of 9-12 inches.

4. Provide and install all straight sections, vertical and horizontal, 90º bends T

and cross sections, and all accessories as shown on the Contract Documents.

Additionally, provide and install all necessary hardware to allow a seamless

transition between the outside and the inside of the communications rooms.

Pulling cables along sharp edges is not permitted.

5. Provide and install 12” threaded rod covers for each piece of threaded rod that

supports the tray and racks.

6. Provide and install cable tray runway cable radius drops at every location

where cabling is routed off cable tray runway.

a. Color: Black

b. Must provide one at every location where cabling is routed through

the rungs

C. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes

for Electrical Systems." Flexible metal conduit shall not be used. All conduit to be provided by

other trades.

1. For Telecommunications’ Work Area Outlets, outlet boxes shall be no

smaller than 4 inches wide, 4 inches high, double gang standard electrical back

box with double gang mud ring and 2 1/2 inch deep. Boxes and conduit stub ups

to be provided by others.

2.2 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Install plywood, fire-retardant treated and painted white. Comply with

requirements in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels. Wall linings

should extend from the finished floor to the structural ceiling (e.g., the slab) and should: be fire-

rated as required by the applicable AHJ codes and regulations; have at least three walls lined with

A/C grade or better, void-free fire-retardant plywood, 2.4 m (8 ft) high with a minimum thickness

of 19 mm (3/4 in). Plywood should be kiln-dried to maximum moisture content of 15 percent;





have the plywood with the grade A surface exposed. The plywood should be securely fastened to

wall-framing members to ensure that it can support attached equipment. Plywood should be void-

free, fire-rated and treated on all sides with at least two coats of fire-resistant light-colored paint.

Contractor shall install with seals facing out and cover at least one with removable tape prior to

painting.

B. Flush hardware and supports should be used to mount plywood. The strength and placement

of the hardware should be sufficient to handle the total anticipated load (e.g., static and dynamic)

and mounting of cabling components as specified by structural drawings and manufacturers’

specifications.

2.3 EQUIPMENT CABINETS

A. Manufacturers:

Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be

incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Chatsworth Products, Inc.

2. Panduit

3. Hoffman Industries, Inc.

B. B130 Room: Floor-Mount Cabinet: Modular-type, steel construction.

1. Standard 42 RU with sides and lockable doors.

2. Minimum 83.9”H x 23.6” W x 47.3” D

3. Color: Black

4. Install contacts for intrusion on all doors.

5. Include seismic anchors for Zone 4 and secure according to manufacturer’s

instructions

6. Similar or Equal to: Chatsworth – P/N: Z4-21U-113E-C12

C. Cable Management for Floor-Mount cabinet:

1. Metal, with integral wire retaining fingers.

2. Baked-polyester powder coat finish.

3. Provide two per cabinet

4. Similar or equal to: Chatsworth Products CPI-14440-C01

D. Cabinet Overhead Bracing:

1. Used to secure the cabinet to the suspended cable tray system to stabilize the cabinet

2. Provide and install all appurtenances necessary to secure the cabinet to the floor as





well as to the overhead cable tray system:

2.4 LABELING

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including

label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

2.5 EQUIPMENT FRAMES

a. Manufacturers:

1. Chatsworth Products, Inc.

2. Panduit

3. Hoffman Industries, Inc.

b. TR Room: Floor-Mount 2-Post Rack: Modular-type, steel construction.

1. Standard 2-post Frame.

2. 84”HighX19”Width45-RMU

3. Color: Black

c. Cable Management for Floor-Mount 2-post Racks: Vertical managers shall be 10”

between each rack and 6” on each end.

1. Metal, with integral wire retaining fingers.

2. Baked-polyester powder coat finish.

3. Vertical wire management on all racks:

a. Chatsworth Products, Inc.

b. Panduit

c. Hoffman Industries, Inc.

d. Floor-Mount 2-post Rack Overhead Bracing:

1. Used to secure the racks to the suspended cable tray system to stabilize the racks,

two (2) assemblies per rack.

2. Provide and install all appurtenances necessary to secure the racks to the floor as

well as to the overhead cable tray system.

3. Provide each rack that attaches to the ladder rack with a runway mounting bracket.

e. Horizontal Ground Bus Bar – 1 Rack Unit – at top of each rack. 3/16” x 1” copper bar





1. Cooper B-Line SBHB119K

2. Hubbell

3. Chatsworth

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." Comply with

TIA/EIA-569-B; Annex A, "Firestopping."

B. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.2 GROUNDING

A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical

Protection" Chapter.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for

Electrical Systems." for grounding conductors and connectors.

C. Telecommunications Main Bus Bar provided by others

D. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

E. Furnish and install a minimum of a number 6-AWG stranded grounding conductor and

grounding lugs for each individual equipment rack/cabinet and cable tray to the

Telecommunications Grounding Bus Bar (TGBB) in each Telecom Room. Jumper each cable tray

section to the next section. The grounding of the patch panels shall be done according to ANSI-J-

STD-607-A.

F. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG

equipment grounding conductor. Remove paint as required to insure bond.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with BICSI TDMM and drawings for layout and installation of communications

equipment rooms.

B. Cable Support: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A-7.

C. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding

manufacturer’s limitations on bend radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

D. Conduits, sleeves, pull-boxes, and other wire-ways designated for communications cabling

with the exception of innerduct are to be installed by others, except for the overhead cable

pathways that are required in addition to the cable hooks. The Subcontractor is responsible for

surveying the work area and coordinating with other trade drawings to locate all such wire-ways.

E. Provide and install the termination hardware for a complete cable plant, as shown on the





detail drawings and described in this specification.

F. All termination hardware shall be mounted in the cabinet, as shown on the drawings. Bolt the

cabinet to the floor slab, support from cable ladder tray, and ground to the building structure.

G. Horizontal cable within the TSA Telecom Room shall be tie wrapped in bundles of 24 cables

using black Velcro ties

H. Comply with requirements Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A; Annex A, "Firestopping."

I. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A.

Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." Comply

with requirements in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-

resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

B. See Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for additional identification

requirements. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-

606-A for Class 2 level of administration including optional identification requirements of this

standard.

C. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type.





COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 13 00-1

SECTION 27 13 00 - COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL


a. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary


1.2 SUMMARY

a. Section Includes:

1. Pathways.

2. Multimode optical fiber backbone cabling.

2. Copper twisted pair backbone cabling.

3. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects.

4. Cabling identification products.

b. Related Sections:



2. Section 27 11 00 "Communications Equipment Room Fittings" for voice and data

cabling associated with system panels and devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

a. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

b. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection

or cross-connection.

c. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

d. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

e. LAN: Local area network.

f. NRTL: The term "nationally recognized testing laboratory" (NRTL) means an organization

which is recognized by OSHA which tests for safety, and lists or labels or accepts, equipment

or materials.

g. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.





h. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 BACKBONE CABLING DESCRIPTION

a. Backbone cabling system shall provide interconnections between telecommunications rooms

and MC 130 facilities as part of the telecommunications cabling system structure. Cabling

system consists of backbone cables, surge protection, intermediate and main cross-connects

and mechanical terminations.

b. Contractor to provide a 12 fiber 50um OM3 multimode plenum-rated armored cable from the

existing MC in the Main Terminal to the new terminal main telecom room (B130) located on

the first floor.

c. Contractor to provide a 12 fiber 50um OM3 multimode plenum-rated armored cable from the

existing Airlines TR in the Main Terminal to the new terminal main telecom room (B130)

located on the first floor.

d. Contractor to provide a 24 fiber 50um OM4 multimode plenum-rated armored cable from the

new TR H109 on lower level of Concourse A to the new terminal main telecom room (B130)

located on the first floor.

e. Plenum-rated cable shall be used per NEC Article 300.22

f. Contractor to provide a 50 pair outdoor-rated copper voice cable from the new TR H109 on

lower level of Concourse A to the new terminal main telecom room (B130) located on the

first floor. Contractor to provide 50 pair surge protection at each end with solid-state 5 pin

protector modules. Contractor to properly ground each protection block at each end to

building ground.

g. Contractor to provide a 50 pair plenum-rated copper voice cable from the existing MC in the

Main Terminal to the new terminal main telecom room (B130) located on the first floor.

h. Contractor to provide a 25 pair plenum-rated copper voice cable from the existing Airlines TR

in the Main Terminal to the new terminal main telecom room (B130) located on the first floor.


a. General Performance: Backbone cabling system shall comply with transmission standards

in ANSI-TIA-568-B.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

a. Product Data: For each type of product specified; provide manufacturer product data cut

sheet.

b. Instruction Manuals: The contractor shall compile and provide three (3) copies of

complete manuals on the finished system to include: operating and maintenance





instructions, manufacturer’s catalog pages of all equipment and components, all as-built

wiring and conduit diagrams (both floor plan and riser types). At project close out – provide

both CAD and PDF versions of all record drawings.

c. Training: In addition to the above manuals, the contractor shall provide the services of a

trained manufacturer’s representative for a period of four (4) hours, during normal business

hours, to instruct designated CMS personnel on the operation and maintenance of the entire

system.

d. Shop Drawings:

1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and

format selected by Owner.

2. Cabling administration drawings and printouts.

3. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics including the following:

a. Cross-connects.

b. Patch panels.

4. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations

and physical relationship between the installed components.

5. Room Ladder tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship

between the tray and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include

the following:

a. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions.

b. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays.

c. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling

structure.

e. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field

inspector.

f. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.

g. Warranty:

1. The Contractor shall warranty the Communications Cable Plant, in writing,

against defects in workmanship and material for a period of one (1) year after

acceptance by the Owner. During this time, the entire Communications Cable Plant

shall be kept in proper operating condition at no additional labor or material cost to

the Owner. Communications Cable Plant consists of all cabling and termination

hardware specified herein.

2. The Contractor shall provide, in addition, a twenty-five (25) years system warranty

for a complete system provided by the system manufacturer. The warranty must be

applied to the backbone subsystems. The backbone subsystem includes the fiber and

copper backbone cables, connectors, and termination blocks. The Contractor shall

include information on how this warranty applies to both material and labor as well

as to Owner’s ability for maintaining the system in compliance with extended





warranty. All details of this warranty shall be coordinated with the manufacturer to

ensure that all applies and any additions are extended to the owner.

3. Acceptance is issued, in writing only, after the project is fully completed, tested and

all close-out material submitted in accordance with Contract Documents and to the

satisfaction of the Owner or its duly authorized representative.

4. The Contractor shall assume responsibility for quality and satisfactory operation of

components and materials not manufactured by Communications Contractor. All

warranties provided by manufacturers shall be extended to the Owner and certified in

writing.


a. Installer Qualifications: All work must be done by a qualified Installer authorized by the

system manufacturer. Any defects or malfunctions in the system resulting from improper

installation shall be corrected at no additional cost to the Owner. Cabling Installer must have

personnel certified by BICSI on staff.

1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and field testing program

development by an RCDD.

2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of

Registered Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this

Section is performed at Project site.

3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site

testing.

b. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with ANSI-TIA-569-B.

c. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.


a. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.

1. Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use

optical fiber flashlight or optical loss test set.

2. Test optical fiber cables while on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer

(OTDR) to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and

connector; including the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record

in maintenance data.

3. Test copper backbone cables for open and short circuits.





b. Packaging and shipping

1. Deliver materials and equipment in time for inspection, and tests in accordance with

approved project schedule. Coordinate delivery schedule with the Construction

Manager.

2. All shipment arrangements for unloading at site shall be coordinated.

3. Movement of material, either at the time of delivery or subsequently, shall be the sole

responsibility of the Communications Contractor. All costs involved with the

movement shall also be the responsibility of the Communications Contractor.

4. Where necessary, ship equipment in containers or boxes of appropriate size to permit

passing through available spaces.

c. Storage and protection

1. Neatly pile and store loose materials at job site under watertight cover on wood

blocking or in suitable areas away from damp surfaces as designated by the

Construction Manager.

2. Protect existing work that may be damaged during subsequent construction and other

normal activities.

d. Clean Up and Storage

1. The contractor shall abide by all terms and conditions of the Construction

Manager regarding the removal of trash and work area clean-up.

2. Prior to acceptance of work, all areas used or entered by the Contractor must be

cleared of any materials or debris caused directly or indirectly by the Contractor to

the satisfaction of the Owner or its duly authorized representative.


a. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until

wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and

maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the

remainder of the construction period.

b. Survey: The Contractor shall be responsible to survey all areas to locate poke-troughs,

furniture openings, sleeves, conduits, cable trays, conduit stub-ups, back boxes, and pull

boxes provided by others for the communication cabling. Additionally, the Contractor shall

be responsible to survey areas where ladder racks, cable trays, cable ties, and cable hangers

are to be installed and secured.

c. Labor Harmony: The Contractor shall be responsible for meeting project schedule dates

regardless of local disputes. The Contractor shall be responsible for protection of his work

from acts of vandalism. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all installed

and configured systems as well as non-installed stored materials from acts of theft.

1.10 COORDINATION





a. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's

telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

b. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with other

trades.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 COPPER CABLE HARDWARE

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the work are the following:

1. Commscope

2. The Siemon Company

3. Panduit

b. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with ANSI-TIA-568- B.2,

IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated

with connecting hardware of same category or higher.

c. 110 wall fields shall be used with appropriate wire management above and below. All blocks

shall include stand-off brackets.

2.02 COPPER CABLE

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. General Cable

2. Essex Cabling

3. Commscope Cable

b. Description: 25 Pair Copper Category 3 Outdoor-rated Backbone Cable between Main

Terminal Telecommunications Room and TR 107 – First Floor.

1. Comply with ANSI-TIA-568-B for performance specifications.

a. Outdoor-rated Rated

2.03 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE – MULTI MODE

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following

manufacturer:

1. Corning Cable Systems





2. Commscope

3. Panduit

b. Description: Multimode optical fiber cable.

1. Comply with ANSI-TIA-568-B.3 for performance specifications.

2. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as

complying with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types:

a. Plenum-rated and armored, Type OFNP, complying with NFPA 262.

3. Multimode Characteristics:

a. Core diameter 50 micron

b. Cladding diameter 125 micron

c. Buffer/acrylate diameter 250 micron.

d. OM3 or OM4 as required.

4. Maximum attenuation – 3.0 dB/km at 850 nm, 1.0 dB/km at 1300 nm.

5. Comply with ANSI-TIA-568-B.3 for performance specifications

c. Jacket:

1. Jacket Color: Black

2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to

ANSI-TIA-598-B.

3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to

exceed 40 inches.

4. Strand Count: 12 or 24

2.04 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE

a. Manufacturers: Basis of Design:

1. Commscope

2. Corning

3. Panduit

b. Cross-Connects and Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered,

duplex cable connectors. Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or

cables assigned to field, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion

criteria

1. High-Density Fiber Optic Enclosure: Optical Fiber Rack Mount Patch Panel

a. 1U Panel, 24 – 72 Port and components





4. 12 Port LC Singlemode and Multimode Coupler Panels

5. Blank Coupler Panels

c. Fiber Cable Connectors: Cable Connecting Hardware: Meet the Optical Fiber Connector

Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications of ANSI-TIA-604-2, ANSI-TIA-604-3-A,

and ANSI-TIA-604-12. Comply with ANSI-TIA-568-B.3.

1. Comply with Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS)

specifications of ANSI-TIA-604-2, ANSI-TIA-604-3-A, and ANSI-TIA-604-12.

Comply with ANSI-TIA-568-B.3.

2. Quick-connect, simplex, Type LC Connectors.

3. Insertion loss not more than 0.75 dB.

4. LC Fiber Connectors for each end of the fiber cable

4. LC Connector Part Numbers:

2.05 GROUNDING

a. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems." for grounding conductors and connectors.

b. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

2.06 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

a. Comply with ANSI-TIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label

stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

2.07 LABELING NOMENCLATURE

a. Comply with ANSI-TIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including

label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

First level = IC12

Second level=IC14

1. Data rack IC#-1 where IC2=telecom room, 1 represents rack number

2. TBC TBC-1 where TBC-telecom bonding conductor, 1 represents

cable #

3. Patch panels DATA A where DATA A represents a data patch panel, A

represents patch panel number





4. 4 pair UTP station cables (not wireless) IC#-A-12 where IC# represents telecom room,

A represents patch panel #, 12 represents port on patch panel-cables machine labeled each end

and clearly visible

5. Feeder cables IC#-IC# where each IC# represents telecom rooms terminated

each end

6. 4 pair UTP station cables Wireless - IC#-AP-# where IC# represents telecom room, AP

represents AP cable, # represents number of AP. (APs will be numbered sequentially

according to each cabling zone)

7. 4 pair UTP station cables Camera - IC#-CAM-# where IC# represents telecom room,

CAM represents CAM cable, # represents number of CAMs. (CAMs will be numbered

sequentially according to each cabling zone) All cameras will be terminated on a separate

patch panel


a. Factory test cables on reels according to ANSI-TIA-568-B.1.

b. Factory test UTP cables according to ANSI-TIA-568-B.2.

d. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

e. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 WIRING METHODS

a. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets,

desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.

1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.

2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 26 Section

"Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems".

b. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where

possible.

c. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect to

terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bend

radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.





3.02 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS

a. Cable Trays: Comply with ANSI-TIA-569-B.

b. Coordinate cable connection hardware installations and specialty arrangements with layout

drawings and requirements specified for communications equipment rooms

c. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks specified in

Division 27 Section "Communications Equipment Room Fittings." Drawings indicate general

arrangement of pathways and fittings.

d. Comply with ANSI-TIA-569-B for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of

bends between pull points.

e. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical

Systems" for installation of conduits and wireways.

f. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms:

1. Install cable trays to route cables.

2. Secure conduits sleeves to backboard when entering room from overhead.

3. Extend conduits 3 inches (76 mm) above finished floor.

g. Backboards: PROVIDE AND Install plywood, fire-retardant treated. Comply with

requirements in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels. Wall

linings should extend from the finished floor to the structural ceiling (e.g., the slab) and

should: be fire-rated as required by the applicable AHJ codes and regulations; have at least

three walls lined with A/C grade or better, void-free plywood, 2.4 m (8 ft) high with a

minimum thickness of 19 mm (3/4 in). Mount from 24” AFF. Plywood should be kiln-dried to

maximum moisture content of 15 percent; have the plywood with the grade A surface

exposed. The plywood should be securely fastened to wall-framing members to ensure that it

can support attached equipment. Plywood should be void-free and fire-rated. Flush hardware

and supports should be used to mount plywood. The strength and placement of the hardware

should be sufficient to handle the total anticipated load (e.g., static and dynamic) and

mounting of cabling components as specified by structural drawings and manufacturers’

specifications.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF CABLES

a. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with ANSI-TIA-568-B.1. Provide 20 feet of slack on all fiber optic cables

and copper backbone cables. Leave slack dressed neatly in ladder rack within the

telecom room.

2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6 and "Cable Termination Practices".

3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.





4. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make

terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.

5. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30

inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings,

outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

6. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to

prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by

manufacturer.

7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding

manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI

ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Use lacing bars and distribution

spools.

8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice

cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if

damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before de-reeling. Heat

lamps shall not be used for heating.

10. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot- (3-m-) long service loop on

each end of cable.

11. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable

pull tensions.

b. Optical Fiber Cable Installation:

1. Comply with ANSI-TIA-568-B.3.

2. Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack mounted.

c. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces

with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway, a minimum of 8 inches (200mm)

above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches (1524 mm) apart.

3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or

other potentially damaging items.

d. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.

e. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and ANSI-TIA-569-B recommendations for separating

unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI

sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways

and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches (127

mm).





b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12

inches (300 mm).

c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches

(610 mm).

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and

unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2

inches (64 mm).


inches (150 mm).


(300 mm).

4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power

lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures

shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: 2”.


inches (76 mm).


(150 mm).

5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and

Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm).

6. Separation between Communication Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of

5 inches (127 mm).

3.04 FIRESTOPPING

a. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." Comply with

ANSI-TIA-569-B; Annex A, "Firestopping."

b. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.05 GROUNDING

a. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical


b. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

c. Ground bar provided by the electrical contractor.

d. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG

equipment grounding conductor. Use 2 hole lugs and exothermic terminations on all ground

terminations.

3.06 IDENTIFICATION





a. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with ANSI-TIA-606-B.

b. Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards.

For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

c. See Section 27 15 00 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for additional identification

requirements. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with ANSI-

TIA-606-A for Class 2 level of administration including optional identification requirements

of this standard.

d. Cable Schedule: Install in a prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet.

List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect

with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive

schedules for Project.

f. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-

point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets,

backbone pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and

positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses

and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors.

g. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that

contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in ANSI-TIA 606-

A, for the following:

1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent.


a. Perform tests and inspections.

b. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber jacket materials markings. Inspect cabling

terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding

for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with ANSI-TIA-

568-B.1.

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding,

equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

3. Test UTP copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults,

and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection

blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection.

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in ANSI-TIA-

568-B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance

requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with

measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)"





Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment

manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

b. Category 6 Performance:

1) A level III test unit is required to verify Category 6 performance and

must be updated to include the requirements of ANSI/ANSI-TIA-

568-B.1.

2) The primary field-tests parameters leading to Pass/Fail criteria used

to verify installed horizontal cabling is listed below. These

parameters are defined in ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.1.

a) Wire Map

b) Length

c) Insertion Loss

d) Near-end cross talk (NEXT) loss

e) Power sum near-end cross talk (PSNEXT) loss

f) Equal-lever-far-end cross talk (ELFEXT)

g) Power sum equal-lever-far-end cross talk (PSELFEXT) loss

h) Return Loss

i) Propagation Delay

j) Delay Skew

3) Test unit manufacturer: Fluke DTX CableAnalyzer™ preferred.

Other test units are acceptable. Must be calibrated within 6 months

of start of testing.

4. Optical Fiber Cable Tests:

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in ANSI-TIA-

568-B.1. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test

equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

b. All tests for fiber optic cabling shall utilize an Optical Time Domain

Reflectometer. OTDR. Must be calibrated within 6 months prior to the

beginning of testing.

c. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests:

1) Horizontal and multimode backbone link measurements: Test at

850 or 1300 nm in 1 direction according to ANSI-TIA-526-14-A,

Method B, One Reference Jumper.

2) Attenuation test results for backbone links shall be less than 1.5 dB.

Attenuation test results shall be less than that calculated according

to equation in ANSI-TIA-568-B.1.

c. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a

summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred

from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted. Test

results shall be summary and printed. Additionally, saved and submitted files shall be in PDF.

Include program for viewing files natively with soft copy of all test documentation.





d. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified

requirements.

e. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

f. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION




COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 1

SECTION 27 1500 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Pathways.

2. UTP cabling.

3. Multiuser telecommunications outlet assemblies.

4. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects.

5. Telecommunications outlet/connectors.

6. Cabling system identification products.

7. Cable management system.

8.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 27 1100 "Communications Equipment Room Fittings" for voice and data cabling


1.3 DEFINITIONS A. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

B. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

C. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or

cross-connection.

D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

E. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

F. TR/IDF: Telecommunications Room/Intermediate Distribution Frame room. Used interchangeably.

G. ITS: Information Transport System.

H. Ladder Rack: A fabricated structure consisting of two longitudinal side rails connected by individual

transverse members (rungs).

I. LAN: Local area network.

J. NRTL: The term "nationally recognized testing laboratory" (NRTL) means an organization which is

recognized by OSHA which tests for safety, and lists or labels or accepts, equipment or materials

K. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable

terminates.

L. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

1.4 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between the

telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the communications





equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called "permanent link," a term that is

used in the testing protocols.

B.

1. Airport specifications require two (2) Category 6 cables at each standard outlet location. A

typical outlet configuration, unless otherwise specified, is defined as consisting of two (2)

Category 6 cables (blue) in a four (4) port faceplate with two (2) Category 6 jacks, one (1) for

voice and one (1) for data and two blanks. Colors are as detailed within the drawings.

2. Each of the cables in the faceplate will be separated – (Voice and Data) and shall terminate on

a separate patch panel in each cabinet in the Telecom Room.

3. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.

4. Leave 1 foot of slack coiled above the workstation location.

C. Cabling destinations are identified within the drawings. The contractor will pay close attention to the

cables running to different telecom rooms.

D. All wireless access points, wall phones and surveillance cameras shall require one (1) blue Category

6 cable at each location. A single cable outlet configuration, unless otherwise specified, is defined as

consisting of one (1) Category 6 cable (blue) in a two (2) port faceplate with one blue Category 6

jack and one blank.

E. The Installer shall provide at the main fire alarm panel two Category 6 (YELLOW) cables

terminated in a surface mount box and terminated on a separate BAS SERVICES patch panel

located in the Telecom Room H109.

F. The Installer shall provide at the main security intrusion alarm panel two Category 6 (YELLOW)

cables terminated in a surface mount box and terminated at the demark panel.

G. All telecom cabling, wireless cabling, security cabling, access control, surveillance cameras, security

cabling to security monitoring stations shall be installed on separate patch panels in H109. All

security network cabling shall comply with this section.

H. The Installer shall provide a standard outlet at the main HVAC control panel and at the main security

panel location and terminated on a separate BAS SERVICES patch panel located in the Telecom

Room H109.

I. A work area is approximately 100 sq. ft., and includes the components that extend from the

telecommunications outlet/connectors to the station equipment.

J. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet (90 m) for UTP cable. This maximum

allowable length does not include an allowance for the patch cord length of 16 feet (4.9 m) to the

workstation equipment. The maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the patch

cord length of 16 feet (4.9 m) in the horizontal cross-connect.

K. The installer shall provide where noted a CATV RG6/u quad-shielded cable to each of the displays

in the hold room as shown on the design drawings. All cable shall be terminated with connectors

rated and approved for the type of cable. All connectors shall be compression and shall not be twist-

on. All CATV cables shall be tested to insure no shorts.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in

TIA/EIA-568-B.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.

1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified, provide a manufacturer product data cut sheet.





B. Instruction Manuals: The contractor shall compile and provide five (5) copies of complete

manuals on the finished system to include: operating and maintenance instructions,

manufacturer’s catalog pages of all equipment and components, as-built wiring and conduit diagrams

(both floor plan and riser types).

C. Training: In addition to the above manuals, the contractor shall provide the services of a trained

manufacturer’s representative for a period of four (4) hours, during normal business hours, to

instruct designated personnel on the operation and maintenance of the entire system.

D. Maintenance Contract: The equipment vendor shall furnish a one (1) year maintenance contract, free

of charge to the owner, effective from the date of final acceptance of the system. There shall be a

minimum of two (2) inspections during the contract year. On the premises, maintenance is to be

performed during normal business hours, at no cost to OWNER, for a period of twelve (12) months

from the date of final acceptance of the system, unless damage is caused by misuse, abuse or

accident.

E. Shop Drawings:

1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and format

selected by Owner.

2. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the cabling

and asset identification system of the software.

3. Cabling administration drawings and printouts.

4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including the following:

5.

a. Cross-connects.

b. Patch panels.

c. Patch cords.

6. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and

physical relationship between the installed components.

F. Samples: For workstation outlets, jacks, faceplates, jack assemblies, in specified finish, one for each

size and outlet configuration.

G. Qualification Data: For Installer qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field

inspector.

H. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.

I. Warranty:

1. The Contractor shall warranty the Communications Cable Plant, in writing, against

defects in workmanship and material for a period of one (1) year after acceptance by the

Owner. During this time, the entire Communications Cable Plant shall be kept in proper

operating condition at no additional labor or material cost to the Owner. Communications

Cable Plant consists of all cabling and termination hardware specified herein.

2. The Contractor shall provide, in addition, a twenty-five (25) years performance warranty for a

complete end-to-end system provided by the connectivity manufacturer which covers all labor

and materials. The warranty must be applied to the horizontal subsystems. The horizontal

subsystem includes the Category 6 copper cables, outlets, jacks, patch panels, connectors, and

termination blocks. The Contractor shall include information on how this warranty applies to

both material and labor as well as to Owner’s ability for maintaining the system in compliance

with extended warranty. All details of this warranty shall be coordinated with the

manufacturer to ensure that all applies and any additions are extended to the owner.

3. Acceptance is issued, in writing only, after the project is fully completed, tested and all close-





out material submitted in accordance with Contract Documents and to the satisfaction of the

Owner or its duly authorized representative.

4. The Contractor shall assume responsibility for quality and satisfactory operation of

components and materials not manufactured by Communications Contractor. All warranties

provided by manufacturers shall be extended to the Owner and certified in writing

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: All work must be done by a qualified Installer authorized by the system

manufacturer. Any defects or malfunctions in the system resulting from improper installation shall be

corrected at no additional cost to the Owner. Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by

BICSI on staff.

B.

1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and field testing program development

by an RCDD.

2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Registered

Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this section is performed at

Project site.

3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.

4. Manufacturer Authorization: The installer shall provide with his submittal proof of

registration and authorization to offer an extended 25-year performance warranty on the

system proposed covering all labor and materials for the warranty period.

C. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-B.

D. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.

1. Deliver factory box test reports for each box of 1000’ of Category 6 cable.

B. Packaging and shipping

1. Deliver materials and equipment in time for inspection, and tests in accordance with approved

project schedule. Coordinate delivery schedule with the Construction Manager.

2. All shipment arrangements for unloading at site shall be coordinated.

3. Movement of material, either at the time of delivery or subsequently, shall be the sole

responsibility of the Communications Contractor. All costs involved with the movement shall

also be the responsibility of the Communications Contractor.

4. Where necessary, ship equipment in containers or boxes of appropriate size to permit passing

through available spaces.

C. Storage and protection

1. Neatly pile and store loose materials at job site under watertight cover on wood blocking or

in suitable areas away from damp surfaces as designated by the Construction Manager.

2. Protect existing work that may be damaged during subsequent construction and other normal

activities.

D. Clean Up and Storage

1. The contractor shall abide by all terms and conditions of the Construction Manager

regarding the removal of trash and work area clean-up.

2. Prior to acceptance of work, all areas used or entered by the Contractor must be cleared of any





materials or debris caused directly or indirectly by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the

Owner or its duly authorized representative.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work

in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient

temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction

period.

B. Survey: The Contractor shall be responsible to survey all areas to locate poke-troughs, furniture

openings, sleeves, conduits, cable trays, conduit stub-ups, back boxes, and pull boxes provided by

others for the communication cabling. Additionally, the Contractor shall be responsible to survey

areas where ladder racks, cable trays, cable ties, and cable hangers are to be installed and secured.

C. Labor Harmony: The Contractor shall be responsible for meeting project schedule dates regardless of

local disputes. The Contractor shall be responsible for protection of his work from acts of vandalism.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all installed and configured systems as well

as non-installed stored materials from acts of theft.

1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's

telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

B. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with other trades.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PATHWAYS A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-B.

B. Cable Support Hooks: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6 designed to prevent degradation of

cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable.

1. Comply with NFPA 70 and UL 2043 for fire-resistant and low-smoke-producing

characteristics.

2. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets.

3. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings.

4. Straps and other devices.

2.2 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Install plywood, fire-retardant treated and painted with white fire retardant paint.

Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.

Wall linings should extend from the finished floor to the structural ceiling (e.g., the slab) and should:

be fire-rated as required by the applicable AHJ codes and regulations; have at least three walls lined

with A/C grade or better, void-free plywood, 2.4 m (8 ft) high with a minimum thickness of 19 mm

(3/4 in). Plywood should be kiln-dried to maximum moisture content of 15 percent; have the





plywood with the grade A surface exposed. The plywood should be securely fastened to wall-

framing members to ensure that it can support attached equipment. Plywood should be void-free and

fire-rated or treated on all sides with at least two coats of fire-resistant light-colored paint. Flush

hardware and supports should be used to mount plywood. The strength and placement of the

hardware should be sufficient to handle the total anticipated load (e.g., static and dynamic) and


specifications.

2.3 UTP CABLE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, are as follows:

1. Panduit

2. CommScope, Inc.

3. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.

B. Description: mid-grade, Plenum rated Category 6 (Category 6) 100-ohm; 4-pair UTP specified 400

MHz or more; covered with a blue thermoplastic jacket. Each 4-pair 100-ohm balanced twisted-

pair Category 6 cable must be terminated in an eight-position connector at the

communications work area outlets.

1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties.

2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications.

3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6.

4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying

with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:

a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262.

2.4 UTP CABLE HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, are as follows:

1. Panduit

2. CommScope

3. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.

B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, IDC type,

with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting

hardware of same category or higher (Category 6).

C. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered Category 6 jack units with IDC-type

connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.

D. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with

integral IDC-type terminals.

E. Patch Cords: Factory-made, 4-pair Category 6 cables in Factory-made, 4-pair cables in 5’ & 7’

lengths; terminated with 8-position modular plug at each end.

1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure Category

6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging.

2. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification

3. Provide two for each outlet; regardless of type.





4. Patch cables shall be manufactured by the same company as the cabling system.

2.5 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS A. Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular. Comply with

TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

B. Workstation Outlets: four-port connector assemblies mounted in single faceplate.

1. Faceplate: Complying with requirements in Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices." NOTE:

Coordinate with Division 26 and use the same style, materials and color faceplates to match

the electrical plates.

2. For use with snap-in jacks, either 4-pair modular or CATV F-style pass-through connector,

and accommodating any combination of UTP, optical fiber, and coaxial work area cords.

3. Legend: Machine printed, in the field, using adhesive-tape label.

4. Legend: Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.

2.6 GROUNDING A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection"

Chapter.

B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at

least 2-inch (50-mm) clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a

minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical

building ground.

D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment

grounding conductor.

2.7 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For

fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

B. See Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for additional identification

requirements. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A

for Class 2 level of administration including optional identification requirements of this standard.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cable and

asset management software.

D. Cable Schedule: Install in a prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List

incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid

frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for

Project.

E. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point

labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone

pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal

cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and

equipment grounding conductors.

F. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts





with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA 606-A, for the

following:

1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent.

2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections.


1. Visually inspect UTP jacket materials markings. Inspect cabling terminations in

communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and

inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and

patch cords, and labeling of all components.

3. Test UTP copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and

polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test

cables after termination but not cross-connection.

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2.

Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test

Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in

"Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that

are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

b. Category 6 Performance

1) A level III test unit is required to verify Category 6 performance and must be

updated to include the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2) The primary field-tests parameters leading to Pass/Fail criteria used to verify

installed horizontal cabling is listed below. These parameters are defined in

ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.1.

3)

a) Wire Map

b) Length

c) Insertion Loss





h) Return Loss


j) Delay Skew

4) Test unit manufacturer: Fluke DTX CableAnalyzer™ preferred.

C. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary

report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the

instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.

D. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified

requirements.

E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.





F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WIRING METHODS A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks,

and counters. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.

B.

1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.

2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 26 Section "Raceway

and Boxes for Electrical Systems".

3.

C. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where

possible.

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect to terminal

points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bend radii. Provide and

use lacing bars and distribution spools.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS A. Cable Conduits: Provided by others. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-B.

B. Coordinate cable connection hardware installations and specialty arrangements with layout drawings

and requirements specified for communications equipment rooms

C. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks specified in Division

27 Section "Communications Equipment Room Fittings." Drawings indicate general arrangement of

pathways and fittings.

D. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-B for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends

between pull points.

E. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for

installation of conduits and wireways.

F. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms:

G.

1. Install ladder rack to route cables.

2. Secure conduits sleeves to backboard when entering room from overhead.

3. Extend conduits 3 inches (76 mm) above finished floor.

H. Backboards: Install plywood, fire-retardant treated and painted with white fire retardant paint.

Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.

Wall linings should extend from the finished floor to the structural ceiling (e.g., the slab) and should:

be fire-rated as required by the applicable AHJ codes and regulations; have at least three walls lined

with A/C grade or better, void-free plywood, 2.4 m (8 ft) high with a minimum thickness of 19 mm

(3/4 in). Plywood should be kiln-dried to maximum moisture content of 15 percent; have the

plywood with the grade A surface exposed. The plywood should be securely fastened to wall-

framing members to ensure that it can support attached equipment. Plywood should be void-free and

fire-rated or treated on all sides with at least two coats of fire-resistant light-colored paint. Flush





hardware and supports should be used to mount plywood. The strength and placement of the

hardware should be sufficient to handle the total anticipated load (e.g., static and dynamic) and


specifications.

I. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch (2440-mm) dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets

tightly, and form smooth gap-free corners and joints.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CABLES

A. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6 and "Cable Termination Practices".

3. Install IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.

4. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations

only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.

5. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches

(760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks,

frames, and terminals.

6. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent

bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.

7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's

limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling

Termination Practices" Chapter. Use lacing bars and distribution spools.

8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable

between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during

installation and replace it with new cable.

9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before de-reeling. Heat lamps

shall not be used for heating.

10. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot- (3-m-) long service loop on each

end of cable.

11. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull

tensions.

B. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with

terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway, a minimum of 8 inches (200mm) above

ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches (1524 mm) apart.

3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other

potentially damaging items.

C. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.

D. Separation from EMI Sources





1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-B recommendations for separating unshielded

copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including

electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and

unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

3.

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm).

b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300

mm).

c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches (610 mm).

d.

4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded

power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

5.

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches (64

mm).

b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches

(150 mm).


d.

6. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines

and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as

follows:

7.

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.

b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches (76

mm).


d.

8. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA

or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm).

9. Separation between Communication Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches

(127 mm).

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-B; Annex A, "Firestopping."

B. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.5 3.5 GROUNDING

A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection"

Chapter.

B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at





least 2-inch (50-mm) clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a

minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical

building ground.

D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment

grounding conductor.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A.

1. Color-code cross-connect fields. Apply colors to voice and data service backboards,

connections, covers, and labels.

B. Using cable management system software specified in Part 2, develop Cabling Administration

Drawings for system identification, testing, and management. Use unique, alphanumeric designation

for each cable and label cable, jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects with same

designation. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as-built conditions.

C. Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For

fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

D. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 2

level of administration.

E. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List

incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with

rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for

Project.

F. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point

labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone

pathways and cables terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation

terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors.

Follow convention of TIA/EIA-606-A. Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in software and

format selected by Owner.

G. Cable and Wire Identification

1. Label each cable within 4 inches (100 mm) of each termination, where it is accessible in a

cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.

2. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.

3. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets

4.

a. Label each connector/cable behind each patch panel and each discrete unit of cable-

terminating and connecting hardware.

H. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts

with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA-606-A.

I.

1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent.






A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections

1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber jacket materials markings. Inspect cabling

terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin

assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and

patch cords, and labeling of all components.

a. Visually confirm Category 6 marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and

patch panels.

3. Test UTP copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and

polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test

cables after termination but not cross-connection.

4.

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2.

Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test

Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in

"Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that

are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

b. Category 6 Performance

1) A level III test unit is required to verify Category 6 performance and must be

updated to include the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2) The primary field-tests parameters leading to Pass/Fail criteria used to verify

installed horizontal cabling is listed below. These parameters are defined in

ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.1.

3)

a) Wire Map

b) Length

c) Insertion Loss





h) Return Loss


j) Delay Skew

c. Test unit manufacturer: Fluke DTX CableAnalyzer™ preferred. Other test units are

acceptable.

5. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTP systems after the complete

communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed.

C. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report





that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the

computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.

D. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel in

cable-plant management operations, including changing signal pathways for different workstations,

rerouting signals in failed cables, and keeping records of cabling assignments and revisions when

extending wiring to establish new workstation outlets.

END OF SECTION 27 1500




PAGING SYSTEM 275113-1

SECTION 27 51 13 - PAGING SYSTEMS

PART 1 – GENERAL


a. The conditions of the General Contract (General, Supplementary, and other Conditions) and the General

Requirements are hereby made a part of this Section.

b. All bids shall be based on the equipment as specified herein. The descriptions are that of:

1. Valcom Communications, Inc.

a. The intent is to establish a standard of quality, function, and features. It is the

responsibility of the bidder to insure that the proposed product meets or exceeds every

standard set forth in these specifications.

b. The functions and features specified are vital to the operation of this facility; therefore,

inclusion in the list of acceptable manufacturers does not release the contractor from

strict compliance with the requirements of this specification.

c. Bidders wishing to submit alternate equipment shall submit to the specifying authority, at least 10 days

prior to bid opening, the equipment proposed to provide a precise functional equivalent system to meet

specifications. Bidder shall provide adequate information prior to bid date such as specification sheets,

working drawings, shop drawings, and a demonstration of the system. The bidder shall also provide the

FCC registration number of the proposed system. Alternate supplier-contractor must also provide a list to

include three installations of the identical system proposed which have been in operation for a period of

two years.

d. Final approval of the alternate system shall be determined at the time of job completion. Failure to

provide the "precise functional equivalent" shall result in the removal of the alternate system at the

contractor’s expense.

1.2 SUMMARY

a. Section Includes:

1. Paging equipment and wiring.

2. Paging equipment racks and cabinets.

3. Installation of horns and speakers.

4. Installation of volume controls.

5. Grounding.

6. Installation and configuration of paging controllers.

7. Test and balancing of the system.

8. Integration with the telephone system.





9. Training.

b. The Contractor shall furnish and install a zoned paging/background music system with all equipment

including, but not limited to, volume controls, wiring, controllers, IP gateways, speakers, and horns and

all other equipment necessary to provide a complete and operating system for the Fayetteville Regional

Airport – Part 1.

c. The contractor shall relocate the existing paging system to the adjoining room to prepare for construction.

Contractor shall extend all cables and coordinate the move with the Airport to eliminate any down time.

d. The system shall integrate with the existing paging system and allow for paging across all zones.

e. The system shall use a stacking feedback eliminator to prevent acoustical feedback.

f. The system shall provide the capability to use an external source for background music.

g. Contractor shall provide at all gates wall-mounted microphones and cords for paging with stainless steel

plates.

h. Equipment supplied by Valcom Inc. shall be considered as meeting these specifications and as the base

bid. All equipment must be approved by the specifying authority. Bidders supplying an alternate system

must make the authority aware of their intentions and provide adequate information, including catalog

cuts, working and shop drawings, and a demonstration of the proposed system at least 10 days prior to

bid date. Any prior approval of an alternate system does not exempt the supplier from meeting the intent

of these specifications. If the alternate system fails to provide all the requirements specified in this

document, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with the removal and replacement

of said equipment

e. Related Sections:

1. Section 27 13 00 "Communications Backbone Cabling" for voice and data cabling




1.3 DEFINITIONS

a. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

b. IDF: Intermediate Distribution Frame.

c. ITS: Information Transport System.

d. Ladder Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of two longitudinal side rails

connected by individual transverse members (rungs).

e. LAN: Local area network.

f. NRTL: The term "nationally recognized testing laboratory" (NRTL) means an organization

which is recognized by OSHA which tests for safety, and lists or labels or accepts, equipment

or materials.

g. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.





h. RMU: Rack Mount Unit

i. Solid-Bottom or Non-ventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of a bottom

without ventilation openings within integral or separate longitudinal side rails.

j. Trough or Ventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of integral or separate

longitudinal rails and a bottom having openings sufficient for the passage of air and using 75

percent or less of the plan area of the surface to support cables.

k. TR: Telecommunications Room – See IDF

l. MCR: Main Communications Room

1.4 NOT USED

1.5 SUBMITTALS

a. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for

equipment racks and cabinets. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics,

electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

b. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room fittings. Include plans, elevations,

sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each

field connection.

2. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access for

cable connections.

3. Grounding: Indicate location of grounding bus bar and its mounting detail showing

standoff insulators and wall mounting brackets.

a. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and

field inspector.


a. All items of equipment including wire and cable shall be designed by the manufacturer to

function as a complete system and shall be accompanied by the manufacturer's complete

service notes and drawings detailing all interconnections.

b. The contractor shall be an established communications and electronics contractor that has had

and currently maintains a locally run and operated business for at least three years. The

contractor shall be a duly authorized distributor of the equipment supplied with full

manufacturer's warranty privileges.

c. The contractor shall show satisfactory evidence, upon request, that he maintains a fully equipped

service organization capable of furnishing adequate inspection and service to the system. The

contractor shall maintain at their facility the necessary spare parts in the proper proportion as

recommended by the manufacturer to maintain and service the equipment being supplied.





d. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

e. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.


a. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install equipment and cable trays until spaces

are enclosed and weather-tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and work above

ceilings is ready for system install.

1.8 COORDINATION

a. Coordinate layout and installation of paging equipment with Owner's telecommunications

and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

b. Coordinate location of volume control and paging equipment receptacles with locations of

communications equipment requiring electrical power to operate.

c. Exact locations and mounting heights of outlets shall be coordinated with the architect and

the construction manager (CM).

d. The contractor shall be responsible for surveying the building and locating all back boxes,

conduits, stub-ups designated for the sequence of work with the construction manager.

e. The contractor shall be responsible for coordination with other trades and drawings.

Furthermore, the contractor shall coordinate the sequence of work with the construction

manager.

f. The paging contractor must review the drawings of all other trades and obtain pertinent

information that pertains to the paging work and is shown or indicated on other trade

drawings. No extras will be permitted due to the failure of contractor to comply with this

requirement. After review of all documents if the contractor feels something is not in his

scope of work, he must take exception during his bid submission and clearly indicate the

scope for which he is taking exception.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DESCRIPTION

a. The installation shall include a comprehensive programmable microprocessor based zone paging

system consisting of a wall mounted equipment cabinet with electronics capable of handling up

to 6 zones of paging plus 3 programmable multi-zone groups of any combination, and an all call

group comprising all six (6) zones.

b. All optional functions shall be accomplished via the page controller. Controllers requiring the

use of a PC for programming will not be acceptable.





c. The page controller shall integrate into the owner’s existing paging system.

d. Provide six individual outputs to allow flexibility for simultaneous paging and/or background

music as well as integration to the emergency messaging system.

e. The controller shall provide for volume control of the background music input, tones and all call

paging.

f. Provide one (1) unrestricted audio path for communication between the multifunction port and

each of the 6 zones.

g. Provide all-call paging to all six paging zones.

h. Capability of background music selection individually or to any combination of six zones.

i. Paging into any group or group combinations shall not interrupt any background music

previously selected in other groups. If the speaker groups receiving music are part of the page

group the background music shall be interrupted during the page and returned automatically

when the page is completed.

j. Built in warble tone activated by a closed contact or a 90 VAC signal.

k. Built in single tone activated by a closed contact.

l. A background music input shall be provided. It shall be capable of receiving a -10 to -18dBm, 8-

600 ohm signal.

m. Systems shall allow for feed from Mass Notification system to override all paging and

background music. System shall increase the volume in the event of a mass notification message

for emergency messaging.

n. The system shall use a stacking feedback eliminator to prevent acoustical feedback.

2.2 COMPONENTS

a. The following equipment shall be provided as required.

b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

the following products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited

to the following product descriptions:

1. Expandable Multi-zone Intercom System with all required expansion units,

enhanced feature options with Windows programming tools and event scheduling.

2. Impedance Matching Module for each of the six (6) zones

The Wilson Group Concord Regional Airport – Commercial Service Terminal

Project No.: 9161-000 June 30, 2015


3. 8” dual input, amplified, round white ceiling speakers. Speaker shall include all

amplification. Provide any required back box and support bridge to install the

speaker per the manufactured instructions and best trade practices. Speaker

locations and quantities shall be capable of providing a uniform sound pressure

level of 100 decibels within the space. Locate the speakers uniformly within the

space and without conflict with other ceiling systems and devices. Where the

serving area exceeds 100 square feet, provide the required number of speakers to

obtain the SPL as specified above

4. In general-purpose areas without finished lay in ceilings, provide 5-watt amplified

pendant speakers.

2.3 LABELING

a. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label

stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FIRESTOPPING

a. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." Comply

with TIA/EIA-569-B; Annex A, "Firestopping."

b. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.2 GROUNDING

a. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical


b. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for

Electrical Systems." for grounding conductors and connectors.

c. Telecommunications Main Bus Bar provided by others

d. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

e. Furnish and install a minimum of a number 6-AWG stranded grounding conductor and

grounding lugs for each individual equipment rack/cabinet to the ground bar location.

f. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG

equipment grounding conductor.


Project No.: 9161-000 June 30, 2015


3.4 INSTALLATION

a. Install per the manufacturers instructions.

b. The Contractor shall coordinate exact locations and quantities of all speaker locations with

the engineer and shall identify on shop drawings to be submitted for approval. Installation

of all ceiling speakers shall be coordinated with these plans

c. Upon completion of installation, a room-by-room verification shall be conducted with a

technician present for every device in the system. Repairs shall be performed or

adjustments made to any devices as needed to correct any malfunctions at no cost to the

Owner. A written room-by-room report following testing and repairs shall be prepared

and submitted to the designer.

h. Comply with requirements Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A; Annex A, "Firestopping."

i. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

a. Identify the system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical

Systems." Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for

painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

b. See Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for additional

identification requirements. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall

comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 2 level of administration including optional

identification requirements of this standard.

c. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type.

3.6 COMMISSIONING

a. Train Owner’s personnel in the procedures and schedules involved in operating,

troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance of the system. Provide a

minimum of 4 hours of training. Set-up in two two-hour sessions.

b. Schedule training with Owner through the Architect, with at least seven days advance

notice.

c. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested by the Architect within one year of date of

Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, resetting

matching transformer taps, and adjusting controls to suit actual occupied conditions.

Provide up to three visits to the sit for this purpose.


Project No.: 9161-000 June 30, 2015


3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

a. Prior to final acceptance, clean system components and protect from damage and

deterioration.

3.8 WIRING INFORMATION

a. Wiring runs for new installation shall be installed with good wiring installation

practices. Switches, connectors, jacks, receptacles, conduit, outlets, cable terminations

shall be clearly, logically and permanently marked.

b. Cables shall be neatly grouped and bundled to provide a workmanlike appearance.

c. When more than one loudspeaker is used in the same area, all speakers in that area must be

connected in phase with each other.

d. Shield drain wires should only be grounded at the main equipment rack or ground buss. On

single speaker runs the shield drain wire should be cut off and taped at the speaker. On

multiple speaker runs the shield must be tied through each speaker and taped and must not

touch ground. The shield drain wire should be cut off and taped at the last speaker.

e. Loudspeaker cable shall be as herein before specified and shall be manufactured by West

Penn, Belden, or approved equal. Furnish and install all necessary interconnecting wire for

the program system.

f. Certain “Inherent Characteristics” of the system require special attention during all phases of

installation. Install all system components and associated wiring per the instructions of the

manufacturer or his authorized distributors recommendations. All conductors and wiring

must be sufficiently isolated from the magnetic field produced by alternating current, or any

current produced by any other unrelated wiring that would interfere with the performance of

the system. Codes and conditions may require changes to the cabling system. Per Article

760 of the National Electric Code, provide an earth ground connection, preferably a #6

copper, independent of the third wire of the electric circuit. This #6 copper conductor should

be run from the main control for the system to the earth ground, at the electric entrance to

the building.

END OF SECTION



ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS 281000 - 1

SECTION 28 10 00 – ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The Access Control System shall control and monitor portals in the terminal and process

areas, office areas, and secure core space. The access control shall provide access control,

badging, and monitoring functions as well as integrate to the Video Management System

(VMS) as well as other systems as specified. Smart Cards shall be utilized along with an

individualized PIN to require two forms of credentials at each access point.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. See Specification 27 01 00.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. See Specification 27 15 00. In addition, the following shall apply:

B. The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The

publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.

1. Checkpoint Design Guide 2015.02.20 Revision 6.0 – Airport Technical Design Standards

2. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) 800 series.

3. Integrated Security System Standard for Airport Access Control, RTCA /DO230B dated

June 19, 2008

4. HSPD-12 – Homeland Security Presidential Directive 12: Policy For a Common

Identification Standard for Federal Employees and Contractors – August 27, 2004

1.4 DEFINITIONS

See Specification 27 15 00 Section 1.3.

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. General: All systems will comply with HSPD-12, FIPS Pub 201 policies, Government Smart

Card Interoperability Specification (GSC-IS V2.1) and GSA Schedule 70 for products and

services.

1. The Airport has an existing Johnson Controls P2000 Security System. All products,

controllers, readers and components must be a part of the Johnson Controls P2000

Security System.




B. General: The Access Control System shall consist of Ethernet based, redundant, real-time host

processors/servers, two combination VMS/Access Control workstations and Ethernet based

intelligent field panels that interface with modules (reader and input/output) that connect

specified readers, portal input devices, portal output devices, monitor and control devices. The

system shall be capable of routing individual alarms to specific workstations.

C. Contractor shall provide a minimum of one-hour stand-by battery run time for all field panels,

network switches and lock power supplies. Batteries shall be supervised for failures while on

primary power. Battery failure outputs and low battery conditions shall be connected to the

access control to notify the system of the failure. Primary power shall be supervised to

indicate an “on battery” condition to the system. All power supplies shall be

connected to generator power in addition to the battery back-up indicated.

D. Work of this section includes all labor, materials, and software required for detailed technical

design, systems, installation, data entry and importation, programming, graphic entry and

importation, testing, commissioning, documentation and warranty of a complete and operating

Access Control System as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

E. This contract includes all work necessary for a fully functional access control system for the

Terminal and secure areas. Work includes but is not limited to: furnishing all

equipment, cabling, installation, programming, and testing of all devices.

F. Door hardware and conduit rough-in has been provided by others and this contractor shall

coordinate with all other trades, contractors, general contractors, and projects as needed for a

fully functional system.

1.6 PURPOSE

A. The purpose of the access control is to ensure following:

1. Access by authorized individuals to Secure and SIDA areas, and any other areas the

airport may designate.

2. Prevention of unauthorized access by inadvertent means or unauthorized individuals.

3. Assure that an individual is immediately denied entry to a specified area when that

person’s access authority for that area is withdrawn.

4. Archiving of all access and alarm events providing audit trails for all these events.

5. Timely notification to airport authorities of all off-normal events or alarmed events.

6. Utilize existing ID badges for personnel working at the airport terminal.

1.7 RADIO/TELEVISION INTERFERENCE

A. See Specification Section 17 1500 Section part 3.3 D.




1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. See Specification Section 17 1500 Section 1.6.

B. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and

Division 1 Specifications Sections.

C. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings showing equipment/locations, and arrangements.



B. Contractor: In addition to the general requirement as stated in section 17 1500, the

Contractor must have been in the business of selling and installing similar systems for a

minimum of five (5) years. The Contractor shall have been actively engaged in installing,

maintaining and operating similar systems and services as outlined in this document. The

Contractor shall have a minimum of three (3) sites that are actively using the same system with

the same version of the software, and each of those sites must be currently in operation, and

have been in operation for at least the proceeding twelve (12) months. Of these three (3) sites,

at least one (1) must have 100 or more card readers active on the system together with 20 or

more cameras. The Contractor shall submit information regarding a minimum of three

(3) reference sites that are actively using the systems proposed by Contractor.

C. The Contractor shall include twenty (20) hours of on site assistance (excluding travel time) to

be used after the final acceptance of the system. This assistance time is in addition to

Warranty services and shall be performed on an on-call basis at the Owner’s request. The

Contractor shall upgrade each software package and firmware (where applicable) used in the

system to the latest version by the end of the warranty.

D. The Contractor shall offer an “Optional One (1) Year Extended Warranty” package

renewable for up to three (3) years to the Owner as shown in the unit pricing Section. The

Owner shall inform the Contractor of the acceptance or rejection of the first year of the package

at the time of final acceptance.

E. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of

security system components and accessories.

F. UL Compliance and Labeling: Provide system components, which are UL-listed and labeled.






1.11 WARRANTY

A. See Specification Section 17 1500 Section 1.6.I.

B. Period: The Contractor shall guarantee all labor, workmanship, and materials for a period of

one (1) year from the date of final acceptance or opening day – whichever occurs last. Should a

failure occur within the first year to the system, the Contractor shall provide all labor and

materials necessary to restore the system to the condition required for the final test and

acceptance for this Contract, at no cost to the Owner. When spare equipment is used

to provide system fixes, the Contractor shall replace spare equipment used in order to maintain a

constant on-site spare parts inventory. Warranty work shall include preventative and routine

maintenance work in addition to emergency warranty work. Emergency warranty work

shall include the repair or replacement of components which fail during the warranty period

excluding equipment damaged or rendered unserviceable due to apparent and provable misuse,

abuse, vandalism or negligence by Airport employees or the using public. Apparent and

provable as used herein shall mean that the physical evidence indicates what and who caused

the damage, e.g., lightning strike, vehicular damage, someone other than the Contractor’s

technician, etc.

C. Extended Warranty/Maintenance Agreement: Contractor shall provide, as a separate line item

cost in their proposal, a price for an extended Warranty and Operations Maintenance Services

Agreement for all of the access control System as a whole.

1.12 TRAINING

A. Provide system operation and administration/ maintenance training for Airport personnel. Two

(2) categories of system training shall be provided. System operational training and

administration/ maintenance training shall be provided. Training shall be provided

multiple times and at the intervals specified below. For each time that training is

provided, two (2) sessions of each category of training shall be held. One (1) session shall be

provided during daytime working hours, and one session during evening working hours, with

specific days, work shifts, and hours for training to be selected by the Airport. Training must be

in a modular format and shall provide separate areas of training materials specific to

administration, operation, and maintenance. Training materials shall be provided to the

Airport ten (10) working days in advance of the training courses. Training sessions and

intervals shall be as follows:

1. System Pre-Acceptance training – shall be provided two (2) weeks before acceptance

testing and system utilization by the Airport.

2. Follow-up Training Session – shall be provided between fifteen (15) and sixty (60) days

after pre-acceptance training, with times and dates to be selected by the Airport.

3. Factory Certification Training – Manufacturer’s factory certification training shall

be provided (at the site) for a minimum of two (2) Airport technicians and two (2) Airport

IT personnel. This training shall provision for the Airport technicians and IT

personnel to provide service to the system during the warranty period (when required)

without voiding the conditions of the warranty.




1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1.14 MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT


1.15 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. General: The security access control system shall provide the following card access control

system objectives:

1. Access Control.

2. Alarm Monitoring.

3. Cardholder Management.

4. Key Management.

5. System Administration.

6. Screen/Forms Creation.

7. Graphical Map Creation.

8. Data Import.

9. Data Export.

B. Access Control:

1. Controlled entry, via access card readers and PIN, of only authorized personnel to

secured areas based on cardholder information entered and stored in the system database.

2. The access request response time from card presentation, database verification, to

electric lock/unlock shall be no more than one (1) second in normal operating mode on a

fully loaded system.

3. All access requests, both authorized and denied, shall be sent to the host for storage and

annunciation, as required, with the cardholder number, name, and access point/area

where access was attempted or gained.

4. The system shall annunciate all alarms at the alarm monitoring workstations within one

(1) second of the alarm being initiated.

5. The system shall provide for automatic lock/unlock of access-controlled doors on

a scheduled basis using time zones.

6. The operating mode of access-controlled doors shall be indicated as locked, unlocked, or

system controlled. The door status shall be indicated as open or closed.

7. A cardholder call-up feature shall be included that allows the quick search and

display of images in the database.

8. An audit function shall be available for System Operators to locate and track activity on

specific cardholders or card readers from the database.

9. The access control shall offer an individually selectable door shunt time to allow persons

with disabilities additional time to access a portal and an extended shunt time to allow

additional time to pass through the door before alarm. This shall be selectable by

cardholder and shall meet all of the requirements as set forth in the Americans with

Disabilities Act.




10. Alarm Monitoring: The system is used for graphical alarm monitoring. Map

Configuration software must have capabilities to create maps of their facility and to

attach icons to those maps. The map import function shall also provide for

import of static drawing files from AutoCAD® in either DWG or DXF formats or

drawing files from other industry standard CADD and drawing programs such as

MicroStation. The system shall provide for nesting of maps with increased resolution

with each level of nested map. The system shall also provide dynamic map zoom

capability, allowing the operator to use the mouse to window an area of interest for zoom.

11. Alarms shall be prioritized. The alarm-monitoring screen shall provide information

about the time and location of the alarm, along with its priority. The alarm monitoring

screen shall be able to sort pending and/or insert new alarms based on any of the

following attributes: priority, date/time, Intelligent Field Panel (IFP), card reader, or

card holder. Date/time sorts must be user selectable to be either ascending or

descending and must have the option of displaying the seconds of the minute in which the

alarm arrived into the system.

12. The system shall provide for alarm monitoring and/or transaction reporting for specific

events, such as, but not limited to the following:

a. Duress condition with duress button as noted on plans.

b. Anti-pass back violation.

c. Rejected access request.

d. Invalid PIN

e. Card reader tamper.

f. Card reader off-line.

g. Controller cabinet tampers.

h. SNMP network alarms.

i. Commercial AC power failure.

j. Controller communications failure.

k. Low battery at UPS power supply.

l. Monitoring of door devices (door position, magnetic lock bond sensor, tamper

switches, etc.)

m. Monitoring of miscellaneous devices (duress alarm buttons, key-switch position,

and other contact closure devices, etc.)

n. The system must allow unique emergency instructions to be specified for each type

of alarm. If components of the system fail for any reason the system shall be

capable of informing the operator of their impact to other down-stream or

connected devices, this notification should be done through the GUI with a change

in the graphics of specifically impacted components. For example, the loss of an

Intelligent Field Panel should notify the personnel monitoring the system of what

is controlled by that device, be programmed with instructions of what to do for

this event, and show the portals or devices affected as off-line on the graphic maps

as well as the system device tree.

o. The system shall allow masking and unmasking (shunt/enable) of alarm points

manually by the operator, automatically by time zone, automatically by the

activation of another alarm point, or, where required, by a cardholder from a reader

keypad. The system shall not allow an alarm point to be masked if the alarm point

is in a trouble condition.

p. All alarm points shall be individually annunciated upon any change of state.

Alarm contacts shall not be connected in parallel or series in zones, unless




specifically shown on the contract drawings or stated herein. Double doors with

alarm contacts on each leaf of the double door unit may be wired in series, for that

double door unit.

C. Cardholder Management: The access control shall include a cardholder management system

integrated with the access control. This cardholder management functionality must allow the

enrollment of cardholders into the database, capturing of images and signatures,

and import/export of employee data. This functionality shall also allow the System

Operator to assign or modify access rights of a cardholder.

D. Each card and cardholder shall be entered into the database prior to use. Each card can be

manually disabled at any time without the requirement to delete the card. Each card can then be

subsequently re-enabled at a later time.

E. Card records shall include the entry of activation and deactivation dates to provide for the

automatic enabling and expiring of the card record.

F. The system shall provide the capability of setting a parameter of days whereby cards will be

automatically disabled if they are not used at all for access for the preset number of days (i.e. 30

days, 60 days, etc.). Any card can be subsequently re-enabled at anytime.

G. Security Directive SD 1542-04-08C - Database Field Requirements: The badging system shall

include the provisions for storing all data base field requirements based on the latest

TSA Security Directive SD 1542-04-08C that was issued November 3rd, 2006. Badging

software shall assemble and export the required fields in the format stated in the directive as

well as meet all other requirements.

H. Access Levels: The access level will determine the doors and times a cardholder is authorized to

pass through an access control controlled portal. Two (2) methods shall be provided: a

global specification for general use and a method specific to individual cardholders, intended

for customizing access levels where necessary.

I. Asset Management: The access control shall provide an asset management database that

shall be integral to the access control system database. The following items shall be included

in this tracking of assets.

1. Keys: This function shall document the assignment of keys to personnel as part of the

badge/ cardholder enrollment process.

2. Vehicle Permits: This function shall allow for the vehicle permits to be assigned to the

cardholder along with all pertinent information of the vehicle and its association with a

company.

3. Authorized Signatures: Issuance of a badge to persons at the airport requires paperwork

that includes an authorized signature of airport management or management of the

company requesting a badge for their employee. The badging system shall include

database storage of authorizing signature images to provide automated signature

lookup for comparison with badging request paperwork documents. Signature image

lookup and retrieval shall be provided based on system operator entry of the

particular name of the individual signed on the paperwork. Lookup of all

individuals authorized to sign for a particular entity shall be possible based on entry of

the company name. Provide all recording devices and database configuration for entry,




storage and retrieval of signature images. Provide an electronic signature capture pad for

local (on-site) entry of signatures and a high-resolution scanner (minimum 600 x 600 dpi)

for entry of signatures that are mailed in.

4. Screens/Forms Creation: Should the system standard fields not be suitable, the system

shall provide a form Designing and Editing Module that give System

Administrators the ability to modify any standard field to customize the card holder

screens as desired. The system shall also allow the System Administrators to add custom

fields in addition to any standard fields on a minimum of sixteen pages of information.

User defined fields shall not be predefined, meaning only the labels can change while the

properties cannot.

5. Graphical Map Creation: The access control shall provide Graphical Map creation and

Editing Software that must allow the System Administrators to import

customized map backgrounds of their facility and to attach custom icons to those

maps.

6. Data Import: The access control shall support an import utility that will allow the

customer or reseller to import cardholder information into the system database.

7. System Administration: Access to perform System Administrative tasks such as

defining workstation & System Operator permissions set-up, access groups, time zones,

reports, maps, etc. is provided from any workstation on the network, with appropriate

administrative log-on password. The Contractor shall be responsible for the following

programming for all points on the system:

a. All controllers, field panels, card readers, input and output points.

b. Creation of Airport Facility alarm maps.

c. Alarm messages, defining CCTV coverage, what automatic events occurred

upon the alarm and providing the operator with “how to respond” instructions for

all points.

d. Graphical Map Creation: The access control provides Graphical Map

creation and Editing Software that allows the System Administrators to import

customized map backgrounds of their facility and to attach custom icons to those

maps

e. Data Import: The access control supports an import utility that will allow the

customer or reseller to import cardholder information into the system database.

f. Access Levels: The Contractor shall program all access levels into the system and

the creation of generic users profiles and user groups. The access levels

and generic profiles shall be coordinated with all users of the system

including but not limited to Airport personnel and Customs & Border

Protection.

g. System Reports: System database software shall provide capability for the operator

to create custom Crystal Reports formats based on any combination of the database

fields from any of the database tables. Appropriate latest version of Crystal

Reports shall be provided and follow the same licensing requirements as the rest of

the system. The operator shall be able to create queries via point and click mouse

selection from a list of the available fields within the database. Operator shall be

able to define a range of time for the report. Operator shall have the option of

selecting from a list of filters to further refine reporting capabilities. The

system shall be configured to provide standard reports, which shall include

the following queries as the minimum list of standard reports:

1) Active Badge Report by company.




2) Lost Badge Report.

3) Active Secure Area Badge Report.

4) Inactive Secure Area Badge Report.

5) Notification of Expiration Report (active badges that will expire within a

user defined time frame).

6) Stop List of non-Secure Area Badges.

7) Stop List of Secure Area Badges.

8) Company Report List (list of all companies in the database).

9) Operator Activity Report.

10) Secure Area Access Granted Report (in alpha by name, company name, and/

or badge number order).

11) Non-Secure Area Access Granted Report.

12) Access denied report.

13) Alarm Report.

14) Alarm Acknowledged report.

15) Selected Activity Report.

16) Badge Activity Report (badge trace).

17) Asset Report (A listing of all assets assigned to a company or person).

18) All reports shall include totals by category and the total number of records

for the entire database. System report configuration shall provide the

ability to run reports for any company or all companies. Reports shall

be configurable based on a beginning and ending dates and by user-

defined time frame within a 24-hour period.

1.16 HARDWARE ARRANGEMENTS

A. The names assigned to the equipment in this section and the methods are intended to describe a

generic, distributed intelligence access control component.



Security System.

B. Intelligent Field Panels: (IFP) A distributed intelligence processor that stores the cardholder

database to grant or deny access, monitors system activity, and provides data

communications interface between Input/Output Panels and the access control System Host

CPUs via Ethernet connection. This device is intended to be located in TR107 and connected

via a contractor-provided Category 6 cable to the airport network.

C. Portal Interface Panel or Module: A passive junction point that connects the portal

devices into the access control System.

D. Input/Output Panel or module: A modular card that provides for input and output device

connection to the access control System. This device is intended to be located in the LAN

Room.

E. Card Reader with keypad: A portal device to read encoded portable credentials.




F. Electric Strike (ES): A device to secure the portal and allow passage through the portal by

means of remote control.

G. Balanced Magnetic Switch (BMS): A UL 634 Level 2 device used to monitor the open/closed

status of the portal.

H. Lock Status Switch: A device used to monitor secured/unsecured status of the portal. For

magnetic type locks, this is often referred to as a bond sensor.

I. Request to Exit Device: A device used to allow egress through a secured portal without

creating an alarm condition.

1.17 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. General: The access control’s primary function shall be to regulate access through specific

portals to secured areas.

B. Access Control: The systems primary purpose shall be to provide access control.

C. Alarm Monitoring: The system shall be used for graphical alarm monitoring. Alarms are to

be prioritized. The alarm-monitoring screen shall provide information about the time and

location of the alarm, along with its priority. The alarm monitoring screen must be able to sort

pending and/or insert new alarms based on any of the following attributes: priority, date/time,

Intelligent Field Panel, card reader, or card holder. Date/time sorts must be user selectable to

be either ascending or descending and must have the option of displaying the seconds of the

minute in which the alarm arrived into the system. The Contractor shall coordinate alarm level,

text descriptions, etc. with the airport and enter the information into the system as a part of

the system expansion. All maps required for the system shall be entered and populated as

required for a fully functional system.

D. The system must allow unique emergency instructions to be specified for each type of alarm.

The Contractor shall coordinate the instructions with the Airport and enter these into the system

as a part of the system installation.

E. Access Levels: The access level will determine the doors and times a cardholder is authorized

to pass through an access control controlled portal. The Contractor shall coordinate the

access level layout with the airport and enter the access levels into the system. Coordinate

requirements with the Airport and TSA.

F. The Management Station is equipped with a verification reader and peripheral devices.

G. Screens/Forms Creation: The Contractor shall add any additional fields required by the users

during installation of the system and project specific fields associated the utilization of smart

cards and multiple biometric technologies.

H. Graphical Map Creation: The Contractor shall create all maps required by the system

installation. The Contractor shall, at a minimum, import customized map backgrounds of the

facility and to attach custom icons to those maps. Coordinate requirements with the airport.




1.18 OPERATOR INTERFACE

A. The Airport has an existing Johnson Controls P2000 Security System. All products, controllers,

readers and components must be a part of the Johnson Controls P2000 Security System.

1.19 SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

A. General:



Security System.

1.20 INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Contractor shall provide all cost associated with the interfaces to other system as

specified. All programming, customs configuration, development, implementation, and

testing shall be provided. Final Acceptance will not be given until all interfaces have

been demonstrated to be fully functional and meeting all requirements stated.

B. Video Management System (VMS): The access control shall interface with the VMS so

that upon alarm, the system shall automatically call up the closest CCTV camera(s) live view on

a selected monitor(s) and activate PTZ preset (for PTZ type cameras) so that camera is pointed

in the direction of where the alarm occurred. The intent is to provide automatic call-up of

the closest camera when an alarm is triggered by the access control so that responding operators

can view and track associated live video activity related to the cause of the alarm. In

additions access control events shall be associated with related digital video recordings of the

alarm area. The intent is to provide tagging of associated recorded video and allow for

playback of this video from within the access control alarm monitoring and reporting software

applications. The access control shall also be capable of causing changes to VMS parameters

such as frames per second and resolution based on alarm events. Include necessary CCTV /

digital video management software module/option and all costs associated with this work shall

be included. From any access control workstation both live and playback views from the VMS

shall be supported as well as PTZ camera control. This interface shall be accomplished via

software programmable data type communications so that software changes within the access

control to change or add linked video via new cameras can be accomplished without requiring

any re-wiring of the system. The Access Control head end shall be capable of interfacing with

the VMS system head end using either database events and triggers or XML interface.

Integration utilizing relays or hardwired input/output based method shall not be allowed.

1.21 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The The Airport has an existing Johnson Controls P2000 Security System. All products,

controllers, readers and components must be a part of the Johnson Controls P2000 Security

System.

B. APPLICATION DESIGN




C. The Airport has an existing Johnson Controls P2000 Security System. All products, controllers,


1.22 OPERATING SYSTEM



1.23 CLIENT/SERVER RELATIONAL DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (RDBMS)



1.24 INTERNAL SYSTEM SECURITY PROVISIONS

A. Supervised Wiring: Selected field wiring shall be supervised. Cutting, shorting or

altering connections of any wire listed as supervised below shall be detected, and activate an

alarm condition at system workstations. Provide wiring supervision for the following functions:

1. Tamper Switches.

2. Panic and duress alarms.

3. Balanced Magnetic Switches.

B. Multiple Contractor User privilege levels will likely be established during the installation

and testing periods of this Project. As a condition of system final acceptance, all Contractor

User privileges shall be removed from the system, unless otherwise authorized in

writing, by the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Power: All access control equipment shall operate on 120-VAC or PoE (Power over Ethernet

Protocol). Any special power treatment required, such as filtering or spike elimination that

may be required for proper operation and protection of the access control system, shall be

provided with the system. The project site is in an area prone to lightning. Contractor

shall provide lightning surge suppressors on all exterior copper circuits to prevent lightning

damage to the equipment.

B. Backup Power: access control field equipment shall be supplied from supervised power

supplies with battery backup. Power supplies shall be located within communication room and

shall be tied onto the emergency power circuits access control servers shall be fed from UPS

units. Both UPS and power supplies with battery back up methods shall provide for a

minimum of (1) one hour with 100% spare capacity for future growth.




C. Hardware: Provide a distributed access control system as required for a complete operating

system as described herein and shown on the Drawings.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS



B. TWIC and FIPS 201 COMPLIANCE

1. The entire system shall be capable of supporting the latest FIPS 201/PIV-I smart cards.

The intent is that the system as specified will work with existing cards utilizing either

DESFire compliant or HID iClass smart cards to be utilized initially upon completion of

this project but support the ability of the current and any future FIPS 201/PIV-I compliant

cards to be read, used, and managed by the system at the same time will operating

with the Customs and Border Protection issued badges. FIPS 201/PIV-I Compliance

shall be defined as:

a. All provided card readers shall be able to read the current FIPS 201 PIV card

configurations as defined in the latest FIPS 201 documentation.

b. All installed card readers shall be able to read any future changes to the FIPS 201

cards. Readers with either flash upgradeable firmware or Manufacturer’s

free swap replacement programs are considered approved.

c. All reader to reader panel, reader panel to IFP, and IPF to host communication

protocols shall be able to identify and transfer the necessary FIPS 201 card

information for the purpose of physical access control applications.

d. All IFP and associated hardware shall be able to identify and process the

necessary FIPS 201 card information for the purpose of physical access control

applications.

e. Badge input station application shall allow verification of a foreign FIPS-201

card. This includes but is not limited to: verification of card format authenticity

and verification of certificate authenticity.

f. Due to evolving changes to the FIPS 201 standard, if all other reader interface and

capabilities are met, then a manufacturer’s plan to provide FIPS 201 compliance

shall be acceptable.

C. Manufacturers::

1. Access Control System (software, controllers, and modules):

Johnson Controls P2000 Security System

2. Card Readers:

Johnson Controls P2000 Security System

3. Report Printer

a. HP

b. IBM

c. Lexmark

4. Flush Mounted balance magnetic switches:

a. GE Security – Sentrol




5. Surface and special application security switches:

a. GE Security – Sentrol

6. Power Supplies (controller, module, and door hardware):

a. Alarm Safe.

b. Altronix

7. Duress alarm buttons:

a. Dortronics Systems, Inc.

b. Locknetics

c. Securitron

8. Key Switches – Duress alarm disable/reset

a. Dortonics Systems, Inc.

b. Locknetics

c. Securitron

9. Visual and/or Audible Devices:

a. Wheelock

b. Pre-approved equal

2.3 SPARE PARTS

A. The Contractor shall furnish spare parts for the access control system. The intent of the

spare parts inventory is to allow the immediate replacement of failed or faulty components to

the lowest level of field repair to maintain system-operating integrity. Any spare parts used

throughout the duration of this Project shall be replaced prior to final acceptance.

Furnish spare parts as follows:

1. Processing Devices – Communications Control Panels, furnish one (1) spare.

2. Processing Devices – Intelligent Field Panels, furnish one of each type used in the

Project.

3. Processing Devices –Portal Interface Panels, furnish two (2) of each type used in the

Project.

4. Processing Devices – Input/Output Panels, furnish one of each type used in the Project.

5. Power supplies - furnish one of each type used in the Project

6. Devices - furnish one of each type used in the Project.

2.4 PROCESSING DEVICES






2.5 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM DEVICES

A. Duress Alarm Pushbutton: Provide pushbuttons as shown in the drawings for monitoring by the

access control system.

B. Smart Card Reader: Provide contactless smartcard reader.

C. Smart Card Readers with Keypad: Provide contactless smartcard reader/pin pads with the

following characteristics:

1. HID iClass or DESFire compliant contactless smartcard reader

2. FIPS 201 compliant hardware platform

3. Encryption: Triple DES or equal

4. Read Range: typical 1-inch, no less and ½-inch

5. ISO card compatibility:

a. Audible/Visual Alarm Units: Provide alarm indicator units at the door locations

indicated in the drawings.

b. Power Supplies: Power supplies (for active components and field devices):

Power supplies shall be located as needed per successful vendors’ system

architecture.

2.6 PROCESSING DEVICES



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF SECURITY SYSTEMS

A. General: The Contractor shall investigate the Site and become thoroughly familiar with the

construction site. The Contractor shall plan the new access control installation such that the

new access control system processing components are installed and tested for proper

communications before any portal or door is put under control of the new access control system.

B. Install security system in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions

and complying with applicable portions of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation".

C. Contractor shall be an authorized Software House reseller.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS

A. General: Installation of conductors shall comply with Division 27 Specification 1500

“Structured Cabling System”, and meet all applicable manufacturer recommendations,

local, state and national codes.




3.3 GROUNDING

A. Cable Shields: All shields and pair shields shall be grounded at one (1) point only. Cables that

originate from processing equipment and serve field devices shall be grounded to the signal

ground terminal in the processing equipment.

3.4 FINAL TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE

A. The Contractor shall develop a Final Test and Acceptance plan. The plan shall identify each

component of the system, intent of test, method or methods of test and expected results. Each

component listed in the plan shall include space for test party signatures, brief comments, time

of test and pass/fail check boxes. The plan shall be submitted to the Owner for approval or

comment. When Owner Test and Acceptance Plan comments are satisfied and the system is

operational, the testing may begin. The component tests shall be compared to the transaction

log for accuracy, queries shall be made to narrow the test report to the test cards, card holders,

operator responses and portals involved in the test. All components must be checked “pass”,

signed by all parties and agree with the transaction log to be complete.

3.5 SYSTEM AVAILABILITY TEST

A. The access control shall undergo a fourteen (14) day System Availability Test (SAT). The

operational demonstration period will start when all of the IFPs are on line with the host CPU,

the system is loaded with normal traffic, and shall continue for no less than fourteen

(14) consecutive days of successful system operation. Final system acceptance of the

entire Project shall be withheld until after successful completion and approval

of the fourteen (14) day operational demonstration report. This report shall be submitted

to the Owner within five (5) days from completion of the conclusion of the operational

demonstration period.

B. The purpose of the SAT is to demonstrate that the system is capable of maintaining a 99.9%

availability prior to final acceptance.

C. The SAT will be conducted while the system is in full operation.

D. The SAT shall utilize the Contractor's provided complement of spare parts to minimize

downtime due to lack of spare parts. The Contractor at his expense shall replace all such spare

parts used by the Contractor during the SAT.

E. Successful completion of the SAT is a prerequisite to final acceptance of the access control.

3.6 ACCEPTANCE

A. System warranty shall not start until acceptance. Acceptance will be withheld until the

following activities have been successfully completed:

1. Acceptance of all submittals.

2. Delivery of final documentation.




3. Successful SAT testing.

4. Successful training and demonstration, including operation of system using the manuals

and demonstration of fully functional system with interfaces.

Purging of Contractor User privileges.




VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 282300 - 1

SECTION 28 23 00 VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (VMS)

PART 1. GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. General Description: This specification section covers the furnishing and installation of a

complete low-voltage, enterprise-wide video management system (VMS) for the new

Concourse – Part 1 for the Fayetteville Regional Airport.

B. Contractor shall coordinate and furnish licenses and install VMS hardware devices,

monitoring stations, mounting brackets, power supplies, and other components of the

system as shown and specified.

C. Furnish and install special boxes, miscellaneous cable, connectors, wiring, and

other accessories necessary to complete the system installation.

D. Outlets, junction boxes, pull boxes, conduit, connectors, wiring, and other accessories

necessary to complete the system installation, will be provided in accordance with the

projects’ Division 26, Electrical Work specifications, and coordinated with VMS

requirements.

E. Shall integrate with the Access Control System. See Section 28 10 00 for specifications. 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS

Provide the work in accordance with Section 28 10 00, Security System General Requirements.

1.3 GENERAL CONDITIONS

In accordance with Section 28 10 00, Security System General Requirements

1.4 RELATED WORK


1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS


1.6 PRECEDENCE

Obtain, read and comply with General Conditions and applicable sub-sections of the contract

specifications. Where a discrepancy may exist between any applicable sub-section and directions

as contained herein, this section shall govern. 1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS & EQUIPMENT SUBMITTAL


1.8 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS




In accordance with Section 28 10 00, Security System General Requirements 1.9 WARRANTY

In accordance with Section 28 10 00, Security System General Requirements 1.10 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE


1.11 TRAINING


1.12 OWNER’S RIGHT TO USE EQUIPMENT

The Owner reserves the right to use equipment, material and services provided as part of this work

prior to Acceptance of the Work, without incurring additional charges and without

commencement of the Warranty period. 1.13 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS, VIDEO SURVEILLANCE

SYSTEM A. General

1. The following information is provided to establish required system performance for

the complete operating Video Surveillance System (VMS) system for the

Fayetteville Regional Airport (FAY). Some of the performance requirements noted

herein are supported and supplied by new equipment and software which shall be

provided by the Contractor under this scope of work. Contractor shall provide

equipment, miscellaneous wiring and software programming at all sites as necessary

to provide a complete system as described herein and as shown on the drawings.

2. Contractor shall be responsible for providing equipment, licenses and software to

achieve the specified system performance described herein. Contractor shall provide

and install two workstations with dual 24” monitors, keyboards and mice.

B. Purpose

1. The System shall provide the ability to record images received from cameras located

throughout FAY Concourse A facility in a digital format.

2. The System shall allow operators to view live video images in single and

multiple- camera formats and retrieve the recorded video information, based on

parameters requested by the user.

C. Environment

1. The main video server shall be in a cabinet within the Main Telecom Room B130 but

shall also be fully integrated with the building Electronic Access Control systems and

the intrusion system. Refer to the drawings and Bid Instructions to determine the scope




limitations for this phase of work.

2. Central Administrative Post: A t e m p o r a r y S e c u r i t y M o n i t o r i n g S t a t i o n

s h a l l b e s e t u p f o r t h i s p r o j e c t . Contractor to provide two management

stations with 24” LCD color monitors. Monitors shall have, at a minimum, 1920 x 1200

resolution at 32 bit, 60 Hertz. System programming, configuration and control shall

occur at this location or as directed by the Owner.

3. Contractor to provide PoE switch in each cabinet/rack for all network cameras, VMS

devices, servers, storage devices. Provide connectivity to access control panels, alarm

panels and all security-related network attached devices.

4. Infrastructure and Connectivity

a. The video camera and processing components at each site shall utilize a

combination of standard copper cable, IP or wireless transmission schemes,

depending on individual site conditions.

b. Local Site: The Video System (VMS) Client Workstations shall reside on the

security LAN or network segment. Recording, live viewing, switching, long-

term storage, reviewing, and configuration shall be implemented over this

infrastructure. See Section 1.13.C.3

D. Attributes

1. General

a. The Video Management system (VMS), as part of the Airport Terminal

surveil lance system is new and shall communicate with the access

control software. Refer to Specification Section 28 10 00, Electronic Access

Control Software and Section 27 10 00 Structured Cabling for coordinating

information.

b. The system shall comprise of video clients, digital storage devices,

router/switches provided by the owner, and ancillary equipment assembled into a

fully operating system.

c. Field Components: Field Components shall comprise TCP/IP video cameras,

positioning devices, lenses, camera mounts and housings and other video system

devices and miscellaneous wiring as described herein and shown on the drawings.

d. Video Processing Components: Video processing components shall comprise

computer video servers, digital storage devices, computer video monitoring

stations, and other video processing devices as described herein and as needed to

provide the required functionality.

e. Quality: The initial quality/compression parameters shall be set as determined by

the Engineer and the Owner at the time of commissioning. Minimum video quality

shall be equivalent to D4 video quality, as judged by Owner and Owner’s

representatives.




2. Integrated Video Management System

a. The VMS / access control (Spec Section 28 10 00) shall support an integrated

Video Management recording solution that provides the following features and

capabilities:

1) Seamless integration with the access control

2) The Video Management Software (VMS) shall incorporate a modular

architecture and be able to support an unlimited number of cameras

3) The VMS shall be able to simultaneously record and display live video and

display recorded video

4) The VMS shall support both event based and continuous recording

5) The VMS shall mark all events and they shall be available for playback and

or archiving at any time

6) Video events shall be linked to access control events in the access control

database and only one database shall be acceptable for this interface.

7) User defined profiles for tailored granular access to configuration and

operation

8) Independent camera setup for, compression rate, brightness, contrast and

other factor setups.

9) The VMS system shall be provided with remote access software with unlimited

licenses for network-attached viewing.

b. access control Integration 1) Any alarm / event in the access control shall have the ability to be associated

with a digital video clip in real time. The VMS shall support user-defined pre

and post event recording and shall activate upon alarm.

2) Each camera shall be configurable for a 32 alphanumeric character name and

shall allow for the setup and adjustment of brightness, contrast, archiving,

motion detection, Pan / Tilt / Zoom, on a per camera basis.

3. Real Video Time Monitoring: The VMS shall allow monitoring of real time video

from any Alarm Monitoring client workstation. VMS and Camera status shall be

displayed on a System Hardware Tree.

4. Matrix View: The VMS shall support an advanced Matrix View of On-line camera

views. Up to 32 channels shall be able to be simultaneously displayed in the video

matrix. The 32 channels shall be any combination of Live or Recorded video.

5. Pan / Tilt / Zoom Control from Alarm Monitoring




a. Camera Control: Video cameras so equipped, shall be capable of pan/tilt/zoom

positioning and remote control functions. Video camera positioning and imaging

signals shall be transmitted by LAN networks as described herein, to permit

remote viewing and camera control “on demand” on any LAN-connected device,

from any location, with appropriate software and authorization.

6. Video Camera Groups / Video Camera Tours

a. The VMS shall support camera grouping to allow for video camera tours in the

access control Alarm Monitoring Module.

b. An unlimited number of camera groups shall be supported in the access control

and each camera group shall support an unlimited number of cameras. Cameras

shall have the ability to be placed into multiple camera groups.

c. The access control shall provide for video camera tours that rotate live video

between each of the cameras defined in the video camera group at a user

defined increment. The time increment shall be user definable in whole seconds.

7. Still Image Capture / Save: During playback or monitoring of video, the System

shall have the ability to create and save a still picture. This operation shall not

affect any other operation and shall not alter the recorded video. The file format

shall be an industry standard format allowing for file transfer via e-mail, printing or file

transfer to other media

8. Export Video Clip to File: The access control shall have to ability to save and export

recorded video to a file for the purpose of sharing and reviewing video clips. The start

and end times for each video segment shall be user defined. The exported video clip

shall be viewable via a standard Windows media player.

9. Video Loss Detection: The VMS access control shall detect video loss/Blackout from

any or all cameras and activate an alarm.

10. Automated Motion Video Searching

a. The VMS shall support advanced automated motion video searching against pre-

recorded video. The automated motion video search shall analyze frames in a video

segment to detect motion activity from image to image. It shall display thumbnail

images of the frames with activity, complete with a histogram depicting the relative

amount of activity within each frame.

b. The search shall be defined by selecting a specific camera and a specific time

period in which the suspected activity took place and all motion events associated

with that camera and time period shall be displayed in either a trace or thumbnail

format for review

11. System Redundancy:

a. System server shall be equipped with RAID 10 array hard drives to allow failed

hard drives to be “rebuilt” without loss of recorded information. Hard drives shall

be hot swap type.




12. Electronic Access Control System Integration: Integrate the VMS, with the

Electronic Alarm and Access Control Systems, in accordance with Security System

General Requirements, Section 28 10 00.

E. Functional Requirements

1. Video Recording Protocols: Initially, configure the system with the following

recording protocol definitions:

a. Recording Modes:

1) Time Lapse Mode: 7.5 frames per second (fps) per camera, at

normal compression. All cameras shall be continuously recorded at this rate.

2) Real Time Mode: 30 fps per camera at high quality compression

3) Alarm Mode: 15 fps per camera at high quality compression

4) Event Mode: 15 fps per camera at high quality compression

2. Views shall be retrieved on a camera-by-camera basis, and the individual frames shall

be connected, or “streamed”, to present a seamless series of frames for continuous

viewing. When retrieving views recorded in “normal mode”, the system shall

“hold” each frame for a sufficient period, to provide a smooth visual presentation to the

user. Pictures may also be retrieved on a single-shot basis.

3. Video Recall: The system shall recall the video from any recorded event within the last

30 days within five seconds upon request from any Video Workstation. This

information shall be stored on the VMS hard drives.

4. System Integration Functions

a. When the access control detects an alarm or event it will send an alarm message

to the VMS to change the recording parameters of the camera or cameras viewing

the alarm based on the desired recording protocol.

b. When the access control system detects an alarm it will send a message to the

access control server to be forwarded and processed by the VMS. Alarm events

will notify the operator and be displayed on a map in a new viewing window

on the access control workstation.

5. Recording and Retrieval

a. Provide a minimum hard-disk storage of 30 days of recording, for cameras

installed as a part of this project. Storage media shall be located in the security

equipment room, communications room, security monitoring center, or where

shown on the plans. Storage capacity shall be calculated based on the following

parameters:

1) Time Lapse Mode (1 frame per second (fps) per camera, normal

compression): All cameras, 24-hours per day, 7-days per week, at high




resolution, plus;

2) Real-Time Mode (30fps per camera at high-quality compression): 10% of the

total number of cameras, 2-hours per day, 7-days per week, at high

resolution.

b. The Server shall operate on the First In/First Out principle: when the designated

storage area is filled, subsequent recordings shall overwrite the oldest recording.

c. Video files shall be stored in a manner such that pictures may be searched and

retrieved by direct access from the Server or Video Clients, based upon user entry

of any one or more of the following parameters:

1) camera name,

2) time,

3) date,

4) alarm/event trigger,

5) comment/bookmark

6. Forensic Recording: Provide a means of recording video clips for transport such as

DVD or DVD-ROM, for forensic and evidentiary purposes.

7. Software routines required to accomplish the required functionality will be

fully developed, installed, tested and supported by the Contractor and Manufacturer.

8. Alarm Mode

a. One or more cameras may be associated with a controlled door or gate, or alarm

monitored portal or area.

b. Associated cameras shall be programmed to be automatically pre-positioned and

"called" into alarm mode by access control event commands, to be displayed in

full-screen view on a video workstation and recorded in “real-time”.

c. The system shall allow an individual alarm input to initiate pre-positioning,

viewing and recording sequences of two or more alarm point-associated cameras,

simultaneously. When two or more cameras are simultaneously designated for

event recording, they shall each be recorded in “real-time” mode.

9. Video Storage/Retrieval

a. Stored video will be time/date stamped and synchronized with the access control

clock.

b. The system shall retrieve any stored video based on time/date parameters entered

by the operator.

c. The system shall be capable of performing activity detection on stored video. Any

recorded video channel may be selected and a zone may be selected within the view

of the camera scene. The stored video can then be searched and will only

display clips of video that identify motion in the selected zone.




10. Surveillance/Display Modes

a. Cameras may be used for assessment, to view areas of concern and provide

video escort functions.

b. The system shall process video signals for primary display on video workstation

display monitors. Video signals may be displayed in single or multi-view formats.

c. Selection of display formats shall be under the control of the operators, via their

local video monitoring software, video control keyboards, or by

computer- controlled graphical user interfaces.

d. Display Modes: The system shall enable one or more cameras from any

combination of areas or sites to be displayed on one or more video workstations or

display devices, simultaneously.

1) Single Camera Display: Any individual camera may be called-up and

displayed on a video workstation, and by any other properly configured

computer or LAN device, with VMS monitoring software.

2) Multiple Display: Up to 16 cameras may be called-up and displayed

simultaneously on each video monitor with VMS monitoring

software. Cameras may be called-up for multiple display without regard to

their location in the system, or on the network, such that each of the 16

cameras may be from 16 different sites or areas, displayed simultaneously on a

video workstation.

e. The system shall support independently configured display modes at each video

workstation or LAN device, simultaneously. Display mode configured at one video

monitoring device shall not affect the others.

11. Switching and Control

a. The routing of video input signals (encoders, cameras, etc.) to the appropriate

video processing device (video monitors, video workstations, Email, PDA’s)

shall be a function of the video encoder/decoders, video workstations and VMS

software.

b. Operator Control: Cameras and monitors may be controlled individually or in

pre- programmed groups by automatic or manual means including, but not limited

to:

1) Event-initiated activity

2) Standard video switcher keyboards, compatible with positionable devices and

the video management software.

3) Graphical user interfaces, including the access control and video

management software map screens, with related mouse or computer keyboard

interfaces. PART 2. PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL




Product Acceptability: The Products section contains lists of acceptable products. If product

substitutions are proposed, they must be made based upon a comparison of equivalence to the

product specified. Considerations may include but shall not be limited to functional, physical,

aesthetic and/or interface aspects. The Owner shall be the sole judge of whether or not a

submitted substitution is deemed to be "equivalent" to that specified. 2.2 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE (VMS)

A. Approved Manufacturers:

1. Johnson Controls P2000 VMS enterprise Solution

B. Video Cameras

1. All video cameras shall be:

a. Pelco TCP/IP Digital Video cameras or approved equivalent.

PART 3. EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

In accordance with Section 28 10 00, Security System General Requirements. 3.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION:

A. Camera recording and display configurations shall be arranged via a combination of the

Video Server, Video Monitoring Workstation, and LAN/Wireless LAN network.

B. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to determine the required pre-programmed

surveillance and event-initiated configurations. 3.3 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM INTEGRATION

Provide Access Control system integration equipment, software and programming, in accordance

with Section 28 10 00, Security System General Requirements. 3.4 EQUIPMENT, RACK AND CONSOLE INSTALLATION

All server equipment shall be housed in each cabinet.

3.5 GROUNDING PROCEDURES

Provide grounding of all systems and equipment in accordance with Section 28 10 00, Security

System General Requirements. 3.6 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION PRACTICES




Provide only miscellaneous wire and cable installation in accordance with Section 27 10 00,

Structured Cabling General Requirements. 3.7 DATABASE PREPARATION, CHECKING, AND ACTIVATION

Provide database preparation, checking and activation for systems and equipment in accordance

with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.8 START-UP RESPONSIBILITY

Provide start-up services for all systems and equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations. 3.9 PRELIMINARY INSPECTION AND TESTING

Provide preliminary inspection and testing services for systems and equipment in accordance with

Testing and Commissioning, Section 28 10 00. 3.10 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TESTING AND ADJUSTING PROCEDURES

A. Provide performance testing, burn-in, and adjusting of systems and equipment in

accordance with Testing and Commissioning, Section 28 10 00.

B. VMS Performance Testing

1. Demonstrate acceptable picture quality and camera views on each camera.

2. Demonstrate acceptable picture quality on each video monitoring workstation, and

display devices accessible over the Wireless LAN.

3. Demonstrate no tearing of video is observed while Pan-Tilt –Zoom cameras are being

repositioned.

4. Demonstrate switching, recording and playback functions for the video server.

5. Demonstrate camera positioning functionality, on pan/tilt/zoom cameras, throughout the

entire range of possible camera positions.

6. Ensure primary views are acceptable. Demonstrate the view obtained by each pre-

programmed camera position.

7. Demonstrate automatic event-initiated recording sequences, including camera pre-

positioning, where applicable. 3.11 BURN-IN PERFORMANCE PERIOD

Provide a burn-in performance period to demonstrate the stability of the system, in accordance

with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.12 COMMISSIONING AND VALIDATION

A. Provide commissioning and validation services to prove and improve the effectiveness of the

system, in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.




B. Coordinate with the Owner, or the Owner’s representative, for the provision of these services.

3.13 FINAL PROCEDURES

Perform final procedures in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

END OF SECTION


DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS 283111 - 1

SECTION 283111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire-alarm control unit. 2. Manual fire-alarm boxes. 3. System smoke detectors. 4. Heat detectors. 5. Notification appliances. 6. Voice evacuation/messaging system. 7. Remote annunciator. 8. Addressable interface device. 9. Digital alarm communicator transmitter. 10. System printer.

1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS:

A. North Carolina State Building Code, 2012 Edition

B. North Carolina Fire Prevention Code, 2012 Edition

C. North Carolina Mechanical Code, 2012 Edition

D. North Carolina Electrical Code, 2011 Edition

E. NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code, 2007 Edition

F. ANSI/ASME AII Safety Code for elevators and escalators.

G. Factory Mutual (FM), FM AG Approval Guide

H. NFPA Standards 101, 1221 and 90A, latest adopted edition.

I. National Electrical Code, latest adopted edition.



J. Local Building Code.

K. Requirements of local Fire Departments.

L. North Carolina Department of Insurance, Office of the State Fire Marshall- Fire Detection and Alarm Systems (FDAS), dated 2008.

1. The contractor shall obtain a copy of the FDAS publication and is hereby notified that these specifications contain all relevant portions of the FDAS and the contractor shall comply with all applicable sections of these specifications and the FDAS. Where conflicts occur between these specifications and the FDAS the FDAS shall have precedence.

M. UL Publication.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

C. FAAP: Fire alarm annunciator panel.

D. FACP: Fire alarm control panel.

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Provide a complete, non-coded, UL certified addressable, microprocessor-based fire alarm system with addressable initiating devices, non-addressable emergency voice alarm notification appliances, and monitoring and control devices as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.

B. System covered by this section shall include all labor including installation, configuration and programming, equipment and materials necessary for a complete, operable and fully functional fire alarm system as shown on drawings and specified herein.


A. Seismic Performance: Fire-alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.




1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Engineer.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design on the specific fire alarm system being installed on this project.

1) The factory training and certification must have occurred within the most recent 24 months.

2) Copies of the certification must be part of the Contractor’s submittal to the Engineer prior to installation.

3) The submittal will not be approved without this certification.

b. In addition to the requirement for factory certification the person preparing the shop drawings shall be a NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. The submittal shall include all required items as indicated below. Partial submittals are not acceptable and will be rejected.

1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits.

a. End Of Line (EOL) voltage drop must not exceed 14% of the expected battery voltage.

b. Submit calculations indicating compliance with this criteria.

3. Include battery-size calculations.

a. Battery:

1) Sizing calculations showing compliance for:

a) Provide 24-hours battery capacity while in the alarm mode for 5-minutes.

b) Provide battery capacity for 15-minutes while in the alarm mode for fire alarm systems having a voice alarm/signaling system.

2) Submit battery information indicating the rating of each battery that will be used on this project.

4. Voice Evacuation/messaging system.



a. Submit calculations to support the intial voice evacuation speaker power settings (wattage).

b. Submit calculations for each voice evacuation/messaging system power supply panel indicating the initial connected load and 50% spare capacity.

5. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

6. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

7. Include Floor Plans:

a. Indicate final outlet locations and routing of cable and conduits.. b. Show locations for isolation modules, terminal cabinet boxes, FACP, FAAP, NAP

power supplies, and main FACP battery cabinet. Isolation modules shall not be located in the FACP.

c. Show address of each addressable device.

8. Include riser diagram:

a. Indicate fire alarm system per the planned installation. b. Indicate wiring circuits, and wire sizes. c. Indicate Terminal cabinet locations.

9. Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, grounding schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.

10. Device Address List:

a. Coordinate with final system programming. b. Coordinate with Owner for final naming convention and room names to identify

location of devices.

11. System Operation Description:

a. Detailed description for this Project, including method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs.

b. Manufacturer’s standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.

D. Operating Instructions: For mounting at the FACP.

E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of system components certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

F. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. Comply with NFPA 72.



G. Maintenance Data: For fire alarm systems to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Comply with NFPA 72.

H. Submissions to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for Submittals specified in Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures,” make an identical submission to authorities having jurisdiction. Include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to depict component locations to facilitate review. Resubmit if required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to Engineer for review.

I. Certificate of Completion: Comply with NFPA 72.

J. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire-alarm control unit, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.




K. Field quality-control reports.

L. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.

3. Record copy of site-specific software. 4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of

the same name and include the following:

a. Frequency of testing of installed components. b. Frequency of inspection of installed components. c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. d. Manufacturer's user training manuals.

5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. 6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit. 7. Copy of NFPA 25.

M. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.



2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files.

3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.


A. Installer Qualifications: All persons terminating wiring, installing fire alarm system devices and /or programming the fire alarm systems shall meet the following minimum requirements:

1. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design on the specific fire alarm system being installed on this project.

a. The factory training and certification must have occurred within the most recent 24 months. The manufacturer must sign the certification certifying the installer’s compliance with their requirements.

b. Copies of the certification must be part of the Contractor’s submittal to the Engineer prior to installation.

B. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from single source from single manufacturer.

C. For any fire alarm component that will be connected to an existing fire alarm system the components shall be compatible with, and operate as, an extension of existing system.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by compliance with the Engineer’s witness test. Refer to Part 3 – Execution.


A. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of fire-alarm service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Owner's written permission.


A. Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until new equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN



SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service and label existing fire-alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building.

B. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of new fire-alarm system, remove existing disconnected fire-alarm equipment and wiring.

1.11 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Comply with UL 864.

B. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for one year.

C. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within one year from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software.

1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.



1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 1 unit.

2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 1 unit.

3. Smoke Detectors, Heat Detectors: Quantity equal to 6 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than 1 unit of each type.

4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 6 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than 1 unit of each type.

5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamper proofed components. 6. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system. 7. Manual Stations:

a. Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount installed.

8. Indoor Notification Appliance:

a. Quantity equal to 4 percent of amount installed.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Being listed as an acceptable Manufacturer in no way relieves obligation to provide all equipment and features in accordance with these specifications.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Edwards Systems Technology; Unit of General Signal. 2. NOTIFIER; a Honeywell company. 3. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.; Fire Safety Division. 4. Simplex Grinnell LP; a Tyco International company.

C. Alternate products must be submitted to the Engineer two weeks prior to bid for approval. Alternate or as-equal products submitted under this contract must provide a detailed line-by-line comparison of how the submitted product meets, exceeds, or does not comply with this specification.

D. The equipment and service provider shall be a nationally recognized company specializing in fire alarm and detection systems. This provider shall employ factory trained and NICET Level III certified technicians, and shall maintain a service organization within 100 miles of this project location. The equipment and service provider shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the fire protective signaling systems industry.

2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and/or systems:

1. Manual stations. 2. Heat detectors. 3. Smoke detectors. 4. Duct smoke detectors. 5. Automatic sprinkler system water flow. 6. Heat detectors in elevator shaft, machine room and pit. 7. Fire-extinguishing system operation. 8. Fire standpipe system.

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. 2. Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. 3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths. Refer to plans for egress paths. 5. Release of drop/shutter rolling steel type fire doors. 6. Activate voice/alarm communication system.



7. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode.

a. Unless otherwise noted on the fire alarm matrix on the drawings the default condition shall be ‘OFF’ during a general fire alarm condition with a manual override switch/control for activation by the fire department.

8. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors. 9. Record events in the system memory. 10. Record events by the system printer. 11. Shunt trip elevator power where sprinkler heads are installed in elevator shafts, machine

rooms or pits.

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Valve supervisory switch. 2. Low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe sprinkler system. 3. Elevator shunt-trip supervision.

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating

devices. 3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.

a. When 8-hours have elapsed after the power outage.

4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits. 5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. 6. Break in standby battery circuitry. 7. Failure of battery charging. 8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator. 9. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.

E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. Record the event on system printer.

2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT

A. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:

1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, complying with UL 864 and listed and labeled by an NRTL.

a. System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies.



b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and printer.

2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.

a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow for adjustment of sensitivity at fire-alarm control unit.

b. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device.

3. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.

B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 3 line(s) of 80 characters, minimum. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control

commands and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.

C. Circuits:

1. Addressable Systems: Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits:

a. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC): Class B. b. Initiating Device Circuits: Class A, Style D. c. Signaling Line Circuits (SLC): Class A6, T-Taps not permitted.

2. Serial Interfaces: Two RS-232 ports for printers.

D. Elevator Recall:

1. Smoke detectors at the following locations shall initiate automatic elevator recall. Alarm-initiating devices, except those listed, shall not start elevator recall.

a. Elevator lobby detectors except the lobby detector on the designated floor. b. Smoke detector in elevator machine room. c. Smoke detectors in elevator hoistway. d. Smoke detectors in elevator pit.

2. Elevator lobby detectors located on the designated recall floors shall be programmed to move the cars to the alternate recall floor.

3. Water-flow alarm connected to sprinkler in an elevator shaft and elevator machine room shall shut down elevators associated with the location without time delay.

a. Water-flow switch associated with the sprinkler in the elevator pit may have a delay to allow elevators to move to the designated floor.



E. Elevator Circuit Breaker Shunt Trip:

1. Provide heat detectors in the elevator machine rooms and where indicated in the elevator pit with temperature settings coordinated with sprinkler heads in the same room.

a. Heat detector to activate prior to the sprinkler head temperature setting.

F. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory, and print out the final adjusted values on system printer.

G. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.

H. Voice/Alarm Signaling Service: Central emergency communication system with redundant microphones, preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators provided in a separate cabinet located in the fire command center or as a special module that is part of fire-alarm control unit.

1. Indicated number of alarm channels for automatic, simultaneous transmission of different announcements to different zones or for manual transmission of announcements by use of the central-control microphone. Amplifiers shall comply with UL 1711 and be listed by an NRTL.

a. Allow the application of and evacuation signal to indicated number of zones and, at same time, allow voice paging to the other zones selectively or in any combination.

b. Programmable tone and message sequence selection. c. Standard digitally recorded messages for "Evacuation" and "All Clear." d. Generate tones to be sequenced with audio messages of type recommended by

NFPA 72 and that are compatible with tone patterns of notification appliance circuits of fire-alarm control unit.

2. Status Annunciator: Indicate the status of various voice/alarm speaker zones. 3. Preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators shall automatically transfer to backup

units, on primary equipment failure.

I. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events. Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble) and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications. Also print system reset event, including same information for device, location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printing of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events.

J. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals and supervisory signals shall be powered by 24-V dc source.



1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-supply module rating.

K. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch.

1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium or Sealed, valve-regulated, recombinant lead acid 2. Battery Nominal Life Expectancy: 20 years, minimum. 3. Facilities with generator power to the Fire Alarm Control Panel must have 24-hours

battery capacity while in the alarm mode for 5-minutes. 4. Facilities with emergency voice evacuation/messaging systems in addition to meeting the

above stated criteria, as applicable, must have battery capacity for 15-minutes while in the alarm mode.

5. End Of Line (EOL) voltage drop must not exceed 14% of the expected battery voltage.

L. Battery Charger:

1. Solid-state, fully automatic, variable-charging-rate type. 2. Provide capacity for 150 percent of the connected system load while maintaining

batteries at full charge. 3. Whenever batteries are fully discharged, the charger shall recharge them completely

within four hours. 4. Charger output is supervised as part of system power supply supervision.

M. Integral Automatic Transfer Switch:

1. Transfers the load to the battery without loss of signals or status indications when normal power fails.

N. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

O. Air Handling Unit Shutdown Defeat:

1. A supervised “AHU Shutdown Defeat” switch must be provided in or adjacent to the FACP, and as a key-operated function in the Remote Annunciator (where provided).

2. Whenever the Remote Annunicator option is utilized, provide an informative engraved label at the FACP about this function.

3. The switch must cause a system “trouble” indication when it’s placed in the off-normal (“AHU Shutdown Defeated”) position.

2.4 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show



visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.

1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch. 3. Weatherproof Protective Shield (as shown on floor plans): Factory-fabricated clear

plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.

2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Detectors shall be four-wire type. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a

twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and power-on status.

7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit.

a. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

C. Ionization Smoke Detector:






D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.




3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector.

4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific

duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

E. Remote Test Switch and Indicating Lights: All duct detectors shall have a remote test switch and indicating light installed in the nearest corridor or public area and identified by an engraved label affixed to the wall or ceiling.

2.6 HEAT DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.

B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F per minute unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

C. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed temperature of 190 deg F.

1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.



2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

D. Spacing: Drawings reflect spacing based on a prescriptive design of 30 ft per NFPA 72. If heat detector supplied cannot meet this spacing requirement, contractor is responsible for providing additional heat detectors to cover area as indicated on the drawings.

2.7 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

B. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens.

1. Rated Light Output:

a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.

2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined

with guards in place. 4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red.

C. Voice/Tone Notification Appliances:

1. Appliances shall comply with UL 1480 and shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL. 2. High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W field selectable. 3. Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W field selectable. 4. Mounting: Flush. 5. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment of speaker

location.

2.8 ROLLING STEEL FIRE DOORS

A. Provide addressable module for the control of the rolling steel fire door.



B. Door shall be released whenever any flow switch is active (water is flowing) AND a smoke detector located near the door location is active. The door shall not be released upon just a general alarm.

2.9 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.

1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1.

B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights shall match those of fire-alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals.

C. Wall-mounted Device Location Maps indicating the building floor plan with a “You Are Here” designation.

1. Mounting: Adjacent to remote annunciator and the FACP.

2.10 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

B. Multi-gang Indicating Addressable devices are not permitted. All devices shall be installed in individual boxes

C. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to AHU starter, smoke damper operation, elevator controller to initiate elevator recall or to circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown.

2.11 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632 and be listed and labeled by an NRTL.

B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-alarm control unit and automatically capture two telephone lines and dial a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted. Whenever service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal.



C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the following:

1. Verification that both telephone lines are available. 2. Programming device. 3. LED display. 4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication. 5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.

D. The following signals shall be reported as applicable:

1. Fire Alarm 2. Sprinkler Water flow Alarm 3. Fire Pump Running Alarm (if pump provided) 4. Fire pump Abnormal Status 5. Sprinkler Valve Tamper (Closed) Supervisory Signal 6. Sprinkler Low Temperature/Air Pressure Supervisory Signal 7. Burglary/Intrusion/Duress/Other Security or Emergency Alarms 8. Fire Alarm System AC Power Trouble after 8-hours. 9. Low Battery

E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.

F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.

G. Precedence of Signals:

1. Fire Alarm. 2. Supervisory signal. 3. Trouble Signal. 4. Security Alarm.

H. Contractor: Contractor must program the PROM, connect each DACT to the telephone lines provided and verify proper signal receipt by the supervising station.

I. The installation of this device shall include the required telecommunications cabling as specified for data outlets in these specifications.

2.12 SYSTEM PRINTER

A. Printer shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL as an integral part of fire-alarm system. Printer shall be 120 volt ac and use ordinary (non-thermal) paper. Install as shown on drawings or as selected by Owner. For high rise buildings, the printer must be monitored by the Central FACP and be powered from an emergency circuit.

1. Provide wall shelf for mounting. 2. Provide dedicated 120-volt receptacle from same power source as the FACP.



2.13 DEVICE GUARDS

A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, gong, or other device requiring protection.

1. Factory fabricated and furnished by manufacturer of device. 2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.

2.14 WIRING

A. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded THHN/THWN insulation.

1. Low-Voltage Circuits: Stranded No. 12 AWG, minimum. 2. Line-Voltage Circuits: Solid No. 12 AWG, minimum.

B. Power-Limited Circuits: NFPA 70, Types FPL, FPLR, or FPLP, as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Wiring shall be color coded as follows:

1. Addressable loop (signaling line) circuits shall be wired with type FPL/FPLR/FPLP fire alarm cable, low capacitance (30-pF Max.), 18 AWG minimum, twisted shielded copper pair. Cable shield drain wires are to be connected at each device on the loop to maintain continuity, taped to insulate from ground, and terminated at the FACP. Acceptable manufacturers include Atlas, Belden, West Penn or equal wire having capacitance of 30 pf/ft. maximum between conductors. The cable jacket color shall be red, with Red (+) and Black (-) conductor insulation.

2. Unshielded Cable, otherwise equal to the above, is permitted where the manufacturer’s installation instructions unequivocally require, or state a preference for, the use of unshielded cable for all systems.

3. Alarm notification appliance circuits (horns and strobes) shall be wired with type THHN/THWN, stranded copper, AWG 12 minimum, color coded Blue (+), Black (-) conductor insulation.

4. One way voice/Alarm digital audio circuits shall be wired with low capacitance (30-pF Max.), AWG 12 minimum, twisted shielded copper pair. Cable shield drain wires are to be connected continuous from the amplifier to the end of the line. Acceptable manufacturers include Atlas, Belden, West Penn or equal wire having capacitance of 30 pf/ft. maximum between conductors. The cable jacket shall be Gray outer jacket, Red (+), Black (-) conductor insulation.

a. Note: Where required to meet NFPA fire rating requirements MI cable shall be utilized.

5. System equipment with 24VDC operating power shall be wired with type THHN/THWN, stranded copper, AWG 12 minimum, color coded Yellow (+), Brown (-) conductor insulation.



6. Door control circuits for maglocks if supplied from fire alarm system shall be wired with type THHN/THWN, stranded copper, AWG 12 minimum, color coded Orange conductor insulation.

7. Circuits from Zone Addressable Monitored Devices shall be wired with type THHN/THWN, stranded copper, AWG 12 minimum, color coded Violet (+), Gray (-) conductor insulation.

8. For underground circuits installed in conduit, use Type TC or PLTC cable (PE insulated) to avoid problems for moisture. Color coding for specific application, as described herein, shall be followed.

2.15 POWER SUPPLIES

A. Notification Appliance circuit booster (“ADA”) power supplies and Voice Messaging power supplies must be individually monitored for integrity and are not permitted to be located above a ceiling, or in non-conditioned space. Any 24vdc power circuits serving addressable control relays must also be monitored for integrity. Provide a smoke detector within 15 feet of the power supply.

1. Each Power Booster shall be addressable to and supervised, per NFPA requirements, by the FACP.

2. The FACP shall be able to distinguish each individual Power Booster and issue a digital readout for each individual Power Booster that reports a trouble signal.

3. Provide dedicated 120-volt receptacle from the same source as the FACP. 4. Notification Appliance circuit booster total capacity shall not be less that the total load

connected to the circuit booster, as calculated from the devices Cd as shown on the drawings, plus 30% spare capacity for additional devices or a change to Cd settings.

5. Voice messaging power supplies for the speaker system shall have a total capacity not less that the total load connected to the power supply, as calculated from the quanty and device initial settings, plus 50% spare capacity for additional devices or a change to the speaker wattage settings.

2.16 ISOLATION MODULES

A. To minimize the impact of a wiring fault (short), isolation modules or (if the ceiling height is <10 feet) isolator base type initiating devices shall be provided as follows:

1. After each 20 devices and control points on any addressable circuit. 2. For each addressable circuit that extends outside the building walls. 3. Immediately adjacent to the FACP, at each end of the addressable loop. These two

isolators must be in the same room as the FACP and within 15 feet. Isolation modules shall not be located in the FACP.

4. For loops covering more than one floor, install isolator at terminal cabinet on each floor (with additional isolator(s) on any floor with over 20 addresses).

5. Coordinate with the Owner and the Engineer for the approved method of installation for accessibility and maintenance.



2.17 TVSS

A. The following protection against voltage transients and surges must be provided by the fire alarm equipment supplier, and installed by the electrical contractor for all fire alarm system panels:

1. On AC Input:

a. A feed through (not a shunt-type) branch circuit transient arrestor such as the EFI HWM-120, Leviton OEM-120EFI, Northern Technologies TCS-HW, Transtector ACP100BWN3, or any equivalent UL Listed device submitted to and approved by the Engineer.

b. Install suppressor on the outside of the electrical panelboard, and trim excess lead lengths.

c. Wind small coil in the branch circuit conductor just downstream of the suppressor connection. Coil to be wound using 5 to 10 turns, ¾”-1” diameter. The coil shall be securely tie-wrapped at two points to maintain the coil diameter and winding integrity.

1) This series impedance will improve the effectiveness of the arrestor in suppressing voltage transients.

2. On DC Circuits Extending Outside Building:

a. Acceptable models: Simples 2081-9027 and 2081-9028, Transtector TSP8601, the Ditek DTKxLVL series, Citel American BF280-24V, Northern Technologies DLP-42. Equal products may be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

b. Adjacent to the FACP, and also near point of entry to outlying building, provide “pi” type filter on each leg, consisting of a primary arrestor, a series impedance, and a fast acting secondary arrestor which clamps at 30v to 40v.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install fire-alarm control unit on wall as indicated on the drawings.

1. Install seismic bracing. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making changes or connections.

1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building. 2. Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising station.



3. Expand, modify, and supplement existing [control] [monitoring] equipment as necessary to extend existing [control] [monitoring] functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system.

D. Control Relays

1. Control relays shall be installed to meet NFPA requirements. This shall include but not limited to control relays that actuate smoke and/or fire dampers and motors associated with smoke exhaust/removal systems.

a. The maximum distance from the fire alarm control relay to the motor controller shall be 3-ft.

E. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:

1. The fire alarm devices shown on the plans and details are diagrammatic in nature and are to establish the basis for bidding. The certified contractor shall install all devices in compliance with NFPA, National, Local codes as applicable to this project.

2. During installation the certified contractor shall review the design layout and adjust the fire alarm system using, but not limited to, the following guidelines:

a. Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing.

b. Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for heat-detector spacing.

c. Not less than 4 inches (100 mm) from a side wall to the near edge. d. For exposed solid-joist construction, mount detectors on the bottom of joists unless

the depth of the beams create a pocket as defined by NFPA. e. Refer to the latest edition of the NFPA for mounting of detectors where there is no

gypsum board or acoustical tile (drop) ceilings to mount detectors on. Follow NPFA requirements for mounting height.

f. Review all structural beam depths, spacing and structural ceilings prior to installing conduits and detectors.

g. On smooth ceiling, install not more than 30 feet (9 m) apart in any direction. h. Wall-Mounted Smoke Detectors: Not less than 4 inches (100 mm), but not more

than 12 inches (300 mm), below the ceiling. i. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for

high ceiling areas shall be determined according to the appropriate Appendix in NFPA 72.

j. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening.

k. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting fixture.

F. Smoke detector: Mount photoelectric smoke detector within 15’ of the central FACP, any FAAPs and each external power supply.



G. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct. Each duct detector installation shall have a hinged or latched duct access panel, 12x12 inches minimum, for sampling tube inspection and cleaning. Indicate airflow direction on the duct, adjacent to the detector.

1. Verify that each unit is listed for the complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

2. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of the duct.

H. Manual Pull Stations: Mount semi-flush in recessed back boxes. Mount 48” AFF to top of device.

1. Coordinate with the general contractor for installation of devices required by code to be within 5-ft of exit doors.

a. Method of installing fire alarm cables through mullions of curtain wall systems.

1) Submit to the Engineer and Engineer for approval installation drawings showing methods to be used for routing of cables and device mounting.

I. Water-Flow Detectors and Valve Supervisory Switches: Connect for each sprinkler valve station required to be supervised.

J. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts, Machine Rooms or Pits:

1. Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler rating and location. 2. Heat detectors shall be installed within 2-ft. of each sprinkler head location.

K. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position. Indicators shall be installed in individual boxes and not be installed in multi-gang boxes.

L. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install 80” AFF to device bottom unless noted otherwise on the drawings..

M. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install 80” AFF to device bottom unless noted otherwise on the drawings.

N. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

O. Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Surface mounted, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

P. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

Q. Digital dialer: Provide two (2) data outlet jacks compatible with the digital dialer, including data cabling as specified in these specifications (Category 5e minimum rating). Connect to the local floor telecommunications equipment as specified in these specifications. Install in ½” conduit minimum from outlet jacks to telecommunications equipment.



R. Smoke Detector Protection: Unless suitable protected against dust, paint, etc., spot type smoke detectors shall not be installed until the final construction clean-up has been completed. In the event of contamination during construction, the detectors must be replaced.

S. Detector Identification: Identification of individual detectors is required. Assign each a unique number as follows, in sequence starting at the FACP: (Addressable Loop#-- Device#) Put on the as-built plans, and also permanently mount on each detector’s base so that it’s readable standing on the floor below without having to remove the smoke detector. Exception: for detectors with housings (i.e., air duct, projected beam, air sampling, flame), apply the identification to a suitable location on exterior of their housing.

T. Fire Alarm System notification circuits, an end-of-line (EOL) resistor should be located as follows:

1. In a location that is accessible to fire alarm maintenance personnel. 2. In an area where maintenance or testing at the EOL resistor location will not be

disruptive to the normal use of the facility. 3. In an area that is not easily accessible to the normal building occupants (objective is to

avoid accidental or malicious damage by building occupants). 4. In an area that is no higher than 9 ft of lower than 7 ft from the floor level. 5. Not located in a stairway or bathroom location.

U. The branch circuit breaker(s) supplying any circuit for Fire Alarm system equipment must be physically protected by panelboard lock or handle lock and must be identified with a 1/4" permanent red dot applied to handle or exposed body area.

V. A floor plan diagram with device identifiers shall be framed under glass and mounted near the main Fire Alarm Control Panel.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.

1. Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm system in this Section before making connections.

B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled.

1. Alarm-initiating connection to smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighter smoke-control system panel.

2. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems. 3. Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components. 4. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control.



5. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 6. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches. 7. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler system. 8. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt trip breaker. 9. Supervisory connections at fire-pump power failure including a dead-phase or phase-

reversal condition. 10. Supervisory connections at fire-pump engine control panel.

3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Installer Qualifications: All persons terminating wiring, installing fire alarm system devices and /or programming the fire alarm systems shall meet the following minimum requirements:

1. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design on the specific fire alarm system being installed on this project.

a. The factory training and certification must have occurred within the most recent 24 months. The manufacturer must sign the certification certifying the installer’s compliance with their requirements.

b. Copies of the certification must be part of the Contractor’s submittal to the Engineer prior to installation.

c. The submittal will not be approved without this certification.

2. In addition to the requirement for factory certification the person preparing the shop drawings shall be a NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum.

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Division 26 Section “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.” Conceal raceway except in unfinished spaces and as indicated.

1. Coordinate with the general contractor for installation of devices required by code to be within 5-ft of exit doors.

a. Method of installing fire alarm cables through mullions of curtain wall systems.

1) Submit to the Engineer for approval installation drawings showing methods to be used for routing of cables and device mounting.

2. All Class A SLC loop circuits, as required herein, shall have the supply and return ‘loop’ cables installed in separate raceways to insure survivability except as noted herein.

a. On multi-story buildings each floor shall have a dedicated Class A SLC loop. b. Minimum separation distance between the Class A SLC supply and return

raceways/cables shall be the corridor width, less 1-ft., for the floor being served by the Class A SLC loop.

1) Exception: The supply and return Class A loop cables may occupy the same raceway from the junction box where the SLC initiating device is mounted



for a maximum distance of 6-ft. where they shall enter into a common junction box where they shall be installed in separate raceways to the next device on the loop, fire alarm terminal cabinet or fire alarm control panel.

c. As an option on multi-story buildings, the Class A SLC supply and return raceways may be installed so that the Class A SLC loop cables terminate in fire alarm terminal cabinets located at opposite ends of the floor being served by a Class A SLC loop. From the terminal cabinets on each floor the supply and return loop cables shall be installed in raceways containing only SLC cables and shall be routed to the next fire alarm terminal cabinet on a lower floor or directly back to the fire alarm control panel.

d. The supply and return Class A SLC loop cables/raceways shall be kept separated back to within 10-ft. from where they enter the fire alarm control panel.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by the manufacturer.

1. All wiring and splices shall be made using terminal blocks. Crimp type connectors or ‘wire nuts’ connectors are prohibited.

2. All terminal block screws shall have pressure wire connectors of the self-lifting or box lug type.

3. All terminal blocks shall be securely fastened in place using screws. Adhesive tape or glue will not be acceptable.

4. Run fire alarm system wiring in dedicated raceway system containing only fire alarm system wiring.

5. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. 6. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. 7. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure

associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. 8. All doors of all enclosures shall contain a green insulated #12 copper conductor bonding

the enclosure to the door. This shall not impede opening of the door to 180 degrees. 9. Mark each terminal according to the system’s wiring diagrams. 10. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, screw terminal

blocks, or plug connectors. 11. Label all wires at all termination points. 12. Label inside of enclosure with 120 VAC source panel board and circuit number.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. All system wiring shall be labeled at each termination point or splice.

B. Identify each enclosure with an engraved, red, laminated, phenolic-resin nameplate with lettering not less than 1 inch (25 mm) high. Identify individual components and modules within cabinets with permanent labels.



C. Install Instructions frame in a location visible from the FACP.

D. Label Central FACP with engraved label indicating panel location, panel name, and circuit number of power source to FACP.

E. It is understood that the room names and numbers shown on the contract document may change prior to the final acceptance of the building by the Owner.

1. The installing contractor shall coordinate with the Owner and/or the General Contractor the final room names and numbers for the entire building. This shall occur prior to the final Engineer’s acceptance testing.

2. The FACP programming and subsequent display readouts shall indicate these room names, numbers and identical device addresses in order as follows:

a. Device type. b. Equipment or unit number associated with the device whenever applicable. c. Location by room number. d. Device address number.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.

B. Ground the enclosure doors using a green insulated #12 grounding conductor attached to the enclosure housing and the door. Install so that the door is free to swing open 180- degrees.

C. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be grounded to the AC supply source with an insulated equipment grounding conductor installed and routed in the same raceway with the AC branch circuit conductors feeding the Fire Alarm Control Panel.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by the Owner Representative and/or the Engineer of Record.

B. Tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: The trained and certified person who terminates and programs the system shall be required to perform all field testing as described within these specifications.

C. Contractor/Manufacturer Representative Tests and Inspections:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.



a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter.

b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.

D. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

E. The engineer shall then be informed by written notification that the system is complete per plans and specifications that the 100% system test was completed and is ready for the Engineer’s acceptance test.

F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer two (2) weeks in advance to schedule the Engineer’s acceptance test of the completed system.

H. Engineer of Record Test and Inspections:

1. The Engineer, in the presence of the contractor and an authorized factory-trained representative of the manufacturer who terminated and programmed the fire alarm system, shall perform an acceptance test to verify compliance with the plans, specifications and applicable codes.

2. The contractor shall assist the engineer with the test. 3. The test shall be directed and controlled by the Engineer. 4. The contractor shall provide two-way radios, ladders and any other materials needed to

test the system (smoke candles, approved test smoke, etc.).

I. After the Engineers acceptance test has been successfully completed and all deficiencies have been corrected, the installing contractor shall provide specific documentation for the fire alarm system. This documentation shall include but is not limited to the following:

1. System Status and Program Printout.



2. System Operation Matrix. 3. As-Built Drawings. 4. Two Bound Copies of General System Information for the Owner. 5. For buildings with a smoke control or smoke purge system, an HVAC balance report in

the smoke control/purge mode.

J. After testing and correction of deficiencies have been completed the contractor shall provide site specified FACP programming on a diskette or CD as appropriate for review. This process shall be repeated until there are no further errors or corrections to the database.

3.7 FINAL DOCUMENTATION

A. After all system corrections have been made provide to the engineer the following documentation.

1. Riser diagram(s) showing all fire alarm panels, power booster panels, fire alarm devices and terminal boxes. The diagram shall represent how the devices are connected to the fire alarm system and shall be suitable for trouble shooting the fire alarm system connections.

2. Documentation shall be provided in CAD file format compatible with the engineer’s CAD files for the project.

3. The contractor shall make all corrections to the file(s) as directed by the engineer.

3.8 GUARANTEE:

A. All wiring, etc., shall be in strict accordance with the local Electrical Code requirements and shall have the written approval of all public authorities having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment and wiring free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects for a period of one (1) year from date of installation. The final connection between the equipment and wiring system and all programming shall be made under the direct supervision of a qualified technical representative of the manufacturer. All products of combustion detectors shall have sensitivities set by Factory Trained Technician, and results submitted to the Engineer.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.

3.10 TRAINING:

A. Training shall cover the following topics at a minimum:

1. Preventative maintenance service techniques and schedules, including historical data trending of alarm and trouble records.



2. Overall system concepts, capabilities, and functions. Training shall be in-depth, so that the owner shall be able to add or delete devices to the system and to take any device out of service and return any device to service without need for Manufacturer’s approval.

3. Explanation of all control functions, including training to program and operate the system software.

4. Methods and means of troubleshooting and replacement of all field wiring and devices. 5. Methods and procedures for troubleshooting the main fire alarm control panel, including

field peripheral devices as to programming, bussing systems, internal panel and unit wiring, circuitry and interconnections.

6. Manuals, drawings, and technical documentation. Actual system software used for training shall be provided on 3 ½ inch floppy disk or CD and shall be left with the Owner at the completion of training for the Owner’s use in the future.

PART 4 - NFPA FORMS

4.1 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CERTIFICATION OF COMPLETION.

A. Complete the latest revised NFPA 72-2002, Figure 4.5.2.1, “Record of Completion” Form.

1. On the form, place the installers name and NICET number or factory authorized certification number of installing technician who is responsible for certifying the installation of the fire alarm system.

B. Submit to Engineer for review prior to Engineer’s scheduled acceptance testing.




TERMITE CONTROL 313116 - 1

SECTION 313116 - TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Soil treatment.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include the EPA-Registered Label for termiticide

products.


A. Product certificates.

B. Soil Treatment Application Report: Include the following:

1. Date and time of application.

2. Moisture content of soil before application.

3. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer.

4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.

5. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application.

6. Areas of application.

7. Water source for application.

C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities

having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project

is located and who employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer to install

manufacturer's products.




1.5 WARRANTY

A. Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and

Contractor, certifying that termite control work consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment

will prevent infestation of subterranean termites, including Formosan termites (Coptotermes

formosanus). If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period,

re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL TREATMENT

A. Termiticide: EPA-Registered termiticide acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, in an

aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to

the following:

a. BASF Corporation.

b. Bayer Environmental Science.

c. Ensystex, Inc.

d. Syngenta.

2. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than five

years against infestation of subterranean termites.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Remove extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials, such as wood debris,

tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and

around foundations.

B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could

decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated.




3.2 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT

A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Distribute

treatment uniformly. Apply treatment at the product's EPA-Registered Label volume and rate

for maximum specified concentration of termiticide to the following so that a continuous

horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under

building construction.

1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground-supported slab construction,

including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil

materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed.

2. Foundations: Soil adjacent to and along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls;

along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric conduit

penetrating the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along

the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing.

3. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations. Treat adjacent areas, including

around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply overall treatment only

where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground.

4. Masonry: Treat voids.

5. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs and below-grade

walls will be penetrated.

B. Post warning signs in areas of application.

C. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading,

landscaping, or other construction activities following application.



AP#1515 Crawford Design Company July 18, 2016

LANDSCAPING 32 90 00 - 1

SECTION 32 90 00

LANDSCAPING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary


1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following items:

1. Installing temporary and permanent landscape groundcover.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Certification of grass seed from seed vendor for each seed mixture.

B. Product certificates.


A. Maintain and establish lawns by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming,

replanting, and other operations to produce a uniformly smooth lawn for not less than the

following:

1. Permanent groundcover: 60 days after date of Substantial Completion. Thereafter,

maintain at 3 month intervals minimum during the one year warrantee period on or

about the 15 of the month to maintain growth.

2. Erosion Control Temporary Seeding – Install as required to minimize erosion.

Minimum 15 days after a land disturbing activity in accordance with The North Carolina

Department of Environment & Natural Resourses (NCDENR).

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Utilities: Determine location of above grade and underground utilities and perform work in

a manner which will avoid damage. Hand excavate as required. Maintain grade stakes until

removal is mutually agreed upon by concerned parties.

B. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble

fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Engineer before planting.

C. Contractor shall seed all areas disturbed by the construction phase.




PART 2 PRODUCTS

A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with the Association of Official

Seed Analysts' "Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.

1. Seed Mixture: Provide seed of grass species and varieties, proportions by weight, and

minimum percentages of purity, germination, and maximum percentage of weed seed as

indicated.

B. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, 4 percent organic material minimum, free of

stones 1 inch (25 mm) or larger in any dimension, and other extraneous materials harmful to

plant growth.

1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on the site. Verify suitability of surface

soil to produce topsoil meeting requirements and amend when necessary. Supplement

with imported topsoil when quantities are insufficient. Clean topsoil of roots, plants,

sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.

C. Lime: ASTM C 602, Class T, agricultural limestone, applied at the rate of 2 tons/acre.

D. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting

of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea-

form, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 1 lb per 1000 sq. ft. (0.5 kg per 100 sq. m) of actual nitrogen, 4 percent

phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.

PART 3 EXECUTION

A. Lawn Planting Preparation: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches (100 mm).

Remove stones larger than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish,

and other extraneous materials.

1. Spread planting soil mixture to 4-inch depth to meet thickness, grades, and elevations

shown, after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade

is frozen.

2. Place approximately 1/2 the thickness of planting soil mixture required. Work into top of

loosened subgrade to create a transition layer and then place remainder of planting soil

mixture.

B. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting when soil is dry and allow surface to dry before

planting.

C. Seeding Lawns: Sow seed with a spreader or a seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop

seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal

quantities in 2 directions at right angles to each other. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch (3

mm) of topsoil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.

1. Seeding Rate: to 4 lb per 1000 sq. ft. (1.5 to 2 kg per 100 sq. m).




2. Protect seeded areas with slopes less than 1:6 against erosion by spreading straw mulch

after completion of seeding operations and anchor by crimping into topsoil. Spread

uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons per acre (45 kg per 100 sq. m).

3. Sow seed at the following rates:

a. Planting Date from Mar. 1 - Aug. 31: Mixture: 1/2 hulled Common Bermuda and

1/2 Fescue, Ky-31.

b. Planting Date from Sep. 1 - Feb. 28: Mixture of 2/3 Common Bermuda and 1/3

Rye Grain.

D. Disposal: Remove trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property.

Remove surplus soil including excess subsoil and distribute within approved areas.

END OF SECTION



LANDSCAPE GRADING 32 91 19 - 1

SECTION 32 91 19

LANDSCAPE GRADING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Final grade topsoil for finish landscaping.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures

B. Materials Source: Submit name and location of imported materials source.


A. Furnish each topsoil material from single source throughout the Work.

B. Perform Work in accordance with contract requirements and North Carolina DOT Roads

and Standard Manual.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL

A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, 4 percent organic material minimum, free

of stones 1 inch (25 mm) or larger in any dimension, and other extraneous materials

harmful to plant growth.

1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on the site. Verify suitability of

surface soil to produce topsoil meeting requirements and amend when necessary.

Supplement with imported topsoil when quantities are insufficient. Clean topsoil

of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful

to plant growth.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions

before starting work.

B. Verify building and trench backfilling have been inspected.

C. Verify substrate base has been contoured and compacted.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect landscaping and other features remaining as final Work.



LANDSCAPE GRADING 32 91 19 - 2

B. Protect all new and existing site improvements as required.

3.3 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION

A. Eliminate uneven areas and low spots.

B. Remove debris, roots, branches and native stones, in excess of (1) one inch in size.

Remove contaminated subsoil.

C. Remove all construction gravel.

D. Scarify surface to depth of (6) six inches where topsoil is scheduled. Scarify in areas

where equipment used for hauling and spreading topsoil has compacted subsoil.

3.4 PLACING TOPSOIL

A. Place topsoil in areas where seeding, sodding, planting, is required to minimum depth of

(4) four inches. See specific depths under 3.7 SCHEDULES. Place topsoil during dry

weather.

B. Work approximately ½ of the required depth into top of loosened subgrade to create a

transition layer and then place remainder of planting soil mixture.

C. Fine grade topsoil in a smooth even plane to eliminate rough or low areas. Maintain

profiles and contour of subgrade.

D. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading.

E. Manually spread topsoil close to plant material, building, and other site improvements to

prevent damage.

F. Lightly compact and role placed topsoil.

G. Remove surplus subsoil and topsoil from site.

H. Leave any stockpile areas that is scheduled to remain in a uniform manner and site clean

and rake, ready to receive landscaping.

3.5 TOLERANCES

A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.

B. Top of Topsoil: Plus or minus (1/2) one half inch.

3.6 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK

A. Section 01 73 00 - Execution: Requirements for protecting finished Work.

B. Prohibit construction traffic over topsoil.

3.7 SCHEDULES

A. Compacted topsoil thicknesses:

1. Seeded Grass: (4) 4- inches.

2. Sod: (4) four inches.

3. Shrub Beds: (18) eighteen inches.

4. General Planting Landscape Beds: (8) eight inches.

END OF SECTION

Fayetteville Regional Airport – Airline Terminal Improvements – Part 1 Owner: City of Fayetteville Fayetteville, North Carolina AP#1515 DK Consultants, LLC July 18, 2016

PASSENGER BOARDING BRIDGES 347713 - 1

SECTION 347713 - PASSENGER BOARDING BRIDGES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. The City of Fayetteville, North Carolina (Owner) proposes to add two (2) new Passenger Board-ing Bridges (PBB’s) and associated equipment for the new “A” terminal at the Fayetteville Re-gional Airport (FAY). . 1. The Contractor shall supply and install two (2) new PBB’s, GPU’s and PCAir’s at new “A”

terminal, as indicated on the Drawings and in these Specifications, including all structural, support, mechanical, electrical, and finish requirements to serve the aircraft mix indicated on the Drawings and in these Specifications

B. The Owner also wishes to receive bids for three (3) Add Alternates.

1. Add Alternate 1 – Remove and scrap the PBB at Gate B2 and supply and install a new PBB, PCAir, GPU and associated equipment at Gate B2., as indicated on the Drawings and in these Specifications, including all structural, support, mechanical, electrical, and finish require-ments to serve the aircraft mix indicated on the Drawings and in these Specifications.

2. Add Alternate 2 - Remove and scrap the PBB at Gate B3 and supply and install a new PBB,

PCAir, GPU and associated equipment at Gate B3, as indicated on the Drawings and in these Specifications, including all structural, support, mechanical, electrical, and finish require-ments to serve the aircraft mix indicated on the Drawings and in these Specifications.

3. Add Alternate 3 – Supply and install a semi-permanent boarding ramp that will be used to

transit passengers from the PBB at gate B2 to the apron for a ground loading operation during construction of the new “A” terminal. No scope of work for the Contractor for this Add Al-ternate.

C. The Contractor shall provide the necessary information, product data, project management, coor-

dination and installation support for the design, manufacturing, supply and installation of the GPU and PCAir, which will also be supplied as part of this Project.

1. If the PBB manufacturer is not the manufacturer of the PCAir and GPU, the Contractor shall

be fully responsible to ensure that the manufacturers of the PCAir and GPU comply with ALL requirements of the Contract Documents, Specifications and Drawings.

D. This Section Includes:

1. Passenger Boarding Bridges: Supply and installation of two (2) new PBB’s at the new “A”

terminal and, if selected by the Owner Add Alternate PBB’s at Gates B2 and B3. The PBB models supplied shall be as follows: a. A1 – A3-64/131 b. A2 – A3-68/141 c. B2 – A3-60/119



d. B3 – A3-60/119 2. Installation of new GPU, new PCAir on the new PBB’s.

a. If the PBB manufacturer is NOT the manufacturer of the GPU and PCAir, the PBB man-ufacturer shall fully coordinate and be responsible for supplying the necessary mechani-cal, electrical and control connections on the PBB for the proper installation and func-tioning of the new GPU, new PCAir, existing PCAir and their ancillary equipment.

3. The new PBB’s shall be equipped with the CRJ / ERJ cab features and options specified here-

in.

4. New fixed Walkways. There are no new fixed Walkways on this project. 5. The center of the PBB foundations at the two (2) A gates will NOT be the standard 4’-6”

from the face of the terminal building. The center of the PBB foundation will be 5’-7-5/8” from the face of the terminal building. An extended corridor will be required.

6. As part of the Add Alternates, removal and scrap of the existing PBB’s at B2 and B3, as indi-

cated on the Drawings and in these Specifications.

E. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. GENERAL PROVISIONS 2. DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 3. SECTION 238121 - PRECONDITIONED AIR UNIT AND ACCESSORIES 4. SECTION 263543 - 400Hz GROUND POWER UNIT AND ACCESSORIES 5. SECTION 145001 – BAGGAGE LIFT 6. SECTION 347715 – MOBILE BOARDING RAMP

1.2 REFERENCES

A. The PBB shall be designed and manufactured to meet U.S. Codes and Regulations that have been

adopted by the Passenger Boarding Bridge industry. Portions or all of certain recognized industry or association standards referred to herein as being a requirement of these Specifications shall be considered as binding as though the reproduced in full herein unless supplemented and/or modified by more stringent requirements in this Specification. Unless otherwise stated, the reference standard shall be the standard which is current as of the date of issuance of these Specifications

B. Applicable Industry and Association Standards

1. Design: Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Aerospace Recommended Practice (ARP) 1247, FAA Advisory Circular AC-150/5210-5, Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Oc-



cupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code (VUSBC) 2006 Edition adopting IBC 2006.

2. Structural: American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), Specifications for the Design,

Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. American Welding Society (AWS) Standards.

3. Material: Structural Plate/Steel/Shapes: ASTM-A36; Structural Tube: ASTM-A500; Steel

Pipe: ASTM-A53; Steel Sheet: ASTM-A570; Steel Plate: ASTM-A514; Hinge Pins: ASTM-A311 Grades 1018 & 1144; Bolts: High Strength SAE-J429 Grades 5 & 8 or ASTM-A325 & A440.

4. Mechanical: Mechanical components and designs shall conform to the relevant recommenda-

tions and standards established by the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) and the Amer-ican Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).

5. Electrical: The PBB shall be listed by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL),

such as ETL, for conformance to applicable ANSI/UL codes. The PBB and the Fixed Walkway and their components, materials and methods of construction and installation shall conform to the applicable requirements and recommendations of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), the National Electrical Code (NEC), NFPA-70 and NFPA 79, latest issue and State, county and local construction and electrical codes including any modifications to the NEC by the local authority having jurisdiction.

6. Paint: Surface preparation and painting shall conform to the guidelines and standards of the

Structural Steel Painting Council (SSPC). 7. Fire Protection: The PBB design shall comply with NFPA 415, 2016. Select materials and

components shall be tested per NFPA 415, 2016. Select materials shall comply with the ma-terial specifications of NFPA 415, 2016.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The City of Fayetteville, North Carolina is the Owner and contracting entity for this project.

B. The Owner shall appoint a Project Manager (Owner PM) as the Owner representative for this Project. All project correspondence, submittals, RFI’s, questions, etc. shall be directed to the Owner PM. The Owner shall notify the Contractor of the Owner PM’s contact information when the contract is awarded.

C. The term “Day” or “Days” shall refer to work days not calendar days. D. The terms "Passenger Boarding Bridge” or “PBB” and specified components of these, whether

referred to in singular or plural form, apply to each unit provided in this Contract.

E. PBB Tunnels "A," "B," and "C" are referred to in the order from closest to the terminal to closest to the aircraft.



F. The terms "right" and "left" refer to directions looking down the PBB tunnels toward the aircraft.

G. The term “Contractor” shall refer jointly to the General Contractor who is awarded the contract and the PBB and new Fixed Walkway manufacturer who designs, manufactures and installs the new PBB’s and new Fixed Walkways and refurbishes the existing Fixed Walkways.

H. Any Specification language that is lined through shall not be considered requirements for this Project.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings, Samples and Required Documentation (Submittals) shall be supplied in accord-

ance with the requirements of this Specification and of DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

1. All Shop Drawings, Samples and Required Documentation submitted in English language

and in Inch-Pound units, including dimensions, volumes, weights, and forces.

2. The Owner’s review, comment, approval or rejection of the Contractor’s Submittals shall not be considered a prerequisite for the Contractor to undertake the design, procurement of mate-rials and manufacturing of the PBB and accessories. a. If the Contractor is required to undertake the design, procurement of materials and manu-

facturing of the PBB and accessories prior to the Owner’s review and approval of the Contractor’s submittals, the Contractor shall undertake these activities at its own risk and shall modify the design, material procurement and manufacturing based on the Owner’s review, comment, approval or rejection of the Contractor’s Submittals.

b. Any such modification shall be at the cost of the Contractor and shall not impact the Pro-ject schedule.

B. Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, test reports, certifications, cut

sheets, calculations and other data or information which are specifically prepared and submitted by the Contractor to demonstrate that the Contractor will provide a PBB and accessories which meets the requirements of the Project Specifications and Drawings. 1. Shop Drawing submittals shall show sufficient detail to indicate conformance to the require-

ments of the Project Specifications and Drawings. 2. Shop Drawing submittals shall be organized in a manor so that compliance to Project Specifi-

cations and Drawings can be easily determined by the Owner.

3. Before submitting each Shop Drawing package, the Contractor shall have determined and verified that the Shop Drawing submittal does in fact demonstrate compliance to the Project Specifications and Drawings. a. Shop Drawing packages that contain information that is not in compliance with the Pro-

ject Specifications and Drawings will be rejected and will require re-submittal.



4. Manufacturer's assembly or fabrication drawings that do not provide information needed to determine compliance with requirements of the Project Specifications and Drawings are not acceptable and shall not be submitted.

5. Refer to Engineer-of-Record Qualifications in this Section for sealing of certain As Built

Shop Drawings.

C. Samples - Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion or all of the PBB or its components and which establish the standards by which cer-tain portions of the PBB, its components and installation will be judged.

D. Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings, Samples and Required Other Documentation for Own-er’s review and approval in accordance with the schedule required in approved Progress Schedule and APPENDIX IV. 1. All submittals will be identified as required and furnished in the number of copies specified

in the Contract Documents. 2. The data shown on the Shop Drawings and Required Documentation will be complete with

respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show Owner the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide.

E. Shop Drawings and Samples shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. An index prepared in sequential order listing all drawings, sketches, details, and material

submitted. 2. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical product data, including specifications. Include data

substantiating that materials comply with requirements. 3. Interior Finishes:

a. Interior finish schedule including interior wall and ceiling finishes. Include physical characteristics, such as durability, resistance to fading, flame resistance, and manufactur-er's recommendations for maximum permissible moisture content of substrates.

b. Wall material impact resistance test report. c. Transition ramp details. d. Marine Grade Plywood compliance to BS 1088. e. Wall board construction and thickness f. Wall finish attachment methods. g. Light fixture details, layout, and maintained illumination calculations at floor using the

actual interior finishes (use 10% reflectance for the floor surface). h. PBB and fixed walkway section dimensions and general arrangement drawings. i. Tunnel, cab and rotunda flooring system j. Tunnel floor finish. k. Cab and cab bubble floor finish. l. Rotunda Floor finish. m. Floor covering edging details, including lines of demarcation between covered and hard

surfaced floor at wall areas, and treatment at doors and thresholds.



n. Rotunda and Cab radiused diamond plate o. Floor covering quantity. p. Cab and Rotunda Curtain details, including mounting and operation. q. Insulation. r. Handrail details. s. Bridge precooling/preheating grille. t. Security camera locations.

4. Exterior:

a. General PBB layout, including mounting of all ancillary equipment and accessories, in-cluding roof handrails, service landing and stairs, etc.

b. Exterior elevations. c. Graphics/signage details. d. Exterior Paint System – Details for all three (3) coats. e. Second coat and top coat colors. f. Flashing (building to PBB or fixed walkway). g. Flashing (fixed walkway section to PBB). h. Cab door seal. i. Ramp service stairway. j. Service/maintenance ladder, cage and cab roof handrails, roof fall protection cables and

connection points. k. Baggage chute. l. Gate sign. m. Preconditioned Air Unit mounting location and mounting details n. Preconditioned Air Unit hose reel or basket and PBB interface. o. Ground Power Unit mounting location and mounting details. p. Cable hoist mounting location and details.

5. Cab:

a. Operator's cone of visibility, including mirrors for viewing drive wheels and apron. b. Control panel location and functional layout of Operator console faceplate and all switch-

es and controls. c. HMI Screen layout for all Operator controls. d. View panels. e. Safety devices, including proximity sensor product data. f. Canopy closure fuselage seal interface detail for largest specified aircraft to be serviced. g. Aircraft Spacer h. Modifications necessary for proper connection with required aircraft types including au-

to-leveling devices and RJ aircraft features. i. Operating instructions placard. j. Sun block / glare reduction material for Operator’s window. k. Cab Mirrors and mounting locations

6. Interior and Exterior Safety and Signage:

a. Rain Gutter markings b. All Interior Signage and Plaques. c. All Exterior Signage and Plaques.

7. Electrical, Mechanical, Structural:



a. Certifications of Compliance with all listed Design and Construction Standards. b. Horizontal drive system and components c. Vertical drive system and components, including hydraulic schematics if hydraulic verti-

cal drive system is supplied. Also include outrigger system to be supplied, as well as the proposed safety hoop system.

d. All electrical and mechanical components installed or attached to the exterior of the PBB. e. Details of equipment disconnect panel or individual equipment disconnects, including

mounting details. f. Details of PBB cable carrier system and conduit / SO cable routing for PBB, new fixed

walkway. g. All electrical components used on the interior of the PBB, including components in the

power panel and operator console. h. Operator cameras and display i. Gate Sign j. Electrical power and control schematic diagrams. k. Electrical components, wire information, wire routings, use of conduit, terminations, ter-

minal blocks. l. Details of roof handrails and safety cable system, including details of attachment methods

and materials. m. Details of service door, landing and stairs. n. Bag slide. o. Interface requirements for foundations and building supplied utilities. Provide exact lo-

cation of electrical power and communications J-boxes. p. Structural drawings including all pertinent calculations which shall be signed and sealed

by a professional engineer legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where the Pro-ject is located.

q. The PBB manufacturer shall provide the Owner PM with actual foundation loading data sheets for each type of bridge and walkway provided based on load requirements speci-fied in the "Structural Design and Support Elements" Article in Part 2 of this Section. Foundation loads shall include design forces and moments (in three directions) at the col-umn base due to dead, live, wind and seismic loads. In addition, furnish bolting layout with dimensions.

8. Provide drawings and procedures that will be provided to installation subcontractor the re-

quired details and information for the removal and scrap of PBB’s and ancillary equipment and the installation of the new PBB’s, Fixed Walkways and ancillary equipment. a. Drawings and procedures shall provide sufficient detail so that the installation subcon-

tractor can successfully complete the removal and storage of the existing PBB’s and an-cillary equipment and install the new PBB’s and ancillary equipment.

F. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for compliance to the requirements of the

Project Drawings and Specifications by the Owner’s approval of Shop or working drawings, product data, samples or similar submittals. Deviations from the requirements of the Project Drawings and Specifications shall not be approved unless:

1. the Contractor has specifically submitted a formal deviation or substitution request to the

Owner in writing, per the requirements of the Contract Documents. This DOES NOT in-clude information in the submittal document or making notes on submittal documents that such deviation is included within the Contractor’s submittal, and;



2. the Owner has given written approval of each such deviation or substitution request by spe-

cific written response to the Contractor. G. If deviations from the Project Drawings and Specification requirements are included in approved

Shop Drawings or other submittals documents and they are NOT identified and approved per par-agraph F above, these deviations shall NOT be considered approved

H. Certifications

1. Provide evidence of compliance with 2016 Chapter 6 design requirement. The PBB shall be

certified by an NRTL for compliance to the applicable UL codes and NFPA 415 2016. Evi-dence of such certification from the NRTL (e.g. the Authorization to Mark) must be supplied with the Contractor’s Proposal OR prior to Contract award.

2. Independent 3rd Party Labeling from an NRTL, such as UL or ETL, shall be affixed to the name plate of the PBB prior to shipment, either by permission or by inspection of the Inde-pendent 3rd Party NRTL. This labeling shall indicate compliance to the requirements of NFPA 415 2016 and the applicable UL codes.

I. Spare Parts: In addition to the recommended spare parts list and sources, the Contactor shall sub-

mit the list of the PBB Manufacturer’s recommended stocking levels of critical spare parts, in-cluding the manufacturer’s item description, part number, assemblies per unit, the recommended on-hand stocking level and a firm list price for a period of two (2) years from the date of Final Acceptance of the PBB by the Owner. 1. The total value of this Recommended Spare Parts List shall be equal to the value of the PBB

Spare Parts Allowance identified in the Project Bid Documents.

J. Operations and Maintenance manuals:

1. Proposed format and content of O&M manuals shall be submitted to the Owner for review and approval thirty (30) days prior to shipment of the first PBB.

2. Supply, upon delivery of the first PBB, ten (10) copies of the PBB Operations and Mainte-

nance (O&M) Manuals for the PBB’s

3. O&M Manuals shall not be generic in nature and shall reflect the exact construction of the PBB’s furnished.

4. Non-applicable items and drawings shall not be included in the manuals. 5. Manuals may have descriptive type photographs. 6. Pages shall have reinforced edges. 7. Manuals shall be compact in size and bound. 8. Manufacturer shall also provide three (3) CD-ROM copies of the O&M Manual. Each sec-



tion of this electronic O&M manual shall be directly accessible via an index provided with the electronic O&M manual. T

9. The O&M manuals shall contain the following information:

a. Description and operation of all systems and components. b. Electrical drawings specific for each bridge furnished. Provide one set of bound, lami-

nated electrical drawings for each bridge, to be placed in the control console. Provide one set in each technical manual.

c. Maintenance instructions including troubleshooting/diagnostics guidelines. d. PBB Control Software Documentation e. Instructions for software access, programming upload and download and system diagnos-

tics f. Overhaul instructions. g. List of parts and part numbers. h. Illustrated parts list of all components. i. Recommended spare parts list and sources. j. Complete and detailed Preventive Maintenance Program for each type of boarding bridge

furnished under this Contract.

K. Installation: See APPENDIX IV – SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE. L. Permits and Certificates: Provide Owner PM with copies of all inspection/acceptance certifi-

cates and operating permits as required by the Owner and the City of Fayetteville, NC neces-sary to allow normal, unrestricted use of the PBB’s, GPU’s and PCAir’s after completion of ini-tial acceptance inspections.

M. Quality Assurance, Inspections, Testing and Commissioning: See APPENDIX IV –

SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE.

N. Training: See APPENDIX IV – SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE.

O. Other Documentation: See APPENDIX IV – SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE.

P. As Built Drawings: The Contractor shall supply the Owner with an As Built set of Shop Draw-ings within thirty (30) days of Final Acceptance by the Owner of the work at the first gate. 1. Quantity and submittal of the As Built drawings shall be per the requirements of the Contract

Documents.

2. Certain As Built drawings shall be Signed and Sealed per 1.5.F.

Q. Project Schedule: Contractor shall develop and submit a Project Schedule, per the Contract Re-quirements, within thirty (30) days of the NTP. 1. Project Schedule shall include, but is not limited to the following:

a. Complete list and schedule for of all required submittal documentation b. Contract Review activities c. Design and Engineering activities d. Material Procurement activities



e. Manufacturing activities f. Shipment activities g. Installation activities h. Quality Assurance activities, included all inspection and hold points, factory inspections

and testing, onsite inspections and testing, substantial completion and final acceptance. i. Training activities

2. Schedule should be on a gate by gate basis 3. Schedule should include activities for PBB, PCAir and GPU. 4. Schedule should include a one (1) week for tenant Airline “familiarization period” Airline

employees to become familiar with the equipment at each gate. This familiarization process will utilize aircraft to “test” all equipment.

R. Software and Laptop: Contractor will supply at Substantial Completion of the first gate, copies of

any and all software and the required interface cables so that the Authorities maintenance person-nel can reload the PBB’s control software and make any necessary adjustments, as allowed by the manufacturer, to the PBB control software. 1. If any software licenses are required to use this software, the Contractor shall supply any and

all required licenses. 2. Contractor shall also supply one (1) laptop computer for the Project with the latest Windows

Operating System and all of the necessary software that would be required to access and use the PBB, PCAir and GPU software.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: The PBB manufacturer shall be in the specific business to design

and manufacture the specially constructed PBB required by this Specification. The Contractor must have a minimum of ten (10) years’ experience in producing the PBB design proposed. The PBB design being proposed MUST have been in continuous use for a minimum of ten (10) years in the US market. Specific design features included in this ten (10) year requirement shall be the PBB’s:

1. Tunnel side wall structural panels

2. Tunnel roller system

3. Vertical drive system

4. Horizontal drive system

5. Electronic controls system.

6. Cable Conveyance System



B. Product Qualifications: The Owner has established certain key PBB product design features that shall be supplied in order for the new PBB’s to be of consistent design, functionality, reliability and maintainability with the Owner’s fleet of Apron Drive PBB’s. Further definition of these re-quired design features can be found in the details of the Specification.

C. Installation Subcontractor Qualifications: The Installation subcontractor used by the Contractor

to install the PBB’s and the ancillary equipment and remove and scrap the existing PBB’s and an-cillary equipment shall have a minimum of ten (10) years of experience installing PBB’s, PCAir and GPU’s. The installation subcontractor shall be trained and certified by the PBB manufactur-er as having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install the manufacturer's products per the specified requirements.

D. Regulatory Requirements: The bridges shall be designed to conform to all applicable Federal,

State and Municipal Codes and regulations as applicable to the project site which are in effect at the time of manufacture. 1. The PBB must fully comply with the requirements of Chapter 6 of NFPA 415 2016 and ap-

plicable UL codes. a. The major components of the PBB, identified below, MUST have passed the fire tested

per Chapter 6, Section 6.4 of NFPA 415 2016. (1) 6.4.6 – Walls and Floors (2) 6.4.7 – Flexible Closures (3) 6.4.8 – Cab and Rotunda Curtain Slats (4) 6.4.9 – Aircraft Bumper (5) 6.4.10 – Miscellaneous Seals and Weather-stripping

b. PBB design shall comply with the design requirements of NFPA 415 2016, Chapter 6, Sections 6.1 and 6.2.

c. The specific materials identified Chapter 6, Section 6.3 of NFPA 415 2016 shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 415 2016, Chapter 6, Sections 6.3.

d. The PBB to be supplied shall have Independent 3rd Party Certification from an NRTL of compliance with the requirements of NFPA 415 2016 (items 1.a 1.b and 1.c above) and the applicable UL codes.

e. In addition, independent 3rd Party Labeling from an NRTL, such as UL or ETL, shall be affixed to the name plate of the PBB prior to shipment, either by permission or by inspec-tion of the Independent 3rd Party NRTL. This labeling shall indicate compliance to the requirements of NFPA 415 2016 and the applicable UL codes.

f. All equipment control cabinets shall comply with UL 508A and shall be labeled as being in compliance with UL 508A.

2. Structural Design and Construction Standards:

a. American Welding Society Standards. (1) All welds shall be qualified weld procedures performed by qualified welders in ac-

cordance with AWS D.1.1. (2) Submit welder qualifications and weld procedure qualifications. (3) All welds shall exhibit adequate penetration and shall be clean and free of slag. (4) Welds shall not be ground to improve appearance except as required for flush surfac-

es or where nonstructural parts are involved. b. All sheared or sharp metal edges shall be deburred or broken.

(1) All exposed metal corners shall have minimum radii in accordance with the appropri-



ate material specification. 3. Mechanical and Hydraulic Specifications and Standards:

a. All mechanical components and designs shall conform to the recommendations and standards established by the Society of Automotive Engineers, Joint Industrial Confer-ence and the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

b. All threaded fasteners shall incorporate suitable locking devices. 4. Electrical Specifications and Standards:

a. The PBB and the new Fixed Walkway and their components, materials and methods of construction and installation shall conform to the applicable requirements and recom-mendations of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), the National Electrical Code (NEC), NFPA-70 and NFPA 79, latest issue and State, county and local construction and electrical codes including any modifications to the NEC by the local au-thority having jurisdiction.

b. All electrical components utilized shall be recognized by Underwriters Laboratories/ETL in all cases where UL/ETL maintains a listing category for the devices installed.

E. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each product, material, pre-manufactured assembly, or

component from one supplier/manufacturer for all passenger boarding bridges in this Specifi-cation. Obtain color, texture, grade, finish, and type of material from a single source with re-sources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties with-out delaying progress of the Work.

F. Engineer-of-Record Qualifications – Signed and Sealed Drawings

1. Provide all “As Built” PBB structural design and connection shop drawings and all structural calculations required by these Specifications signed and sealed by a professional engineer li-censed to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and experienced in provid-ing engineering services of the kind indicated which has resulted in the successful design and installation of PBB’s similar in material, design, and extent to that provided for this Project.

2. Provide all other “As Built” mechanical and electrical systems shop drawings signed and

sealed or otherwise certified by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the state or country, if foreign, of manufacture.

G. Certificate of Compliance - Prior to the Owner and their designated representatives scheduling

the first Factory Inspection visit, the PBB, manufacture shall submit a Certificate of Compliance that the equipment supplied under this contract fully complies with the Contract Specifications and Drawings.

1. This Certificate of Compliance shall be signed by the PBB manufacturer’s Engineering Man-

ager, Quality Assurance Manager and General Manager.

H. Contractor shall be fully responsible to ensure that the new PBB’s, rotunda corridors, rotunda spool pieces, and new Fixed Walkways supplied for this Project are designed and manufactured to conform to the existing PBB foundation conditions, existing walkway conditions and existing building face conditions.



1. The Contractor SHALL NOT rely on the Project Drawings for their design as the infor-mation on these drawings is for reference only.

2. The Contractor SHALL base their designs on the results of their own site survey information


A. The equipment shall NOT be shipped until approval from the Owner has been received. If the

Contractor ships the equipment without the Owner’s approval, the Contractor shall bear ALL costs associated with any storage, delays, or required remedies performed at site to correct non-compliances to the Specifications and Drawings.

B. Delivery: Deliver PBB’s and Walkways with protective covering to prevent exposure of interior

to weather, dirt and water.

C. Factory and Field Storage:

1. Store PBB’s and new Fixed Walkways at the factory and on site during installation pro-cess, and protect interior from weather, dirt, water and construction debris.

2. The Contractor shall have the flexibility to produce the PBB’s and new Fixed Walkways to

facilitate their production schedule if the production schedule does not match the require-ments for the PBB’s and Walkways to be in FAY for installation.

3. The on-site installation schedule shall be coordinated with the Owner PM.

a. The two (2) A gates should be able to be installed at the same time. b. Only one (1) of the B2 or B3 gates shall be taken out of service at any one time. c. Therefore, the Contractor shall make the necessary provisions to store the PCAir units

and accessories at the manufacturing location and deliver the PCAir units and accessories to meet the on-site installation schedule.

4. The Contractor shall coordinate all deliveries with the Owner PM so that the PBB’s, Walk-

ways and any ancillary equipment are delivered to FAY to correspond to their scheduled in-stallation. a. It is the objective of the delivery and installation process to NOT have any PBB’s stored

on-site at FAY.

D. Handling: Handle PBB’s and new Fixed Walkways according to manufacturer's written rigging and installation instructions for unloading, transporting and setting in final location.


A. Working Area: Coordinate location of delivered equipment staging area, storage area and erection

area with the Owner PM.

B. Coordinate the removal and scrap of the existing PBB, PCAir and GPU with the Owner PM and the gate closure schedule.



C. Coordinate the recovery of certain spare parts prior to removal of the equipment with the Owner

PM. D. PBB and Walkway Foundation: Coordinate any refurbishment or repair of existing PBB and

Fixed Walkway foundations with the removals and scrap of existing equipment and installation of new equipment.

E. Bridge-Installed Equipment: Coordinate the installation of the 400 Hz GPU, PCAir units and

bag slides with the PBB installation. F. Electrical power and communication. Coordinate installation and connections with contrac-

tor performing this work. 1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Project Warranty: Provide special project warranty, signed by Contractor, PBB Installa-

tion subcontractor and the PBB Manufacturer, agreeing to replace, repair, or restore defective materials and workmanship of any product, materials or work provide pursuant to this Specifi-cation during a warranty period of 2 years from final acceptance of the Owner.

B. PBB Manufacturer shall also provide, directly to the Owner, a 5-year warranty from the date of

final acceptance by the Owner, to replace defective: 1. motors and inverters 2. motors and gearboxes 3. horizontal drive motors 4. control systems 5. wheel bogie assembly 6. lift column assemblies 7. Tunnel and Rotunda guide frame roller assemblies 8. Tunnel frame work and sheet metal in its entirety 9. Cab assembly, including rotating components, bearings and sheet metal enclosures 10. Rotunda assembly and sheet metal enclosures 11. cab and rotunda curtain assemblies to include motors, shafts, bearings, bushings, guides 12. canopy assembly and control system 13. articulating cab floor assembly and control system 14. auto level components and control system 15. all electrical harnesses, connector blocks, and components related to the electrical operating

systems 16. PLC/computer systems and components

C. PBB Manufacturer shall also provide a 10-year warranty directly to the Owner against any exte-

rior paint system failure. D. These warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may

have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.

E. "Defective" is defined to include, but not by way of limitation, operation or control system fail-



ures, performances below required minimums, excessive wear, unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes, unsafe conditions, the need for excessive maintenance, abnormal noise or vibration, and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions.

F. Warranty Claim Response time: The manufacturer shall ship repair parts and send a qualified

service technician (if required), to the Owner within 24 hours of being notified of an equipment failure while under warranty and parts shall be delivered at the applicable Owner facility within 48 hours from the time the order was placed by the Owner. If the manufacturer is unable to obtain the parts to restore the equipment to service, the Owner reserves the right to obtain the replace-ment parts or service elsewhere and charge the total cost to the manufacturer, including labor and administrative fees. The manufacturer shall pay all Customs fees, taxes, and freight for warranty parts during the warranty period.

1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with

protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Provide the following materials for each PBB at installation: a. Paint touch-up kit, full and unopened. b. Aircraft closure (canopy) repair kit.

1.10 SUPPLY OF RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS

A. The Owner shall determine which parts and the quantities of each part, the Contractor shall sup-ply from the Recommended Spare Parts List submitted per paragraph 1.4.I.

1. The Owner shall advise the Contractor of the selected PBB Spare parts and quantities, equal

to the PBB Spare Parts Allowance, within sixty (60) days of the Owner’s approval of the PBB Manufacturer’s Recommended Spare Parts list.

2. The Contractor shall deliver these spare parts to the Owner no later than the Substantial

Completion date of the Scope of Work at the first gate.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

A. In this Specification, the term “or Owner approved equal” may be used to indicate that the Con-tractor shall have the option of proposing an alternative to what has been specified. The Contrac-tor’s alternative must be equal to or exceed the performance, functionality and safety require-ments of the Specification.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements of this Specification, the Contractor shall make every effort to supply materials that match the existing equipment in use at FAY so as to minimize the spare parts requirements for the Owner’s Maintenance group. In addition, the Owner has estab-lished a minimum standard of quality and reliability for certain parts and components that are routinely purchased to maintain the Owner’s equipment. The list below reflects this standard and is in support of the Owner’s spare parts objectives. The manufacturers on this list shall not be perceived or construed as favored or preferred. This list shall, in no way, preclude other manu-facturers, provided that their equipment and components have been reviewed by the Owner’s PM and determined to be of equivalent or similar quality, functionality, and reliability. The Owner’s decision in this regard shall be final. The use of specific product manufacturers or models on previous Owner’s projects does not constitute pre-approval on this Project.

1. PBB’s and new Fixed Walkways:

a. JBT AeroTech. b. ThyssenKrupp Airport Systems

2. Baggage Slide

a. Nova or Owner approved alternate 2.3 MATERIALS

A. Where components are not otherwise indicated

1. Provide standard components published by manufacturer as included in standard pre-engineered PBB and new Fixed Walkway systems and as required for a complete system.

2. All equipment and parts furnished shall be the manufacturer's latest listed and published stock

models, except as permitted or required by the Owner PM. 3. The equipment and parts shall meet all the applicable requirements of the specifications.

B. Material Specifications:

Component Applicable Standard

Structural Plate/Steel/Shapes ASTM-A36 or ASTM A572 Grade 50



Structural Tube ASTM-A500 Grade B Steel Pipe ASTM-A53 Grade b Steel Sheet ASTM-A570, ASTM A569 or ASTM A653 Steel Plate ASTM-A514, ASTM 517 Hinge Pins ASTM-A311 Grades 1018 & 1144, or ASTM A576 Grade 1045 Bolts-Standard ASTM A307 Bolts-High Strength ASTM A325, SAE-J429 Grade 5 or 8, or

ASTM A490

Electrical and Electronic Components NFPA 70, NFPA 79, UL listed 2.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - PASSENGER BOARDING BRIDGE

A. Design: The PBB and new Fixed Walkway shall meet the following general requirements.

1. The PBB shall be apron drive, telescoping two or three-tunnel design and shall be the PBB

model numbers as defined in these Specifications.

2. The PBB, including telescoping tunnels, cab and canopy shall serve the aircraft mix as de-fined on the Drawings and in these Specifications.

3. The PBB and new Fixed Walkway foundation locations with respect to the terminal wall and terminal door shall be “As Constructed” and shall be verified by the Contractor to en-sure the new PBB’s and new Fixed Walkways interface correctly with the foundation and terminal building or existing Fixed Walkway.

4. The Aircraft Mix for each gate is as follows: a. A1 and A2

(1) Prop – Q400 (Q200/300 ground load from terminal) (2) RJ – ERJ-135/145, CRJ-200/700/900 (3) NB – EMB-170/175/190, MD-80/90, B717, B737-700/800, A319, A320

b. B2 (1) RJ – ERJ-135/145, CRJ-200/700/900

c. B3 (1) RJ – ERJ-135/145, CRJ-200/700/900 (2) NB – EMB-170/175/190, MD-80/90, B717, A319

5. New Fixed Walkways shall be of the same construction and interior finish as the PBB tun-

nels.

B. Operation Limits:

1. The PBB shall be capable of moving to any point on the terminal apron within the design op-eration range to accommodate the indicated aircraft.

2. The PBB shall have simultaneous directional movements including extension-retraction, lat-eral motion, vertical elevation, and cab rotation.



3. Each PBB shall have a minimum continuous operation range as indicated on the Drawings or

Specifications, measured from the center point of the rotunda to the center point of cab rota-tion.

4. The PBB shall meet the full continuous range of horizontal and vertical movement specified throughout the full continuous range of cab rotation without requiring field modification to meet the full range of movement.

C. Operating Environment:

1. The PBB shall operate satisfactorily in the Fayetteville Regional Airport operational and climatological environment, under ambient temperatures from -25°F to 125°F with winds up to 60 mph on wet, ice-covered or snow-laden apron surfaces.

2. The entire PBB shall be weatherproof when extended while parked to the aircraft and in the stowed position with the cab door closed.

D. Operating Instructions:

1. A weatherproof and water resistant placard outlining the PBB operating instructions shall be displayed in a prominent location in the cab of each PBB in plain sight of the Operator.

2. A qualified graphics expert shall prepare the placard and the displayed instructions. 3. Operating instructions shall be specific to the PBB model, features and functions of the

particular PBB.

E. Safety Requirements:

1. The purpose of these specifications and standards is to describe the requirements, quanti-ties, performance and maintenance properties of the PBB design and installation.

2. Safety to passengers, employees, other personnel, aircraft and equipment is of prime im-

portance. 3. Nothing in these specifications shall relieve the manufacturer or Contractor of the respon-

sibility for providing and installing a safe product. 4. All equipment shall be designed to be fail-safe and all controls that regulate PBB motions

(i.e., horizontal travel, vertical travel, and cab rotation) shall be of the dead-man type. a. Dead-man type shall mean controls that require the operator to apply constant pressure to

be engaged. b. Once the pressure is released the control is disengaged.

5. All operating mechanisms (i.e., horizontal and vertical drive, cab rotation) shall be designed

so the drive mechanism is locked when power fails or is shut off. 6. Positive mechanical stops shall be provided to prevent over-travel where any component



might become disengaged from its guiding or restraining component. a. The positive stop shall be in addition to all limit switches provided to restrict over-travel

during normal operating conditions, including tunnel extension / retraction, drive wheel steering motions and cab rotation.

b. Mechanical stops shall be identified and detailed on the shop drawings. 7. The operator's position in the control cab shall be designed to provide the operator adequate

visibility to position the boarding bridge with the cab weather door closed 8. Suitable enclosures, guard rails, and other restraint devices shall be provided to protect the

operator from being pitched out the open end of the cab in case of sudden stops or inadvertent movements of the bridge when operated with the door open.

9. Fall protection shall be provided for technicians (2 of up to 300 lbs. ea.) working on the PBB

or new Fixed Walkway roof consisting of: a. Two (2) stainless steel tie-off cables on the roof of the new Fixed Walkway and the PBB

A and B tunnel and the part of the C tunnel not covered by handrails b. OSHA compliant Roof hand rails on the C tunnel. c. Labeled tie off points or OSHA Compliant Roof Handrails on the PBB Rotunda and Cab

roof d. An OSHA compliant safety-caged roof access ladder from the service platform outside

the PBB service door.

10. Fall protection tie off points shall be supplied on both sides of the Cab, outside the Cab weather doors so that personnel working on the exterior of the Cab can attached safety har-nesses.

11. Safety Placards and Signage: a. Safety signage shall be located in all areas and locations where there is exposure to haz-

ards for maintenance/operational personnel and the public. Refer to OSHA, ANSI, NEC, National Safety Council, local, federal and state codes for recommended location, size, shape, design and verbiage required for safety signage, the verbiage of the sign shall be appropriate for the particular location/warning.

b. The safety signs shall be clearly visible, firmly affixed and large enough for the content to be visually distinguishable at a glance from a minimum of 6 feet away.

c. The following are, at a minimum, the safety placards, labels and signage that shall be provided. The Contractor shall also provide whatever safety placards, label and signage they have deemed necessary for the safety of the passengers, PBB operators, ramp per-sonnel, maintenance personnel or any other persons using the PBB or near the PBB while it is operating. (1) Operator Instructions – Mounted by operator control console. Instructions shall be

specific to the operational functions and features of the PBB. (2) “NO EXIT - Authorized Personnel Only” – Mounted on interior of service door (3) “WARNING – CRUSH HAZARD, KEEP FEET CLEAR” (with graphic) mount-

ed each side of wheel bogie cross tube. (4) “FORWARD” – Mounted on forward/aircraft side of the wheel bogie cross tube. (5) “REVERSE” – Mounted on rear/terminal side of the wheel bogie cross tube. (6) High Voltage and Electrical Warning Signs and graphics for all electrical cabinets,

panels and junction boxes, and as required by NEC and/or local codes



(7) Engraved labels on all equipment disconnects or disconnect cabinets and exterior junction boxes.

(8) “DO NOT LOCK DOOR WHILE DOCKED TO AIRCRAFT” – On interior of weather door.

(9) “CAUTION - UNEVEN SURFACES” (with graphic) above transition ramp(s). (10) “CAUTION - UNEVEN SURFACES” – Cab exterior – right side- above ACF

Floor. (11) “DO NOT TOUCH” on Auto-level wheel assemblies. (12) Label all fall protection tie offs with appropriate warning placards.

d. Provide a sign on the end of the “B” tunnel that says “Welcome to City Name”. F. Maintenance Provisions:

1 Maintenance requirements shall present no special problems to personnel knowledgeable in

their respective fields of hydraulics, electrical power and controls, or general mechanical as-sembly.

2 Install PBB components with adequate access and appropriate fastener types to permit

change-out by one person. a. If a component's weight requires mechanical assistance to lift, the component or assem-

bly shall be provided with lift eyes, fork lift guides, or other means of providing a me-chanical advantage.

b. Components shall be simple, rugged and easily accessible for routine maintenance, lubri-cation, exchange and adjustment.

c. Electrical cabinets, hydraulic cabinets and pumps shall be located so they are always ac-cessible to maintenance personnel.

d. All interior electrical cabinets shall have a door-operated light for illuminating all interior components.

3 Provide access panels to exterior areas where any inspections, adjustments, maintenance or

replacement of components is required. a. The access panel and opening shall be sized to allow necessary tools and equipment to be

inserted to complete the work. b. The panel shall be permanently attached with by stainless steel hinges c. Panel shall use stainless steel self-retaining fasteners or stainless steel latches to secure

the panel. d. Any rev-nut or nut-cert used shall be stainless steel. e. Panels shall be painted per the approved PBB exterior paint process and be painted the

same color as the PBB exterior. f. NOTE – the requirements of this paragraph shall also apply to the access cover of the

GPU Cable Hoist. See Specification Section 263543. 4 Provide all product specific tools required for routine maintenance. 5 Utilize standardized modular components that are readily available in the continental United

States to provide rapid corrective measures of malfunctioning critical components. Critical bridge components shall be located to allow for ease of access and installation.

6 The manufacturer shall maintain an adequate inventory of all proprietary or vendor fabricated



and modified parts for routine maintenance of the unit. a. All stock shall be maintained, whether or not the unit is in current production, for a min-

imum of ten (10) years from date of final acceptance of the last unit installed. 7 All mechanical and electrical systems shall be protected from potential damage resulting

from climatic conditions, falling objects or collision with aircraft service equipment and other moving vehicles.

8 All cable ties, fasteners, straps and other items subject to direct or indirect sunlight shall be

ultraviolet light rated.

G. Power and Communication Characteristics:

1. Incoming power for PBB, Fixed Walkway, PCAir, and GPU and the communication circuit will be provided to the face of the terminal building in junction boxes provided by the Owner.

2. Provide PBB, PCAir and GPU disconnect cabinet or individual equipment disconnects on the

PBB rotunda column per the requirements of paragraph 2.7.A.1. 3. The Contractor shall be required to supply the necessary junction boxes, conduit, fittings,

properly sized power feeders (not SO Cable), cabling and other required materials to connect all power circuits and all communication or other function circuits terminated at the building face to the disconnects or disconnect cabinet and the communication or other function junc-tion boxes on the PBB rotunda.

4. If a new Fixed Walkway is supplied, it shall be shipped with the necessary junction boxes,

conduit and fittings, properly sized power feeders (not SO Cable) cabling and other required materials to connect all power circuits and all communication or other function circuits ter-minated at the building face to the disconnects or disconnect cabinet and the communication or other function junction boxes on the PBB rotunda. a. Equipment power feeders shall be one continuous run from the junction boxes at the ter-

minal face to the SST disconnect cabinet or individual equipment disconnects at the PBB rotunda.

b. No intermediate junction boxes under the Fixed Walkway shall be allowed. 5. There will be two (2) power circuits provided at the terminal face.

a. One circuit for the PCAir unit b. One circuit, which will supply power to both the PBB and the GPU.

6. There will be three (3) power circuits provided at the terminal face. One circuit each for the

PBB, PCAir and GPU. a. The PBB power circuit is part of the terminal building emergency power system.

7. A section of flex conduit shall be utilized for each conduit connection from the PBB rotunda

or Fixed Walkway to the terminal building or PBB Rotunda to Fixed Walkway. a. Flexible conduits SHALL NOT exceed three (3) feet in length.

8. Equipment power feeders from the terminal building to the SST Disconnect Cabinet or indi-

vidual equipment disconnects at the PBB Rotunda, including those under the new or Fixed



Walkway AND from the SST Disconnect cabinet or individual equipment disconnects to the PBB power panel, PCAir and GPU SHALL NOT be parallel feeders.

9. There shall be three (3) equipment power feeders from the junction boxes at the terminal

building face to the SST Disconnect Cabinet or individual disconnects at the PBB rotunda. This includes power feeders under the new or Fixed Walkways. a. One (1) ea. power feeder for the PBB, PCAir and GPU.

10. The PBB shall operate on a 480-volt, 3-phase, 60-Hz, 60-Amp circuit, with ground. 11. The PBB shall have a telephone communication circuit with CAT5 or CAT6 cable from a lo-

cation in the PBB cab to a junction box mounted at the terminal face. 12. The PBB shall have an interior security camera system that shall connect to the Owner’s se-

curity system at a junction box mounted at the terminal face. 13. The PBB shall have a service door security access system that shall connect to the Owner’s

security system at a junction box mounted at the terminal face. 14. The PBB and PCAir smoke detectors shall be connected to the terminal building fire alarm

system at a junction box mounted at the terminal face. 15. Provide PBB cable conveyance system for the required

a. PBB, PCAir and 400Hz GPU power b. Control wiring c. CAT5 or CAT6 communication cables d. Cabling for PBB internal security camera system e. Cabling for service door security access system f. Cabling for PBB and PCAir smoke detectors.

16. Cable conveyance system shall have been in use for a minimum of ten (10) years. 17. Rotunda Column Grounding: Provide a grounding stud on the rotunda base plate and make

required connection to grounding stud so that PBB and all ancillary equipment are properly grounded.

H. Mechanical Characteristics:

1. Mechanical Design and Components:

a. Only standard components readily available in the continental United States, manufac-tured in Inch-Pound standard units and conforming to recommendations and standards listed in the Quality Assurance Article shall be used.

b. All operating mechanical components shall be assembled and tested before the PBB leaves the manufacturer's plant.

2 All non-structural exterior hardware and fasteners shall be stainless steel.




A. Aircraft: Passenger boarding bridges shall be capable of servicing the first and, if applicable,

second forward door of all commercial aircraft specified in these Specifications and indicated on the Project Drawings.

1. PBB shall meet the full continuous range of vertical travel required by the specified Aircraft

Mix, measured from the apron to the cab spacer leveled edge with the cab fully rotated coun-terclockwise, as installed, without requiring field modification.

2. The PBB cab shall have the necessary cab floor, handrails and canopy features to service the

ERJ and CRJ aircraft specified as part of the Aircraft Mix.

B. Telescoping Tunnel Slope: Maximum slope shall be 8.33% (1:12) measured along the tunnel floor (except at the transition ramps), for each aircraft type serviced.

C. Cab Rotation: The cab shall be designed to rotate a total of 125° (90°-95° counterclockwise and

30°-35° clockwise from center) at a maximum speed of 145° per minute in either direction.

D. Bridge Rotation: The rotunda shall permit the entire unit to rotate 175° (87.5° clockwise and 87.5° counterclockwise).

E. Drive Wheel Rotation: Steer angle shall be limited to the left and to the right by physical stops,

per the PBB manufacturer’s standard “steer past 90” limits. Steer speed shall be 23° per mi-nute.

F. Vertical Lift Speed: 1.5 feet per minute (fpm) to 5 fpm as measured at the cab spacer.

G. Drive Speed: The drive system shall permit the unit to extend/retract and rotate to any point

within its operating envelope at a variable speed between 0 and 90 fpm.

H. Deceleration: The horizontal drive system shall include a decelerator device to reduce or elimi-nate shocks when approaching maximum extension or retraction, or when horizontal travel is stopped or reversed suddenly, for protection of the equipment and passenger boarding bridge operator.

2.6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN AND SUPPORT ELEMENTS

A. Loads: In addition to the dead loads and dynamic effects caused by movement, the entire

passenger boarding bridge shall support the following minimum loads, and those of all at-tachments to the bridge, unless the governing building code prescribes more severe require-ments. These loads may be applied in total or in part, singularly or simultaneously. The de-sign shall be based on the combination that imposes the most adverse loading.

1. Live Load PBB (Extended or Retracted) and new Fixed Walkways: 40 lb./sq. ft. 2. Wind Load:

a. Retracted and Stowed: 25 lb./sq. ft., or an approximate wind velocity of 100 mph, 10 second duration.



b. Operational: 12.5 lb./sq. ft., or an approximate wind velocity of 60 mph. 3. Roof (Snow) Load: 30 psf and the ability to support two (2) 300 lb. persons at any location

on the roof. 4. Equipment Minimum Loads (Approximate):

a. Preconditioned Air Point-of-Use Unit: 7,000-10,000 lbs. Aft of the drive column. b. Hose Reel or Basket and Hose: 350 lbs. c. 400 Hz Power Unit: 2,750 lbs. d. 400 Hz Cable Hoist: 600 lbs.

5. The structural design shall provide sufficient torsional rigidity to minimize sway when the

boarding bridge is brought to a gradual stop. 6. All mechanisms for actuating, guiding and restraining the boarding bridge and its components

shall be designed to minimize the noise, deflection, and vibration apparent to passengers. No operating vibrations or loads shall be transmitted to the terminal building.

2.7 PASSENGER BOARDING BRIDGE AND NEW FIXED WALKWAY

A. Electrical and Control Systems

1. Equipment Disconnects

a. There shall be lockable, SST, NEMA rated disconnects mounted on the rotunda column and accessible to maintenance technicians standing at ground level for the PBB, PCAir, 400Hz GPU and Tennant Airline supplied 28Vdc Mobile GPU.

b. The center of any disconnect handle or circuit breaker shutoff shall NOT be greater than 54 in. from ground level.

c. Conduits and SO Cord should not enter the disconnect cabinet or the individual discon-nect through the top. Penetrations shall be through the bottom or sides.

d. If a single SST disconnect cabinet is supplied, (1) Separate circuit breakers for the PBB, PCAir, 400Hz GPU and Tenant Airline sup-

plied 28Vdc Mobile GPU, the PBB transformer and the various PBB 110/220 auxil-iary, lighting and control circuits shall be supplied.

(2) Input to the 60 amp 28Vdc Mobile GPU circuit breaker shall be from the output of the 400Hz GPU circuit breaker. i) The 28Vdc Mobile GPU circuit breaker shall be subject to the same requirements

as the PBB, PCAir and 400Hz GPU circuit breakers. (3) Output from the 28Vdc Mobile GPU circuit breaker shall be to a plug connection

mounted on the exterior of the SST disconnect cabinet. i) The exterior connection shall be a 60 amp 4-poll, 3-wire receptacle and angled

mounting box. ii) Receptacle shall be an Appleton ADR6034 - Crouse Hinds 113A, Type 3R, Cata-

log # AR642 or Owner approved equivalent. iii) Contractor shall supply cut sheets for receptacle and mounting box for approval.

(4) A large laminated component layout graphic and wiring schematic shall be affixed to the interior door of the cabinet, indicating name and function of each component.



(5) The electrical components and workmanship of the disconnect cabinet shall comply with the items p, q, r in paragraph 2 – General Electrical Requirements below.

(6) The cabinet door shall be SST, hinged and gasketed. (7) The cabinet shall have a means to allow condensate or water leakage to drain from

the cabinet. (8) The cabinet door handle shall have a lockable latching mechanism that engages at

both the top and bottom of the cabinet. (9) Each equipment circuit breaker must be able to be “Lock / Tagged” out in accordance

with OSHA’s requirements for Equipment Lock Out / Tag Out requirements. The disconnect cabinet door shall be able to be completely closed and secured when one or more circuit breakers or disconnects are “Locked / Tagged” out.

(10) Each equipment breaker shall be labeled with an engraved placard listing the compo-nent the breaker is supplying power to and the voltage and amps of the circuit.

e. If separate disconnects are supplied for the PBB, PCAir, 400Hz GPU and Tenant Airline supplied 28Vdc Mobile: (1) Disconnect enclosures shall be SST. (2) Disconnects shall be located on a mounting plate attached to the rotunda support col-

umn. (3) The mounting plate shall be painted to the same specifications as the rotunda column. (4) Input to the 60 amp 28Vdc Mobile GPU disconnect shall be from the output of the

400Hz GPU circuit breaker. i) The 28Vdc Mobile GPU disconnect shall be subject to the same requirements as

the PBB, PCAir and 400Hz GPU disconnects. (5) Output from the 28Vdc Mobile GPU disconnect shall be to a plug connection mount-

ed on the exterior of the SST disconnect. i) The exterior connection shall be a 60 amp 4-poll, 3-wire receptacle and angled

mounting box. ii) Receptacle shall be an Appleton ADR6034 - Crouse Hinds 113A, Type 3R, Cata-

log # AR642 or Owner approved equivalent. iii) Contractor shall supply cut sheets for receptacle and mounting box for approval.

(6) The various PBB 110/220 auxiliary, lighting control circuits shall be located in a sep-arate lockable cabinet in the PBB Cab area.

(7) Each SST disconnect enclosure shall be labeled with an engraved placard listing the component the disconnect is supplying power to and the voltage and amps of the cir-cuit.

(8) Each equipment disconnect must be able to be “Lock / Tagged” out in accordance with OSHA’s requirements for Equipment Lock Out / Tag Out requirements

(9) The electrical components and workmanship of the separate disconnects shall comply with the items p, q, r in paragraph 2 – General Electrical Requirements below.

2. General Electrical Requirements:

a. A four pair CAT6 or CAT5 cable, w/ phone outlet shall be located on the cab wall near the control console for the installation of telephone or intercom equipment. (1) This outlet shall have a SST cover plate.

i) Plate shall be Premier Communication, Part Number PT-630AD-6 (2) Contractor shall employ a qualified subcontractor to connect the PBB communica-

tions (telephone) circuit to the junction box at the terminal face. b. Duplex GFI outlets (un-switched 110V, single phase, 20 amp) shall be located:

(1) in the Rotunda or A-Tunnel (near the terminal door or walkway),



(2) on the left side of the cab wall, near the telephone outlet (3) All interior outlets shall have a SST cover plate. (4) In new Fixed Walkways, as required by Code

c. Light switches, receptacles, alarms, indicators, thermostats or other devices shall be located a minimum of 4 in. and a maximum of 16 in. from the terminal end of the corridor or Fixed Walkway. (1) The distance is measured from the terminal edge of the device or cover plate.

d. Tunnel and service door light switches and any security card reader devices shall be located no further than 6 in. from the interior right edge of the service door. (1) This may require special fabrication allowances of the tunnel structure to the terminal

side of the service door. e. Interior Lighting – PBB tunnel, rotunda, cab bubble and new Fixed Walkway.

(1) The placement of the interior light fixtures and the number (minimum of 2 ea.) of LED tube lamps per fixture shall provide an average light intensity at floor level, throughout the PBB of 20-foot-candles.

(2) The first “A” tunnel light shall be located within 24 in. of the rotunda end of the “A” tunnel.

(3) The interior PBB tunnel and new Fixed Walkway light fixtures shall be recessed. (4) The interior rotunda and cab bubble light fixture(s) may be recessed or surface

mounted. (5) Fixtures shall utilize a minimum of two (2), four (4) ft. 110V LED tube lamps.

i) LED arrays are not allowed. ii) No transformers or tube ballasts shall be allowed. iii) Power cables for lamps shall be terminated in finger proof terminal blocks.

Wago connectors are not allowed for this connection. (6) Fixtures shall blend with the ceiling design (7) Tunnel and new Fixed Walkway fixtures shall be oriented perpendicular to the center

line of the tunnel or new Fixed Walkway. (8) Fixture shall have black trim (9) Fixture frame shall be hinged or removable and shall have self-retaining screws or

latches. (10) Prior to the PBB Tunnel or new Fixed Walkway light fixture being installed, the roof

of the PBB tunnel or new Fixed Walkway shall be painted per the requirements of 2.7.J.3.

(11) The lenses / diffusers for these light fixtures shall be captured in the fixture frame to prevent lens / diffusers or LED tubes from falling out.

f. Three-way switches shall be located in the Rotunda Corridor or new Fixed Walkway (right side near the terminal door) and on the wall or power panel near the service door. (1) Shall control the interior new Fixed Walkway and PBB tunnel, rotunda and cab bub-

ble lights as well as the exterior Cab light. (2) Shall have SST cover plates.

g. If there is a light over the Operator Console - (1) It shall be LED tube light (2) It shall be switched on / off from the HMI screen.

h. Exterior Lighting (1) Floodlights

i) Two (2) on the underside of the cab, facing forward, to illuminate the apron area around and under the PBB. (a) Shall be controlled from the PBB HMI screen.



ii) One (1) at the lift columns to illuminate the PBB wheel area. (a) Located so that the illumination does not interfere with the camera focused

on the wheel bogie. (b) Shall be controlled from the PBB HMI screen. (c) Shall also be illuminated whenever the horizontal drive system is activated,

regardless if the floodlight is turned off on the PBB HMI screen. iv) Lamps for the exterior floodlights shall be Beacon FL-1/12NB-

25/5K/4X4/UNV/YK/BBT v) The three exterior flood lights shall be mounted on the cover of a weather tight,

stainless steel (SST), NEMA 3R or 4 rated enclosure. (a) Cover shall SST, hinged with SST latch(s) or SST self-retaining screws. (b) Cover shall have a weather gasket.

(2) Cab Exterior Light i) Fixture shall be weather proof and surface mounted. ii) Fixtures shall utilize a minimum of two (2), four (4) ft. 110V LED tube lamps.

(a) LED arrays are not allowed. (b) No transformers or tube ballasts shall be allowed. (c) Power cables for lamps shall be terminated in finger proof terminal blocks.

Wago connectors are not allowed for this connection. iii) Fixture shall be mounted outside the weather doors on the PBB Cab roof and

illuminate the cab-aircraft interface. iv) Shall be controlled with the Tunnel light switch and shall be on when the Tunnel

lights are on. v) Shall also be controlled by a button on the HMI so the PBB operator can turn the

light off / on when docking to the aircraft. (3) Service Door Light

i) Shall be an LED light ii) Shall have a photo cell which will override the interior light switch. iii) Shall be an ACUITY LITHONIA TWS LED 1 50K or Owner approved

equivalent. iv) Shall be controlled by a switch located on the interior wall of the PBB, next to

the Service door and in the same switch box as the tunnel 3-way light switch. v) Switch shall have a SST cover plate.

(4) An LED Amber flashing light shall be mounted at the left and right edge of the wheel bogie cross tube i) Shall be continuously on when the PBB is in OPERATE mode.

e. Emergency Lighting (1) The PBB power circuit from the terminal building is part of the terminal buildings

emergency power system so a separate emergency lighting system on the PBB is not required.

(2) The PBB and new Fixed Walkway will NOT be on a terminal building emergency power circuit so the PBB lighting circuit shall have an in-line UPS battery backup system. i) A vision window shall be supplied in the access panel for the UPS unit so that the

status indicators of the UPS unit can be viewed by a person standing in the cab bubble without opening the access panel.

ii) Access panel shall be hinged with self-retaining screws. (3) PBB and new Fixed Walkway lighting circuit shall be energized for a minimum of

fifteen (15) minutes in the event power is lost to the PBB and new Fixed Walkway.



(4) New Fixed Walkway emergency lighting shall include one fixture at each end of the walkway and every third light in the walkway.

(5) PBB emergency lighting shall include one fixture at the: i) Cab Bubble ii) B–C Tunnel Transition Ramp iii) A-B Tunnel Transition Ramp iv) mid-tunnel in each PBB tunnel v) Rotunda

(6) Only those fixtures identified in paragraphs 4 and 5 above shall be part of the emer-gency lighting system.

f. Cable Conveyance System (1) The cable conveyance system shall have been in use for a minimum of ten (10) years. (2) The cable conveyance system shall not impede the normal PBB operation or person-

nel or equipment traffic around the PBB. (3) The cable conveyance system shall include input power cables, each sized for the

specific requirements of the PBB, PCAir and 400Hz GPU supplied for this project and any required control, communication, and other security, video or fire alarm sys-tem cables, as required.

(4) PBB, PCAir and 400Hz GPU power cables SHALL NOT be parallel feeders in the cable conveyance system.

(5) Cables in the cable conveyance system shall be clamped or strapped to prevent slid-ing or slippage of the cables.

(6) All power and control cabling between the equipment disconnect(s) at the PBB ro-tunda and the PBB “C” tunnel shall be contained in an exterior cable conveyance sys-tem mounted under or on the sides of the “A” and “B” tunnels of the PBB. i) All power and control cabling shall be of a “Flat Pak” design. ii) System shall be accessible at all operational positions of the PBB for mainte-

nance personnel to inspect the system or for replacement or addition of cables. (7) All cabling contained in a cable conveyance system on the side of the PBB

i) Shall be either UV resistant or have a separate UV resistant covering. ii) Shall be clamped to the carrier brackets with metal clamps and scuff protection.

(8) All power and control, communication, and other security, video or fire alarm system cables from the cable conveyance system shall terminate directly into terminal blocks or the breaker lugs in the equipment disconnect(s) or junction boxes at the PBB ro-tunda. i) Intermediate junction boxes shall not be allowed.

(9) Strain relief shall be provided for all equipment power cables between the cable con-veyance system and the equipment disconnect(s) mounted on the PBB Rotunda

(10) Power and control cables shall be grouped and supported by straps between the cable tray under the cab bubble floor and their final termination points.

g. Cable Trays and Flex or Rigid Conduit (1) All cable trays used on the PBB shall be either galvanized, aluminum or SST. (2) Cable trays shall be used to route the power and control cables beyond the cable con-

veyance system to the PBB cab bubble floor. Cable trays shall extend for enough under the cab bubble floor so that the power and control cables do not interfere with the GPU unit mounted under the cab bubble floor. Cable trays shall also extend far enough to allow the GPU unit to be mounted as close as possible to the cab bubble floor.

(3) When a Fixed Walkway or Extended Corridor is being supplied



i) All power and control circuit cables MUST be routed in rigid conduit under the Fixed Walkway or Extended Corridor.

ii) Cable Trays ARE NOT allowed under the Fixed Walkway or Extended Corridor. (4) No standard electrical, control or communication service SO Cord shall be permitted

on the exterior sides of the Fixed Walkway, Corridor, Rotund, PBB Tunnels, Cab Bubble or Cab.

(5) All exterior conduits shall be rigid and shall be attached with rigid conduit clamps. i) Flex conduit shall be allowed where required to facility maintenance or

movement of PBB components (e.g. ventilator, vertical drive motors, etc.) ii) Flex conduit shall be attached with a flex conduit clamp.

(6) Any rigid or flex conduit attached to the roof of the PBB Cab, Cab Bubble, Tunnels, Rotunda, Corridor or Fixed Walkway, shall be secured with nelson stud fasteners. i) Drilling or screwing into the roof is NOT allowed.

(7) Concealed wiring running within walls, ceilings, floors or other inaccessible areas of the PBB and Fixed Walkway i) Must be contained in conduit for the length of the run ii) Must be terminated on a terminal strip in a junction box at each end of the

conduit. h. Externally mounted electrical equipment panels or cabinets which contain electrical or

electronic components and controls (terminal blocks only are not included in this re-quirement), shall be equipped with a thermostatically controlled heater

i. Each circuit (e.g. lighting, receptacles, cab floor heat, ventilators, gate sign, etc.) shall be protected by its own circuit breaker (1) Low voltage control circuits of 10 amps 50Vdc / 50Vac OR LESS may be protected

be either circuit breakers or fuses. j. All circuits shall have suitable overload protection.

(1) Each conductor shall be sized to have current carrying capacity as allowed by the National Electric Code (NEC) equal to or greater than the capacity of the circuit breaker provided for the circuit.

(2) Circuit breakers i) Shall be grouped in convenient locations ii) Shall be suitably marked for size and noun-name function.

(3) Protection devices shall be sized to protect wiring, motors and other electrical components from damage due to overload and prevent electrical or mechanical damage to any associated PBB components or ancillary equipment due to failure of any PBB component or ancillary equipment.

k. Quick Disconnect fittings must shall be UL or ETL approved. (1) Quick Disconnect receptacles and plugs shall be labeled with a permanent type label

to indicate which receptacle goes with which plug. l. Toggle switches must be of MIL-S-3950 quality of equivalent and rated for the loads

which they control. m. Electrical interlocks shall be of a fail-safe design. n. All motors and bearings shall be sealed, not requiring lubrication. Actuator mechanisms

shall have adequate allowance made for lubrication requirements. o. Spark-producing electrical components must be located at least eighteen (18) inches

(0.457 m) above ground level. p. All Power and Control Cabinets shall comply with UL 508A and must have an NRTL la-

bel attached to the control cabinet door. q. Enclosures and Junction Boxes



(1) All exterior enclosures and junction boxes shall be labeled with engraved placards. i) Placards shall contain the nomenclature used on the drawings or schematics for

the enclosure or junction box. (2) All exterior electrical components, including terminal blocks / terminal strips, shall

be housed in weather tight, stainless steel (SST) enclosures. (3) All exterior enclosures and junction boxes, including pass through junction boxes,

shall: i) be weather tight, stainless steel (SST) enclosures of NEMA 3R or 4 rating ii) shall have a hinged, SST cover, which shall be retained by SST latch(s) or SST

self-retaining screws. iii) shall have a weather gasket for the cover. iv) shall have a drain device for condensate.

(4) All exterior electrical devices, including, but not limited to, lights, beacons, cameras, sensors, temperature probes and switches shall be a weather proof design with a NEMA 3R or 4 rating. i) All mounting boxes for electrical devices shall be SST and be a weather proof

design with a NEMA 3R or 4 rating. ii) The enclosure cover shall be hinged, SST and be retained by SST latch(s) or SST

self-retaining screws. iii) The enclosure covers shall also have a weather gasket iv) The enclosure shall have a drain device for condensate. v) The device should be mounted to the hinged cover.

(5) All enclosures and junction boxes containing power circuits shall have applicable warning or symbol stickers as required by Code.

(6) All components mounted in enclosures and junction boxes shall be mounted to a backing plate supplied by the enclosure manufacturer i) Components shall be intended for use in the enclosure or junction box. ii) Mounting directly to the enclosure or junction box wall shall NOT be allowed.

(7) Conduits and wiring routed into enclosures, junction boxes or panels shall have clamping fittings and the fitting threads shall have bushings installed.

r. Wiring and Terminal Blocks (1) All wiring shall be brought to mounted terminal blocks.

i) Wire splices or wire nuts of any type shall NOT be used. ii) Terminal blocks shall NOT be allowed to hang free in air iii) In junction boxes where space does not allow for the use of terminal blocks,

mounted Wago type connectors are acceptable. (2) Wiring in all enclosures and junction boxes shall comply with the NEC requirement

in Table 314.16 for the wiring fill capacity of the enclosure or junction box. (3) Wiring shall be formed and restrained to give a neat appearance. (4) All wires, including spares, within junction boxes, control cabinets, disconnects,

other electrical enclosures shall be neatly secured and routed. i) Wire routing trays shall be used when space permits.

(5) Grommets and suitable anti-chafe material shall be used where wires are required to pass through structure or similar relief or opening which exposes the wire to possible chafing.

(6) All wiring shall be identified using stamped labels or other Owner approved wire labels. i) Labels shall be visible and located within 1 in. of their termination point. ii) Wires are to be numbered in a logical sequence



iii) All wire numbers are to be indicated on wiring diagrams. (7) Spare wires shall be numbered and also labeled as “SPARE”. (8) Spare wires shall be indicated on the wiring diagrams. (9) Wires must meet the bend radius requirements of NEC.

i) Ninety degree bends shall not be allowed. (10) Ferrules or insulated ring terminals shall be used on any fine stranded wire,

depending on the terminal block connection. i) Fork or Spade terminals shall ONLY be allowed to make connections to

purchased components that have ring terminals and are assembled into the PBB. No other use of fork or spade terminals shall be allowed.

ii) Direct connection of fine stranded wire to a terminal block shall NOT be allowed.

(11) Terminal blocks shall be either: i) Finger proof or tamper proof design ii) Stud or open style design with a protective cover supplied by the terminal block

manufacturer. iii) Other terminal block designs shall not be accepted.

(12) Terminal blocks must meet the applicable requirements of SAE J561, J858 and J928.

(13) Wire ties SHALL NOT be used to secure and support any wiring. (14) NEC / UL approved clamps and methods must be used to secure and support wiring.

i) Clamps used shall be specifically designed for the wiring being clamped (e.g. clamps for flat pack cable are not the same as clamps for SO cable).

(15) Wire ties shall only be used to keep wires together for appearance and routing to various components.

3. Control Systems

a. PBB shall be PLC controlled. The PLC shall provide built in diagnostics to assist with trouble-shooting.

b. There shall be an HMI screen on the PBB operator console face plate for the display of PBB status information, warning, error and maintenance messages, operation of certain auxiliary equipment and input of certain PBB control and maintenance commands, as specified herein.

c. All PBB motion controls shall be by momentary contact type (dead-man) controls. d. There shall be proximity, laser, radar or other electronic sensors in the Cab floor area of

the PBB indicating the presence of the aircraft. (1) Sensors shall be adjustable and shall NOT be mechanical or protrude past the aircraft

edge of the aircraft spacer. (2) One set of sensors shall cause the PBB to enter a “slow down” mode approximately 3

feet from the aircraft fuselage. i) The speed in “slow down mode” shall be half the normal operating speed.

(3) The second set of sensors shall be activated between 0 to 3 inches from the aircraft fuselage and will stop all forward motion of the PBB. i) The PBB can resume forward travel in the slowdown mode when the PBB spacer

bypass is activated by the Operator from the PBB Console HMI screen. ii) Movement away from the aircraft will not be restricted.

(4) Sensors shall be unaffected by sunlight or aircraft fuselage color. e. The PBB shall be equipped with an automatic leveling system (auto-leveler), mounted on

the cab floor; interior, right side.



(1) The Auto level mechanism must be in full view of the PBB operator. (2) It shall be protected with a guard to prevent accidental damage or activation from

passengers. (3) A “DO NOT TOUCH” label shall be affixed to the cover protecting the Autolevel

wheel. (4) The system shall utilize a deployed arm and allow the PBB to follow changes in the

aircraft elevation that occur during aircraft loading and unloading. (5) The system shall function with equal reliability for all aircraft contours and door sill

heights. f. The auto-leveler is engaged and the Auto Level arm is deployed when the Operator

Console Selector Switch is switched to the “AUTO” position. (1) An Auto Level On message shall appear on the PBB Console HMI screen. (2) When the Operator Console Selector Switch is moved from “AUTO” to

“OPERATE”, the Auto Level arm shall be retracted to its stowed position. g. The auto-leveler circuit shall include a sustained travel timer

(1) The timer shall limit auto-level vertical travel to a maximum of six seconds. (2) The timer shall be adjustable from 1.5 to 6 seconds.

h. An Auto-level fault condition shall occur if the operation exceeds the set time limit. This fault condition shall cause: (1) all vertical motion power to be disconnected (2) a vertical travel brake to be engaged (3) activation of an audible over-travel alarm located on the Operator Console Face Plate

or front panel of the Upper Console. (4) a warning message to be displayed prominently on the PBB Console HMI screen. (5) activation of an audible auto-level over-travel alarm and an amber flashing light, both

of which will be mounted near the terminal door in the Corridor or or New Fixed Walkway above the light switch.

(6) activation of an audible auto-level alarm on the wheel bogie, which produces a dis-tinctly different sound from other PBB alarms. i) The alarm device shall also have a flashing red-light. ii) The alarm device shall have an engraved label – “AUTO LEVEL ALARM”.

i. If the auto level wheel does not make contact with an aircraft as it is deployed, the Auto level fault shall be activated.

j. To prevent the PBB operator from accidentally turning off and disabling the auto level system, the auto-level fault condition and all related audible alarms and warning messag-es shall be activated whenever the selector switch is moved from “AUTO” directly to the “OFF” position.

k. Safety Shoe for Aircraft door: (1) Provide a safety shoe (24 volt operated) as back-up feature to the Auto Level Wheel

leveling system. (2) The safety shoe, when deployed will be placed between the aircraft door and the PBB

cab floor. (3) The safety shoe shall be served from electrical plug in receptacle with a self-retaining

weather cover (complying with this specification for plug in connectors) located in the cab wall below or to the left the Operators window.

(4) If the safety shoe is un-plugged and removed the normal operation of the PBB shall

DANGER AUTO LEVEL FAILURE RE-SET AUTO LEVEL



be un-affected. (5) A storage holster for storing the device shall be located in the same wall area under

or to the left the Operators window. (6) Wire used for the safety shoe shall be spiral type spring S.O. cord (7) The safety shoe system shall have two sequences. (8) In the event of an Autolevel system failure, the safety shoe shall detect and automati-

cally correct the differences between aircraft door and PBB floor elevation. (9) When the aircraft door comes in contact with the safety shoe the first or second time,

i) An audible alarm will sound on the Operator console and a warming message shall be displayed on the HMI

ii) The Autolevel arm shall be retracted iii) The PBB vertical drive system shall move the PBB down until the safety shoe is

deactivated (e.g. the aircraft door is no longer in contact with the safety shoe). iv) The Autolevel arm shall be redeployed and the Autolevel system shall be reac-

tivated. (10) If the aircraft door comes in contact with the safety shoe for a third time, the Au-

tolevel alarm sequence as specified in 2.7.A.3.h shall be activated. (11) If a hydraulic vertical drive system is supplied, a UPS system must be provided to

maintain power to the PLC and I/O rack in the case of a power loss to the PBB. (12) If a hydraulic vertical drive system is supplied, a rapid drop solenoid shall be used in

conjunction with the safety shoe. l. When the Operator Console Switch is in the “OPERATE” position:

(1) LED amber lights mounted under the cab shall be on and flashing (2) Lights at each end of the wheel bogie cross tube, near the lift columns, shall be flash-

ing. (3) These lights will be off when the Operator Console Switch is in the “AUTO” posi-

tion. m. When PBB horizontal, vertical or steer motion is activated:

(1) An audible travel alarm bell mounted on the PBB wheel bogie cross tube shall sound at 98 decibels, measured at 10 feet from the wheel bogie i) The travel alarm bell shall be clearly labeled, with an engraved label –

“TRAVEL ALARM”. (2) The amber lights mounted on the outer edges of the wheel column bogie will flash. (3) The flood light over the wheel bogie shall illuminate.

n. If the PBB manufacturer has any ramp level E-STOP buttons: (1) The E-STOP buttons shall be illuminated w/ 28V LED light. (2) The E-STOP button shall be able to be activated by pressing or hitting the E-STOP

button with the palm of the hand. (3) If the ramp level E-STOP is pressed

i) The PBB Auto-level function shall NOT be disabled. ii) A large, flashing error message shall be displayed on the HMI identifying a

“RAMP E-STOP PRESSED” condition. o. Mechanical or electrical interlocks shall be provided to prevent damage to control circuits

or PBB components by selecting opposite motions simultaneously. p. When the PBB Operator selector switch is in the OFF or AUTO position, the following

PBB movement systems shall be inoperative:

AIRCRAFT DOOR SAFETY SHOE ACTIVATED



(1) horizontal movement (2) vertical movement (3) cab rotation (4) ACF floor operation (5) CRJ/ERJ floor operation (6) canopy operation

q. If the GPU cable hoist is deployed or if either of the PCAir or 400Hz GPU is operating, the controls for all PBB horizontal movement shall be inoperative.

r. If the (1) GPU cable hoist is deployed, or (2) PCAir is operating in aircraft mode, or (3) 400Hz GPU is operating, AND (4) the PBB Operator selector switch is moved to the “Operate” position, a warning message shall be displayed on the HMI and an alarm on the Operator Console face plate will sound.

s. If the PBB is equipped with the controls for PCAir Precool, a PCAir Precool interlock enable / disable selection shall be provided on the HMI Maintenance Screen. (1) If the Precool interlock is disabled and the PCAir is operating in Precool mode and

the Operator selector switch is moved to the “Operate” position, a message stating that PCAir Precool is operating shall be displayed on the HMI.

(2) If the Precool interlock is enabled and the PCAir is operating in Precool mode and the Operator selector switch is moved to the “Operate” position, an alarm on the Op-erator Console face plate will sound and message stating that PCAir Precool is On and the PBB cannot Operated be shall be displayed on the HMI.

t. If the PBB has an electro-mechanical vertical drive system, (1) PBB shall be equipped with Lift Column sensors to detect a Lift Column “Rack”

fault. (2) If a “Rack” fault occurs:

i) power shall be removed from the vertical lift columns ii) a distinct, large warning message shall be displayed on the PBB Console HMI

screen. u. When the canopy is deployed, the controls for all forward and reverse PBB horizontal

movement shall be inoperative. v. The PBB shall have the following “soft” travel limits, which can be set and adjusted by

the Owner. (1) PBB Swing – Left and Right (2) Lift Column Vertical – Up and Down (3) Slope Limits – Up and Down (4) PBB Tunnel Extend / Retract (5) Cab Rotate – Left and Right

w. When the PBB reaches a soft limit: (1) an audible alarm shall sound on the Operator Control Console (2) a distinct, large warning message shall be displayed on the PBB Console HMI screen. (3) the PBB horizontal and vertical motion shall be stopped (4) The operator shall be able to clear the soft limit by operating the PBB in the reverse

direction. x. Mechanical “hard” limit system shall be provided for PBB for the following:

(1) Swing (2) Lift Column Vertical Up / Down Travel Limits



(3) Tunnel Extend / Retract Travel Limits. (4) Cab Rotate Travel Limits

y. If the swing or vertical up/down “hard” limits are reached (1) all operational control power to the PBB shall be switched off so the PBB cannot be

moved or operated. (2) a Keyed By-Pass Switch located inside the lockable Operator Control Station, must

be used to return power to the PBB so it can be brought back into safe operating lim-its and conditions. i) Six (6) keys per PBB, for the keyed by-pass switch shall be provided to the Own-

er. z. Smoke Detector / Alarm

(1) There shall be a smoke detector mounted in the interior PBB Cab Bubble near the roof in the area of the PBB operator console.

(2) If the smoke detector is activated: i) The PBB ventilator and PCAir Pre-cool / heat function shall be disabled.

ii) A warning message and Smoke Detector Reset Button shall be displayed on PBB HMI

iii) An enunciated alarm shall sound on the PBB console (3) When the displayed Smoke Detector Reset button on HMI is pushed, the smoke de-

tector shall be reset, the warning message on the HMI shall disappear, the Smoke De-tector Reset button shall disappear, the enunciate alarm shall be turned off and venti-lator and PCAir Pre-cool / heat functionality shall be restored.

(4) The PBB smoke detector and PCAir smoke detectors shall be connected to the termi-nal building fire alarm system. a. Both smoke detectors shall be able to provide a normally open or normally

closed signal for both a fault or alarm condition. b. A design submittal shall be supplied to the Owner indicating the number of wires

and type of signal (e.g. normally open or normally closed) provided from each smoke detector for a fault or alarm condition.

c. PBB installation subcontractor shall make all necessary connections from the junction box at the PBB rotunda to the fire alarm system junction box at the ter-minal face.

B. Operator Control Station

1. The Operator Control Station shall be located in the PBB Cab and shall provide the operator with a control console and the service utilities required to accomplish PBB operation and docking to the specified aircraft.

2. The Operator Control Station shall be forward facing and positioned so the operator has an

unrestricted full view of the aircraft door during maneuvering and docking operations. 3. The Operator Control Station area shall be protected from the outside environment by closa-

ble weather doors a. Operation of the PBB shall be accomplished without opening the weather doors.

4. The Operator Control Station shall be housed in a NEMA-rated enclosure.



5. The Operator Control Station shall be located so as to provide minimum obstruction to pas-senger traffic and to minimize the possibility of passengers tampering with the PBB controls.

6. The Main Power Panel, Operator Control Cabinet and Upper Control Cabinet (if supplied)

shall have a front access panel that: a. Is latched at the top and bottom or side to side.

(1) Each latch is lockable with a key. (2) 12 ea. keys shall be provided to the Owner for each type of lock / latch

b. Utilize an interlock switch with by-pass capability. c. Shall be either:

(1) Hinged with a door hold open cylinder, or: (2) Removable with self-retaining screws.

d. Shall have vision window(s) to provide viewing of the horizontal drive VFD’s and their status and fault indications and / or messages.

7. The interior of all main power panels or control cabinets shall have an LED light

a. The light shall have a switch to be used by maintenance. b. The light switch shall be easily accessible to maintenance personal standing at the PBB

operator console. 8. The interior of all main power panels or control cabinets shall have a thermostatic controlled

heater. 9. The Operator Control Console shall be located at the Operator Control Station. 10. The Operator Control Console face plate:

a. Shall be hinged to allow for working access to components. b. Shall be equipped with hold open latch. c. Shall have an interlock switch with by-pass capability. d. Shall have a braided ground strap if any components on the face plate are 110V. e. Shall have a wiring harness of sufficient length to allow the face plate to be removed and

turned over to facilitate repairs. 11. There shall be a component layout graphic attached to the inside of the lower and upper con-

sole doors identifying each components noun nomenclature. A laminated photo of the inside of the lower and upper console with each component labeled is acceptable.

12. Laminate PBB electrical and controls wiring diagrams shall be in a holder attached to the

lower console door. Wiring diagrams shall be completely bound on one edge (e.g. coil bind-ing)

13. PBB Operator Camera System.

a. The PBB Operator Camera System monitor shall be: (1) LCD Color (2) 10” or greater (3) Four channel (4) Split Screen (5) mounted on an adjustable / swivel base (6) located at operator eye level on the left side of the Operator Control Station, not in



the Operator Control Console face plate. (7) equipped with a switch to toggle between images from cameras #1, 2, 3 or 4 OR dis-

play the image from all 4 cameras. (8) In the PBB Operate mode, the view of the wheel bogie MUST be displayed regard-

less of any toggle switch settings. (9) not operated by any remote control device (10) powered on and become automatically viewable when the PBB “Power On” but-

ton is activated and shall remain in operation and viewable while power is on to the PBB.

b. LCD monitor shall display images from four (4) Color Cameras: (1) #1 – Apron area to the front of PBB. Camera shall:

i) be mounted on the underside of the C Tunnel ii) be centered on the C Tunnel

iii) be mounted towards the cab end of C tunnel, forward of the PCAir unit, before the lift columns

iv) show the complete wheel bogie area. (2) #2 – Apron area towards the PBB rotunda. Camera shall:

i) be mounted on the underside of the C Tunnel ii) be mounted towards to rotunda, past the PCAir unit

iii) be centered on the C Tunnel iv) show the area under the PBB towards the rotunda.

(3) #3 – Landing, service stair, apron around service stair. Camera shall i) be mounted above the aircraft side of the service door

ii) be mounted on galvanized uni-strut, minimum 4 ft. long, bolted on the PBB Cab roof using a stud bolt system.

iii) be able to be mounted at any position on the uni-strut. iv) show the service platform, stairs and ramp area around the stairs.

(4) #4 – Apron area at the left side wheel bogie location of the PCAir and GPU pendant controls. Camera shall: i) be mounted on galvanized uni-strut, minimum 4 ft. long, bolted to the PBB Cab

or PBB C tunnel using a stud bolt system. ii) be able to be mounted at any position on the uni-strut.

iii) be mounted far enough away from the PBB C Tunnel so that the PCAir / GPU pendant control and PCAir hose basket area are clearly shown.

c. If not routed internally in the PBB, the video / power cable for cameras #3 and #4 shall be routed, in galvanized or aluminum conduit, open on each end, up either side of the PBB cab bubble. (1) Conduit shall be routed and attached using Adel clamps that utilize the fasteners for

attaching the cab curtain to the cab bubble frame. (2) Conduit shall have an offset, 90° bend at the top. (3) See APPENDIX III.

d. A remote function shall NOT be used to operate any of the monitor or camera system functions.

14. PBB Interior Security Camera System a. The Owner shall require the Contractor to supply a PBB Interior Security Camera system

that will connect to the Owner’s Terminal Security Camera System. b. The Owner requires the following areas / views to be covered by the PBB Interior Securi-

ty Camera System.



(1) Aircraft Door and Autolevel (2) Operator Console – Operator and face plate so that Operator actions can be observed. (3) The length of the PBB tunnels from the PBB cab to the PBB rotunda.

c. The Contractor shall determine the number and location of cameras required to meet the requirements of “b” above.

d. A maximum of three (3) camera locations shall be allowed. e. The Owner does require a specific model or style of camera, therefore the Contractor

shall submit one (1) or more alternatives for the Owner’s PM review and approval. f. The location and style of cameras shall be such that they are minimally observable by

passengers. g. The PBB Interior Security Camera System shall be connected to the Terminal Security

Camera System at an Owner supplied junction box(s) at the terminal building face via shielded CAT 6 POE cable.

h. Each camera must be able to be viewed independently by the Terminal Security Camera System.

15. The Operator Control Console shall include, as a minimum, the following “dead man” con-

trols located on the console faceplate. a. A lever arm (“Joy” stick) that shall provide control over horizontal forward and reverse

movement of the PBB. (1) The Joy stick shall, when moved progressively, allow PBB horizontal speed to in-

crease proportionally to the position of the Joy stick. (2) The word “Reverse” shall be silk screened below the Joy stick and the work “For-

ward” shall be silk screened above the Joy stick. (3) Any horizontal movement “delay”, “not ready”, “ready”, etc. indicators shall be:

i) mounted on the console face plate, directly above the Joy stick. ii) shall have engraved metal placards identifying their meaning. iii) illuminated with an LED bulb

(4) A large message, similar to the Auto Level Alarm message, shall display on the HMI whenever the horizontal drive is not engaged but the operator has pressed the joy stick. ii) This message should be explanatory as to why the PBB is not moving even

though the joy stick has been pressed. b. Steer Left / Right push buttons for horizontal drive direction.

(1) Illuminated white lens, with LED bulb, engraved with “Steer”. (2) Blue directional buttons engraved with “Left” and “Right”

c. Vertical Up / Down push buttons for raising and lowering the cab end of the PBB. (1) Illuminated white lens, with LED bulb, engraved with “Vert Drive”. (2) Black directional buttons engraved with “Up” and “Down”

d. Cab Rotate push buttons for cab rotation, left or right (1) Illuminated white lens, with LED bulb, engraved with “Cab Rot”. (2) Blue directional buttons engraved with “Left” and “Right”

16. The Operator Control Console shall also have the following controls, indicators and devices.

a. PBB Power On / Off black push button, with illuminated green engraved “Power On” lens with LED bulb,

b. A non-keyed three-position master Console Switch used to select “OFF”, “OPERATE” or “AUTO” (automatic leveling). (1) This master Console Switch shall be mounted on the Operator Control Console face



plate. (2) The “OFF”, “OPERATE” or “AUTO” identification shall be on a metal engraved

placard. c. A keyed three-position master Console Switch used to select “OFF”, “OPERATE” or

“AUTO” (automatic leveling). (1) This master Console Switch shall be mounted on the Operator Control Console face

plate. (2) Twelve (12) Console Switch keys shall be provided. (3) The “OFF”, “OPERATE” or “AUTO” identification shall be on a metal engraved

placard. d. An illuminated, mushroom type emergency stop button on the left side of the console

face plate that shuts down all PBB movement when pressed. The “E-STOP” identifica-tion can be silk screen onto the face plate or can be on a metal engraved placard. In addi-tion, (1) All PBB movement controls shall be inoperative. (2) All illuminated push buttons should go off. (3) An alarm shall sound at the Operator Console. (4) A large, flashing warning message shall be displayed on the HMI that OPERATOR

CONSOLE E-STOP PRESSED. e. Enunciator for alarms. f. A blue push button to ring the Travel Alarm Bell engraved with “Travel Warning Bell

(Push)”. (1) Shall be operational while the PBB is in “OPERATE” or “AUTO” mode.

g. Canopy buttons to extend and retract the canopy. (1) One each for the left and right side of the canopy.

i) Each side of the canopy shall be able to be extended or retracted independently. (2) Illuminated white lens, with LED bulb, engraved with “Canopy”. (3) Green directional buttons engraved with “Extend” and “Retract”

h. ACF Floor Auto button to select automatic mode for the ACF floor. (1) Illuminated white lens, with LED bulb, engraved with “Cab Floor In Auto”.

i) Illuminated when “On” button pushed. (2) Black “On” button (3) Red “Off” button

i. Manual ACF Floor Operate button to move ACF floor up or down (1) Illuminated white lens, with LED bulb, engraved with “Cab Floor in Manual”

i) Illuminated when ACF Floor Auto is Off. (2) Black directional buttons engraved with “Up” and “Down”

j. RJ Floor Operate buttons, to extend and retract the RJ floor if RJ floor is supplied with the PBB. (1) Illuminated white lens, with LED bulb, engraved with “Sliding Floor”. (2) Green directional buttons engraved with “Extend” and “Retract”

17. The Operator Control Console shall include an HMI touch screen that -

a. Shall be a Schneider Electric Magelis Advanced 15” color touch panel, or Owner ap-proved equal.

b. Shall be easily readable and suitable for the environment c. Shall include the required coatings so that the Operator can read the HMI screen regard-

less of sun glare and protect the surface of the HMI. d. Shall display Operator Error or Warning Messages and PBB Status Conditions



(1) PBB Status Conditions shall include, but are not limited to: i) POWER ON

ii) PBB ON or OPERATE iii) AUTO LEVEL On iv) Canopy Deployed v) GPU Cable Hoist Deployed

vi) GPU ON vii) PCAir ON

(2) Operator Error or Warning Messages shall include but are not limited to: i) AUTO LEVEL Warning – minimum 1” x 3”

ii) Console E-STOP Warning – minimum 1” x 3” iii) Ramp E-STOP Warning, different from Console E-STOP message – minimum

1”x 3” iv) Column Fault Error – minimum 1” x 3” v) PBB Motion “Soft Limit” Warnings

vi) PBB Motion “Hard Limit” Errors – minimum 1” x 3” vii) Cab Rotate Warning

viii) Aircraft Spacer Warning ix) A warning if Console Switch is moved to OPERATE and the PCAir or GPU are

running or the GPU Cable Hoist is displayed. x) A warning if there is an input power phase error that impacts any power or con-

trol system of the PBB. (3) All messages displayed shall have an appropriate LARGE text message informing the

Operator of the nature of the alarm or PBB status. (4) APPENDIX V contains a Summary Chart for the various messages and alarms re-

quired. e. Shall provide non-movement PBB Controls on one screen and shall include, but not lim-

ited to: (1) On / Off for light over PBB console (2) On / Off for floodlights that illuminate the apron area under the aircraft and under the

cab. (3) Spacer limit override, which will override the aircraft proximity sensor and all for fi-

nal positioning of the PBB. (4) PBB Pre Cool On / Off (5) Ventilator On / Off (6) Cab Floor De-ice on / off (7) Smoke Detector Reset – when smoke alarm on.

f. Shall display PCAir status and error messages, including, but not limited to: (1) A graphic representation of the PCAir unit and its major components (2) Status of each compressor (3) Status of each condensing coil (4) Status of each blower motor (5) Status of each condenser fan (6) Status of condensate pump (7) Status of filters (8) Status of PCAir smoke / CO2 alarm (9) Temperature readings – ambient, discharge, temperature probe

(10) Pendant Control Setting (11) Any fault or error messages



g. Shall display GPU status and error messages, including, but not limited to: (1) A graphic representation of the GPU unit and its major components (2) Status of inverters / IGBT’s (3) Status of transformers (4) Status of cooing fans (5) Input voltage (6) Output voltage / amps (7) Output frequency (8) E&F bypass setting (9) Any faults or error messages

18. A required layout of the Operator Console face plate and the various controls, indicators and

HMI screen is included in APPENDIX I of this Specification. a. The manufacturer’s proposed Operator Console face plate layout shall be submitted to the

Owner for approval. 19. When the OFF/OPERATE/AUTO selector switch is moved from OFF to OPERATE, the

HMI screen should come on with an Intro / Logo screen. a. This Intro / Logo screen should contain Owner logo and PBB Manufacturer graphics. b. Layout of this screen shall be submitted to the Owner for approval. c. No PBB functions shall be available from this Intro / Logo screen.

20. Once the PBB Power On button is pushed, the HMI function screen should come up so that

the Operator can perform functions from the HMI. 21. When the OFF/OPERATE/AUTO selector switch is moved from OPERATE to OFF, the

HMI screen should go off.

C. Vertical Drive

1. The PBB shall move vertically by means of two lift column assemblies. Each assembly shall be capable of supporting the PBB under full design load, providing 100% redundancy.

2. The Contractor may supply either:

a. a hydraulic vertical drive system, or b. an electromechanical vertical drive system.

3. If a hydraulic vertical drive system is supplied -

a. The lift cylinders shall be equipped with a safety systems to prevent the bridge from de-scending in the event of fluid loss or other hydraulic system failure,

b. Mechanical stops in the cylinders shall be provided to prevent over-travel of the lift col-umn. The system shall not be damaged if the bridge is raised or lowered into the cylinder stops.

c. The lift cylinders shall be removable for replacement without the requirement to modify, cut or damage any PBB component.

d. The lift cylinders and the entire hydraulic system shall incorporate a bleeder valve to re-lieve any air entrapment in the system.

e. The hydraulic system shall include – (1) SST hydraulic reservoir tank



i) All tubing / piping shall be SST ii) No rubber, nylon, etc. lines are acceptable.

iii) All tubing connections shall be welded or high pressure compression fittings. (2) A drain pan to prevent hydraulic fluid from dripping onto the ramp. Drain pan shall

be equipped with a drain valve in the bottom of the drain pan. (3) Relief valves to prevent system over pressurization (4) Replaceable Hydraulic Fluid / Water Separator Filter OR Replaceable Desiccant

Breather (5) Pressure Gauge (6) Temperature Gauge (7) Fluid Level Gauge (8) Tank and block heaters to keep hydraulic fluid warm in cold weather

f. Hydraulic lines that are routed through the cross tube of the wheel bogie shall be protect-ed by a plate on both sides of the wheel bogie cross tube. (1) The pendant control mounting plate may be used for this protection of the left side of

the wheel bogie cross tube. g. They hydraulic system shall include a key operated emergency release system that will

allow the hydraulic system to “bleed down” and let the PBB slowly lower. 4. If an electromechanical vertical drive system is supplied –

a. Each assembly shall be independent with individual drive systems. b. All motors and bearings shall be sealed, not requiring lubrication. c. Ball screws, bearings and couplings shall have adequate allowance made for lubrication

requirements and ball screw inspection. d. The lift column shall have an access panel, accessible from the PBB roof, for inspection

and servicing the motor chain and coupling and for access to the ball screw inspection and lubrication hole. (1) Access panel shall meet the requirements of 2.4.F.3.

e. Upper column mounting plate shall have a 1-1/2” diameter hole for inspection and lubri-cation of the ball screw assembly. (1) This opening shall be plugged with a removable plastic threaded plug. (2) Access to this hole shall be gained through the access panel specified in paragraph

“d” above. f. A fault detector shall sense differential motion of the lift column assemblies. If a fault is

detected, (1) electrical power shall be disconnected from the vertical drives and vertical drive

brakes shall be engaged. (2) horizontal PBB motion and Cab Rotation shall be disabled. (3) A fault message / alarm shall be displayed on the HMI screen.

g. Mechanical stops on the ball screws shall be provided to prevent over travel of the lift columns.

5. The vertical travel speed shall be 1.5 to 5.0 feet per minute. 6. If the vertical drive system includes outriggers for stabilization, the outrigger system shall –

a. include a manual retraction method b. include a warning bell that will sound when the outriggers are being extended or retract-

ed. c. include a PBB interlock that prevents the horizontal drive function to operate if the out-



riggers are extended.

D. Horizontal Drive

1. The horizontal drive system shall: a. permit the PBB to extent or retract and rotate to any point within the operational envelope

of the PBB b. allow this horizontal movement at variable speeds from 0 to 65 feet per minute. c. allow steering in a varying path while simultaneously extending and retracting the PBB

Tunnels. d. shall also be capable allowing the PBB to move in a straight line when required.

2. Design and control of the horizontal drive system shall provide smooth starts and stops and

positive fail safe braking. a. The brakes shall remain engaged with power removed from the PBB.

3. Horizontal drive shall be electro mechanical. 4. The horizontal drive shall be equipped with physical stops to prevent the PBB wheels from

rotating past 110° to the left and 105° to the right. 5. Tires shall be solid, with either an aircraft tire style tread (e.g. straight line) or a smooth tread

and shall be designed specifically for the proposed PBB model. 6. Grease fittings shall be provided to lubricate the wheel bearings if the wheel bearings are not

contained within an oil filled gear box. a. The grease fittings shall be located one (1) on the outward side and one (1) on the inward

side of the wheel hub so that grease pumped in through the grease fittings flows outward through the bearings pushing out any water or dirt.

7. Grease fittings shall be provided to lubricate the front and back trunion pins of the wheel

bogie assembly. 8. The PBB horizontal drive system shall use an AC gear motor, with an integral brake and

drive system. a. A variable frequency motor controller shall drive the AC motor.

9. The PLC shall provide a variable frequency signal to adjust speeds from 0 feet to 65 feet per

minute. a. The speed shall be proportional to the depression of the Joy stick.

10. An integral spring-applied electrically released brake shall be provided with the drive motor.

a. The brake shall lock the PBB in place when electrical power is disconnected. b. The brake shall also lock when the joystick is in the neutral position.

11. The horizontal drive motor shall be equipped with a manual brake release to permit the PBB

to be towed in the event of power failure. a. The brakes shall automatically reset if power is reapplied to the horizontal drive motor.



12. Tow lugs, permanently affixed, shall be provided on the lower wheel frame. 13. Provide positive FRONT – REAR identification for both the front and backsides of the wheel

bogie cross tube. a. Such identification shall be clearly readable, via the camera system, by the PBB operator

while operating the PBB from the operator control console. 14. All drive chains, drive shafts or couplings shall be protected with guards.

a. Guards shall have a hinged access plate, with retaining latch, for servicing chains. 15. All motors and motor bearings shall be sealed, not requiring lubrication. 16. The horizontal drive system shall include a wheel guard system that fully encompasses both

wheels and will stop all horizontal motion of the PBB when the wheel guard system is contacted or activated by a person or obstruction on the ramp near the PBB wheels. a. The design of the wheel guard system shall not cause injury or damage to the individual

or object contacted. b. The wheel guard system shall be bolted to the lift column cross tube assembly or wheel

bogie and shall be easily un-bolted and removed for maintenance purposes. c. Electrical connections for the wheel guard system shall be plug-in type connections. Any

and all electrical components shall comply with the requirements of this Specification. d. The wheel guard system shall utilize contact pressure type pads / switches or radar

sensing technology that shall run the full perimeter or circumference of the wheel guard system.

e. If ANY part of the circumference of the wheel guard system is contacted or activated: (1) The PBB horizontal drive system shall be disabled. (2) An audible alarm shall sound on the operator console (3) A large warning message shall be displayed on the HIM screen stating –

f. Once the wheel guard obstruction has been cleared “Resume Horizontal Drive” box and a large message shall be displayed on the HMI stating:

g. The wheel guard system shall not interfere with the normal operation of the PBB or any of the ancillary equipment attached to the PBB, including the PCAir hose basket or reel.

h. The wheel guard system shall not have any horizontal surfaces greater than three (3) inches. This does not apply to the pressure type pads / switches.

E. Rotunda

1. The rotunda assembly shall be designed as the self-supporting terminal end pivot for the

PBB’s vertical and horizontal motion.

DANGER Wheel Guard Contact / Obstruction DANGER Horizontal Drive Movement STOPPED

Identify and Clear Obstruction Before Continuing any PBB Movement or Oper-

Wheel Guard Contact / Obstruction CLEARED Press “Resume Horizontal Drive”

To Continue Operation



2. The rotunda column height shall be determined by the PBB manufacturer as a result of their site survey of the existing PBB foundations and their survey of either the terminal floor height or the existing fixed walkway floor height.

3. ALL new Rotunda base plates shall have

a. a #7 bolt hole pattern for 2-1/4” anchor bolts b. a grout installation hole. c. a ground lug shall be provided on the rotunda base plate, near the rotunda column pipe so

the PBB can be grounded to the ground wire at the PBB rotunda foundation. d. For those gates that do not have an existing #7 anchor bolt pattern, a “spool” piece shall

be incorporated to the standard #7 base plate attached to the rotunda column so that the PBB rotunda can be installed on the existing foundation anchor bolt pattern. The Con-tractor MUST complete a site survey at each gate to determine what the existing an-chor bolt pattern is and where adaptor spools will be required.

4. The rotunda shall be designed so that there are no physical connections to the Terminal

Building that could transmit loads or vibrations to the Terminal Building. 5. The rotunda shall include flap type seals to provide weather and bird intrusion protection

a. These flap seals shall be between the rotunda and the hinged telescoping tunnel section AND at the connections of the Rotunda curtain to the exterior roof of the Rotunda struc-ture.

b. These seals shall be both interior and exterior at the top, bottom, left and right sides, and shall comply with NFPA 415 2016 Section 6.3.

c. Brush type seals are acceptable on the exterior between the rotunda curtain cover and the rotunda curtain.

d. On the exterior, between the rotunda roof and the curtain, a large, flap top seal shall com-pletely cover the gap between the curtain and rotunda roof.

6. The Rotunda shall have exterior hinged Rotunda Curtain covers.

a. Hinges shall be SST or galvanized b. Hinges shall be piano type c. Hinges shall running the full length of the cover. d. SST or galvanized clips or latches shall be provided to secure the hinged covers.

7. The Rotunda Curtains shall have:

a. galvanized steel slats b. two (2) rows of wire / glass vision windows in each slat of both curtains, centered from

top to bottom. c. wind-lock and tabs on the curtain slats. d. stainless steel bottom dome sections that the curtains ride on when rolling-up or un-

rolling from the barrel e. stainless steel chains if chains are used to connect the two (2) curtain barrels

8. The rotunda assembly shall swing through a range of 175o total; 87.5o clockwise and 87.5o

counterclockwise from the terminal door centerline. 9. The Rotunda roof shall have OSHA Compliant fall protections tie off points for harnesses

clevis to be attached to.



a. These attachment points shall be labeled or identified as tie off points and not lifting point connections.

b. Labels or identification must be adjacent to the tie off point and visible through the full operating range of the PBB.

c. All attachment brackets and hardware shall be SST. 10. The Rotunda roof shall be equipped with galvanized roof top handrails.

a. Handrails shall be OSHA 1910.23(c)(1) compliant. b. Handrails shall be installed the full circumference of the Rotunda roof. c. An OSHA compliant opening, protected by a swing gate shall be provided for access to

the A-Tunnel. d. An OSHA compliant toe rail shall be supplied for the full perimeter and in all sections of

the handrail. 11. If access from the Rotunda roof is required to perform any equipment or component adjust-

ments, servicing, repair or replacement, the Rotunda roof shall have either: a. Access panels

(1) Access panels shall comply with the requirements of 2.4.F.3. b. A one removable Rotunda roof access cover

(1) Cover shall be secured in place using SST lift off hinges and SST Nelson studs with SST nuts.

(2) Cover shall be painted per the exterior PBB paint process and color. 12. The rotunda shall utilize a columnar support and be capable of mounting to a foundation uti-

lizing the existing foundation anchor bolt pattern. a. The Contractor shall verify the anchor bolt pattern and distance from the face of the ter-

minal building or walkway to the center of the existing anchor bolt pattern. b. The Contractor shall be fully responsible to ensure the new PBB rotunda will install cor-

rectly using the existing or new PBB foundation anchor bolts 13. The rotunda bearing shall have a sufficient number of grease fittings, so that all sections of

the rotunda bearing can be lubricated, both on the upper and lower sides. a. Grease fittings shall be a minimum of 12 in. apart.

14. The rotunda floor shall:

a. remain stationary regardless of PBB movement. b. remain level at all times.

15. Limits located on the rotunda assembly shall include PBB slope and PBB over-travel swing.

a. Slope limits shall be adjustable up to 8.33 percent (4.8) for both up and down slopes. This limit shall be adjustable to meet local operating conditions and requirements.

b. The over-travel swing limit system shall be shall be adjustable to meet local conditions. When activated, the system shall disable PBB movement in the direction of fault, but al-low the PBB to move in the opposite direction.

c. The over-travel swing limit system shall activate the warning alarm and the warning mes-sage display two (2) degrees prior to the activation of the PBB motion-disabling capabil-ity of the over-travel swing limit system.



16. Anchor Bolts: a. If requested by the Owner, provide plywood or metal template of required spacing and

alignment of #7 bolt pattern to be used to align anchor bolts during construction of any new PBB foundations.

F. Rotunda Corridor or Fixed Walkway

1. Corridor: a. The rotunda entry corridor shall be a fixed rectangular section attached to the rotunda to

provide the internal transition from the rotunda to the terminal door or fixed walkway opening.

b. The design of the corridor shall allow the installation of interior sheet metal and exterior flexible weather seals and a floor threshold between the corridor and the terminal build-ing or fixed walkway without reliance on the terminal building or fixed walkway to pro-vide any degree of structural support

c. The Corridor shall be painted with the same interior and exterior paint system as the PBB rotunda.

d. The size of the Corridor shall be determined by the PBB manufacturer as a result of their site survey to determine the distance from the center of the existing or new PBB founda-tion to the face of the terminal building, existing fixed walkway or new fixed walkway.

e. The two (2) A Gates will need to have extended corridors of approximately 1 foot. How-ever, the Contractor shall verify the exact size of the required extended corridor from their site survey.

2. Fixed Walkway Design and Construction:

a. Length and slope shall be per the Project drawings or these Specifications. b. Interior height shall be the same as a PBB “B” tunnel and width shall be the same as the

PBB “A” tunnel. c. All structural loading requirements specified for the PBB shall also apply to the Fixed

Walkways. d. All interior and exterior finishes specified for the PBB tunnels shall apply to the Fixed

Walkways. This includes floor covering, wall covering, paint finishes, ceiling, insulation and lights

e. There shall be ADA compliant handrails, full length, on both sides of the Fixed Walk-ways.

f. Fall protection cables, as specified for the PBB “A” and “B” tunnels shall be supplied for the entire length of the Fixed Walkway.

g. All electrical power, control and communication circuits required to route the same from the PBB rotunda or the terminal building face shall be in conduit under the Fixed Walk-way. Cable trays or wire racks are not acceptable.

h. The design of the rotunda corridor or new Fixed Walkway shall allow the installation of flexible weather seals and a floor threshold to the face of the terminal building (where there is no Fixed Walkway) or to the Fixed Walkway without reliance on the terminal or fixed walkway to provide any degree of structural support.

3. Fixed Walkways shall be rectangular in cross section and constructed in the same manner as

the PBB tunnels. a. Fixed Walkways shall be PBB “A” tunnel wide and PBB “B” tunnel high.



4. Sheet metal interior flashing shall be installed between the rotunda corridor or existing Fixed Walkway and the terminal building or between the rotunda corridor and the existing Fixed Walkway. a. Sheet metal shall be galvanized or galvanealed. b. Interior flashing shall only be attached to the terminal door frame and not the PBB rotun-

da corridor or Fixed Walkway at the terminal building or attached to the Fixed Walkway and not the rotunda corridor at the existing Fixed Walkways.

c. Flashing shall be painted to match the interior paint of the PBB. d. Felt backing shall be installed on flashing to protect the surfaces of the terminal building

or Fixed Walkway from damage caused by the movement of the flashing. e. Flashing and threshold installation shall comply with the requirements of “PBB Interior

Flashing Specification”, which can be found in 347713 - APPENDIX II. 5. Exterior flashing shall be installed between the rotunda corridor or Fixed Walkway and the

terminal building or Fixed Walkway. a. The flashing material shall meet the requirements of NFPA 415 2016, Section 6.3 and

6.4.10. b. Flashing installation shall comply with the requirements of “PBB Exterior Flashing

Specification”, which can be found in 347713 - APPENDIX II.

6. The Fixed Walkway shall utilize one columnar support and one haunch support from the PBB Rotunda Column.

7. The Fixed walkway shall have a lighted EXIT sign mounted on the ceiling at the terminal end

of the walkway.

G. PBB Tunnels

1. All tunnels shall be rectangular in cross section and constructed from corrugated or “C” type steel panels a. If the tunnels are constructed using a “C” type steel panel and the seams between the

panels are not fully welded (1) The seams shall be sealed prior to painting. (2) The roof and wall seams that are in the tunnel overlap sections and for 6 feet beyond

the overlap sections towards the rotunda end of the tunnel, shall be sealed with an au-tomotive metal panel epoxy sealant.

(3) The material specification for this epoxy sealant must be submitted to the Owner for approval prior to any PBB tunnels being assembled.

2. Minimum interior clear dimensions for the tunnel sections are as follows:

a. Minimum Floor Width 4’ – 6” (1372 mm) b. Minimum Interior Height 6’ – 11” (2110mm)

3. A transition ramp shall accommodate the difference in elevation where telescoping tunnel

sections overlap. a. The transition ramp(s) shall meet a slope of 1:20 when the PBB is level. b. The transition ramp shall have a safety yellow strip running the full width of the ramp

nosing. The yellow strip must be durable and withstand the wear of passenger and roller bag traffic.



c. The Transition ramp nosing shall be designed to provide a smooth, even, un-obstructed walking surface area, from the tunnel floor to the ramp.

d. The transition ramp shall be hinged, with a SST “piano” style hinge or an integrated “finger: system that allows for free movement of the ramp when the PBB is moved vertically or horizontally.

e. The transition ramp shall be designed and installed so that the ramp does not mark or wear the PBB tunnel carpet when the PBB is extended or retracted.

4. Access panels required for tunnel roller adjustments shall meet the requirements of 2.4.F.3.

a. Panels shall have a rubber gasket to prevent water intrusion. 5. If the tunnels utilize interior rain gutters in the B and C tunnels, they shall be continuous alu-

minum extrusion, yellow rubber rain gutters or other Owner approved design. a. If aluminum extrusion gutters are supplied:

(1) yellow / black safety tape shall be installed full length of the gutters b. If yellow rubber rain gutters are supplied, the following installation requirements shall

apply. (1) Both the tunnel metal floor surface as well as the rubber gutter material shall be

cleaned with Methyl Ethyl Ketone (MEK) and allowed to dry. (2) 3M 1099 Adhesive or Owner approved equal shall be applied to both the tunnel met-

al floor and rubber gutter material. (3) The rubber gutter shall be placed on the tunnel metal floor and rolled smooth to en-

sure an even coating of adhesive on both surfaces. (4) The rubber gutter material shall then be removed to allow the adhesive to dry on both

surfaces. (5) Once the adhesive is dry the rubber gutter material shall be placed back on the tunnel

metal floor and rolled smooth to ensure a proper bond. 6. The rain gutter diverters from A to B and B to C tunnel shall be free of obstructions that

prevent the free flow of water and debris a. Diverters shall have a stainless steel cover that is removable, retained by SST 3/16 or 1/4

in. bolts and SST rev-nuts or SST nut-certs, for cleaning and to prevent passengers from stepping into the drain hole.

7. The Tunnels shall include exterior flap type seals to provide weather and fire protection

between the A tunnel and the Rotunda and B Tunnel and between the B Tunnel and the C Tunnel. a. Seals shall be installed on both ends of the A tunnel and the Cab end of the B Tunnel. b. Seals shall prevent rain, show, wind, air or light infiltration from penetrating the interior

of the PBB rotunda or PBB tunnels. c. Seals shall be installed on the sides, top and bottom of the tunnels d. Seals shall be constructed of one (1) layer EPDM rubber and one (1) layer alpha fire

material. e. Alpha fire material shall be exposed to the exterior.

8. When the PBB is in the positive slope condition, e.g. the Tunnels are raised above the level

position of the rotunda floor elevation, water shall not leak into the Rotunda area from the exterior seals surrounding the entrance/connection of the A-Tunnel in to the Rotunda. a. Metal water diverters shall be welded on the A-Tunnel roof to prevent rain water from



running back into the Rotunda. b. Water diverters shall be welded on prior to the tunnel being prepped and painted.

9. The tunnels shall have interior fire seals, top rain gutter water diverter blocks, interior rain

water diverters and underside rubber splash diverters. 10. All seals, both interior and exterior, shall comply with NFPA 415 2016 Section 6.3 and

6.4.10 11. The tunnel ceilings shall be insulated the full width and length of the ceilings, including

above and beside the lighting fixtures. a. If insulation cannot be installed above the lights, a corrosion resistance coating, in addi-

tion to any interior tunnel paint, shall be applied to the tunnel roof before the light fixture is installed.

12. The PBB C Tunnel shall contain a PCAir pre-cool supply air plenum to deliver pre-

conditioned air into the PBB in an efficient and unobtrusive manner. a. Excessive air velocity or condensation into the PBB shall not be allowed. b. The plenum shall be constructed with double aluminum panels and 1 in. foam insulation

between the panels to keep moisture from causing rust on the exterior or interior metal surfaces of the plenum.

c. Plenum shall be painted to exterior color of the PBB. d. There shall be a means to allow condensate to drain from the bottom of the plenum. e. The interior of the supply air plenum shall be covered with an aluminum vent / grill,

matching the interior finishes of the PBB. f. The PCAir pre-cool plenum shall be placed as close as possible to the Cab Bubble end of

the C Tunnel on the right side. g. It is understood that at PBB full retraction, the PCAir pre-cool plenum may be blocked by

the overlapping B Tunnel. 13. The A and B tunnels and the portion of the C tunnel not covered by handrails shall be

equipped with OSHA compliant SST fall protection cables capable of supporting two (2) in-dividuals, with each individual weighing up to 300 lbs. a. There shall be 2 SST cables – one on either side of the PBB tunnel center line. b. There shall be enough clearance between the SST cable and the PBB tunnel roof to allow

the fall protection harness’s clevis to slide easily along the cable. c. The location of the SST fall protection cables shall be located far enough above the roof

of the PBB tunnels to prevent interference with any water diverters mounted on the tun-nel roof.

d. The mounting brackets and ALL hardware, used to attach, or otherwise used by the SST fall protection cables or system shall be SST.

e. Brackets shall not damage exterior tunnel weather seals or become damaged themselves when PBB is fully retracted.

f. A 24 to 30 in. wide area of anti-skid material shall be incorporated into the PBB roof paint system. (1) This Anti-skid material shall be installed the full length of the SST fall protection ca-

bles, adjacent to the cables. 14. The C tunnel shall be equipped with galvanized roof top hand rails.



a. Handrails shall be OSHA 1910.23(c)(1) compliant and shall be installed from the PBB Cab Bubble roof to a minimum of five (5) feet beyond the lift columns on the “B” tunnel end of the C tunnel.

b. An OSHA compliant opening, protected by a swing gate shall be provided for access to the Cab Bubble roof and the B Tunnel end of the C tunnel.

c. Cab Bubble roof handrail section shall extend far enough forward so that the Cab Roof bearing can be serviced from inside the handrail area.

d. An OSHA compliant toe rail shall be supplied for the full perimeter and in all sections of the handrail. (1) The toe rail section in the Cab Bubble area may have to be raised up to provide

clearance for the rotation of the cab support rods. e. The top rail of the handrail shall be continuous past the lift columns.

15. Provide adjustable tunnel ice scrapers, installed on the tunnel ends, that ride on A and B tun-nel rails. Must be adjustable for 0 to ¼ inches. Ice scrapers shall NOT be part of the tunnel roller.

16. GPU cable hoist mounting.

a. GPU cable hoist(s) shall be mounted on the PBB C tunnel, forward of the lift columns b. Cable hoist shall be mounted on the left side of the Cab bubble roof. c. If a 2nd cable hoist is required, it shall be mounted on the PBB C tunnel, forward of the

lift columns.

H. PBB Cab

1. The PBB Cab shall rotate 125°; 92.5° counter clockwise and 32.5° clockwise from the tunnel

centerline. 2. The PBB Cab shall rotate at a speed of 0° to 145°/min (2.41°/sec).

a. Limit switches or sensors and physical hard stops shall prevent over-rotation of the Cab. b. Cab rotation shall be disabled when the PBB is in the Auto Level mode or the Canopy is

deployed. c. Cab rotation shall be controlled by a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD). d. Cab rotation drive chain shall be SST. e. If the idler chain sprockets are not sealed, the sprocket bearings shall have a grease fitting

to lubricate the bearing and shaft. 3. An aircraft spacer shall be located at the aircraft end of the Cab floor

a. The spacer shall span the full width of the Cab floor. b. The spacer material shall be an E.P.D.M or other suitable polymer and have passed the

fire test specifications of NFPA-415. c. The spacer material must be sufficiently flexible and non-abrasive to prevent scratching

or other damage to the aircraft fuselage. d. The aircraft spacer shall be yellow and the contact surface with the aircraft shall be flat

and the contact surface with the aircraft shall be a minimum of five (5) inches. e. Yellow anti-skid material shall be installed on the area between the aircraft spacer and the

ribbed rubber cab floor.



4. Cab shall have an Adjustable Cab Floor (ACF), which shall: a. be self-leveling regardless of PBB slope and cab orientation to the aircraft. b. provide a surface that parallels the centerline of the aircraft fuselage such that passengers

transiting between the PBB and the aircraft step onto a level surface. c. level automatically and shall also be adjustable by means of a manual operate override. d. shall utilize a piano style hinge

(1) minimum 1-1/2 in x 1-1/2 in x 1/8 in (2) continuous the full length of hinged area (3) SST or coated for corrosion protection.

5. The exterior cab floor shall have a cab floor heat system

a. There shall be a manual control switch on the HMI to turn the cab floor heat On / Off, and indicator light located on the HMI.

b. Floor heat system shall be thermostatically controlled and the thermostat shall be adjustable.

c. Floor heat circuit shall be protected with a GFIC breaker. 6. The area of the Cab where the Operator stands shall have windows for operator visibility.

a. The windows shall be located in front, left and right of the operator. b. Glass in the front and right shall be safety glass. c. Glass in the left shall be wire reinforced glass. d. A tinting shall be applied to each window to minimize glare but shall not limit visibility.

7. Weather doors shall be provided adjacent to the console to seal and secure the interior when

the PBB is not in use. a. These doors shall be swinging double doors that open inward and can be latched closed. b. The latch mechanism shall be a SST sliding rod that latches the door closed to the door

frame. (1) A foot operated door latch shall not be allowed. (2) A door to door latch shall not be allowed.

c. The door shall also have a hold open mechanism mounted between the top of the cab swing door and the door frame.

d. The clear width of the weather doors when open shall be a minimum of 43”. e. The doors shall have full length window centered vertically (approximately 1 ft. down

from top and 1 ft. up from bottom) and horizontally in the door.

8. Provide a metal cab safety chain installed forward of the cab weather doors with red plastic sleeve.

9. The Cab Curtains shall have:

a. galvanized steel curtain slats. b. two (2) wire glass vision windows per panel. c. windows in the right cab curtain located 30” up from the floor. d. windows in the left cab curtain located 30” down from the ceiling. e. wind-lock and tabs on the curtain slats. f. a stainless steel bottom dome sections that the curtains ride on when rolling-up or un-

rolling from the barrel g. stainless steel chains if chains are used to connect the two (2) curtain barrels



10. The Cab shall include flap type seals to provide weather protection between the Cab structure and the Cab Curtain. a. The seals shall be both interior and exterior b. The seals shall comply with NFPA 415 2016 Section 6.3 and 6.4.10. c. Brush type seals are acceptable on the exterior. d. Interior seals shall

(1) be EPDM Rubber (2) run the full length of cab curtain – floor to ceiling, (3) be folded over / doubled to make a flap

11. The Cab shall have exterior hinged Cab Curtain covers.

a. Hinges shall be SST or galvanized b. Hinges shall be piano type c. Hinges shall running the full length of the cover. d. SST or galvanized clips or latches shall be provided to secure the hinged covers

12. The Cab shall be equipped with an adjustable type aircraft closure (canopy) to “seat” the Cab

against the aircraft fuselage and surround the opening between the Cab and the aircraft. a. The aircraft closure must conform to the contours of the aircraft types specified in the

Aircraft Mix and provide a reasonably tight weather seal. b. The aircraft closure shall be compliant with the specifications outlined in Chapter 6 of

NFPA Latest Edition. c. The aircraft closure covering will not absorb water, shall be highly tear resistant, and

remains flexible from -31°F (-35°C) to 127°F (52.8°C). d. The canopy frame structure shall be an A-300 structure. e. If RJ aircraft are in the Specified aircraft mix, the canopy frame and system shall be able

to be used for the CRJ and ERJ aircraft. f. If the canopy frame members would be exposed to the interior of the cab, an inner liner

shall cover the canopy frame members. g. The aircraft closure color shall be gray. h. The aircraft closure shall be a deployable and retractable bellows type canopy and when

deployed against the aircraft, the aircraft closure system shall be designed to maintain a slight pressure and seal against the aircraft fuselage.

i. If the aircraft closure is mechanically actuated: (1) The outer canopy assembly shall have 3 top support straps, located at the: Left side,

center and right side. i) These straps shall be part of the canopy material and shall be fasten at one end to

the cab wall frame and the other end attached to the front of the canopy. (2) Pressure sensitive switches shall be incorporated into the closure mechanisms to

prevent excessive pressure on the aircraft. (3) Covers (i.e. fiberglass) shall be installed to conceal the canopy mechanism and

switches. Covers shall installed using: i) factory pre-drilled mounting holes in the cover

ii) 1 in. wide x 1/8 in. thick stainless or aluminum bar the full length of the cover with factory pre-drilled holes to match the pre-drilled holes in the cover.

iii) Hex head 3/16 in. or 1/4 in. SST bolts and SST rev-nuts or SST nut-certs. iv) Mounting holes in PBB cab wall shall be factory pre-drilled to match cover and 1

in. bar. j. The canopy material contacting the aircraft shall be a soft material to prevent scratching



or damage to the aircraft skin. k. The sections of the canopy material that contact the aircraft shall be segmented for easy

replacement. l. The outer layer shall be a weather and UV resistant material with seams sealed to prevent

water from leaking into the inner layer of material. m. All contact points of the canopy (canopy pads) shall be attached to the main canopy

structure using Velcro fasteners. n. There shall be an A-300 type Canopy Hood Cover to protect the retracted canopy

material from being affected from heavy snow or rain. (1) This cover may be a permanent part of the cab structure or may be a removable hood

cover for shipping and/or fabric replacement. (2) This cover shall be painted the same color as the exterior of the PBB.

13. The PBB Cab shall incorporate the required features in the aircraft closure, auto level, Cab

bumper and Cab floor necessary for the PBB to dock to the ERJ 135/145 with the a swing door and a CRJ 200/700/900 with fold down door, hand rails down. a. If any parts of the Cab floor require actuation to dock to the ERJ or CRJ, such actuation

must be controlled at the Operator Control console. b. The PBB Cab shall be equipped with moveable OSHA compliant hand rails to guide

passengers to the ERJ / CRJ aircraft door opening and prevent passengers from getting to areas of the PBB Cab where there may be gaps between the aircraft and the Cab aircraft spacer. (1) Handrails shall be painted Safety Yellow.

14. The Cab roof bearing shall be able to be lubricated via a grease fitting.

a. The bearing bracket shall be designed to prevent the bearings from being pulled or pushed out of the bracket.

15. The Cab bubble roof shall have OSHA compliant fall protections tie off points for harnesses

clevis to be attached to. a. These attachment points shall be labeled or identified as tie off points and not lifting

point connections. (1) Labels or identification must be adjacent to the tie off point and visible through the

full operating range of the PBB. b. All attachment hardware, brackets and fasteners shall be SST.

16. There shall be two (2) OSHA compliant fall protection tie off points on the exterior cab wall.

a. Exterior cab wall is the wall that contains the cab swing doors. b. One on the left and one on the right. c. Labels or identification must be adjacent to the tie off point d. All attachment hardware, brackets and fasteners shall be SST.

17. All sections of square tubing, boxed sections, areas that can hold water or are used as struc-

tural support for the cab bubble and cab floor, shall have a 1/4” drain hole in the underside of the tube.

I. Service Door, Landing, Stairs

1. The service stairs shall face the terminal building and shall not interfere with any auxiliary



equipment mounted on the side of the PBB.

2. The PBB shall have a caged, OSHA compliant, roof access ladder, which shall be accessed from the Service Stair Platform.

3. The roof access ladder, cage and roof handrails shall be hot-dipped galvanized.

a. They shall be free of any sharp edges or excess galvanizing material b. Uneven or dull finished galvanized coating shall not be acceptable.

4. A service door, landing and stair leading to the apron area constitute the service access. 5. The service access shall be located on the right hand side of the cab end of the PBB. 6. The service access door shall be fully accessible, from both inside the PBB and from the ser-

vice landing, in all possible extend / retract conditions of the PBB. a. The transition from the service landing, through the service door to the PBB interior shall

be smooth and flat, free of any step or ledge between the PBB interior floor and the ser-vice landing.

b. A latch shall be provided to hold the service door open and shall be located on the service platform railing a minimum of twenty four (24) in. above the service platform. (1) The latch shall be bolted to the middle hand rail of the service platform. (2) The latch shall be a McMaster-Carr 1407A5 latch or Owner approved equal.

c. The service door shall: (1) be steel, hollow core (2) have a 20” x 29” minimum wire glass window

i) The wire glass window shall be securely captured within the door so it will not move or shift with PBB movement.

(3) meet or exceeds the 3/4 hour fire rating per ASTM E152 (4) be a minimum of 2’-6” wide and 6’-8” high. (5) be equipped with medium-duty commercial-type hardware and automatic door

closure. (6) have heavy duty, stainless steel hinges / pins. (7) open outward onto the landing. (8) be equipped with Simplex Model EE-1021B 5-push button, double punch

combination lock, with Best Lock core and key override on the outside of the service door.

(9) have a 32” stainless steel kick plate on both sides of the door. d. The service door frame shall have 1/4” water drain holes at the bottom / underside of the

tubing frame to allow condensate water to drain out. 7. The service stair platform shall be constructed of hot-dipped galvanized steel, with a metal

Deckspan / Gripstrut walking surface and shall: a. have a one piece galvanized modesty plate installed under the platform Deckspan / Grip-

strut or the apron side of the landing frame. (1) If the modesty plate is attached to the apron side of the landing frame, it shall be

bolted, not screwed, directly to the apron side of the landing frame and NOT be bolt-ed to the Deckspan / Gripstrut.

(2) Attachment bolts, washers, nuts shall not be on the platform walking surface. b. be protected on the open sides by SST steel handrails and toe rails that are designed to



meet OSHA standards. (1) The hand rail at the outer edge of the platform shall be equipped with a baggage

transfer opening, at the center railing area, to afford use of a baggage slide or baggage transfer ramp operations.

(2) The opening shall be protected with a galvanized chain secured on one end and detachable on the other end.

(3) The top hand rail section and bottom toe rail section of the opening must remain. c. be equipped with an additional support arm bracket, (bolted) installed from the cab beam

to the main platform tube galvanized support bracket. (1) This support is to add additional support to the platform for installation of baggage

conveyor slide system etc. (2) This shall be a requirement even if the Project does not includes the supply of a bag

slide. d. All sections of square tubing used as structural support for service platform and bag

conveyor slide shall have a 1/4” drain hole in the underside of the tube 8. The service stair shall be equipped with self-adjusting risers and tread, of a metal Deckspan /

Gripstrut, with a serrated edge for a gripping surface. a. All steps shall have an equal rise. The tread width shall be 28” (711 mm) and the maxi-

mum tread rise is 9 1/2” (241 mm). b. Treads shall remain level with the ramp regardless of the height of the PBB. c. Length of the service stairs shall be determined by the Contractor and shall meet the in-

clination requirements of OSHA 1910. 24 when the PBB is in the highest position to ser-vice the specified aircraft mix.

d. The service stair shall be equipped with SST handrails on each side that comply with OSHA standards for handrails located at stairs.

e. The entire service stair assembly shall be galvanized: (1) with the exception of the service stair handrails, which shall be SST.

f. The service stair shall be accessible to ramp service personnel at all operational heights and positions of the PBB.

g. Service Stair bolting bracket/tubes at the attachment points of the Service Stairs to the Service Platform (i.e. 4 bolts) shall have 1/8” to 3/16” dia. holes drilled for provisions to grease the attachment bolted connection.

h. The service stair wheels shall have grease fittings in wheel axel and swivel bearing. The wheel tread shall be designed with a tread to minimize wear. The stair wheels shall be designed to accommodate the additional weight of the Baggage Conveyor Slide.

9. Contractor shall supply a gate check baggage slide mounted to the PBB landing and service

stairs. a. Baggage slide shall be specified and approved by the Owner. b. Baggage slide shall include the necessary additional supports

(1) under the service landing (2) at the bottom of the service stairs for the extended wheel caster mounting bracket.

c. Baggage slide shall be the full length of the service stairs.

J. Architectural Requirements

1. Fixed Walkway: All the requirements listed below for the PBB tunnels, shall apply to the new fixed Walkways



2. Ceiling:

a. The ceiling in the Rotunda, Tunnels, Cab Bubble and Cab shall be plank type ceiling panel design or pre-painted, galvannealed 1 meter steel sheets painted per color approved by the Owner.

b. If the painted steel sheet system is used, it must allow for compliance to the Rotunda, Tunnel and Cab Bubble light fixture requirements in paragraph 2.7.A.2.c.

c. If a plank type ceiling system is supplied, the panels shall be approximately 8” wide with a ¾ in space between panels. (1) Planks shall perpendicular to the centerline and continuously from wall to wall. (2) Planks located at the ends of light fixtures shall have a finish color that matches the

ceiling light fixture trim. d. Aluminum corner molding shall be supplied between the ceiling and the wall panels.

(1) If this molding has a filler, the color shall match the color of the trim round the lights and the trim in the wall panel hat sections.

e. Insulation: (1) Plank type ceilings in the Tunnels, Rotunda, Cab Bubble and Cab

i) shall be insulated with 1 inch thick, black fabric faced fire resistant fiberglass in-sulation.

(2) Steel sheet ceilings in the Tunnels, Rotunda, Cab Bubble and Cab i) shall be insulated with 1.5 inch fire resistant fiberglass insulation.

(3) Insulation shall be provide full coverage left to right side and shall fit tightly against light fixtures

3. Paint specification

a. Interior – Exposed to passengers – (1) Carbon steel surfaces shall be mechanically cleaned per requirements of SSPC and

paint manufactures requirements. (2) Galvannealed steel surfaces shall be cleaned with solvent. (3) Paint shall be a two (2) coat system with rust inhibiting epoxy primer and polyure-

thane top-coat. (4) The Owner shall choose interior paint color from the standard colors available from

the PBB manufacturer. b. Interior – Not exposed to passengers –

(1) Carbon steel surfaces shall be mechanically cleaned per requirements of SSPC and paint manufactures requirements.

(2) Galvannealed steel surfaces shall be cleaned with solvent. (3) Paint shall be one coat of rust inhibiting epoxy primer.

c. Interior – Tunnel roof area where tunnel light fixtures are installed. (1) The entire area of the PBB tunnel roof area that comes in contact with the light fix-

ture shall be primed with a rust inhibitor primer that will prevent the formation of condensation.

d. Exterior – (1) Carbon steel surfaces shall be mechanically cleaned per requirements of SSPC and

paint manufactures requirements. (2) Galvannealed steel surfaces shall be cleaned with solvent. (3) Paint shall be a three (3) coat system: (4) Primer

i) a rust inhibiting organic zinc epoxy primer containing NO OSHA or EPA report-



able heavy metals. ii) The primer shall provide corrosion protection comparable to that of chromate

primers. (5) Second Coat

i) Shall be a rust inhibiting high build Epoxy primer. ii) This coat should be tinted to contrast slightly with the finish coat to assist in

achieving a full coat on the final application. iii) If a flexible latex mastic coating is applied to the roof, a second coat on the roof

shall not be required. (6) Finish Coat

i) Shall be a high solids, two components, aliphatic acrylic Polyurethane coating. ii) The Owner shall choose exterior paint color from the standard colors available

from the PBB manufacturer. (7) Exterior paint system MUST be submitted to the Owner for review and approval.

e. Tunnel end caps shall be painted to match the Owner selected interior paint color. f. Interior of the PBB Cab area (e.g. outside the cab weather doors) shall be painted the

same color as the PBB interior color. (1) This includes ALL surfaces in this area, including canopy actuator covers and other

components. g. Metal parts bolted to the PBB or any other loose components.

(1) These loose parts shall be painted per the same exterior paint process specified in Item “d” above

(2) Color shall match the exterior color of the PBB. (3) Alternatively, these loose parts can be galvanized and then etched primed with an

epoxy primer and top coated with polyurethane. Top coat color shall match the se-lected finish coat color of the PBB tunnels.

(4) Alternatively, these loose parts can be blasted, cleaned, primed with a zinc epoxy primer and powder coated with Polyester top coat. Powder coat color shall match the selected finish coat color of the PBB tunnels.

(5) Aluminum parts shall be cleaned and painted with top coat per item (3) or (4) above. Color shall match the exterior color of the PBB tunnels.

4. Tunnel Wall Treatments,

a. The interior tunnel wall treatment shall consist of floor to ceiling high rigid panels faced with velvet finish laminated plastic panels by “Wilson Art” or Owner approved equivalent.

b. The panels will be 1/2 in. thick fire retardant, high pressure laminated plastic. c. The panels shall be a minimum of 3.5 ft. to a maximum of 5.5 ft. on center d. The panels shall be supported by clear anodized aluminum trim with a black plastic

accent strip. e. The design shall permit each panel to be removed individually. f. The toe rail spacer used in the B and C tunnels between the bottom of the wall board and

the bottom roller rail shall (1) have a 3/16 to ¼ in. gap between the toe rail spacer and the bottom roller (2) have other suitable means for water to drain from behind the toe rail spacer. T (3) be aluminum, SST or steel with a multi-coat rust preventative paint system.

5. Wall treatments in the pivoting sections (rotunda and cab) shall consist of galvanized, steel-

slat curtains.



a. The Rotunda and Cab Curtains shall have passed the fire test and meet the requirements of NFPA 415 2016, paragraph 6.2.8 and 6.4.8.

6. Flooring

a. Rotunda, Walkways and Tunnels – (1) ¾” Marine Grade Plywood or Metal subfloor (2) Marine Grade plywood shall conform to the requirements of BS 1088. (3) Wall to wall carpet or floor carpet tiles, as specified by the Owner. (4) A radiused 4” wide diamond threshold plate shall be used between the circular rotun-

da floor and the floor to the PBB “A” tunnel (5) No carpet pound down shall be required around the circumference of the rotunda

floor. (6) If a diamond threshold plate is not used in the rotunda,

i) carpet pound down shall be installed around the circumference of the rotunda floor.

(7) If there is a wide, hinged diamond threshold plate between rotunda floor and the A tunnel floor, i) carpet or carpet tiles shall be installed on this plate, covering the full width of the

plate as close to the A tunnel wall as possible. b. If a “C” pan metal sub floor is supplied,

(1) Additional sheet metal floor panels shall be installed the full length and width of the PBB Tunnels and Fixed Walkway floor prior to the carpet or carpet tiles being in-stalled.

(2) The additional sheet metal floor panels shall be primed - both side - with a rust inhib-iting primer.

(3) C pan metal floor panels shall be primed with a rust inhibiting primer prior to the sheet metal floor panels being installed.

(4) Sheet metal floor panels shall be welded in place c. Transition Ramps –

(1) 1-1/2 in Marine Grade Plywood or 10 gauge sheet steel subfloor (2) Marine Grade Plywood shall conform to the requirements of BS 1088 (3) Wall to wall carpet or carpet tiles as specified by the Owner (4) Carpet or carpet tiles shall be extended from PBB tunnel over transition ramp hinge

in one piece to cover transition ramp. d. Cab Bubble –

(1) 3/4” Marine Grade Plywood or Metal sub floor (2) Marine Grade Plywood shall conform to the requirements of BS 1088 (3) Any subfloor system used in the cab bubble shall have been tested or shall be certi-

fied to meet the burn test requirements of NFPA 415 2016 Section 6.4.6. (4) Minimum 1/4 in. thick black ribbed rubber floor covering. (5) A radiused 4” wide diamond threshold plate shall be used between the cab bubble

floor and cab floor (6) No carpet pound down shall be required around the circumference of the cab bubble

floor. e. Cab Exterior - Metal subfloor with 1/4 in. minimum thick black ribbed rubber floor cov-

ering f. For marine grade plywood used as subfloor -

(1) Marine grade plywood shall comply with BS 1088. Documentation that plywood supplied complies with BS100 shall be submitted for Owner’s review and approval.



(2) each wood piece shall be sealed a minimum of 3 in. from all edges with a fiberglass marine resin.

(3) All plywood floor seams and fastener holes shall be filled and sanded smooth (4) Seams in plywood sub floor shall be staggered and shall not run the full width of the

PBB Tunnel or Walkway. (5) All seams shall be filled, blended and sanded smooth. (6) Any screws used to attach subfloor that protrude through metal panels of Tunnels,

Walkways, Rotunda or Cab, shall be trimmed off and painted. g. Carpet:

(1) Carpet bars shall be attached with screws or rivets (2) Carpet shall be installed at the PBB Manufacturer’s factory before shipment. (3) Predominant lines shall not run parallel to tunnel or walkway centerline. (4) Provide specific carpet manufacturer’s lifetime warranties for carpet and backing.

Warranties shall be from the carpet manufacturer directly to the Owner and shall be specific to this Project.

(5) Install carpet with manufacturer’s recommended, Low-VOC, outdoor adhesive suitable for use.

(6) Submit color selection samples, carpet product data, adhesive technical data sheet and installation drawing for Owner’s review and approval.

7. Tunnel, Walkway, Corridor Handrails

a. Handrails shall meet the requirements of ADA Section 505. b. SST or brushed aluminum handrails shall be provided the full length and on both sides of

the A Tunnel, Walkway and Extended Corridors. c. SST or brushed aluminum handrails shall be provided at the A to B and B to C tunnel

transition ramps, both sides. d. The handrails in the ramp area shall run the full length of the transition ramp. e. Handrails shorter than the length of the floor transition ramp shall not be accepted. f. Handrails shall be curved toward the walls, capped and tight against the wall to prevent

snagging by passenger clothing and luggage. g. Handrails shall terminate within one (1) inch of the Tunnel or Walkway end cap. h. Handrail mounting brackets shall be located –

(1) within six (6) inches of each end of the handrails (2) in the center of each Tunnel or Walkway wallboard.

8. Architectural Exterior and Interior Finishes. a. The architectural interior finishes for the PBB’s and new fixed walkways shall be select-

ed by the Owner. (1) Exterior paint color – Selected from Manufacturer’s standard offering (2) Interior metal surface – color shall match Wall Panels (3) Wall Panels – Select from the Manufacturer’s standard offering (4) Ceiling tiles – Brushed Aluminum (5) Painted Ceiling Sheet Steel – Color shall match Wall Panels. (6) Carpet – Select from the Manufacturer’s standard offering. (7) All interior light switches and outlets shall be SST.

2.8 ACCESSORIES



A. Ventilator:

1. The PBB shall have a 3,000 CFM roof mounted ventilator mounted in the PBB Rotunda roof. 2. The ventilator shall have a seal between the rotunda ceiling panels and the ventilator intake so

air and other material from above the ceiling are not drawn into the ventilator.

3. The ventilator shall be designed and installed so that it does not limit the retraction of the PBB.

4. The ventilator shall be equipped with a removable cover and a back draft damper assembly.

5. The ventilator shall be on when the PCAir Pre-cool function is operating. 6. If the PCAir Pre-cool function is NOT operating, the ventilator shall be thermostatically con-

trolled 7. There shall also be a ventilator on/off control on the HMI at the PBB operator console. 8. The thermostat shall be located in the rotunda end of the A tunnel or Rotunda Corridor, left

hand side. Thermostat shall - a. be standard rheostat, non-digital and non- battery operated b. be fully adjustable. c. be designed so that it is unaffected by the movement of the PBB. d. have a clear Lexan lockable cover.

9. The ventilator shall be linked to the smoke detector located in the PBB Cab Bubble a. Shall automatically shut down in the event of a fire emergency as per the requirements of

NFPA 415 2016 Section 6.2.5.

10. Ventilator shall have a power disconnect switch in the fan housing.

B. A-Frame and Tow Bar:

1. The Contractor shall supply one (1) “A” frame and one (1) PBB “A” frame tow bar for this Project.

2. The “A” frame: a. will be used for PBB maintenance activities, such as changing PBB tires. b. shall have wheels for ease of transport. c. shall have a tow bar bracket so that the tow bar can be attached to the “A” frame. d. shall have fort truck brackets so that the “A” frame can be transported with a fork tuck. e. shall be painted Safety Yellow

3. The tow bar shall a. attach to the “A” frame so the “A” frame can be towed. b. attach to the lugs on the PBB horizontal drive for towing the PBB in the event of loss of

power.



c. be painted Safety Yellow.

C. Gate Sign.

1. Supply new triangular lighted gate sign.

2. Light in gate sign shall be LED. 3. Each side shall be a minimum of 42 in. wide and a minimum 30 in. tall. 4. Location shall be on the right left side of the rotating cab 5. Sign shall be mounted on a post:

a. bottom of the sign shall be a minimum of 2’ – 2” above the cab roof. b. Post mounting bracket shall be welded, not bolted, to the PBB Cab frame. c. Mounting Bracket shall be installed at the factory prior to blast and paint.

6. Lenses shall be 24” with white letters on black background black letters on a white back-

ground. a. Character Font shall be Swiss 721 Heavy Bt.

7. Gate sign frame shall

a. be galvanized, smooth, even finish. b. have water drain holes drilled in any square tubing frame members

8. Bottom plate of gate sign shall have a drain hole to allow water to escape.

D. Brackets for Equipment Mounting:

1. Provide factory installed mounting brackets for 400Hz GPU, GPU Cable Hoist(s) and

PCAir unit. 2. Coordinate bracket requirements with manufacturer of each unit.

3. Brackets for PCAir unit shall be bolted THROUGH the PBB roller rail and not just

clamped to the rail.

E. PCAir Condensate Return:

1. The PCAir condensate shall be discharged directly to the ramp, so no condensate return sys-tem to the PBB rotunda or terminal building shall be required. a. PCAir condensate line shall be routed from the PCAir unit, to the PBB lift columns,

through the cable scissor and terminated at the left side of the wheel bogie cross tube. b. Sufficient “whip” shall be left so that the condensate line hangs down approximately 4-6

in. from cable scissor. 2. The PCAir condensate shall be pumped from the PCAir unit to a connection point at the face

of the terminal building.



a. The condensate hose shall be routed from the PCAir unit to and then through the PBB cable carrier system back to the PBB rotunda.

b. At the PBB rotunda, the condensate hose shall be run from the cable carrier to the PBB rotunda rigid frame.

c. There shall be enough slack in the PCAir condensate hose from the cable carrier to the PBB rotunda rigid from to allow for full rotational movement of the PBB.

d. There shall then be a “whip” section of extra PCAir condensate hose that will be run from the PBB rigid frame to a fixed piping connection at the face of the terminal building.

e. The condensate hose shall be supported between the PCAir rotunda and the face of the terminal building by clamping to one of the power feeder or communication circuit con-duits.

F. Mirrors

1. Two (2) mirrors shall be supplied that can be used to view the service stairs and the area

around the left side of the wheel bogie where the PCAir and GPU pendant controls are locat-ed. a. One mirror shall be mounted on the landing handrail outside the Service Door and shall

allow the operator standing at the console to view the service stairs and ramp area at the bottom of the service stairs through the Service Door Window.

b. One mirror shall be mounted on the left side exterior of the PBB cab and shall allow the operator to view the ramp area around the wheel bogie where the PCAir and GPU pen-dant controls are located through the left side cab window.

c. Mounting system of mirrors shall allow for adjustment to provide flexibility of line of sight from the operator console.

d. Mounting brackets for the mirrors shall painted per the requirements of 2.7.J.3.g.




PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SITE EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions:

1. The Contractor shall submit their proposed Site Survey process and forms it intends to use to

record pertinent site data within 30 days of the NTP. 2. The Contractor shall be fully responsible to conduct a site survey to verify the site conditions,

which shall include, but are not be limited to: a. Center of PBB anchor bolt pattern to the face of the terminal building or face of the

walkway. b. Existing PBB anchor bolt placement, size and projection, elevation and orientation to

face of terminal building or walkway and centerline of the terminal door or walkway opening.

c. Condition and makeup of terminal building or walkway fascia and how interior and exte-rior flashing will be installed.

d. Any terminal building overhang that will impede installation of the new PBB rotunda. e. Elevation of the terminal floor at the terminal door or the walkway floor at opening to

PBB rotunda. f. Planned location of electrical service for PBB / GPU and PCAir. g. Proposed location of communication circuit for PBB.

3. The Contractor shall conduct such site survey of ALL gates and submit their report of the

survey results, within 60 days of the NTP. 4. The Contactor shall notify the Owner PM of any discrepancies with Contract Documents,

passenger boarding bridge, or fixed walkway requirements 5. Contractor shall be fully responsible to ensure that the new PBB’s, rotunda corridors, rotunda

spool pieces, and fixed walkways supplied for this Project are designed and manufactured to conform to the existing PBB foundation conditions, existing walkway conditions and existing building face conditions. The Contractor SHALL NOT rely on the Project Drawings for their design as the information on these drawings is for reference only. The Contractor SHALL base their designs on the results of their own site survey information.

6. PBB manufacturer shall coordinate with Owner PM the locations and requirements for new

electrical service and communication junction boxes to be install at the face of the terminal building by the Electrical Contractor doing the terminal construction work.

7. If any discrepancies are identified during the installation process that prevent the PBB and

any new walkway from being installed, any and all costs incurred by the Contractor or the Owner to resolve such discrepancies shall be borne by the Contractor.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements

1. The installation activities for this project shall be planned and executed in a manner so as to minimize the impact on existing airport operations. Within ninety (90) days from the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit an Installation Methods Statement, which shall in-clude, but not be limited to: a. Site Safety Plan and Program b. How Contractor / Subcontractor will ensure compliance to all relevant codes and regula-

tions during installation activities. These shall include, but are not limited to (1) FAA Regulations (2) OSHA Regulations (3) FAY Safety and Security Procedures (4) State, County and Local Construction and Electrical Codes (5) NEC (6) NEMA

c. Detailed Installation Schedule and Phasing Plan. Below is a suggest phasing plan for the installation activities. However, the Contractor shall provide a comprehensive installa-tion schedule and phasing plan as part of their Installation Methods Statement. (1) Site Survey of existing conditions, PBB foundations, anchor bolt information and

orientation, distances from center of foundation to terminal building or fixed walk-way, center line of foundation to centerline of terminal door or fixed walkway, height from top of pier to terminal door or fixed walkway, electrical and communication supply at the terminal building face, face of terminal building construction and any potential issues with flashing, any terminal building overhang and any other infor-mation contained in the PBB Manufacturer’s approved site survey form.

(2) Removal and scrap of existing PBB, PCAir and GPU (3) Install the new PBB and Associated Equipment. (4) Complete installation and testing and obtain Substantial Completion. Begin working

on Punch List Items. (5) Conduct Operator training. (6) Conduct Maintenance training. (7) Complete Punch List Items and obtain Final Acceptance.

d. Site Survey procedure and site survey form. e. Description of equipment delivery and off-loading process to be used. f. Description of how existing PBB, PCAir and GPU will be removed and scrapped. g. Description of PCAir and GSE Charging Station removal and storage. h. Description of equipment installation procedures. There should be procedures for each

piece of equipment (e.g. PBB, Fixed Walkway, PCAir, GPU, etc.) i. Description of equipment acceptance testing. j. Description of how punch list items are identified, fixed, tracked and verified as com-

plete. k. Use of and compliance to Equipment Manufacturer’s Installation Manual and Procedures. l. Use of barriers to segregate installation activities from other AOA activities. m. Proposed Site Manager and his / her qualifications. n. Evidence of training / experience of Installation Subcontractor.

2. The Installation Methods Statement shall be based on the Equipment Manufacturer’s Installa-



tion Manual, which may be modified to include the specific requirements of this Project. 3. The purpose of this Methods Statement is to ensure the Contractor and their Subcontractor(s)

completely understand and have planned for ALL of the Installation requirements for this Project.

4. The Contractor shall utilize a specialized PBB Installation Subcontractor, who has been ap-

proved and trained by the PBB manufacturer, to remove and scrap the existing PBB’s, PCAir’s and GPU’s and install the new PBB, Fixed Walkway, PCAir and GPU’s and refur-bish the existing fixed walkways.. Evidence of this approval and training shall be submitted with the Installation Methods Statement.

5. The following PBB Installation Subcontractors are recommended. However, the PBB manu-

facturer may have additional recommendations. a. National Jetbridge b. AERO Bridgeworks c. Advanced Bridge Company d. Skycon, Inc.

6. The PBB Installation Subcontractor SHALL be approved by the Owner and only the ap-

proved PBB Installation Subcontractor shall perform the PBB, Fixed Walkway, PCAir and GPU removal, scrap, installation, testing and commissioning and Fixed Walkway Refurbish-ment scope of work.

7. The “demarcation” with respect to power and communications connections from the terminal

building to the new PBB, PCAir and GPU shall be the junction boxes at the face of the termi-nal building. a. In other words, it shall be the responsibility of the PBB Installation Subcontractor to

make any and all connections from the PBB, PCAir, GPU and Fixed Walkway to the electrical power and communication junction boxes at the terminal building face.

b. This “demarcation” shall also apply to the removal and scrap of any existing PBB, PCAir and GPU.

8. The PBB Installation Contractor shall coordinate any electrical power and communications to

the terminal building with the General Contractor and his / her Electrical Contractor. 9. All terminal building electrical power feeders and junction boxes and communication or other

function circuits and junction boxes shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor do-ing the terminal construction work.

10. A full time Site Manager shall be utilized by the PBB Installation Subcontractor and he/she

shall be present at FAY for ALL project Installation Activities and shall directly supervise and control all work activities, employees, and other Subcontractors and their employees. a. This Site Manager shall have a minimum of 5-years’ experience as a Site Manager direct-

ly supervising PBB installations. b. This Site Manager shall be an employee of the PBB manufacturer or the approved PBB

Installation Subcontractor. 11. The Contractor’s Site Manager shall conduct a weekly status meeting with the Owner and



any representative of any affected airlines. Minutes of these meetings shall be distributed by the Site Manager to all attendees by the end of the shift.

12. The Contractor’s Site Manager shall also function as the Contractor’s Site Safety Manager

and coordinate all safety related issues and activities with the Owner’s and airline’s Safety Managers.

13. The Owner SHALL approve the Site Manager proposed by the Contractor and /or Subcon-

tractor. 14. In addition to the Site Manager, the PBB manufacturer and PCAir or GPU manufacturer if

different than the PBB manufacturer, shall provide qualified manufacturer's technical repre-sentative / service personnel during the PBB, PCAir and GPU installation, testing and com-missioning process AT EACH GATE to assure a proper installation, and to provide adequate and reliable field service support to correct any and all equipment failures that may occur dur-ing the commissioning and testing and during the initial operating period. a. The PBB manufacturer’s technical representative / service personnel shall be available at

FAY for the first 60 days after the first PBB is installed and accepted by the Owner. b. The manufacturer's technical representative / service personnel shall monitor and ensure

that the approved PBB Installation Subcontractor follows: (1) The PBB, PCAir and GPU manufacturer's field installation manual. (2) Compliance with all safety requirements. (3) Accurate and complete reports and records maintenance. (4) Applicable requirements of the Project Specifications and Drawings

c. The PBB manufacturer’s technical representative / service individual could also function as the designated Site Manager, if qualified.

15. The Contractor and/or approved PBB Installation Subcontractor shall utilize, to the extent

feasible, local DBE Certified or WMBE firms to provide labor and services if qualified firms are available.

16. The Contractor’s Site Manager and other representatives from the Contractor and/or Subcon-

tractor shall be required to obtain badging at FAY. THE OWNER WILL PROVIDE NO ESCORTS.

17. FAY is a smoke free facility. The Contractor is required to ensure that all of its personnel

and subcontractors adhere to and abide with the smoking policy at FAY. 18. The PBB, PCAir and GPU manufacturer and the PBB Installation Subcontractor shall pro-

vide all tools, equipment, vehicles, consumables, supplies, test fixtures, etc. required to com-plete the PBB, PCAir and GPU removal and scrap; and the new PBB, Fixed Walkway, PCAir and GPU installation, testing and commissioning Scope of Work.

B. Applicable Codes And Standards

1. FAY Security, Badging, AOA Access, Safety and Construction Policies and Procedures 2. DOT 49 CFR Part 1500 Series – Civil Aviation Security



3. DOT 14 CFR Part 157 - Notice of Construction, Alteration, Activation and Deactivation of Airports

4. OSHA Regulations 5. NEC (National Electric Code), NFPA 70 and NFPA 79 6. NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association 7. Local, County and State Building and Electrical Codes

C. Other Installation Requirements

1. The requirements listed herein are in addition to other Contractor or Site Installation Re-quirements that may be included in other applicable Specifications or Owner contractor re-quirements. If there is any conflict between those requirements and the requirements listed below, the other applicable Specifications and Owner contractor requirements shall take precedence.

2. For gates with no walkways, the Contractor shall be responsible to complete all electrical, communications and other function connections from the new PBB’s disconnect cabinet or the individual equipment disconnects or junction boxes at the PBB rotunda to the junction boxes located on the terminal building face. a. Electrical, communications and other function wiring for these connections shall be en-

closed in rigid conduit with one flexible conduit section and shall be in compliance with NEC, NEMA and state, county and local construction and electrical codes.

b. Flexible conduit is required to allow for movement of the PBB rotunda. c. Flexible conduit sections shall NOT exceed three (3) feet.

3. For gates with walkways, the Contractor shall be responsible to complete all electrical, com-munications and other function connections from the new PBB’s disconnect cabinet or the individual equipment disconnects or junction boxes at the PBB rotunda, a. through conduit and one flexible conduit section to the walkway b. through new conduit under existing walkways or conduit supplied with the new walk-

ways, through conduit and one flexible conduit section c. to the junction boxes located on the terminal building face. d. Electrical, communications and other function wiring for these connections shall be en-

closed in rigid conduit and flexible conduit and shall be in compliance with NEC, NEMA and state, county and local construction and electrical codes.

e. Flexible conduit is required to allow for movement of the PBB rotunda and Walkway. Flexible conduit sections shall not exceed three (3) feet.

f. Wire ways, cable trays, etc. shall NOT be allowed under the Walkway. 4. For gates with existing walkways,

a. the Contractor shall also supply the necessary conduit, fittings, wiring, junction boxes, audible alarm and amber flashing light for the PBB auto-level alarm to be mounted in the existing fixed walkway, above the light switch at the terminal door.

b. This circuit shall be connected to the auto-level alarm circuit at the new PBB rotunda. c. This work shall be coordinated with the fixed walkway refurbishment.



5. Contractor shall also install a ground wire from the power grounding lug in the disconnect

cabinet or individual disconnects to the grounding lug on the PBB rotunda base plate. a. Ground wire shall be secured to the rotunda column.

6. Contractor shall use materials (wire, conduit, fittings, etc.) that fully comply with NEC and ALL Local, County and State electrical code requirements and Owner requirements.

7. Conduit shall be galvanized steel, either Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC) or Rigid Gal-

vanized Steel Conduit (RGSC). a. All exterior conduit installed that is exposed to weather must drain to a common conduit

system low point per NEC. 8. The PBB Installation Subcontractor shall test the power feeds in the junction boxes at the

terminal face and make sure they are correctly labeled with the Brown (L1), Orange (L2) and Yellow (L3) markings. a. If they are incorrectly labeled, the PBB Installation Subcontractor shall coordinate with

the Contractor to have the power feeds correctly labeled. 9. The PBB Installation Subcontractor shall also ensure that the PBB, PCAir and GPU power

cables coming to the equipment disconnects are correctly labeled as to phase. 10. In addition, the following shall apply to electrical materials supplied and electrical installation

work performed for the PBB Installation scope of work. a. Enclosures and Junction Boxes

(1) All exterior enclosure and junction boxes shall be labeled with engraved placards. i) Placards shall contain the nomenclature used on the drawings or schematics of

the enclosure or junction box. (2) All exterior electrical components, including terminal blocks / terminal strips, shall

be housed in weather tight, stainless steel (SST) enclosures. (3) All exterior enclosures and junction boxes, including pass through junction boxes

shall: i) be weather tight, stainless steel (SST) enclosures of NEMA 3R or 4 rating.

ii) Shall have a hinged, SST cover, which shall be retained by SST latch(s) or SST self-retaining screws.

iii) Shall have a weather gasket for the cover iv) Shall have drain device for condensate.

(4) All exterior electrical devices, including, but not limited to, lights, beacons, sensors, temperature probes and switches shall be a weather proof design with a NEMA 3R or 4 rating. i) All mounting boxes for electrical devices shall be SST and be a weatherproof de-

sign with a NEMA 3R or 4 rating. ii) The enclosure cover shall be hinged, SST and be retained by SST latch(s) or SST

self-retaining screws. iii) The enclosure covers shall also have a weather gasket. iv) The enclosure shall have a drain device for condensate. v) The device should be mounted to the hinged cover.

(5) All enclosures and junction boxes containing power circuits shall have applicable



warning or symbol stickers required by Code. (6) All components mounted in enclosures and junction boxes shall be mounted to a

backing plate supplied by the enclosure manufacturer. i) Components shall be intended for use in the enclosure or junction box.

ii) Mounting directly to the enclosure or junction box wall shall NOT be allowed. (7) Conduits and wiring routed into enclosures, junction boxes or panels shall have

clamping fittings and the fitting threads shall have bushings installed. b. Wiring and Terminal Blocks

(1) All wiring shall be brought to mounted terminal blocks. i) Wire splices of any type shall NOT be used.

ii) Terminal blocks shall NOT be allowed to hang free in air. iii) In junction boxes were space does not allow for the use of terminal blocks,

mounted Wago type connectors are acceptable. (2) Wiring in all enclosures and junction boxes shall comply with the NEC requirement

in Table 314.16 for wiring fill capacity of the enclosure or junction box. (3) Wiring shall be formed and restrained to give a neat appearance. (4) All wires, including spares, within junction boxes, control cabinets, disconnects, oth-

er electrical enclosures shall be neatly secured and routed. i) Wire routing trays shall be used when interior space permits.

(5) Grommets and suitable anti-chafe material shall be used where wires are required to pass through structure or similar relief opening which exposes the wire to possible chafing.

(6) All wiring shall be identified using stamped labels or other Owner approved wire la-bels. i) Labels shall be visible and located within 1 in. of their termination point.

ii) Wires are to be numbered in a logical sequence and all wire numbers are to be indicated on electrical wiring diagrams.

(7) Spare wires shall be numbered and also labeled as “SPARE”. (8) Spare wires shall be indicated on the electrical diagrams. (9) Wires must meet the bend radius requirements of NEC.

i) Ninety degree bends shall not be allowed. (10) Ferrules or insulated ring terminals shall be used on any fine stranded wire, depend-

ing on the terminal block connection. i) Fork or Spade terminals shall ONLY be allowed to make connections to

purchased components that have ring terminals and are assembled into the PBB. No other use of fork or spade terminals shall be allowed.

ii) Direct connection of fine stranded wire to a terminal block shall NOT be al-lowed.

(11) Terminal blocks shall be either: i) Finger proof or tamper proof design

ii) Stud or open style design with a protective cover supplied by the terminal block manufacturer.

iii) Other terminal block designs shall not be accepted. (12) Terminal blocks must meet the applicable requirements of SAE J561, J858 and J928. (13) Wire ties SHALL NOT be used to support any wiring. (14) NEC / UL approved clamps and methods must be used to secure and support wiring.

i) Clamps used shall be specifically designed for the wiring being clamped (e.g.



clamps for flat pack cable are not the same as clamps for SO cable). (15) Wire ties shall only be used to keep wires together for appearance and routing to var-

ious components.

11. Contractor shall be responsible to connect telephone cable from the PBB to the communica-tion junction box on the terminal building. Use of conduit and flexible conduit shall be the same as items 2 and 3 above.

12. Contractor shall be responsible to determine what Mechanical or Electrical Permits are re-quired to complete ALL of the equipment installation activities. Contractor shall then be re-sponsible to obtain the required permits from the City of Fayetteville, NC.

13. Contractor shall be responsible to collect and dispose of any waste materials, including any hazardous wastes associated with paint touch up, lubricants, etc.

14. Contractor shall maintain the apron area in a clean and orderly manner during installation ac-tivities. At the close of each shift, all tools and equipment shall be appropriately stored. All waste materials shall be collected and disposed of. All parts shall be collected and organized in an orderly fashion near the terminal building.

15. A spreader beam MUST be used when installing the PBB Rotunda on to the PBB foundation. 16. If the existing anchor bolt extension does not allow for the use of 2 new anchor bolt jam nuts,

the Contractor shall either use two (2) new anchor bolt ½ nuts OR shall tack weld the anchor bolt nuts to the flat washer and the flat washer to the PBB rotunda base plate.

D. Substantial Completion, Punch Lists, Final Acceptance

1. Upon completion of Installation Scope of Work, including any required testing, the Owner will accept the equipment as Substantially Complete.

2. In order to be Substantially Complete, the Equipment must be fully installed and operational

and be able to use by the Owner and airlines as intended. 3. The Owner’s representative and the Contractor’s Site Manager shall jointly develop a Punch

List of any outstanding work, defects or non-compliances. At this time a Completion Date for the Punch List works shall be agreed to by the Owner’s representative and Contractor’s Site Manager.

4. The Contractor shall complete this Punch List work within the agreed upon completion date.

If the Punch List work is not complete by the agreed Completion Date, the Owner may im-pose penalties as called for in the Contract Documents.

5. Upon the completion and Owner’s acceptance of the Punch List work, the Owner will issue a

Final Acceptance as called for in the Contract documents.

3.3 DEMOLITION AND SCRAP OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT (ADD ALTERNATE)



A. Removal and Scrap of PBB’s, PCAir and GPU at B Gates.

1. Prior to installing the new PBB, PCAir and GPU, the Contractor shall remove and scrap the

existing PBB, GPU and those PCAir units. There are no PCAir or GPU’s on Gates B2 and B3.

2. The PCAir units and their pendant controls, temperature probes, PBB interlock connection

and other PBB connections at A3, A7, A9, A13 and E4 shall be removed, stored and rein-stalled on the new PBB’s. The PCAir hose, coupler and hose basket for these gates will be scrapped.

3. The Owner shall allow its PBB Maintenance contractor to salvage certain parts from the

PBB, PCAir and GPU prior to the Contractor removing and scrapping them. a. The Owner’s PBB maintenance contractor shall have 24 hours from when the gate is tak-

en out of service to remove such salvage spare parts. b. The Contractor shall coordinate directly with the Owner’s maintenance contractor to

schedule the salvage part removal. c. The Owner’s PBB maintenance contractor may remove complete PCAir units on the B

and C concourses or complete GPU units, and their accessories, for salvage. d. Once the Owner’s PBB maintenance contractor has completed the removal of any spare

parts, the Contractor may proceed with removal and scrap of the PBB, PCAir and GPU. e. The Contractor shall obtain and provide to the Owner, Certificates of Scrap for each

PBB, PCAir and GPU. i) The Certificates of scrap shall list the Serial Number and Description of the piece of

equipment scraped and shall be endorsed by the scrap yard and the Contractor. f. Any proceeds from the scrap of the PBB, PCAir and GPU may be retained by the Con-

tractor. 4. For those gates with Walkways, the Contractor shall coordinate with the Contractor doing the

refurbishment of the Walkway for the separation of the existing haunch from the PBB rotun-da and the support of the Walkway at that haunch end of the Walkway.

B. Protection of Existing Rotunda Anchor Bolts

1. The Contractor shall take care NOT to damage the existing PBB anchor bolts when removing

the PBB rotunda. The new PBB’s will be installed on the existing foundations using the ex-isting anchor bolts.

2. Contractor shall remove existing grout down to foundation pier cap, taking care not to dam-

age the foundation anchor bolts. 3. Contractor SHALL remove ALL old anchor bolt nuts and flat washers. No existing anchor

bolt nuts or flat washers shall be reused. 4. Contractor shall clean, chase and protect with oil all anchor bolts. 5. If the existing anchor bolts do not have threads all the way down to the foundation pier cap

and additional threads are required to correctly install the new PBB rotunda on the leveling



nuts, the Contractor shall use a die to cut new threads, to match existing threads, down to the foundation pier cap.

6. Contractor shall supply three (3) new anchor bolt nuts per anchor bolt and 2 flat washers per

anchor bolt and install these on the anchor bolts as soon as the anchor bolts are cleaned and oiled.

7. The Contractor shall install a temporary protection, consisting of a section of PVC pipe over

each anchor bolt / nuts to protect the anchor bolts from the time the old PBB is removed and the new PBB is installed. Top anchor nut shall be flush with the top of the PVC pipe.

3.4 TRAINING

A. Contractor shall provide Operations and Maintenance classes for the PBB’s supplied on this Pro-

ject.

1. The training shall be specific to the PBB’s supplied to FAY. A “standard” training class is not acceptable.

2. Training shall utilize prepared texts, power point presentations and other instructional aids as

appropriate. Contractor shall supply whatever equipment is required to present training mate-rials.

3. The Contractor shall conduct two (2) Operations Training Classes to facilitate the scheduling

of Owner and Tenant Airline personnel. a. Operations training classes shall be a minimum of 4 hours and shall consist of both class

room and hands on training. b. Operator training shall include, at a minimum, the proper demonstration as well as actual

use of correct PBB operations to avoid damaging the equipment or aircraft or personal in-jury, by improper use of the PBB and its controls.

c. The anticipated class size shall be 10. 4. The Contractor shall conduct two (2) Maintenance Training Classes during each group to fa-

cilitate the scheduling of Owner and Owner maintenance contractor personnel. a. Maintenance training classes shall be a minimum of 8 hours and shall consist of both

class room and hands on training. b. Maintenance training shall include, at a minimum:

(1) proper demonstration of cut-away models of critical parts, full instruction of proper maintenance and troubleshooting, and instructions on proper use of manuals.

(2) Instruction in proper use, operation, and daily maintenance of the PBB. (3) Emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed at

time of failure in operation and other building emergencies. (4) Normal procedures to be followed in checking for sources of operational failures or

malfunctions. (5) Use of the hardware / software tools required to upload and download control pro-

grams, trouble shoot the PBB control software, perform equipment diagnostics and review data flow.



(6) Requirements for a complete PBB PM maintenance program, including monthly, quarterly, semiannual and annual checks.

(7) Warranty, technical support and parts ordering procedures. c. The anticipated class size shall be 5.

5. The Contractor shall video tape one complete Operations training session and one complete Maintenance training session and provide these recordings to the Owner.

6. Training dates and times shall be coordinated with the Owner PM.

7. The Owner, Owner’s Maintenance Contractor and tenant Airline shall assign their respective

employees to be trained. 8. Contractor shall submit a Training Syllabus for all training classes to be conducted at FAY

within sixty (60) days of the Notice to Proceed. Format and content of Contractor’s proposed Training classes shall be subject to approval of the Owner.

9. The Contractor’s PBB operator and maintenance training classes shall be conducted concur-

rent with the GPU and PCAir training classes. 10. The Contractor’s PBB training program must meet the requirements of this Specification and

be done within the allowance for the GPU, PCAir and PBB operator and maintenance train-ing classes, as stated in the Project Bid Documents.




PART 4 - CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS 4.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. For additional Quality Control requirements refer to GENERAL PROVISIONS. B. The following describes the minimum inspection and testing required in the Contractor's quality

Control Program for the work of this section. THE IMPLEMENTATION OF A CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM DOES NOT RELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR FROM THE RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, APPLICABLE CODES, REGULATIONS, AND GOVERNING AUTHORITIES. The Contractor Quality Control Program shall include, but not be limited to, the elements included herein. These elements are provided only as a minimum starting point for the Contractor to use to generate the complete Contractor's Quality Control Program.

4.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The quality assurance requirements for this project shall focus on ensuring Contractor designs, manufactures, delivers and installs the required equipment that fully complies with the require-ments of this Specification.

B. The quality assurance requirements shall consist of: 1. The Contractor’s and Manufacturer’s Quality System – Consisting of the Contractor’s Quali-

ty Manual and Quality Procedures

2. The Contractor’s Quality Plan – The Quality Plan developed by the Contractor to ensure all requirements of this Specification are met.

3. Contract Review and Design Approval – One of the main components of the Owner’s review and approval of the Contractor’s equipment design and compliance with the Contract, Speci-fication and Drawing is through the Submittal review and approval process. a. The Owner’s factory inspections, witness of factory testing, site inspections and witness

of site testing and commission are also part of Contract Review and Design Approval.

4. Certificate of Compliance - Prior to the Owner and their designated representatives schedul-ing the first Factory Inspection visit, the PBB, PCAir and GPU manufacture shall submit a Certificate of Compliance that the equipment supplied under this contract fully complies with the Contract Specifications and Drawings. a. This Certificate of Compliance shall be signed by the PBB manufacturer’s Engineering

Manager, Quality Assurance Manager and General Manager. 5. PBB Manufacturer’s Material Receipt, In-Process Manufacturing and Final Inspections – All

receiving, in-process and final inspection documents and reports shall be submitted for re-view and approval of the Owner.

6. Manufacturer’s Factory Acceptance Testing – The PBB Manufacturer shall conduct their own functional testing on the PBB and its components, prior to the Owner’s Factory Inspection, to



ensure all equipment meets the requirements of this Specification. a. The Contractor shall submit reports of such functional testing for review and approval of

the Owner.

7. Owner Factory Inspection to Shipment – The Owner reserves the right to perform an in-factory inspection and witness of functional testing of all equipment PRIOR to shipment. a. The PBB, fixed walkway and all of their components and accessories shall made availa-

ble for inspection. b. To the extent possible, the PBB and its components shall be assembled to demonstrate a

functioning unit. c. This inspection shall review the PBB, fixed walkway and all of their components and ac-

cessories against the Specification requirements, as modified by any Owner approved substations or deviations.

d. This inspection shall also witness the functional testing of the PBB and its components to ensure that the PBB functions and meets the performance requirements per the Specifica-tion.

8. Contractor’s Installation In-Process and Punch List Completion Inspection – All Installation

In-Process and Punch List Completion inspection documents and reports shall be submitted for review and approval of the Owner.

9. Owner In Process Installation Inspection – The Owner’s representative will perform an in process inspection during the Installation process.

10. Manufacturer’s Functional Testing & Commissioning – As part of the installation process, the Contractor shall conduct the Functional Testing and Commissioning as required by the Specifications and to verify the equipment meets the functional and performance require-ments of the Specification. a. All test reports from such Functional Testing shall be submitted to the Owner for review

and approval.

11. Owner Substantial Completion Inspection – The Owner’s representative will perform Sub-stantial Completion Inspection after the Contractor notifies the Owner that Substantial Com-pletion is achieved on all equipment. a. This inspection shall also include the Owner’s witness of the site testing and commission-

ing, as required by the Specifications. b. At this time, a Punch List will be generated, identifying all non-conformances to the Con-

tract, Specifications and drawings and the agreed upon date between the Owner and the Contractor for the Contractor to remedy all non-conformances.

12. Between Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance of each gate, there shall be a one (1)

week tenant Airline “familiarization period” for Airline employees to become familiar with the equipment at the gate. a. This familiarization process will utilize aircraft to “test” all equipment. b. Additional punch list items may be identified during this period.

13. Owner’s Final Inspection - Once all items on the Punch List are complete, the Owner’s repre-sentative will perform a Final Inspection to determine if Final Acceptance has been achieved.



4.3 CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY PLAN

A. The Contractor shall develop a Quality Plan that identifies the relevant inspection points and ac-

ceptance criteria that will be utilized by the Contractor to ensure all of the requirements of the Specification are met.

B. The Quality Plan shall identify the inspection and review points during the contract review, de-

sign, manufacturing and installation where the Contractor will perform inspections or tests to en-sure compliance to the Specifications.

C. The Quality Plan shall identify the scope of the inspections and tests and the specific acceptance

criteria that will be utilized by the Contractor for each inspection and test. D. The Quality Plan shall also identify the test plan, procedures, methods, techniques, etc. that will

be utilized by the Contractor to conduct the required FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND ON-SITE FUNCTIONAL TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

E. The Contractor’s Quality Plan shall be specific to the requirements of the Contract, Specifications

and Drawings. F. The Contractor shall submit their Quality Plan to the Owner for approval within sixty (60) days of

the issuance of the Notice to Proceed. 4.4 NON-CONFORMING GOODS

A. Goods shall be defined as any equipment supplied and the on-site installation, testing and com-missioning activities. In other words, the equipment and work covered by the Contract, Specifi-cations and Drawings.

B. The Owner has the right to disapprove or reject any Goods that the Owner believes to be non-

conforming. C. If the Owner elects to reject the Goods in whole or in part, Owner’s notice to Contractor will de-

scribe in sufficient detail the non-conforming aspect of the Goods. If Goods have been delivered to Owner, Contractor shall promptly, and within the Contract Times, remove and replace or mod-ify the rejected Goods.

D. Contractor shall bear all costs, losses and damages attributable to the removal and replacement or

modification of the non-conforming Goods. E. Upon rejection of the Goods, Owner retains a security interest in the Goods or to the extent of any

payments made and expenses incurred in their testing and inspection. F. If the Owner elects to permit the Contractor to modify the Goods to remove the non-

conformance, Contractor shall promptly provide a schedule for such modifications and shall make the Goods conforming within a reasonable time.

G. Instead of requiring modification or removal and replacement of non-conforming Goods discov-



ered either before or after final payment, Owner may accept the non-conforming Goods. Con-tractor shall bear all costs, losses, and damages attributable to Owner’s evaluation of and deter-mination to accept such non-conforming Goods.

H. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages, including but not limited to all fees

and charges for re-inspection, retesting and for any engineers, architects, attorneys and other pro-fessionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs arising out of or relating to the non-conforming Goods, including the modification or removal and replacement of the non-conforming Goods and the replacement of property of Owner and others destroyed by the modifi-cation or removal and replacement of the non-conforming Goods, or the obtaining of conforming Goods from others.

I. Contractor’s responsibility for correcting all non-conformities in the Goods will extend for the

Warranty Period as specified in the Contract Documents after the date of Final Acceptance of the Goods, or for such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any specific provisions of the Contract Documents.

J. Neither payments made by Owner to Contractor prior to any tests or inspections, nor any tests or

inspections shall constitute acceptance of non-conforming Goods, or prejudice Owner’s rights under the Contract.

4.5 INSPECTIONS

A. Factory Inspections

1. The Owner shall conduct one (1) Factory Inspection at the equipment manufacturer’s facility and perform an inspection of the equipment and witness the equipment testing as set forth in the Project Specifications and in the Contractor’s approved Factory Test plan for each equip-ment type.

2. The Owner may conduct a second factory inspection if Add Alternate 1 or 2 is contracted for. 3. These Factory Inspections shall consists of in-process fabrication inspection, inspections at

final assembly and witness of equipment testing. The Owner recognizes that the equipment will be produced in the manufacturer’s normal production process and at any one time, there will be multiple pieces of equipment in various stages of completion.

4. Owner may send up to three (3) representatives to conduct these Factory Inspections. 5. The Contractor shall supply the Owner’s inspection representatives with instruments, tools

and equipment and all such assistance as they may find necessary to conduct inspections of the equipment.

6. Contractor shall provide Owner with a detailed manufacturing schedule within 30 days of the

NTP so that the Owner can establish a plan for the required inspections. 7. The Contractor shall supply 30 days written notice, prior to start of fabrication for the first

PBB, PCAir and GPU and 15 days written notice prior to the completion of assembly and



readiness for factory testing of the first PBB, PCAir and GPU. 8. The Contractor shall supply 15 days written notice prior to the completion of assembly and

readiness for factory testing of any subsequent PBB, PCAir and GPU. 9. The basis for the Factory inspections and testing shall be the project equipment Specifications

and drawings. The inspections and testing document utilized by the Owner or Owner’s repre-sentative WILL BE the Specification and drawing documents.

10. If, on the basis of the Factory inspections and testing, the equipment appears to be conform-

ing, Owner will give Contractor prompt notice thereof. a. Such notice will be the Contractor’s authorization to ship the equipment.

11. If on the basis of the Factory inspection and testing, the equipment is non-conforming per the

requirements of the Specifications and Drawings, as determined by the Owner, a. Owner will give Contractor prompt notice thereof and will advise Contractor of the re-

quired remedies and, b. if such remedies must be accomplished prior to shipment and, c. if a subsequent re-inspection by the Owner’s representatives will be required prior to

shipment. 12. If subsequent factory inspections are required by the Owner due the non-conformance of any

equipment, as determined by the Owner, a. the Contractor shall arrange and pay for all travel, lodging, local transportation and local

meals for the Owner representatives (up to three (3)) to attend any factory re-inspections and re-testing that may be required.

b. The Contractor shall also pay, via a back charge, all labor costs for the Owner’s repre-sentatives to conduct such factory re-inspections, including time for inspections at the factory and time for preparation of inspection reports.

c. Prior to the Owner scheduling travel for the factory re-inspections, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with documented evidence that the non-conformances have been rem-edied.

13. If on the basis of any Factory re-inspection and testing, the equipment is still non-conforming

per the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings, as determined by the Owner, a. Owner will give Contractor prompt notice thereof and will advise Contractor of the re-

quired remedies and, b. if such remedies must be accomplished prior to shipment and, c. if a subsequent additional re-inspections by the Owner’s representatives will be required

prior to shipment.

14. The equipment shall NOT be shipped until approval from the Owner has been received. If the Contractor ships the equipment without the Owner’s approval, the Contractor shall bear ALL costs associated with any storage, delays, or required remedies performed at site to cor-rect non-compliances to the Specifications and Drawings.

B. Inspection Upon Delivery

1. Contractor shall inspect the PBB’s upon delivery at FAY solely for purposes of identifying



the PBB’s and general verification of quantities and observation of apparent condition in or-der to ensure PBB’s are acceptable and suitable for installation at FAY. Such inspection will not be construed as final or as receipt of any PBB’s that, as a result of subsequent inspections and tests, are determined to be non-conforming.

2. Within three (3) days of such receiving inspections, Contractor shall provide Owner with

written notice of Contractor’s determination regarding conformity of the PBB’s. In the event Contractor does not provide such notice, it will be presumed that the PBB’s are suitable for Installation.

C. Inspection During Installation Process

1. The Owner’s representative will conduct one or more inspections during the Installation pro-cess to review the Contractor’s compliance with the Specifications and the rectification of any previously identified non-conformities. The Contractor shall supply the Owner’s inspec-tion representative with instruments and all such assistance as they may find necessary.

2. The Owner reserves the right to conduct these Installation inspections, unannounced and at

any time during the Installation process. 3. If, on the basis of any inspections or testing, the PBB’s, GPU’s or PCAir’s appear to be non-

conforming, the Owner will give Contractor prompt notice thereof will advise Contractor of the required remedies and the required completion date of such remedies.

D. Inspection At Substantial Completion

1. The Owner’s representative will conduct a Substantial Completion Inspections when the Con-tractor has completed the installation of the PBB, PCAir and GPU. a. This Substantial Completion inspection will be on a Gate by Gate basis. b. The Owner’s representative shall review all of the equipment to ensure they are installed

properly, that the installation has been completely carried out and that all previously iden-tified non-conformities have been remedied.

c. During this Substantial Completion Inspection, the Contractor shall conduct, with the Owner’s representative as a witness, the specified on-site functional testing of the PBB, PCAir and GPU.

d. The Owner’s representative will identify any Punch List items that must be remedied by the Contractor during the Substantial Completion Inspection.

2. The Contractor shall provide seven (7) days written notice to the Owner of the proposed date

of Substantial Completion and on-site functional testing for each gate. 3. If the PBB, PCAir and GPU are considered by the Owner to be Substantially Complete and

useable for the intended purpose, the Contractor shall issue a Substantial Completion Certifi-cate to the Owner. a. This Substantial Completion Certificate must list all identified Punch List items, must in-

dicate a due date for the completion of the Punch List items and must be approved by the Owner.

4. If, after the Substantial Completion Inspection and Equipment Testing and Commissioning,



the PBB, PCAir and GPU are NOT substantially complete, as determined by the Owner, and additional Substantial Completion Inspections are required - a. the Contractor shall arrange and pay for all travel, lodging, local transportation and local

meals for the Owner representatives to conduct any additional Substantial Completion In-spections and Equipment Testing and Commissioning.

b. The Contractor shall also pay, via a back charge, all labor costs for the Owner’s repre-sentatives to conduct such Substantial Completion re-inspections, including time for in-spections at the installation site and time for preparation of inspection reports.

c. Prior to the Owner scheduling travel for the Substantial Completion re-inspections, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with documented evidence that the non-conformances have been remedied.

5. If the Contractor does not receive a signed Substantial Completion Certificate on the required

date, as specified in the Contract Documents, the Owner may exercise delay penalties as called out in the Contract Documents.

E. Inspection at Final Acceptance

1. Once the Contractor has remedied all of the Punch List items, the Owner shall be notified to re-inspect the equipment and installation. Upon such notification, the Owner’s representative shall re-inspect the equipment and installation to verify the Punch List items have been reme-died.

2. If, after the Final Acceptance Inspection, there are still outstanding Punch List items, as de-

termined by the Owner, and additional Final Acceptance Inspections are required - a. the Contractor shall arrange and pay for all travel, lodging, local transportation and local

meals for the Owner representatives to conduct any additional Final Acceptance Inspec-tions.

b. The Contractor shall also pay, via a back charge, all labor costs for the Owner’s repre-sentatives to conduct such Final Acceptance re-inspections, including time for inspec-tions at the installation site and time for preparation of inspection reports.

c. Prior to the Owner scheduling travel for the Final Acceptance re-inspections, the Con-tractor shall provide the Owner with documented evidence that the remaining Punch List items have been remedied.

3. If any of the Punch List items have not been remedied to the Owner’s satisfaction and subse-

quent inspections are required by the Owner’s representative, the Contractor shall bear any and all costs, including labor, material, travel and per diem, incurred by the Owner to conduct such repeat FINAL ACCEPTANCE inspections.

4. If the Contractor does not remedy the Punch List items by the date identified on the Substan-

tial Completion form, the Owner may exercise delay penalties as called out in the Contract Documents.

5. Once all Punch List items are remedied and accepted by the Owner, the Contractor shall issue

a Final Acceptance Certificate, indicating the model and serial number of the equipment and the date the equipment has been accepted by the Owner. This date will also be the start date of the Contractor’s Warranty Period for the equipment.



4.6 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. Contractor’s Factory Testing Plan 1. The Contractor shall develop a Factory Testing Plan, as part of its overall Quality Plan, which

identifies the specific testing to be done at the Contractor’s factory. a. The Factory Tests must confirm, to the extent possible in Contractor’s factory that all fea-

tures, functions and capabilities of the PBB, as defined in the Specification and Contract Documents, are performing as intended.

b. The Factory Test Plan shall be submitted with the Contractor’s Quality Plan and ap-proved by the Owner thirty (30) days prior to any Factory Tests being conducted.

2. It is the intent of the Owner that the Contractor shall develop a comprehensive Factory Test

Plan, identifying the specifics of the tests to be carried out, and the acceptance criteria of such test, to ensure the PBB complies with the requirements of the Specification and Contract Documents.

3. The Factory Test Plan, shall at a minimum, address the requirements in Paragraphs B below,

which shall constitute the Factory Tests to be witnessed by the Owner’s representative(s).

B. Passenger Boarding Bridge

1. Tunnel Extend / Retract 2. All Cab operations 3. PLC and Control Systems 4. HMI Functions and displays 5. Auto-level over travel alarm 6. Activation of other alarms and beacons 7. Interior / Exterior Lights and Outlets

4.7. ON-SITE FUNCTIONAL TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

A. Contractor’s On-Site Testing and Commissioning Plan 1. The Contractor shall develop an On-Site Testing and Commission Plan, as part of its overall

Quality Plan, which identifies the specific testing to be done by the Contractor after the PBB, PCAir and GPU are installed at FAY. a. The On-Site Testing and Commissioning must confirm that all of the equipment function

as intended, alone and in conjunction with each other and provide the required features, functions and capabilities as defined in the Specification and Contract Documents.

b. The On-Site Testing and Commission Plan shall be submitted with the Contractor’s Qual-



ity Plan and approved by the Owner sixty (60) days from NTP. 2. It is the intent of the Owner that the Contractor shall develop a comprehensive On-Site Test-

ing and Commissioning Plan, identifying the specifics of the tests and procedures to be car-ried out, and the acceptance criteria of such test or procedure, to ensure the PBB, PCAir and GPU comply with the requirements of the Specification and Contract Documents.

3. The items listed in Paragraphs B, C, D below shall be considered as a minimum required field

tests and commissioning activities. The Contractor has the responsibility to identify any ad-ditional tests and commissioning activities and develop the On-Site Test and Commissioning Plan to ensure the PBB, PCAir and GPU comply with the requirements of the Specification and Contract Documents. The Owner reserves the right to witness any or all On-Site Tests and Commissioning activities.

4. The results of the On-Site functional testing shall be provided to the Owner with the Final

Acceptance Certificate and Final Payment Application.

B. Passenger Boarding Bridge 1. Contractor shall arrange and pay for a PCAir factory-authorized on-site representative for the

time required to assist and/or supervise the installation, start-up and testing of all new PCAir gate equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. a. The on-site representative shall be the point of contract for interface with the manufactur-

er's home office engineering, manufacturing and other support staff as needed, and serve as liaison with the Contractor, if applicable.

2. The PBB onsite functional testing and commissioning shall include, at a minimum:

a. PBB movements to the maximum limits – tunnel extension, left / right swing, vertical b. HMI Functions and displays c. HMI messages for all limits and error conditions and associated audible alarms. d. Full Cab Rotation e. PBB will reach all parking positions and doorsill height at park positions. Must meet

Owner’s Gate Layout. f. Auto level over travel message and audible alarm g. All other audible alarms and flashing beacons h. Lift Column fault does not allow PBB to operate i. All interior and exterior lights and outlets j. All functions on the Operator’s Control Console k. GPU, Cable Hoist, PCAir, PCAir Precool and Canopy Interlocks function correctly l. Camera System Function and View from All 4 Cameras. m. Perform a "canned smoke" test of the PBB smoke detector to verify:

(1) Ventilator and PCAir Pre-cool / heat are disabled. (2) Warning message and Smoke Detector Reset are displayed on PBB HMI (3) Alarm sounds at PBB console (4) Smoke Detector Reset button on HMI resets smoke detector, removes warning mes-

sage and ventilator and PCAir Pre-cool / heat are functional. n. Walkway, Tunnel and Transition Ramp Slope

C. PCAir



1. Contractor shall arrange and pay for a PCAir factory-authorized on-site representative for the

time required to assist and/or supervise the installation, start-up and testing of all new PCAir gate equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. a. The on-site representative shall be the point of contract for interface with the manufactur-

er's home office engineering, manufacturing and other support staff as needed, and serve as liaison with the Contractor, if applicable.

2. Before operating the system, perform these steps:

a. Check filters for cleanliness. b. Prepare report test sheets for each PCAir unit. Obtain manufacturer's recommended pro-

cedures for testing. c. Check fan rotation. d. Connect air handling unit (via flexible ductwork) to Contractor-provided "test section."

3. Start-up and Testing

a. Each PCAir unit shall be tested for a minimum of two hours in each mode of operation. All tests shall be witnessed by the Owner or their designee.

b. Contractor shall provide an adjustable "test section" to simulate the pressure and flow re-strictions of different aircraft and to allow for the use of the required meters and test de-vices to measure air flow volume, temperature and pressure.

c. Test section shall be installed at the end of the aircraft hose to simulate air flow condi-tions entering the aircraft.

d. The maximum number of hose sections required for the specified aircraft mix shall be used for testing.

e. The "test section" must be able to be attached to the 14-inch flexible PCAir duct via an aircraft adapter nozzle.

f. The "test section" shall be mounted on feet for stability, and a volume damper shall be located at the far end of the "test section" to adjust static pressure and airflow.

g. Also provide a port at the midpoint of the "test section" large enough to insert a pitot tube.

h. All PCAir units shall be tested during start-up with this test section for airflow volumes, gauge pressure and supply air temperature.

i. For Aircraft Cooling Operation: (1) Measure and record the supply air temperature, flow rate, and gauge pressure at the

outlet of the aircraft connector. (2) For gates servicing multiple sizes of aircraft, supply air recordings shall be made for

all Selector switch options. j. For Aircraft Heating Operation:

(1) Measure and record the supply air temperature, flow rate, and gauge pressure at the outlet of the aircraft connector.

(2) For gates servicing multiple sizes of aircraft, supply air recordings shall be made for all selector switch options.

(3) Verify electric strip heat stage control. k. For Bridge Precool and Preheat Operation:

(1) Measure supply airflow rate and temperature at the supply air grille. (2) Verify correct damper position. (3) Verify aircraft hose does not inflate when PCAir unit in Bridge Precool/Preheat op-

eration even if not properly stored in basket.



l. For Safety Device: (1) Perform a "canned smoke" test of the PCAir unit smoke detector to verify proper unit

shut down and visual and audible alarm indication. (2) Verify unit restarts after manual reset energized. (3) Perform a test of the PCAir unit CO2 detector to verify proper unit shut down and

visual and audible alarm indication. (4) Verify unit restarts after manual reset energized.

m. Record and Report Data: (1) Record all data obtained during start-up and testing procedures as approved on the

sample report forms. (2) Provide back-up calculations that verify the recorded values match expected unit op-

eration at the outdoor conditions the tests were run at. (3) Provide recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical performances

when system does not meet specified design criteria. n. Correct all deficiencies resulting from tests. o. In the event that equipment defects necessitate the rejection of the PCAir equipment, the

Owner's Project Representative shall have the right to operate the equipment without ad-ditional cost until such time as new equipment is provided to replace the rejected equip-ment. Replacement of the equipment shall be coordinated and scheduled with the Owner.

4. Confirm that the PBB does not operate when PCAir is running in aircraft cool or heat mode

and that a warning message is displayed on the HMI and an audible alarm on the console faceplate is activated.

5. Confirm that the PBB does or does not operate, as determined by the HMI setting, when the

PCAir is running in aircraft pre-cool or pre-heat mode and that a warning message is dis-played on the HMI and an audible alarm on the console faceplate is activated if required.

6. Perform a "canned smoke" test of the PCAir smoke detector to verify:

a. PCAir unit shuts down. b. Warning message is displayed on PBB HMI c. Light and audible alarm are activated on the front of the PCAir unit. d. Smoke Detector is able to be reset, light and alarm are reset and message on PBB HMI is

removed.

7. Perform a test of the PCAir CO2 detector to verify: a. PCAir unit shuts down. b. Warning message is displayed on PBB HMI c. Light and audible alarm are activated on the front of the PCAir unit. d. CO2 Detector is able to be reset, light and alarm are reset and message on PBB HMI is

removed.

D. GPU 1. Contractor shall arrange and pay for a GPU factory-authorized on-site representative for the

time required to assist and/or supervise the installation, start-up and testing of all new GPU gate equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. a. The on-site representative shall be the point of contract for interface with the manufactur-

er's home office engineering, manufacturing and other support staff as needed, and serve



as liaison with the Contractor, if applicable.

2. Confirm the GPU functions properly when operated with Pendant Control and 400Hz Vac output

3. Confirm Cable hoists operate properly with Pendant Control

4. Confirm that output cables reach connection points for all specified aircraft

5. Confirm that the PBB does not operate when GPU is running or hoist is deployed and that a warning message is displayed on the HMI and an audible alarm on the console faceplate is activated.

6. In addition to the tests listed above, the Contractor shall conduct both resistive AND reactive load bank testing the GPU outputs, simultaneously. a. These load tests hall be carried out at various load levels, beginning at minimum loads

and increasing in several steps to maximum load.




APPENDIX I – PBB OPERATOR CONSOLE FACEPLATE LAYOUT



APPENDIX II – INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR FLASHING



APPENDIX III – ROUTING OF CAMERA VIDEO / POWER TO ROOF OF PBB



APPENDIX IV – SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE Shop Drawings and Samples

Description Due Date Index of Shop Drawings, Samples and Required Documentation that will be submitted by Contractor

Per Contractor’s Submit-tal Schedule

Certification by Third Party agency or NRTL of actual fire test reports which indicated compliance to NFPA 415 2016, Chapter 6, Sections 6.4.5, 6.4.6, 6.4.7, 6.4.8, 6.4.9, 6.4.10


Certification by Third Party Agency or NRTL that the PBB design complies with NFPA 415 2016, Chapter 6, Sections 6.1 and 6.2.


Certification by Third Party Agency or NRTL that materials used in the con-struction of the PBB comply with NFPA 415 2016, Chapter 6, Sections 6.3


Certification by a Third Party Agency or NRTL that PBB design complies with the applicable UL codes.


Calculations, data and information that certify the PBB Design will comply with all load requirements as specified in Section 2.6

Per Contractor’s Submit-tal Schedule

Product Data / Cut Sheets Per Contractor’s Submit-tal Schedule

Interior Finishes Per Contractor’s Submit-tal Schedule

Exterior and Exterior Finishes Per Contractor’s Submit-tal Schedule

Cab Per Contractor’s Submit-tal Schedule

Safety / Signage Per Contractor’s Submit-tal Schedule

Electrical, Mechanical, Structural Per Contractor’s Submit-tal Schedule

Electrical load and requirements for PBB, PCAir and GPU Per Contractor’s Submit-tal Schedule

Foundation Load Reactions for PBB and Fixed Walkway Per Contractor’s Submit-tal Schedule

Rotunda Spool Piece design for those gates that require it. Per Contractor’s Submit-tal Schedule

Installation Drawings Per Contractor’s Submit-tal Schedule

As Built Drawings –Signed and Sealed 30 Days from Final Ac-ceptance of first Gate

Software and Laptop, as required by Specifications Substantial Completion of First Gate



Required Documentation

Description Due Date Certificate of Compliance – Signed by QA, Engineering and General Man-agers

Prior to First Factory In-spection

Recommended Spare Parts List w/ Pricing With Shop Drawing Sub-mittal

Project Progress Schedule 30 Days from NTP Written notification of Start of Fabrication for 1st unit 30 Days prior to start of

Fabrication Written Notification of completion of assembly and readiness for factory inspection and testing – each unit.

15 Days prior to comple-tion of assembly.

Training plan and class syllabus for all training

60 Days from NTP

Proposed content and format of O&M Manuals 60 Days from NTP Final O&M Manuals With shipment of Equip-

ment for 1st Gate QUALITY ASSURANCE / TESTING

Description Due Date Quality Plan, specific to the Project and including at a minimum, the follow-ing

Review, Inspection, Hold and Witness points, with acceptance crite-rial, that will be performed during the contract review, design, manu-facturing, factory testing, installation and field testing / commission.

Scope of inspections and tests to be performed, with acceptance cri-teria

Test plans, procedures, methods, techniques for Factory Acceptance Testing.

Test plans, procedures, methods, techniques for Onsite Functional Testing and Commissioning

60 Days from NTP

Contractor’s Factory Test results and records – Each piece of equipment Prior to Shipment of each piece of equipment

Contractor’s On-Site Functional Test Results and Records – Gate by Gate With Final Acceptance of a Gate



INSTALLATION

Description Due Date Installation Methods Statement per requirements of 3.2.A.1

Method to insure compliance to Code, Specification and Drawing requirements

Gate by Gate Installation and Phasing Plan and Schedule Proposed site survey process and forms Equipment Delivery and Off Loading Procedures Description of equipment removal and scrap process. Description of process and procedures to remove, store and reinstall

existing PCAir units that are to be reused. New Equipment installation procedures / process. Existing Fixed Walkway refurbishment process. Process to ensure compliance to equipment manufacturer’s installa-

tion manual, drawings and field package. Description of how on site testing and commissioning will be ac-

complished. Description of how punch list items will be identified, tracked and

completed. Use of barriers to segregate work at the site. Resume or CV of Proposed Installation Site Manager Resume or CV of Proposed Manufacturer’s Technical Representa-

tive, if different than Site Manager.

90 days from NTP

Minutes from Weekly Site Status Review meetings Weekly once installation begins

Certificate of Scrap – Each “B” gate 10 days from removal of equipment from gate

Completed Permits / Certificates from City of Fayetteville - Gate by Gate At Final Acceptance for each Gate

Site Survey Report, with all dimensions and information about terminal building, electrical service and walkway and rotunda foundation. For all gates.

60 days from NTP,

Written Notice of Proposed Date of Substantial Completion on On-Site Test-ing. Gate by Gate Basis

7 Days Prior to Proposed Date of Substantial Com-

pletion Written Notice of readiness for Final Acceptance Inspection. Gate by Gate Basis.

7 Days Prior to Readiness for Final Acceptance In-

spection. Final Acceptance Certificate Upon completion of Final

Acceptance Inspection and no remaining Punch

List Items



APPENDIX V – AUDIBLE ALARM AND MESSAGE SUMMARY


Fayetteville Regional Airport – Airline Terminal Improvements – Part 1 Owner: City of Fayetteville Fayetteville, North Carolina AP#1515 Gordon Johnson Architecture May 8, 2017

Notice to Bidders NTB-1 of 2

NOTICE TO BIDDERS

Pursuant to N.C.G.S. 143-128 sealed proposals will be received from prequalified general contractors by the Fayetteville Regional Airport, on behalf of the City of Fayetteville, North Carolina, until 5:00 p.m., Tuesday, June 20, 2017, in Airport Conference Room, 1st floor, Main Terminal Building, 400 Road, Fayetteville, North Carolina, for the project entitled “Fayetteville Regional Airport – Airline Terminal

Improvements – Part 1”. A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held at 10:00 a.m., Wednesday, May 24, 2017, in the ground floor Conference Room of the Terminal Building, 400 Airport Road, Fayetteville, North Carolina 28306. A site visit will take place immediately following the pre-bid conference. Plans, specifications and bid documents are available online for downloading at www.gordonjohnsonarchitecture.com (look for the “Bid Sets and Addenda” tab on the upper right-hand corner of our home page) or may be viewed in the Purchasing Office of the City of Fayetteville, City Hall Building, 433 Hay Street, Fayetteville, North Carolina 28301, between the hours of 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday. Plans and specifications will also be on file at www.iSqFt.com. Each Proposal shall be accompanied by cash, cashier’s check, or certified check drawn on a bank insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation or Savings Association Insurance Fund. Checks shall be made payable to the City of Fayetteville, North Carolina, in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total bid as a guarantee that a Contract, if awarded, will be entered into. In lieu thereof, a Bid Bond which conforms to the provisions of G.S. 143-129 as amended by Chapter 1104 of the Public Laws of 1951 may be submitted by the Bidder. Performance and Payment Bonds will be required in the amount of 100% of the contract award amount and shall be furnished by the Contractor prior to start of work. All contractors are notified that North Carolina Statutory Provisions (Chapter 87, Article 1) pertinent to licensing of Contractors will be observed in receiving, reading, and awarding of contracts. Bids may not be withdrawn after the scheduled closing time for the receipt of proposals for a period of one hundred twenty (120) days. The Owner may make such investigations as deemed necessary to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request.

The Contractor shall complete all work within five hundred fifty (550) calendar days. Failure to complete the work within this time frame will cause considerable damage to the City; therefore a liquidated damage charge of $1,000.00 per day for each day of overrun and $1,000.00 per day for each day of unauthorized suspension will be assessed to the Contractor.

Fayetteville Regional Airport – Airline Terminal Improvements – Part 1 Owner: City of Fayetteville Fayetteville, North Carolina AP#1515 Gordon Johnson Architecture May 8, 2017

Notice to Bidders NTB-2 of 2

This project will be funded in part with federal grant funds under the Federal Aviation Administration’s Airport Improvement Program. Certain federal contract requirements are included in Appendix D of the contract documents and are incorporated herein by reference, including but not limited to Buy American Preference, Foreign Trade Restriction, Davis Bacon, Affirmative Action, Government-wide Debarment and Suspension and Government-wide Requirements for Drug-free Workplace.

The City of Fayetteville, in accordance with the provisions of Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 (78 Stat. 252, 42 U.S.C. §§ 2000d to 2000d-4) and the Regulations, hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively ensure that any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, disadvantaged business enterprises will be afforded full and fair opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in consideration for an award.

The City of Fayetteville hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, that the bidder shall make good faith efforts, as defined in Appendix A of 49 CFR Part 26, Regulations of the Office of the Secretary of Transportation, to subcontract 6.6% of the dollar value of the prime contract to Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (DBE’s). Only firms certified as DBE’s by the NCDOT Unified Certification Program may be applied to the goal. The apparent successful competitor will be required to submit with the bid information concerning the DBE firms that will participate in this contract. The information shall include the name and address of each DBE, a description of the work to be performed by each named firm, and the dollar value of the sub-contract. If the bidder fails to achieve the contract goal stated herein, they will be required to provide documentation demonstrating that it made good faith efforts in attempting to do so. A bid that fails to meet these requirements will be considered nonresponsive.

The successful bidder must provide written confirmation from each of the DBE firms the bidder lists in their commitment included in the bid. The written confirmation shall be made using the Letter of Intent form and shall be submitted within the time frame established in Appendix C of the contract documents.

The right is reserved to reject any or all bids and to waive all informalities concerning bid, or award bid to the lowest responsible bidder or bidders, taking into consideration quality, performance and the time specified in the proposals for the performance of the contract. CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE

Kimberly Toon Purchasing Agent

Fayetteville Regional Airport – Airline Terminal Improvements – Part 1

Owner: City of Fayetteville


Bid Proposal BP-1 of 5

Bid Proposal: For General Construction of the Fayetteville Regional Airport – Airline Terminal Improvements – Part 1; FAY 01-05-3022; FAA AIP 3-37-0027-044-2016.

From: _________________________________________ License No. ______________ To: City of Fayetteville 433 Hay Street Fayetteville, NC 28301 Re: Fayetteville Regional Airport – Airline Terminal Improvements – Part 1 The undersigned, as bidder, hereby declares that the only person or persons interested in this proposal as principal or principals is or are named herein and that no person other than those herein mentioned, has any interest in the proposal or in the contract to be entered into; that this proposal is made without connection with any other person, company, or parties making a bid or proposal; and that it is in all respects fair and in good faith without collusion or fraud. A bidder shall be considered disqualified for any of the following reasons, among others;

(a) Submitting more than one proposal from the same partnership, firm, or corporation under the same or different name.

(b) Evidence of collusion among bidders. Bidders participating in such collusion shall be disqualified as bidders for any future work of the City until any such participating bidder has been reinstated by the City as a qualified bidder. The bidder further declares that he has examined the site of the work and informed himself fully in regard to all conditions pertaining to the place where the work is to be done, that he has examined the specifications for the work and the contract documents relative thereto, and has read the special provisions furnished prior to the opening of the bids; that he has satisfied himself relative to the work to be performed. In the case of conflict between words and figures, the words will govern. The bidder proposes and agrees that if this proposal is accepted, to contract with the City of Fayetteville in the form of contract specified, to furnish all necessary materials, equipment, machinery, tools, apparatus, means of transportation, and labor necessary to perform all construction in full and complete agreement with the plans and specifications and contract documents entitled FAYETTEVILLE REGIONAL AIRPORT – AIRLINE TERMINAL IMPROVEMNETS – PART 1;





FAY 01-05-3022; FAA PROJECT 3-37-0027-044-2016 to the full and entire satisfaction of the Fayetteville Regional Airport and City of Fayetteville for the stipulated sum indicated. The bidder furthers proposes and agrees that if this proposal is accepted, to commence work on the commencement date specified in the Notice to Proceed and to complete fully all work hereunder within the following consecutive calendar days: Commencement date to Completion: 550 calendar days Liquidated damages for failure to complete all work by the specified number of days are fixed at the sum of $1,000.00 per calendar day. Lump Sum Base Bid: ________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________Dollars ($____________________) MAJOR SUB CONTRACTS FOR SINGLE PRIME CONTRACTOR For projects bid in the Single Prime Alternative list the names, bid, and license number of the major sub contractors here: Mechanical ______________________________$__________________ License #: ____________ Plumbing: ______________________________$__________________ License #: ____________ Electrical: ______________________________$__________________ License #: ____________ Fire Protection:______________________________$__________________ License #: ____________ Site Work: ______________________________$__________________ License #: ____________ ALTERNATES Should any of the alternates as described in the contract documents be accepted, the amount written below shall be the amount to be “added to” the Base Bid. Award of the contract will be the lowest responsive and qualified bidder based on any combination of Base Bid and Bid Alternates selected by the City at the time of initial contract. The City reserves the right to select the bid alternatives at a later date during the contract or not at all. 1. Alt. G-1: Provide new Passenger Boarding Bridge as specified at Gate A1. ADD _____________________________________________ Dollars ($____________)





2. Alt. G-2: Provide new Passenger Boarding Bridge as specified at Gate A2. ADD _____________________________________________ Dollars ($____________) 3. Alt. G-3: Provide new accessible ramp specified @ Passenger Boarding Bridge B2 ADD _____________________________________________ Dollars ($____________) 4. Alt. G-4: Provide property insurance (builder’s risk) as specified ADD _____________________________________________ Dollars ($____________) 5. Alt. G-5: Provide Water Vapor Emission Control as specified to new concrete slabs. ADD _____________________________________________ Dollars ($____________) UNIT PRICES These unit prices are applicable to lump sum work and are for changes in the work, or for unforeseen conditions encountered per Specification Section 01270. A. Unit Price A-1 – Replace unsuitable soil per CY:

___________________________________________________Dollars ($______________)

B. Unit Price A-2 – Undercut and replace with Stone per CY: ___________________________________________________Dollars ($______________)

BOND: The Undersigned agrees, if awarded the contract to furnish and deliver to the General Consultant within 10 days following receipt of notice of the award, a signed Contract, satisfactory Performance and Labor and Material Payment Bonds, each in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Price, and all required certificates of insurance. CERTIFIED CHECK OR BID BOND: The bidder further agrees that in the case of failure on his part to execute said contract and provide required bonds within 10 consecutive calendar days after written notice is given of the award of the contract, that a check, cash, or bid bond in the amount of 5% shall accompany this bid and shall be paid into the hands of the City, as liquidated damages for such failure; otherwise, the check, cash, or bid bond accompanying this proposal shall be returned to the undersigned.





CONTRACTOR’S LICENSE: The undersigned further states that he is a duly licensed Contractor in the State of North Carolina, and that all fees, licenses, permits, etc., pertinent to the submission of this bid have been paid for in full. ADDENDUM RECEIPT: The receipt of the following addenda to the Contract Documents is acknowledged: ADDENDUM No. _________ DATE _____________ ADDENDUM No. _________ DATE _____________ ADDENDUM No. _________ DATE _____________ ADDENDUM No. _________ DATE _____________ OWNER’S RIGHT OF REJECTION: The City reserves the right to reject any or all bid(s), or sections thereof, as it appears in its judgment to be in the best interest of the City. The undersigned bidder understands that all bids may be rejected if the lowest responsive bid received exceeds the engineer’s estimate and it is determined by the City that an award of contract would not be in the best interest of the City. PARTIAL SCHEDULE OF VALUES: All General Contractor Bidders shall submit with their bid the attached Partial Schedule of Values with specific AIP eligible items’ costs filled in.





Respectfully submitted this ______ day of _______________, 2017. Bid Proposal from:___________________________________________(Company Name) ______________________________ (Name of Bidder) ______________________________ ______________________________ (Address of Bidder) (Corporation) by __________________ President Attest: ___________________ Secretary Corporate Seal (Partnership) by __________________ Title ________________ Witness: __________________ (Proprietorship) ________________ (Seal) Witness: __________________

Fayetteville Regional Airport

Airline Terminal Improvements - Part 1

Partial Schedule of Values - Base Bid Cost Elements

Cost Element Value

Concourse A Elevator (Installed cost including shaft construction & all accessories)

Gate A1 Passenger Boarding Bridge (Installed cost, including foundation, PCAir, GPU and all

accessories)

Gate A2 Passenger Boarding Bridge (Installed cost, including foundation, PCAir, GPU and all

accessories)

Gate A1 Baggage Lift (Installed cost, including all accessories)

Gate A2 Baggage Lift (Installed cost, including all accessories)

Civil/Site Work (Including site demolition, earthwork, drainage pipe & structures, trench

drains, foundation drains, roof and downspout collectors, sanitary sewer, water lines, joint

use telecommunications duct bank, airport electrical duct banks, fine grading, aggregate

base course, concrete paving, asphalt paving, fencing, segmental retaining walls, bollards,

curb & gutter, sidewalks, temporary SIDA fencing and gates, temporary access roads,

erosion and sediment control, stormwater basin, staging areas, irrigation, landscaping,

railings, pavement markings, traffic control and all incidental items and accessories)

This partial schedule of values is required with the bid in support of project pre-award budget analysis efforts, including but not limited to AIP

eligibility analysis.

Airline Terminal Improvements Part 1 B-1

PROHIBITION OF SEGREGATED FACILITIES (a) The Contractor agrees that it does not and will not maintain or provide for its

employees any segregated facilities at any of its establishments, and that it does not and will not permit its employees to perform their services at any location under its control where segregated facilities are maintained. The Contractor agrees that a breach of this clause is a violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in this contract.

(b) “Segregated facilities,” as used in this clause, means any waiting rooms, work

areas, rest rooms and wash rooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees, that are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin because of written or oral policies or employee custom. The term does not include separate or single-user rest rooms or necessary dressing or sleeping areas provided to assure privacy between the sexes.

(c) The Contractor shall include this clause in every subcontract and purchase order

that is subject to the Equal Opportunity clause of this contract. Signature of Contractor Date Title NOTE: The penalty for making false statements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S. C. 1001. (Reference: 41 CFR § 60)


TRADE RESTRICTION CERTIFICATION By submission of an offer, the Offeror certifies that with respect to this solicitation and any resultant contract, the Offeror:

a. is not owned or controlled by one or more citizens of a foreign country included in the list of countries that discriminate against U.S. firms as published by the Office of the United States Trade Representative (U.S.T.R.);

b. has not knowingly entered into any contract or subcontract for this project with a person that is a citizen or national of a foreign country included on the list of countries that discriminate against U.S. firms as published by the U.S.T.R; and

c. has not entered into any subcontract for any product to be used on the Federal on the project that is produced in a foreign country included on the list of countries that discriminate against U.S. firms published by the U.S.T.R.

This certification concerns a matter within the jurisdiction of an agency of the United States of America and the making of a false, fictitious, or fraudulent certification may render the maker subject to prosecution under Title 18, United States Code, Section 1001. The Offeror/Contractor must provide immediate written notice to the Owner if the Offeror/Contractor learns that its certification or that of a subcontractor was erroneous when submitted or has become erroneous by reason of changed circumstances. The Contractor must require subcontractors provide immediate written notice to the Contractor if at any time it learns that its certification was erroneous by reason of changed circumstances. Unless the restrictions of this clause are waived by the Secretary of Transportation in accordance with 49 CFR 30.17, no contract shall be awarded to an Offeror or subcontractor:

(1) who is owned or controlled by one or more citizens or nationals of a foreign country included on the list of countries that discriminate against U.S. firms published by the U.S.T.R. or

(2) whose subcontractors are owned or controlled by one or more citizens or nationals of a foreign country on such U.S.T.R. list or

(3) who incorporates in the public works project any product of a foreign country on such U.S.T.R. list;

Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require establishment of a system of records in order to render, in good faith, the certification required by this provision. The knowledge and information of a contractor is not required to exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the ordinary course of business dealings. The Offeror agrees that, if awarded a contract resulting from this solicitation, it will


incorporate this provision for certification without modification in in all lower tier subcontracts. The contractor may rely on the certification of a prospective subcontractor that it is not a firm from a foreign country included on the list of countries that discriminate against U.S. firms as published by U.S.T.R, unless the Offeror has knowledge that the certification is erroneous. This certification is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when making an award. If it is later determined that the Contractor or subcontractor knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, the Federal Aviation Administration may direct through the Owner cancellation of the contract or subcontract for default at no cost to the Owner or the FAA. This certification concerns a matter within the jurisdiction of an agency of the United States of America and the making of a false, fictitious, or fraudulent certification may render the maker subject to prosecution under Title 18, United States Code, Section 1001. Signature of Contractor Date Title (Reference: 49 U.S.C. § 50104; 49 CFR part 30)


CERTIFICATION OF OFFERER/BIDDER REGARDING DEBARMENT (Bidder or Offeror Certification)

By submitting a bid/proposal under this solicitation, the bidder or offeror certifies that neither it nor its principals are presently debarred or suspended by any Federal department or agency from participation in this transaction.

CERTIFICATION OF LOWER TIER CONTRACTORS REGARDING DEBARMENT (Lower Tier Contract Certification)

The successful bidder, by administering each lower tier subcontract that exceeds $25,000 as a “covered transaction”, must verify each lower tier participant of a “covered transaction” under the project is not presently debarred or otherwise disqualified from participation in this federally assisted project. The successful bidder will accomplish this by:

1. Checking the System for Award Management at website: http://www.sam.gov

2. Collecting a certification statement similar to the Certificate Regarding Debarment and Suspension (Bidder or Offeror), above.

3. Inserting a clause or condition in the covered transaction with the lower tier

contract If the FAA later determines that a lower tier participant failed to disclose to a higher tier participant that it was excluded or disqualified at the time it entered the covered transaction, the FAA may pursue any available remedies, including suspension and debarment of the non-compliant participant. Signature of Contractor Date Title (Reference: 2 CFR part 180 (Subpart C), 2 CFR part 1200, DOT Order 4200.5)


LOBBYING AND INFLUENCING FEDERAL EMPLOYEES The bidder or offeror certifies by signing and submitting this bid or proposal, to the best of his or her knowledge and belief, that:

1. No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid, by or on behalf of the Bidder or Offeror, to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of an agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with the awarding of any Federal contract, the making of any Federal grant, the making of any Federal loan, the entering into of any cooperative agreement, and the extension, continuation, renewal, amendment, or modification of any Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement.

2. If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid

to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with this Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement, the undersigned shall complete and submit Standard Form-LLL, “Disclosure Form to Report Lobbying,” in accordance with its instructions.

3. The undersigned shall require that the language of this certification be included in

the award documents for all sub-awards at all tiers (including subcontracts, sub-grants, and contracts under grants, loans, and cooperative agreements) and that all sub-recipients shall certify and disclose accordingly.

This certification is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was made or entered into. Submission of this certification is a prerequisite for making or entering into this transaction imposed by section 1352, title 31, U.S. Code. Any person who fails to file the required certification shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000 and not more than $100,000 for each such failure. Signature of Contractor Date Title (Reference: 31 U.S.C. § 1352 – Byrd Anti-Lobbying Amendment; 2 CFR part 200, Appendix II(J); 49 CFR part 20, Appendix A)


CERTIFICATE OF BUY AMERICAN COMPLIANCE FOR TOTAL FACILITY

Certificate for Project Base Bid

As a matter of bid responsiveness, the bidder or offeror must complete, sign, date, and submit this certification statement with their proposal. The bidder or offeror must indicate how they intend to comply with 49 USC § 50101 by selecting one of the following certification statements. These statements are mutually exclusive. Bidder must select one or the other (i.e. not both) by inserting a checkmark () or the letter “X”. ☐ (A) Bidder or offeror hereby certifies that it will comply with 49 USC. 50101 by:

a) Only installing steel and manufactured products produced in the United States; or b) Installing manufactured products for which the FAA has issued a waiver as

indicated by inclusion on the current FAA Nationwide Buy American Waivers Issued listing; or

c) Installing products listed as an Excepted Article, Material or Supply in Federal Acquisition Regulation Subpart 25.108.

By selecting this certification statement, the bidder or offeror agrees:

1. To provide to the Owner evidence that documents the source and origin of the steel and manufactured product.

2. To faithfully comply with providing US domestic products. 3. To refrain from seeking a waiver request after establishment of the contract, unless

extenuating circumstances emerge that the FAA determines justified. ☐ (B) The bidder or offeror hereby certifies it cannot comply with the 100% Buy American

Preferences of 49 USC § 50101(a) but may qualify for either a Type 3 or Type 4 waiver under 49 USC § 50101(b). By selecting this certification statement, the apparent bidder or offeror with the apparent low bid agrees:

1. To the submit to the Owner within 15 calendar days of the bid opening, a formal

waiver request and required documentation that support the type of waiver being requested.

2. That failure to submit the required documentation within the specified timeframe is cause for a non-responsive determination that may result in rejection of the proposal.

3. To faithfully comply with providing US domestic products at or above the approved US domestic content percentage as approved by the FAA.

4. To furnish US domestic product for any waiver request that the FAA rejects. 5. To refrain from seeking a waiver request after establishment of the contract, unless

extenuating circumstances emerge that the FAA determines justified.


REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION Type 3 Waiver - The cost of components and subcomponents produced in the United States is more that 60% of the cost of all components and subcomponents of the “facility”. The required documentation for a type 3 waiver is:

a) Listing of all manufactured products that are not comprised of 100% US domestic content (Excludes products listed on the FAA Nationwide Buy American Waivers Issued listing and products excluded by Federal Acquisition Regulation Subpart 25.108; products of unknown origin must be considered as non-domestic products in their entirety).

b) Cost of non-domestic components and subcomponents, excluding labor costs associated with final assembly and installation at project location.

c) Percentage of non-domestic component and subcomponent cost as compared to total “facility” component and subcomponent costs, excluding labor costs associated with final assembly and installation at project location.

Type 4 Waiver - Total cost of project using US domestic source product exceeds the total project cost using non-domestic product by 25%. The required documentation for a type 4 of waiver is:

a) Detailed cost information for total project using US domestic product b) Detailed cost information for total project using non-domestic product

False Statements: Per 49 USC § 47126, this certification concerns a matter within the jurisdiction of the Federal Aviation Administration and the making of a false, fictitious or fraudulent certification may render the maker subject to prosecution under Title 18, United States Code. Certificate for Project Base Bid Date Signature Company Name Title



Certificate for Add Alternate Bid – Passenger Boarding Bridges, Pre-Conditioned

Air Units and Ground Power Units As a matter of bid responsiveness, the bidder or offeror must complete, sign, date, and submit this certification statement with their proposal. The bidder or offeror must indicate how they intend to comply with 49 USC § 50101 by selecting one of the following certification statements. These statements are mutually exclusive. Bidder must select one or the other (i.e. not both) by inserting a checkmark () or the letter “X”. ☐ (A) Bidder or offeror hereby certifies that it will comply with 49 USC. 50101 by:

d) Only installing steel and manufactured products produced in the United States; or e) Installing manufactured products for which the FAA has issued a waiver as


f) Installing products listed as an Excepted Article, Material or Supply in Federal Acquisition Regulation Subpart 25.108.



5. To faithfully comply with providing US domestic products. 6. To refrain from seeking a waiver request after establishment of the contract, unless

extenuating circumstances emerge that the FAA determines justified. ☐ (B) The bidder or offeror hereby certifies it cannot comply with the 100% Buy American


6. To the submit to the Owner within 15 calendar days of the bid opening, a formal

waiver request and required documentation that support the type of waiver being requested.

7. That failure to submit the required documentation within the specified timeframe is cause for a non-responsive determination that may result in rejection of the proposal.


9. To furnish US domestic product for any waiver request that the FAA rejects. 10. To refrain from seeking a waiver request after establishment of the contract, unless

extenuating circumstances emerge that the FAA determines justified.


REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION

Type 3 Waiver - The cost of components and subcomponents produced in the United States is more that 60% of the cost of all components and subcomponents of the “facility”. The required documentation for a type 3 waiver is:

d) Listing of all manufactured products that are not comprised of 100% US domestic content (Excludes products listed on the FAA Nationwide Buy American Waivers Issued listing and products excluded by Federal Acquisition Regulation Subpart 25.108; products of unknown origin must be considered as non-domestic products in their entirety).

e) Cost of non-domestic components and subcomponents, excluding labor costs associated with final assembly and installation at project location.

f) Percentage of non-domestic component and subcomponent cost as compared to total “facility” component and subcomponent costs, excluding labor costs associated with final assembly and installation at project location.

Type 4 Waiver - Total cost of project using US domestic source product exceeds the total project cost using non-domestic product by 25%. The required documentation for a type 4 of waiver is:

c) Detailed cost information for total project using US domestic product d) Detailed cost information for total project using non-domestic product

False Statements: Per 49 USC § 47126, this certification concerns a matter within the jurisdiction of the Federal Aviation Administration and the making of a false, fictitious or fraudulent certification may render the maker subject to prosecution under Title 18, United States Code. Certificate for Add Alternate Bid – Passenger Boarding Bridges, Pre-Conditioned

Air Units and Ground Power Units

Date Signature Company Name Title


FORM OF NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT (This Affidavit is Part of the Proposal)

STATE OF COUNTY OF being first duly sworn, deposes and says that he/she is (Sole owner, a partner, president, secretary, etc.) of the party making the foregoing Proposal that such Proposal is genuine and not collusive or sham; that said Offeror has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed directly or indirectly, with any Offeror or person, to put in a sham Proposal, or that such other person shall refrain from submitting a proposal and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person, to fix the proposal price of affiant or any other Offeror, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said proposal price, or of that of any other Offeror or to secure any advantage against OWNER any person interested in the proposed Contract; and that all statements in said Proposal are true; and further, that such Offeror has not, directly or indirectly submitted this proposal, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or date relative to any association or to any member or agent thereof. Signature of Offeror Sworn to and subscribed before me this day of , 2017. (Official Seal) Official Signature of Notary

, Notary Public Notary’s Printed or Typed Name My Commission expires , 20___


Bidder must complete above “Listing of DBE Subcontractors” form and submit with bid. Letters of Intent must be submitted by the apparent low bidder for all DBE subcontractors no later than 2:00 pm of the fifth calendar day following opening of bids, unless the fifth day falls on Saturday, Sunday or an official state holiday. In that situation, it is due in the office of the Airport Director no later than 10:00 am on the next official state business day.

Listing of DBE Subcontractors & Suppliers Fayetteville Regional Airport To Be Submitted With The Bid Airline Terminal Improvements – Part 1 The Bidder hereby proposes the following DBE participation in accordance with Appendix C:

DBE Subcontractor or Supplier Name and Address

NCDOT Reporting Number

Cert. Type (DBE)

Work To Be Performed Subcontract

Amount

Amount Applicable to

Goal

Total Applicable DBE Participation

Base Bid Amount

DBE Participation Proposed (%)

DBE Participation Goal (%) 6.6%

Bidder (Firm Name) Signature Date




Bidder Information Sheet BIS-1 of 1

BIDDER INFORMATION

Name of Company

Address

Phone No. Fax No.

E-Mail Address

Federal I.D. No.

DBE / Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Yes No

N. C. General Contractor License Number

Bid Submitted by:

(Name Printed Out)

(Signature)

Title:

Date:

Fayetteville Regional Airport C-1 May 2017

APPENDIX ‘C’

DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PROVISIONS (Local Government Agencies)

Description The purpose of this Special Provision is to carry out the U.S. Department of Transportation’s policy of ensuring nondiscrimination in the award and administration of contracts financed in whole or in part with Federal funds. This provision is guided by 49 CFR Part 26. General This appendix has been developed from NCDOT Special Provision SP1 G63, revised January 17, 2017. Certain additional provisions have been added, to facilitate the management of project data. Definitions Additional DBE Subcontractors - Any DBE submitted at the time of bid that will not be used to meet the DBE goal. No submittal of a Letter of Intent is required. Committed DBE Subcontractor - Any DBE submitted at the time of bid that is being used to meet the DBE goal by submission of a Letter of Intent. Or any DBE used as a replacement for a previously committed DBE firm. Contract Goal Requirement - The approved DBE participation at time of award, but not greater than the advertised contract goal. DBE Goal - A portion of the total contract, expressed as a percentage, that is to be performed by committed DBE subcontractor(s). Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) - A firm certified as a Disadvantaged Business Enterprise through the North Carolina Unified Certification Program. Goal Confirmation Letter - Written documentation from the City of Fayetteville to the bidder confirming the Contractor's approved, committed DBE participation along with a listing of the committed DBE firms. Local Government Agency – The City of Fayetteville, North Carolina, the entity letting the contract. When this provision refers to the Department or NCDOT, it shall also mean the City of Fayetteville, acting alone as Owner, or jointly with the Department/ NCDOT.


Manufacturer - A firm that operates or maintains a factory or establishment that produces on the premises, the materials or supplies obtained by the Contractor. Regular Dealer - A firm that owns, operates, or maintains a store, warehouse, or other establishment in which the materials or supplies required for the performance of the contract are bought, kept in stock, and regularly sold to the public in the usual course of business. A regular dealer engages in, as its principal business and in its own name, the purchase and sale or lease of the products in question. A regular dealer in such bulk items as steel, cement, gravel, stone, and petroleum products need not keep such products in stock, if it owns and operates distribution equipment for the products. Brokers and packagers are not regarded as manufacturers or regular dealers within the meaning of this section. North Carolina Unified Certification Program (NCUCP) - A program that provides comprehensive services and information to applicants for DBE certification, such that an applicant is required to apply only once for a DBE certification that will be honored by all recipients of USDOT funds in the state and not limited to the Department of Transportation only. The Certification Program is in accordance with 49 CFR Part 26. Standard Specifications - The general term comprising all directions, provisions, and requirements contained or referred to in the North Carolina Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Roads and Structures and any subsequent revisions or additions to such book. United States Department of Transportation (USDOT) - Federal agency responsible for issuing regulations (49 CFR Part 26) and official guidance for the DBE program. Forms Referenced in this Provision Note: These forms may be downloaded from NCDOT maintained web pages. DBE-IS Subcontractor Payment Information – Form for reporting the payments made to all DBE firms working on the project. RF-1 DBE Replacement Request Form – Form for replacing a committed DBE. JC-1 Joint Check Notification Form – Form and procedures for joint check notification. The form acts as a written joint check agreement among the parties providing full and prompt disclosure of the expected use of joint checks. Letter of Intent - Form signed by the Contractor and the DBE subcontractor, manufacturer or regular dealer that affirms that a portion of said contract is going to be performed by the signed DBE for the amount listed at the time of bid. Listing of DBE Subcontractors Form - Form for entering DBE subcontractors on a project that will meet this DBE goal. This form is for paper bids only.


Subcontractor Quote Comparison Sheet - Spreadsheet for showing all subcontractor quotes in the work areas where DBEs quoted on the project. This sheet is submitted with good faith effort packages. DBE Goal The following DBE goal for participation by Disadvantaged Business Enterprises is established for this contract: Disadvantaged Business Enterprises 6.6% The Contractor shall exercise all necessary and reasonable steps to ensure that DBEs participate in at least the percent of the contract as set forth above as the DBE goal. Directory of Transportation Firms (Directory) Real-time information is available about firms doing business with the Department and firms that are certified through NCUCP in the Directory of Transportation Firms. Only firms identified in the Directory as DBE certified shall be used to meet the DBE goal. The Directory can be found at the following link. https:// www.ebs.nc.gov/VendorDirectory/default.html The listing of an individual firm in the directory shall not be construed as an endorsement of the firm’s capability to perform certain work. Listing of DBE Subcontractors At the time of bid, bidders shall submit all DBE participation that they anticipate to use during the life of the contract. Only those identified to meet the DBE goal will be considered committed, even though the listing shall include both committed DBE subcontractors and additional DBE subcontractors. Additional DBE subcontractor participation submitted at the time of bid will be used toward the overall race-neutral goal. Only those firms with current DBE certification at the time of bid opening will be acceptable for listing in the bidder's submittal of DBE participation. The Contractor shall indicate the following required information: Blank forms will not be deemed to represent zero participation. Bids submitted that do not have DBE participation indicated on the appropriate form will not be read publicly during the opening of bids. The Department and the City of Fayetteville will not consider these bids for award and the proposal will be rejected.

(1) Bidders, at the time the bid proposal is submitted, shall submit a listing of DBE participation, including the names and addresses on Listing of DBE Subcontractors contained elsewhere in the contract documents in


order for the bid to be considered responsive. Bidders shall indicate the total dollar value of the DBE participation for the contract.

(2) If bidders have no DBE participation, they shall indicate this on the Listing

of DBE Subcontractors by entering the word “None” or the number “0.” This form shall be completed in its entirety.

(3) The bidder shall be responsible for ensuring that the DBE is certified at the

time of bid by checking the Directory of Transportation Firms. If the firm is not certified at the time of the bid-letting, that DBE’s participation will not count towards achieving the DBE goal.

DBE Prime Contractor When a certified DBE firm bids on a contract that contains a DBE goal, the DBE firm is responsible for meeting the goal or making good faith efforts to meet the goal, just like any other bidder. In most cases, a DBE bidder on a contract will meet the DBE goal by virtue of the work it performs on the contract with its own forces. However, all the work that is performed by the DBE bidder and any other DBE subcontractors will count toward the DBE goal. The DBE bidder shall list itself along with any DBE subcontractors, if any, in order to receive credit toward the DBE goal. For example, if the DBE goal is 45% and the DBE bidder will only perform 40% of the contract work, the prime will list itself at 40%, and the additional 5% shall be obtained through additional DBE participation with DBE subcontractors or documented through a good faith effort. DBE prime contractors shall also follow the procedures listed under Listing of DBE Subcontractor just as a non-DBE bidder would. Written Documentation – Letter of Intent The bidder shall submit written documentation for each DBE that will be used to meet the DBE goal of the contract, indicating the bidder’s commitment to use the DBE in the contract. This documentation shall be submitted on the form titled Letter of Intent. The documentation shall be received in the office of the Airport Director no later than 2:00 pm of the fifth calendar day following opening of bids, unless the fifth day falls on Saturday, Sunday or an official state holiday. In that situation, it is due in the office of the Airport Director no later than 10:00 am on the next official state business day. If the bidder fails to submit the Letter of Intent from each committed DBE to be used toward the DBE goal, or if the form is incomplete (i.e. both signatures are not present), the DBE participation will not count toward meeting the DBE goal. If the lack of this participation drops the commitment below the DBE goal, the Contractor shall submit evidence of good faith efforts, completed in its entirety, to the Airport Director no later


than 2:00 pm on the eighth calendar day following opening of bids, unless the eighth day falls on Saturday, Sunday or an official state holiday. In that situation, it is due in the office of the Airport Director no later than 10:00 am on the next official state business day. Submission of Good Faith Effort If the bidder fails to meet or exceed the DBE goal, the apparent lowest responsive bidder shall submit to the City of Fayetteville documentation of adequate good faith efforts made to reach the DBE goal. One complete set and 3 copies of this information shall be received in the office of the Airport Director no later than 2:00 pm of the fifth calendar day following opening of bids, unless the sixth day falls on Saturday, Sunday or an official state holiday. In that situation, it is due in the office of the Airport Director no later than 10:00 am on the next official state business day. Note: Where the information submitted includes repetitious solicitation letters, it will be acceptable to submit a representative letter along with a distribution list of the firms that were solicited. Documentation of DBE quotations shall be a part of the good faith effort submittal. This documentation may include written subcontractor quotations, telephone log notations of verbal quotations, or other types of quotation documentation. Consideration of Good Faith Effort for Projects with DBE Goals More Than Zero Adequate good faith efforts mean that the bidder took all necessary and reasonable steps to achieve the goal which, by their scope, intensity, and appropriateness, could reasonably be expected to obtain sufficient DBE participation. Adequate good faith efforts also mean that the bidder actively and aggressively sought DBE participation. Mere pro forma efforts are not considered good faith efforts. The Department and the City of Fayetteville will consider the quality, quantity, and intensity of the different kinds of efforts a bidder has made. Listed below are examples of the types of actions a bidder will take in making a good faith effort to meet the goal and are not intended to be exclusive or exhaustive, nor is it intended to be a mandatory checklist. (A) Soliciting through all reasonable and available means (e.g. attendance at pre-bid

meetings, advertising, written notices, use of verifiable electronic means through the use of the NCDOT Directory of Transportation Firms) the interest of all certified DBEs who have the capability to perform the work of the contract. The bidder must solicit this interest within at least 10 days prior to bid opening to allow the DBEs to respond to the solicitation. Solicitation shall provide the opportunity to DBEs within the market area where the project is located (NCDOT Highway Division 6 and the surrounding Divisions). The bidder must determine with certainty if the DBEs are interested by taking appropriate steps to follow up initial solicitations.


(B) Selecting portions of the work to be performed by DBEs in order to increase the likelihood that the DBE goals will be achieved.

(1) Where appropriate, break out contract work items into economically feasible

units to facilitate DBE participation, even when the prime contractor might otherwise prefer to perform these work items with its own forces.

(2) Negotiate with subcontractors to assume part of the responsibility to meet the contract DBE goal when the work to be sublet includes potential for DBE participation (2nd and 3rd tier subcontractors).

(C) Providing interested DBEs with adequate information about the plans,

specifications, and requirements of the contract in a timely manner to assist them in responding to a solicitation.

(D) (1) Negotiating in good faith with interested DBEs. It is the bidder’s

responsibility to make a portion of the work available to DBE subcontractors and suppliers and to select those portions of the work or material needs consistent with the available DBE subcontractors and suppliers, so as to facilitate DBE participation. Evidence of such negotiation includes the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of DBEs that were considered; a description of the information provided regarding the plans and specifications for the work selected for subcontracting; and evidence as to why additional agreements could not be reached for DBEs to perform the work.

(2) A bidder using good business judgment would consider a number of factors

in negotiating with subcontractors, including DBE subcontractors, and would take a firm’s price and capabilities as well as contract goals into consideration. However, the fact that there may be some additional costs involved in finding and using DBEs is not in itself sufficient reason for a bidder’s failure to meet the contract DBE goal, as long as such costs are reasonable. Also, the ability or desire of a prime contractor to perform the work of a contract with its own organization does not relieve the bidder of the responsibility to make good faith efforts. Bidding contractors are not, however, required to accept higher quotes from DBEs if the price difference is excessive or unreasonable.

(E) Not rejecting DBEs as being unqualified without sound reasons based on a

thorough investigation of their capabilities. The bidder’s standing within its industry, membership in specific groups, organizations, or associates and political or social affiliations (for example, union vs. non-union employee status) are not legitimate causes for the rejection or non-solicitation of bids in the bidder’s efforts to meet the project goal.


(F) Making efforts to assist interested DBEs in obtaining bonding, lines of credit, or insurance as required by the recipient or bidder.

(G) Making efforts to assist interested DBEs in obtaining necessary equipment,

supplies, materials, or related assistance or services. (H) Effectively using the services of available minority/women community

organizations; minority/women contractors’ groups; Federal, State, and local minority/women business assistance offices; and other organizations as allowed on a case-by-case basis to provide assistance in the recruitment and placement of DBEs. Contact within 7 days from the bid opening NCDOT’s Business Development Manager in the Business Opportunity and Work Force Development Unit to give notification of the bidder’s inability to get DBE quotes.

(I) Any other evidence that the bidder submits which shows that the bidder has made

reasonable good faith efforts to meet the DBE goal. In addition, the Department and the City of Fayetteville may take into account the following:

(1) Whether the bidder’s documentation reflects a clear and realistic plan for achieving the DBE goal.

(2) The bidders’ past performance in meeting the DBE goals.

(3) The performance of other bidders in meeting the DBE goal. For example,

when the apparent successful bidder fails to meet the DBE goal, but others meet it, you may reasonably raise the question of whether, with additional reasonable efforts the apparent successful bidder could have met the goal. If the apparent successful bidder fails to meet the DBE goal, but meets or exceeds the average DBE participation obtained by other bidders, the Department and the City of Fayetteville may view this, in conjunction with other factors, as evidence of the apparent successful bidder having made a good faith effort.

If the City of Fayetteville does not award the contract to the apparent lowest responsive bidder, the City of Fayetteville reserves the right to award the contract to the next lowest responsive bidder that can satisfy to the Department and the City of Fayetteville that the DBE goal can be met or that an adequate good faith effort has been made to meet the DBE goal. Non-Good Faith Appeal The City of Fayetteville will notify the contractor verbally and in writing of non-good faith. A contractor may appeal a determination of non-good faith made by the Airport Director. If a contractor wishes to appeal the determination made by the Airport Director, they shall


provide written notification to the Airport Director and the City of Fayetteville. The appeal shall be made within 2 business days of notification of the determination of non-good faith. Counting DBE Participation Toward Meeting DBE Goal (A) Participation

The total dollar value of the participation by a committed DBE will be counted toward the contract goal requirement. The total dollar value of participation by a committed DBE will be based upon the value of work actually performed by the DBE and the actual payments to DBE firms by the Contractor.

(B) Joint Checks

Prior notification of joint check use shall be required when counting DBE participation for services or purchases that involves the use of a joint check. Notification shall be through submission of Form JC-1 (Joint Check Notification Form) and the use of joint checks shall be in accordance with the Department's Joint Check Procedures.

(C) Subcontracts (Non-Trucking)

A DBE may enter into subcontracts. Work that a DBE subcontracts to another DBE firm may be counted toward the contract goal requirement. Work that a DBE subcontracts to a non-DBE firm does not count toward the contract goal requirement. If a DBE contractor or subcontractor subcontracts a significantly greater portion of the work of the contract than would be expected on the basis of standard industry practices, it shall be presumed that the DBE is not performing a commercially useful function. The DBE may present evidence to rebut this presumption to the Department and the City of Fayetteville. The Department's decision on the rebuttal of this presumption is subject to review by the Federal Aviation Administration but is not administratively appealable to USDOT.

(D) Joint Venture

When a DBE performs as a participant in a joint venture, the Contractor may count toward its contract goal requirement a portion of the total value of participation with the DBE in the joint venture, that portion of the total dollar value being a distinct clearly defined portion of work that the DBE performs with its forces.

(E) Suppliers

A contractor may count toward its DBE requirement 60 percent of its expenditures for materials and supplies required to complete the contract and obtained from a


DBE regular dealer and 100 percent of such expenditures from a DBE manufacturer.

(F) Manufacturers and Regular Dealers

A contractor may count toward its DBE requirement the following expenditures to DBE firms that are not manufacturers or regular dealers:

(1) The fees or commissions charged by a DBE firm for providing a bona fide

service, such as professional, technical, consultant, or managerial services, or for providing bonds or insurance specifically required for the performance of a DOT-assisted contract, provided the fees or commissions are determined to be reasonable and not excessive as compared with fees and commissions customarily allowed for similar services.

(2) With respect to materials or supplies purchased from a DBE, which is

neither a manufacturer nor a regular dealer, count the entire amount of fees or commissions charged for assistance in the procurement of the materials and supplies, or fees or transportation charges for the delivery of materials or supplies required on a job site (but not the cost of the materials and supplies themselves), provided the fees are determined to be reasonable and not excessive as compared with fees customarily allowed for similar services.

Commercially Useful Function (A) DBE Utilization

The Contractor may count toward its contract goal requirement only expenditures to DBEs that perform a commercially useful function in the work of a contract. A DBE performs a commercially useful function when it is responsible for execution of the work of the contract and is carrying out its responsibilities by actually performing, managing, and supervising the work involved. To perform a commercially useful function, the DBE shall also be responsible with respect to materials and supplies used on the contract, for negotiating price, determining quality and quantity, ordering the material and installing (where applicable) and paying for the material itself. To determine whether a DBE is performing a commercially useful function, the City and Department will evaluate the amount of work subcontracted, industry practices, whether the amount the firm is to be paid under the contract is commensurate with the work it is actually performing and the DBE credit claimed for its performance of the work, and any other relevant factors.


(B) DBE Utilization in Trucking

The following factors will be used to determine if a DBE trucking firm is performing a commercially useful function.

(1) The DBE shall be responsible for the management and supervision of the

entire trucking operation for which it is responsible on a particular contract, and there shall not be a contrived arrangement for the purpose of meeting DBE goals.

(2) The DBE shall itself own and operate at least one fully licensed, insured,

and operational truck used on the contract.

(3) The DBE receives credit for the total value of the transportation services it provides on the contract using trucks it owns, insures, and operates using drivers it employs.

(4) The DBE may subcontract the work to another DBE firm, including

an owner-operator who is certified as a DBE. The DBE who subcontracts work to another DBE receives credit for the total value of the transportation services the subcontracted DBE provides on the contract.

(5) The DBE may also subcontract the work to a non-DBE firm, including from

an owner-operator. The DBE who subcontracts the work to a non-DBE is entitled to credit for the total value of transportation services provided by the non-DBE subcontractor not to exceed the value of transportation services provided by DBE-owned trucks on the contract. Additional participation by non-DBE subcontractors receives credit only for the fee or commission it receives as a result of the subcontract arrangement. The value of services performed under subcontract agreements between the DBE and the Contractor will not count towards the DBE contract requirement.

(6) A DBE may lease truck(s) from an established equipment leasing business

open to the general public. The lease must indicate that the DBE has exclusive use of and control over the truck. This requirement does not preclude the leased truck from working for others during the term of the lease with the consent of the DBE, so long as the lease gives the DBE absolute priority for use of the leased truck. This type of lease may count toward the DBE’s credit as long as the driver is under the DBE’s payroll.

(7) Subcontracted/leased trucks shall display clearly on the dashboard the

name of the DBE that they are subcontracted/leased to and their own company name if it is not identified on the truck itself. Magnetic door signs are not permitted.


DBE Replacement When a Contractor has relied on a commitment to a DBE firm (or an approved substitute DBE firm) to meet all or part of a contract goal requirement, the contractor shall not terminate the DBE for convenience. This includes, but is not limited to, instances in which the Contractor seeks to perform the work of the terminated subcontractor with another DBE subcontractor, a non-DBE subcontractor, or with the Contractor’s own forces or those of an affiliate. A DBE may only be terminated after receiving the City’s written approval based upon a finding of good cause for the termination. The prime contractor must give the DBE firm five (5) calendar days to respond to the prime contractor’s notice of termination and advise the prime contractor and the Department of the reasons, if any, why the firm objects to the proposed termination of its subcontract and why the Department should not approve the action. All requests for replacement of a committed DBE firm shall be submitted to the Airport Director for approval on Form RF-1 (DBE Replacement Request). If the Contractor fails to follow this procedure, the Contractor may be disqualified from further bidding for a period of up to 6 months. The Contractor shall comply with the following for replacement of a committed DBE: (A) Performance Related Replacement

When a committed DBE is terminated for good cause as stated above, an additional DBE that was submitted at the time of bid may be used to fulfill the DBE commitment. A good faith effort will only be required for removing a committed DBE if there were no additional DBEs submitted at the time of bid to cover the same amount of work as the DBE that was terminated.

If a replacement DBE is not found that can perform at least the same amount of work as the terminated DBE, the Contractor shall submit a good faith effort documenting the steps taken. Such documentation shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

(1) Copies of written notification to DBEs that their interest is solicited in

contracting the work defaulted by the previous DBE or in subcontracting other items of work in the contract.

(2) Efforts to negotiate with DBEs for specific subbids including, at a minimum:

(a) The names, addresses, and telephone numbers of DBEs who were

contacted. (b) A description of the information provided to DBEs regarding the plans

and specifications for portions of the work to be performed.

(3) A list of reasons why DBE quotes were not accepted.


(4) Efforts made to assist the DBEs contacted, if needed, in obtaining bonding

or insurance required by the Contractor.

(B) Decertification Replacement

(1) When a committed DBE is decertified by the Department after the DBE has executed a subcontract, the City will not require the Contractor to solicit replacement DBE participation equal to the remaining work to be performed by the decertified firm. The participation equal to the remaining work performed by the decertified firm will count toward the contract goal requirement.

(2) When a committed DBE is decertified prior to DBE executing a subcontract,

the Contractor shall take all necessary and reasonable steps to replace the DBE subcontractor with another DBE subcontractor to perform at least the same amount of work to meet the DBE goal requirement. If a DBE firm is not found to do the same amount of work, a good faith effort must be submitted to FAYETTEVILLE REGIONAL AIRPORT (see A herein for required documentation).

Changes in the Work When the Owner makes changes that result in the reduction or elimination of work to be performed by a committed DBE, the Contractor will not be required to seek additional participation. When the Owner makes changes that result in additional work to be performed by a DBE based upon the Contractor’s commitment, the DBE shall participate in additional work to the same extent as the DBE participated in the original contract work. When the Owner makes changes that result in extra work, which has more than a minimal impact on the contract amount, the Contractor shall seek additional participation by DBEs unless otherwise approved by the Airport Director. When the Owner makes changes that result in an alteration of plans or details of construction, and a portion or all of the work had been expected to be performed by a committed DBE, the Contractor shall seek participation by DBEs unless otherwise approved by the Airport Director. When the Contractor requests changes in the work that result in the reduction or elimination of work that the Contractor committed to be performed by a DBE, the Contractor shall seek additional participation by DBEs equal to the reduced DBE participation caused by the changes.


Reports and Documentation The Department and the City of Fayetteville will require copies of actual subcontract agreements involving DBE subcontractors. When using transportation services to meet the contract commitment, the Contractor shall submit a proposed trucking plan. The plan shall be submitted prior to beginning construction on the project. The plan shall include the names of all trucking firms proposed for use, their certification type(s), the number of trucks owned by the firm, as well as the individual truck identification numbers, and the line item(s) being performed. Within 30 calendar days of entering into an agreement with a DBE for materials, supplies or services, the Contractor shall furnish the Owner a copy of the agreement. The documentation shall also indicate the percentage (60% or 100%) of expenditures claimed for DBE credit. Reporting Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Participation The Contractor shall provide the Airport Director with an accounting of payments made to all DBE firms, including material suppliers and contractors at all levels (prime, subcontractor, or second tier subcontractor). This accounting shall be furnished to the Airport Director for any given month by the end of the following month. Failure to submit this information accordingly may result in the following action: (A) Withholding of money due in the next partial pay estimate; or (B) Removal by the Department of an approved contractor from the prequalified

bidders’ list or the removal of other entities from the approved subcontractors list. While each contractor (prime, subcontractor, 2nd tier subcontractor) is responsible for accurate accounting of payments to DBEs, it shall be the prime contractor’s responsibility to report all monthly and final payment information in the correct reporting manner. Failure on the part of the Contractor to submit the required information in the time frame specified may result in the disqualification of that contractor and any affiliate companies from further bidding until the required information is submitted. Failure on the part of any subcontractor to submit the required information in the time frame specified may result in the disqualification of that contractor and any affiliate companies from being approved for work on future projects until the required information is submitted.

Contractors reporting transportation services provided by non-DBE lessees shall evaluate the value of services provided during the month of the reporting period only.


At any time, the Airport Director can request written verification of subcontractor payments.

The Contractor shall report the accounting of payments on the Department’s DBE-IS (Subcontractor Payment Information) with each invoice. Invoices will not be processed for payment until the DBE-IS is received. Failure to Meet Contract Requirements Failure to meet contract requirements in accordance with Subarticle 102-15(J) of the 2012 Standard Specifications may be cause for the Department to disqualify the Contractor from further bidding for a specified length of time. Additional Project Requirements For this project, the Contractor shall provide additional management and documentation of project DBE participation data to assist the Owner with implementation of the airport’s DBE Program, as follows. The Contractor shall provide, prior to Notice-to-proceed, a detailed written description of the work to be performed by each committed DBE firm, to include specific work element(s), location(s) on the project and time frame(s) within the overall project schedule. For trucking/hauling DBE participation, describe in detail the material to be hauled and the start and end points (locations) of each hauling operation. DBE payments shall be reported on the designated forms. Copies of dated DBE invoices, cancelled checks and/or other financial records shall be submitted as back-up documentation. Prior to final acceptance of the work, the Contractor shall submit a signed and notarized statement from each committed DBE as to the total of all payments received for this contract. In addition to DBE payment reporting, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a monthly written DBE participation progress report, listing the DBE firms which performed work on the project in the prior month, along with the dates, nature and status of that work; listing the project DBE participation for the following month (including firm name(s) and nature of work); provide dated photos and/or other records documenting when DBE equipment and workers are on site and delivery of goods by DBE suppliers or haulers; provide documentation of commercially useful function, including trucking documents; provide any information regarding DBE participation challenges, including non-performance, pending termination and replacement issues; describe any participation impacts of pending contract changes; describe any scheduling changes which may affect the relative timing of participation; and any other project considerations which could affect DBE participation. Failure to provide thorough and timely documentation and reporting may be cause for the Owner to delay processing of payments to the Contractor.

Form GFE - 1


10-26-05 Sheet 1 of 10

THIS INFORMATION MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH YOUR BID PROPOSAL IF YOUR BID DOES NOT MEET THE PROJECT DBE REQUIREMENTS, OR WHEN REQUESTED BY

FAYETTEVILLE REGIONAL AIRPORT CONTRACT NAME

DEPARTMENT FAYETTEVILLE REGIONAL AIRPORT

DATE BID SUBMITTED

BIDDER'S NAME

SIGNATURE

TITLE

DBE GOAL FROM BID PROPOSAL

DBE GOOD FAITH EFFORTS DOCUMENTATION


Form GFE - 1 10-26-05

Sheet 2 of 10

DBE GOOD FAITH EFFORTS DOCUMENTATION CONTRACT NAME SUBMITTED IF THE MBE/WBE GOAL ESTABLISHED FOR THIS CONTRACT HAS NOT BEEN MET OR FAYETTEVILLE REGIONAL AIRPORT REQUESTS THE SUBMITTAL THEREOF, THE BIDDER IS REQUIRED TO SUBMIT GOOD FAITH EFFORTS AS OUTLINED IN THIS DOCUMENT. THE BIDDER ACKNOWLEDGES AND CERTIFIES THAT THIS FORM ACCURATELY REPRESENTS THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN. BIDDER SIGNATURE TITLE____________________________ NAMES OF CERTIFIED DBEs AND THE DATES ON WHICH THEY WERE SOLICITED TO BID ON THIS PROJECT INCLUDE THE ITEMS OF WORK OFFERED AND THE DATES AND METHODS USED FOR FOLLOWING UP INITIAL SOLICITATIONS TO DETERMINE WHETHER OR NOT DBEs WERE INTERESTED.

NAMES AND FED. TAX ID. OF DBEs SOLICITED

DATE OF INITIAL SOLICITATION

ITEM(S) OF WORK FOLLOW-UP METHODS

AND DATES

NOTE: ATTACH ADDITIONAL PAGES IF NECESSARY ATTACH COPIES OF SOLICITATIONS, TELEPHONE RECORDS, FAX CONFIRMATIONS, ELECTRONIC INFORMATION, ETC.


Form GFE - 1 10-26-05

Sheet 3 of 10

DBE GOOD FAITH EFFORTS DOCUMENTATION CONTRACT NAME SUBMITTED IF THE DBE GOAL ESTABLISHED FOR THIS CONTRACT HAS NOT BEEN MET OR FAYETTEVILLE REGIONAL AIRPORT REQUESTS THE SUBMITTAL THEREOF, THE BIDDER IS REQUIRED TO SUBMIT GOOD FAITH EFFORTS AS OUTLINED IN THIS DOCUMENT. THE BIDDER ACKNOWLEDGES AND CERTIFIES THAT THIS FORM ACCURATELY REPRESENTS THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN. BIDDER SIGNATURE TITLE____________________________

TELEPHONE LOG

DBE(s) CALLED TELEPHONE

NUMBER DATE CALLED TIME CALLED

CONTACT PERSON OR VOICE MAIL

STATUS

NOTE: ATTACH ADDITIONAL PAGES IF NECESSARY


Form GFE - 1 10-26-05

Sheet 4 of 10


CONTRACT NAME SUBMITTED IF THE DBE GOAL ESTABLISHED FOR THIS CONTRACT HAS NOT BEEN MET OR FAYETTEVILLE REGIONAL AIRPORT REQUESTS THE SUBMITTAL THEREOF, THE BIDDER IS REQUIRED TO SUBMIT GOOD FAITH EFFORTS AS OUTLINED IN THIS DOCUMENT. THE BIDDER ACKNOWLEDGES AND CERTIFIES THAT THIS FORM ACCURATELY REPRESENTS THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN. BIDDER SIGNATURE TITLE____________________________

ITEM(S) OF WORK THAT THE BIDDER MADE AVAILABLE TO DBE FIRMS

IDENTIFY THOSE ITEM(S) OF WORK THAT THE BIDDER MADE AVAILABLE TO DBE FIRMS OR THOSE ITEM(S) THE BIDDER IDENTIFIED AND DETERMINED TO SUBDIVIDE INTO ECONOMICALLY FEASIBLE UNITS TO FACILITATE MBE/WBE PARTICIPATION. FOR EACH ITEM LISTED, SHOW THE DOLLAR VALUE AND PERCENTAGE OF THE TOTAL CONTRACT AMOUNT. IT IS THE BIDDER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO DEMONSTRATE THAT SUFFICIENT WORK TO MEET THE GOAL WAS MADE AVAILABLE TO MBE/WBE FIRMS.

ITEM(S) OF WORK MADE AVAILABLE

BIDDER NORMALLY PERFORMS ITEM(S)

(Y/N)

ITEM(S) BROKEN DOWN TO

FACILITATE PARTICIPATION

(Y/N)

AMOUNT IN DOLLARS

PERCENTAGE OF CONTRACT



Form GFE - 1 10-26-05

Sheet 5 of 10


CONTRACT NAME SUBMITTED IF THE DBE GOAL ESTABLISHED FOR THIS CONTRACT HAS NOT BEEN MET OR FAYETTEVILLE REGIONAL AIRPORT REQUESTS THE SUBMITTAL THEREOF, THE BIDDER IS REQUIRED TO SUBMIT GOOD FAITH EFFORTS AS OUTLINED IN THIS DOCUMENT. THE BIDDER ACKNOWLEDGES AND CERTIFIES THAT THIS FORM ACCURATELY REPRESENTS THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN. BIDDER SIGNATURE TITLE____________________________

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REGARDING ITEM(S) OF WORK THAT THE BIDDER MADE AVAILABLE TO DBE FIRMS (Continued From Sheet 4)

ITEM(S) OF WORK MADE AVAILABLE, NAMES OF SELECTED FIRMS AND DBE STATUS, DBEs THAT PROVIDED QUOTES, PRICE QUOTE FOR EACH FIRM, AND THE PRICE DIFFERENCE FOR EACH DBE IF THE SELECTED FIRM IS NOT A DBE.

ITEM(S) OF WORK MADE AVAILABLE

(CONT.)

NAME OF SELECTED FIRM AND FED. TAX ID

DBE OR NON-DEB

NAME OF REJECTED FIRM(S)

QUOTE IN DOLLARS

PRICE DIFFERENCE IN DOLLARS

NOTE: ATTACH ADDITIONAL PAGES IF NECESSARY. IF THE FIRM SELECTED FOR THE ITEM IS NOT A DBE, PROVIDE THE REASON(S) FOR THE SELECTION ON A SEPARATE PAGE AND ATTACH. PROVIDE NAMES, ADDRESSES, AND TELEPHONE NUMBERS FOR THE FIRMS LISTED ABOVE.


Form GFE - 1 10-26-05

Sheet 6 of 10

DBE GOOD FAITH EFFORTS DOCUMENTATION CONTRACT ID. NO. DATE SUBMITTED IF THE DBE GOAL ESTABLISHED FOR THIS CONTRACT HAS NOT BEEN MET OR FAYETTEVILLE REGIONAL AIRPORT REQUESTS THE SUBMITTAL THEREOF, THE BIDDER IS REQUIRED TO SUBMIT GOOD FAITH EFFORTS AS OUTLINED IN THIS DOCUMENT. THE BIDDER ACKNOWLEDGES AND CERTIFIES THAT THIS FORM ACCURATELY REPRESENTS THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN. BIDDER SIGNATURE TITLE____________________________

ADVERTISEMENTS OR PROOFS OF PUBLICATION

NAMES AND DATES OF EACH PUBLICATION IN WHICH A REQUEST FOR DBE PARTICIPATION FOR THE PROJECT WAS PLACED BY THE BIDDER. ATTACH COPIES OF PUBLISHED ADVERTISEMENTS OR PROOFS OF PUBLICATION.

PUBLICATIONS DATES OF ADVERTISEMENT


Form GFE - 1 10-26-05

Sheet 7 of 10


NAMES OF AGENCIES CONTACTED TO PROVIDE ASSISTANCE NAMES OF AGENCIES AND THE DATES THESE AGENCIES WERE CONTACTED TO PROVIDE ASSISTANCE IN CONTACTING, RECRUITING, AND USING DBE FIRMS. IF THE AGENCIES WERE CONTACTED IN WRITING, ATTACH COPIES OF SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS.

NAME OF AGENCY METHOD AND DATE OF

CONTACT RESULTS

NOTE: ATTACH ADDITIONAL PAGES IF NECESSARY.


Form GFE - 1 10-26-05

Sheet 8 of 10


TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE AND INFORMATION PROVIDED TO MBE/WBEs EFFORTS MADE TO PROVIDE INTERESTED DBEs WITH ADEQUATE INFORMATION ABOUT THE PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND REQUIREMENTS OF THE BID DOCUMENTS TO ASSIST THE DBEs IN RESPONDING TO A SOLICITATION. IDENTIFY THE MBE/WBEs ASSISTED, THE INFORMATION PROVIDED, AND THE DATE OF CONTACT. ATTACH COPIES OF SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS.

DBEs ASSISTED INFORMATION PROVIDED DATE OF CONTACT


Form GFE - 1 10-26-05

Sheet 9 of 10


EFFORTS MADE TO ASSIST DBEs OBTAIN BONDING, LINES OF CREDIT, INSURANCE, ETC. EFFORTS MADE TO PROVIDE INTERESTED DBEs IN OBTAINING BONDING, LINES OF CREDIT, INSURANCE, NECESSARY EQUIPMENT, SUPPLIES, MATERIALS, OR RELATED ASSISTANCE OR SERVICES, EXCLUDING SUPPLIES AND EQUIPMENT THE SUBCONTRACTOR PURCHASES OR LEASES FROM THE PRIME CONTRACTOR OR ITS AFFILIATES.

DBEs ASSISTED ASSISTANCE OFFERED DATES SERVICES OFFERED

AND/OR PROVIDED



Form GFE - 1 10-26-05

Sheet 10 of 10


ADDITIONAL DATA TO SUPPORT DEMONSTRATION OF GOOD FAITH EFFORTS

NOTE: ATTACH ADDITIONAL PAGES, IF NECESSARY


FORM RS-1-D DBE_____ MBE____ WBE____ NONE____ REV. 2-28-97 SPECIAL INSURANCE: YES___ NO___

DBE SUBCONTRACT CERTIFICATION

Race Conscious / Goals Required PROJECT NO.: F. A. NO.: COUNTY: CONTRACT NO.: T.I.P. NO.:

(Contractor Name and Address)

(Subcontractor Name and Address)

LINE

CODE NO.

ITEM DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UNIT UNIT

PRICE AMOUNT

TOTAL: SUBMITTED BY: RECOMMENDED BY: SUBCONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR: BY: BY: TITLE: TITLE: INSTRUCTIONS ON BACK

R-199


INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLETING “DBE SUBCONTRACT CERTIFICATION” (FORMS RS-1-D)

RACE CONSCIOUS / GOALS REQUIRED 1. Fill out the blank portions of the “DBE Subcontract Certification” (Form RS-1-D). 2. The negotiated unit or lump sum price must be the actual price agreed upon between the Contractor

and the Subcontractor. 3. This form shall be completed and attached to the “Request for Subcontract” (Form RS-1-A) or “Request

for Second Tier Subcontract” (Form RS-1-B), whenever the proposed Subcontractor is certified DBE Subcontractor.

4. In lieu of attaching “DBE Subcontract Certification” (Form RS-1-D), a copy of the actual subcontract

agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor can be submitted. 5. Signatures are required.

R-200

Fayetteville Regional Airport C-27 FY 2014

City of Fayetteville Fayetteville Regional Airport

DBE VENDOR COMMITMENTS/AWARDS

Airport Name: Airport ID:

Project Number: PO No: Vendor ID:

Awarded By Name Awarded By

Report ID Vendor/Subcontractor

Name Vendor/Subcontractor

Report ID Service / Item Description

Anticipated Utilization ($)

TOTAL

SUBMITTED BY: SUB RECIPIENT: BY: TITLE:

AV-POSTBID (AV-509) (10/06)

Fayetteville Regional Airport C-28 FY 2014

CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE FAYETTEVILLE REGIONAL AIRPORT

DBE VENDOR PAYMENTS

Airport Name: Airport ID:

Project Number: PO No: Vendor ID:

Payor Name Payor Report ID Vendor/Subcontractor

Name Vendor/Subcontractor

Report ID

Amount Paid to Vendor/Subcontractor

this Invoice

Date Paid to Vendor/Subcontractor

this Invoice

TOTAL

SUBMITTED BY: SUB RECIPIENT: BY: TITLE:

AV-VENPAY (AV-510) (10/06)

LETTER OF I N TENT TO PERFORM AS A SUBCO N TRA C T O R CONTRACT: Fayetteville Regional Airport NAME OF BIDDER: Airline Terminal Improvements Part 1

The undersigned intends to perform work in connection with the above contract upon execution of the bid and subsequent award of contract by the City of Fayetteville as:

Name of MBE/WBE/DBE Subcontractor

Address

City State _Zip

Please check all that apply: Minority Business

Enterprise (MBE)

Women Business Enterprise (WBE)

Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE)

The MBE /WBE /DBE status of the above named subcontractor is certified by the North Carolina Department of Transportation. The above named subcontractor is prepared to perform the work described below, in connection with the above contract upon award and execution of the contract by the City of Fayetteville. The above named subcontractor is prepared to perform the described work at the estimated Commitment Total for Subcontractor Price indicated below.

Commitment Total based on estimated Unit Prices and Quantities: Amount $

Work to be performed:

The above named bidder and subcontractor mutually accepts the Commitment Total shown above. This commitment total is based on estimated quantities of contract and sub-contract work and most likely will vary up or down as the project is completed. Final compensation will be based on actual quantities of work performed and accepted during the pursuance of work. The above listed amount represents the entire dollar amount quoted based on estimated quantities. No conversations, verbal agreements, and/or other forms of non-written representations shall serve to add, delete, or modify the terms as stated.

This document shall not serve in any manner as an actual subcontract between the two parties. A separate subcontractor agreement will describe in detail the contractual obligations of the bidder and the MBE/WBE/DBE subcontractor.

Affirmation

The above named MBE/ WBE/ DBE subcontractor affirms that it will perform the portion(s) of the contract for the estimated dollar value as stated above.

Name of MBE/ WBE/ DBE Subcontractor Name of Bidder

Signature / Title Signature / Title

Date Date

Fayetteville Regional Airport – Airline Terminal Improvements – Part 1 Owner: City of Fayetteville, North Carolina May 4, 2017

Federal Contact Provisions Page 1

Appendix D Federal Contract Provisions General

This project is funded in part with federal grant funds under the Airport Improvement Program (AIP) administered by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). The Contract Provisions contained herein have been developed from the FAA guidance document entitled “Required Contract Provisions for Airport Improvement Program and for Obligated Sponsors,” dated January 2016. These provisions shall apply to all work of this contract, and shall apply to all subcontracts and sub-agreements as follows:

1) The contractor and all subcontractors shall insert these contract provisions in each lower tier contract (e.g. subcontract or sub-agreement).

2) The contractor and all subcontractors shall incorporate the applicable requirements of these contract provisions by reference for work done under any purchase orders, rental agreements and other agreements for supplies or services.

3) The prime contractor shall be responsible for compliance with these contract provisions by any subcontractor, lower-tier subcontractor or service provider.

Failure to Comply with Provisions

Contractor failure to comply with the terms of these contract provisions may be sufficient grounds to:

1) Withhold progress payments or final payment; 2) Terminate the contract for cause; 3) Seek suspension/debarment; or 4) Take other action determined to be appropriate by the sponsor or the FAA.

A – CONTRACT PROVISIONS

A1 to A25



A1 ACCESS TO RECORDS AND REPORTS

A1.1 SOURCE

2 CFR § 200.333

2 CFR § 200.336

FAA Order 5100.38

A1.2 CONTRACT CLAUSE

ACCESS TO RECORDS AND REPORTS

The Contractor must maintain an acceptable cost accounting system. The Contractor agrees to provide the sponsor, the Federal Aviation Administration, and the Comptroller General of the United States or any of their duly authorized representatives, access to any books, documents, papers, and records of the contractor which are directly pertinent to the specific contract for the purpose of making audit, examination, excerpts and transcriptions. The Contractor agrees to maintain all books, records and reports required under this contract for a period of not less than three years after final payment is made and all pending matters are closed.



A2 AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENT

A2.1 SOURCE

41 CFR part 60-4

Executive Order 11246


NOTICE OF REQUIREMENT FOR AFFIRMATIVE ACTION to ENSURE EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY

1. The Offeror's or Bidder’s attention is called to the "Equal Opportunity Clause" and the "Standard Federal Equal Employment Opportunity Construction Contract Specifications" set forth herein.

2. The goals and timetables for minority and female participation, expressed in percentage terms for the contractor's aggregate workforce in each trade on all construction work in the covered area, are as follows:

Timetables

Goals for minority participation for each trade: 26.2%

Goals for female participation in each trade: 6.9%

These goals are applicable to all of the contractor's construction work (whether or not it is Federal or federally-assisted) performed in the covered area. If the contractor performs construction work in a geographical area located outside of the covered area, it shall apply the goals established for such geographical area where the work is actually performed. With regard to this second area, the contractor also is subject to the goals for both its federally involved and non-federally involved construction.

The Contractor's compliance with the Executive Order and the regulations in 41 CFR Part 60-4 shall be based on its implementation of the Equal Opportunity Clause, specific affirmative action obligations required by the specifications set forth in 41 CFR 60-4.3(a), and its efforts to meet the goals. The hours of minority and female employment and training must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the contract, and in each trade, and the contractor shall make a good faith effort to employ minorities and women evenly on each of its projects. The transfer of minority or female employees or trainees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor's goals shall be a violation of the contract, the Executive Order and the regulations in 41 CFR Part 60-4. Compliance with the goals will be measured against the total work hours performed.

3. The Contractor shall provide written notification to the Director of the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs (OFCCP) within 10 working days of award of any construction subcontract in excess of $10,000 at any tier for construction work under the contract resulting from this solicitation. The notification shall list the name, address, and telephone number of the subcontractor; employer identification number of the subcontractor; estimated dollar amount of the subcontract; estimated starting and completion dates of the subcontract; and the geographical area in which the subcontract is to be performed.

4. As used in this notice and in the contract resulting from this solicitation, the "covered area" is the City of Fayetteville, Cumberland County, North Carolina.



A3 BREACH OF CONTRACT TERMS

A3.1 SOURCE

2 CFR § 200 Appendix II(A)


BREACH OF CONTRACT TERMS

Any violation or breach of terms of this contract on the part of the contractor or its subcontractors may result in the suspension or termination of this contract or such other action that may be necessary to enforce the rights of the parties of this agreement.

Owner will provide Contractor written notice that describes the nature of the breach and corrective actions the Contractor must undertake in order to avoid termination of the contract. Owner reserves the right to withhold payments to Contractor until such time the Contractor corrects the breach or the Owner elects to terminate the contract. The Owner’s notice will identify a specific date by which the Contractor must correct the breach. Owner may proceed with termination of the contract if the Contractor fails to correct the breach by deadline indicated in the Owner’s notice.

The duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and the rights and remedies available thereunder are in addition to, and not a limitation of, any duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law.



A4 BUY AMERICAN PREFERENCE

A4.1 SOURCE

Title 49 USC § 50101


A4.2 .1 Buy Amer ican Preference Sta tement

BUY AMERICAN PREFERENCE

The contractor agrees to comply with 49 USC § 50101, which provides that Federal funds may not be obligated unless all steel and manufactured goods used in AIP funded projects are produced in the United States, unless the FAA has issued a waiver for the product; the product is listed as an Excepted Article, Material Or Supply in Federal Acquisition Regulation subpart 25.108; or is included in the FAA Nationwide Buy American Waivers Issued list.

A bidder or offeror must complete and submit the Buy America certification included herein with their bid or offer. The Owner will reject as nonresponsive any bid or offer that does not include a completed Certificate of Buy American Compliance.

A4.2 .2 Cer t i f ica te o f Buy Amer ican Compl iance – Tota l Fac i l i ty


As a matter of bid responsiveness, the bidder or offeror must complete, sign, date, and submit this certification statement with their proposal. The bidder or offeror must indicate how they intend to comply with 49 USC § 50101 by selecting one of the following certification statements. These statements are mutually exclusive. Bidder must select one or the other (i.e. not both) by inserting a checkmark () or the letter “X”.

Bidder or offeror hereby certifies that it will comply with 49 USC. 50101 by: a) Only installing steel and manufactured products produced in the United States; or b) Installing manufactured products for which the FAA has issued a waiver as


c) Installing products listed as an Excepted Article, Material or Supply in Federal Acquisition Regulation Subpart 25.108.



2. To faithfully comply with providing US domestic products. 3. To refrain from seeking a waiver request after establishment of the contract,

unless extenuating circumstances emerge that the FAA determines justified. The bidder or offeror hereby certifies it cannot comply with the 100% Buy American


1. To the submit to the Owner within 15 calendar days of the bid opening, a formal waiver request and required documentation that support the type of waiver being



requested. 2. That failure to submit the required documentation within the specified timeframe

is cause for a non-responsive determination that may result in rejection of the proposal.


4. To furnish US domestic product for any waiver request that the FAA rejects. 5. To refrain from seeking a waiver request after establishment of the contract,

unless extenuating circumstances emerge that the FAA determines justified.

Required Documentation

Type 3 Waiver - The cost of components and subcomponents produced in the United States is more that 60% of the cost of all components and subcomponents of the “facility”. The required documentation for a type 3 waiver is:

a) Listing of all manufactured products that are not comprised of 100% US domestic content (Excludes products listed on the FAA Nationwide Buy American Waivers Issued listing and products excluded by Federal Acquisition Regulation Subpart 25.108; products of unknown origin must be considered as non-domestic products in their entirety)

b) Cost of non-domestic components and subcomponents, excluding labor costs associated with final assembly and installation at project location.

c) Percentage of non-domestic component and subcomponent cost as compared to total “facility” component and subcomponent costs, excluding labor costs associated with final assembly and installation at project location.

Type 4 Waiver – Total cost of project using US domestic source product exceeds the total project cost using non-domestic product by 25%. The required documentation for a type 4 of waiver is:

a) Detailed cost information for total project using US domestic product b) Detailed cost information for total project using non-domestic product

False Statements: Per 49 USC § 47126, this certification concerns a matter within the jurisdiction of the Federal Aviation Administration and the making of a false, fictitious or fraudulent certification may render the maker subject to prosecution under Title 18, United States Code.

Date Signature

Company Name Title



A5 C IV IL RIGHTS - GENERAL

A5.1 SOURCE

49 USC § 47123


A5.2 .1 Sponsor Contracts

GENERAL CIVIL RIGHTS PROVISIONS

The contractor agrees to comply with pertinent statutes, Executive Orders and such rules as are promulgated to ensure that no person shall, on the grounds of race, creed, color, national origin, sex, age, or disability be excluded from participating in any activity conducted with or benefiting from Federal assistance.

This provision binds the contractor and subtier contractors from the bid solicitation period through the completion of the contract. This provision is in addition to that required of Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964.



A6 C IV IL RIGHTS – T ITLE V I ASSURANCE

A6.1 SOURCE

49 USC § 47123

FAA Order 1400.11


A6.2 .1 T i t le V I Sol ic i ta t ion Not ice

Title VI Solicitation Notice:

The City of Fayetteville, in accordance with the provisions of Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 (78 Stat. 252, 42 U.S.C. §§ 2000d to 2000d-4) and the Regulations, hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively ensure that any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, disadvantaged business enterprises will be afforded full and fair opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in consideration for an award.

A6.2 .2 T i t le V I C lauses for Compl iance w i th Nondiscr iminat ion Requi rements

Compliance with Nondiscrimination Requirements

During the performance of this contract, the contractor, for itself, its assignees, and successors in interest (hereinafter referred to as the “contractor”) agrees as follows:

1. Compliance with Regulations: The contractor (hereinafter includes consultants) will comply with the Title VI List of Pertinent Nondiscrimination Acts And Authorities, as they may be amended from time to time, which are herein incorporated by reference and made a part of this contract.

2. Non-discrimination: The contractor, with regard to the work performed by it during the contract, will not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in the selection and retention of subcontractors, including procurements of materials and leases of equipment. The contractor will not participate directly or indirectly in the discrimination prohibited by the Nondiscrimination Acts and Authorities, including employment practices when the contract covers any activity, project, or program set forth in Appendix B of 49 CFR part 21.

3. Solicitations for Subcontracts, Including Procurements of Materials and Equipment: In all solicitations, either by competitive bidding, or negotiation made by the contractor for work to be performed under a subcontract, including procurements of materials, or leases of equipment, each potential subcontractor or supplier will be notified by the contractor of the contractor’s obligations under this contract and the Nondiscrimination Acts And Authorities on the grounds of race, color, or national origin.

4. Information and Reports: The contractor will provide all information and reports required by the Acts, the Regulations, and directives issued pursuant thereto and will permit access to its books, records, accounts, other sources of information, and its facilities as may be



determined by the sponsor or the Federal Aviation Administration to be pertinent to ascertain compliance with such Nondiscrimination Acts And Authorities and instructions. Where any information required of a contractor is in the exclusive possession of another who fails or refuses to furnish the information, the contractor will so certify to the sponsor or the Federal Aviation Administration, as appropriate, and will set forth what efforts it has made to obtain the information.

5. Sanctions for Noncompliance: In the event of a contractor’s noncompliance with the Non-discrimination provisions of this contract, the sponsor will impose such contract sanctions as it or the Federal Aviation Administration may determine to be appropriate, including, but not limited to:

a. Withholding payments to the contractor under the contract until the contractor complies; and/or

b. Cancelling, terminating, or suspending a contract, in whole or in part.

6. Incorporation of Provisions: The contractor will include the provisions of paragraphs one through six in every subcontract, including procurements of materials and leases of equipment, unless exempt by the Acts, the Regulations and directives issued pursuant thereto. The contractor will take action with respect to any subcontract or procurement as the sponsor or the Federal Aviation Administration may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for noncompliance. Provided, that if the contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with litigation by a subcontractor, or supplier because of such direction, the contractor may request the sponsor to enter into any litigation to protect the interests of the sponsor. In addition, the contractor may request the United States to enter into the litigation to protect the interests of the United States.

A6.2 .3 T i t le V I L is t o f Per t inent Nondiscr iminat ion Acts and Author i t ies

Title VI List of Pertinent Nondiscrimination Acts and Authorities

During the performance of this contract, the contractor, for itself, its assignees, and successors in interest (hereinafter referred to as the “contractor”) agrees to comply with the following non-discrimination statutes and authorities; including but not limited to:

Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 (42 U.S.C. § 2000d et seq., 78 stat. 252), (prohibits discrimination on the basis of race, color, national origin);

49 CFR part 21 (Non-discrimination In Federally-Assisted Programs of The Department of Transportation—Effectuation of Title VI of The Civil Rights Act of 1964);

The Uniform Relocation Assistance and Real Property Acquisition Policies Act of 1970, (42 U.S.C. § 4601), (prohibits unfair treatment of persons displaced or whose property has been acquired because of Federal or Federal-aid programs and projects);

Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, (29 U.S.C. § 794 et seq.), as amended, (prohibits discrimination on the basis of disability); and 49 CFR part 27;

The Age Discrimination Act of 1975, as amended, (42 U.S.C. § 6101 et seq.), (prohibits discrimination on the basis of age);

Airport and Airway Improvement Act of 1982, (49 USC § 471, Section 47123), as amended, (prohibits discrimination based on race, creed, color, national origin, or sex);



The Civil Rights Restoration Act of 1987, (PL 100-209), (Broadened the scope, coverage and applicability of Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, The Age Discrimination Act of 1975 and Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, by expanding the definition of the terms “programs or activities” to include all of the programs or activities of the Federal-aid recipients, sub-recipients and contractors, whether such programs or activities are Federally funded or not);

Titles II and III of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, which prohibit discrimination on the basis of disability in the operation of public entities, public and private transportation systems, places of public accommodation, and certain testing entities (42 U.S.C. §§ 12131 – 12189) as implemented by Department of Transportation regulations at 49 CFR parts 37 and 38;

The Federal Aviation Administration’s Non-discrimination statute (49 U.S.C. § 47123) (prohibits discrimination on the basis of race, color, national origin, and sex);

Executive Order 12898, Federal Actions to Address Environmental Justice in Minority Populations and Low-Income Populations, which ensures non-discrimination against minority populations by discouraging programs, policies, and activities with disproportionately high and adverse human health or environmental effects on minority and low-income populations;

Executive Order 13166, Improving Access to Services for Persons with Limited English Proficiency, and resulting agency guidance, national origin discrimination includes discrimination because of limited English proficiency (LEP). To ensure compliance with Title VI, you must take reasonable steps to ensure that LEP persons have meaningful access to your programs (70 Fed. Reg. at 74087 to 74100);

Title IX of the Education Amendments of 1972, as amended, which prohibits you from discriminating because of sex in education programs or activities (20 U.S.C. 1681 et seq).



A7 CLEAN AIR AND WATER POLLUTION CONTROL

A7.1 SOURCE

2 CFR § 200, Appendix II(G)


CLEAN AIR AND WATER POLLUTION CONTROL

Contractor agrees to comply with all applicable standards, orders, and regulations issued pursuant to the Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. § 740-7671q) and the Federal Water Pollution Control Act as amended (33 U.S.C. § 1251-1387). The Contractor agrees to report any violation to the Owner immediately upon discovery. The Owner assumes responsibility for notifying the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and the Federal Aviation Administration.

Contractor must include this requirement in all subcontracts that exceeds $150,000.



A8 CONTRACT WORKHOURS AND SAFETY STANDARDS ACT REQUIREMENTS

A8.1 SOURCE

2 CFR § 200, Appendix II(E)


CONTRACT WORKHOURS AND SAFETY STANDARDS ACT REQUIREMENTS

1. Overtime Requirements.

No contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, in any workweek in which he or she is employed on such work to work in excess of forty hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek.

2. Violation; Liability for Unpaid Wages; Liquidated Damages.

In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (1) of this clause, the contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefor shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or a territory, to such District or to such territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (1) of this clause, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (1) of this clause.

3. Withholding for Unpaid Wages and Liquidated Damages.

The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) or the Owner shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other Federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same prime contractor, such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph 2 of this clause.

4. Subcontractors.

The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraphs (1) through (4) and also a clause requiring the subcontractor to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in paragraphs (1) through (4) of this clause.



A9 COPELAND “ANTI -KICKBACK” ACT

A9.1 SOURCE

2 CFR § 200, Appendix II(D)

29 CFR Parts 3 & 5


COPELAND “ANTI-KICKBACK” ACT

Contractor must comply with the requirements of the Copeland “Anti-Kickback” Act (18 U.S.C. 874 and 40 U.S.C. 3145), as supplemented by Department of Labor regulation 29 CFR part 3. Contractor and subcontractors are prohibited from inducing, by any means, any person employed on the project to give up any part of the compensation to which the employee is entitled. The Contractor and each Subcontractor must submit to the Owner, a weekly statement on the wages paid to each employee performing on covered work during the prior week. Owner must report any violations of the Act to the Federal Aviation Administration.



A10 DAVIS-BACON REQUIREMENTS

A10.1 SOURCE

2 CFR § 200, Appendix II(D)

29 CFR Part 5


DAVIS-BACON REQUIREMENTS

1. Minimum Wages

(i) All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the work will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR Part 3)), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalent thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor and such laborers and mechanics.

Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under section 1(b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of paragraph (1)(iv) of this section; also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in 29 CFR Part 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein: Provided, that the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional classification and wage rates conformed under (1)(ii) of this section) and the Davis-Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can easily be seen by the workers.

(ii)(A) The contracting officer shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics, including helpers, which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The contracting officer shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met:

(1) The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and

(2) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and

(3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination.

(B) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if



known), or their representatives, and the contracting officer agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by the contracting officer to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, D.C. 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary.

(C) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and the contracting officer do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), the contracting officer shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the contracting officer, to the Administrator for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary.

(D) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to subparagraphs (1)(ii) (B) or (C) of this paragraph, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification.

(iii) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof.

(iv) If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program, Provided, That the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program.

2 Withholding.

The Federal Aviation Administration or the sponsor shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld from the contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other Federally-assisted contract subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime contractor, so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working on the site of work, all or part of the wages required by the contract, the Federal Aviation Administration may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased.

3. Payrolls and basic records.



(i) Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the contractor during the course of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work. Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual costs incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs.

(ii)(A) The contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to the Federal Aviation Administration if the agency is a party to the contract, but if the agency is not such a party, the contractor will submit the payrolls to the applicant, sponsor, or owner, as the case may be, for transmission to the Federal Aviation Administration. The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(3)(i), except that full social security numbers and home addresses shall not be included on weekly transmittals. Instead the payrolls shall only need to include an individually identifying number for each employee (e.g. , the last four digits of the employee's social security number). The required weekly payroll information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH–347 is available for this purpose from the Wage and Hour Division Web site at http://www.dol.gov/esa/whd/forms/wh347instr.htm or its successor site. The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. Contractors and subcontractors shall maintain the full social security number and current address of each covered worker, and shall provide them upon request to the Federal Aviation Administration if the agency is a party to the contract, but if the agency is not such a party, the contractor will submit them to the applicant, sponsor, or owner, as the case may be, for transmission to the Federal Aviation Administration, the contractor, or the Wage and Hour Division of the Department of Labor for purposes of an investigation or audit of compliance with prevailing wage requirements. It is not a violation of this section for a prime contractor to require a subcontractor to provide addresses and social security numbers to the prime contractor for its own records, without weekly submission to the sponsoring government agency (or the applicant, sponsor, or owner).

(B) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a "Statement of Compliance," signed by the contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following:

(1) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be provided under 29 CFR § 5.5(a)(3)(ii), the appropriate information is being maintained under 29 CFR § 5.5 (a)(3)(i) and that such information is correct and complete;

(2) That each laborer and mechanic (including each helper, apprentice and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without



rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in Regulations 29 CFR Part 3;

(3) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract.

(C) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH-347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the "Statement of Compliance" required by paragraph (3)(ii)(B) of this section.

(D) The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under Section 1001 of Title 18 and Section 231 of Title 31 of the United States Code.

(iii) The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph (3)(i) of this section available for inspection, copying or transcription by authorized representatives of the sponsor, the Federal Aviation Administration or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, the Federal agency may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12.

4. Apprentices and Trainees.

(i) Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the contractor's or subcontractor's registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator determines that



a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination. In the event the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved.

(ii) Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate that is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved.

(iii) Equal Employment Opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR Part 30.

5. Compliance with Copeland Act Requirements.

The contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR Part 3, which are incorporated by reference in this contract.

6. Subcontracts.

The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses contained in 29 CFR Part 5.5(a)(1) through (10) and such other clauses as the Federal Aviation Administration may by appropriate instructions require, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract clauses in 29 CFR Part 5.5.

7. Contract Termination: Debarment.

A breach of the contract clauses in paragraph 1 through 10 of this section may be grounds for termination of the contract, and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12.

8. Compliance With Davis-Bacon and Related Act Requirements.



All rulings and interpretations of the Davis-Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 CFR Parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this contract.

9. Disputes Concerning Labor Standards.

Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this contract shall not be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR Parts 5, 6 and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and the contracting agency, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives.

10. Certification of Eligibility.

(i) By entering into this contract, the contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the contractor's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1).

(ii) No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible for award of a Government contract by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1).

(iii) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001.



General Decision Number: NC170025 01/06/2017 NC25 Superseded General Decision Number: NC20160025 State: North Carolina Construction Type: Building County: Cumberland County in North Carolina. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of $10.20 for calendar year 2017 applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.20 per hour (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year 2017. The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/06/2017 * CARP0312-001 06/01/2016 Rates Fringes CARPENTER, Excludes Drywall Hanging, and Form Work .......... $ 22.85 8.70

IRON0848-005 12/01/2015 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL .................................................... $ 24.00 12.50

PLUM0421-001 07/01/2013 Rates Fringes PLUMBER/PIPEFITTER ................................................................ $ 24.85 9.65

SUNC2011-006 08/24/2011 Rates Fringes BRICKLAYER ................................................................................ $ 19.00 0.00 CARPENTER (Drywall Hanging Only) ........................................... $ 13.83 0.00 CARPENTER (Form Work Only) ................................................... $ 13.38 1.80 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER ................................... $ 15.80 0.00 ELECTRICIAN ............................................................................... $ 20.64 6.68 HVAC MECHANIC (HVAC Duct Installation Only) ........................ $ 17.37 1.82 LABORER: Common or General .................................................. $ 10.54 0.52 LABORER: Landscape & Irrigation ............................................... $ 9.13 0.28 LABORER: Pipelayer .................................................................... $ 13.35 2.80 LABORER: Mason Tender-Brick/Cement/Concrete ...................... $ 12.00 0.00 OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe ................................. $ 18.47 2.41 OPERATOR: Bulldozer ................................................................. $ 16.00 1.87 OPERATOR: Crane ...................................................................... $ 19.77 4.48 OPERATOR: Forklift ..................................................................... $ 13.86 0.00 OPERATOR: Grader/Blade........................................................... $ 15.72 1.49 OPERATOR: Loader ..................................................................... $ 16.17 0.25 PAINTER: Brush, Roller and Spray .............................................. $ 12.35 0.00 ROOFER ........................................................................................ $ 11.75 1.06 SHEET METAL WORKER, Excludes HVAC Duct Installation ...... $ 15.81 1.40



TRUCK DRIVER ............................................................................ $ 13.38 1.48

WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental.

Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)).

The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than "SU" or "UAVG" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the "SU" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that



identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based.

WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS

1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be:

an existing published wage determination a survey underlying a wage determination a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling

On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed.

With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to:

Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210

2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can

request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to:

Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210

The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue.

3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the

Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to:

Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210

4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final.

END OF GENERAL DECISION



A11 DEBARMENT AND SUSPENSION

A11.1 SOURCE

2 CFR part 180 (Subpart C)

2 CFR part 1200

DOT Order 4200.5


A11 .2 .1 B idder or Of feror Cer t i f ica t ion

CERTIFICATION OF OFFERER/BIDDER REGARDING DEBARMENT

By submitting a bid/proposal under this solicitation, the bidder or offeror certifies that neither it nor its principals are presently debarred or suspended by any Federal department or agency from participation in this transaction.

A11 .2 .2 Lower T ier Contract Cer t i f ica t ion

CERTIFICATION OF LOWER TIER CONTRACTORS REGARDING DEBARMENT

The successful bidder, by administering each lower tier subcontract that exceeds $25,000 as a “covered transaction”, must verify each lower tier participant of a “covered transaction” under the project is not presently debarred or otherwise disqualified from participation in this federally assisted project. The successful bidder will accomplish this by:

1. Checking the System for Award Management at website: http://www.sam.gov 2. Collecting a certification statement similar to the Certificate Regarding Debarment and

Suspension (Bidder or Offeror), above. 3. Inserting a clause or condition in the covered transaction with the lower tier contract

If the FAA later determines that a lower tier participant failed to disclose to a higher tier participant that it was excluded or disqualified at the time it entered the covered transaction, the FAA may pursue any available remedies, including suspension and debarment of the non-compliant participant.



A12 D ISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE

A12.1 SOURCE

49 CFR part 26

A12.2 CONTRACT PROVISIONS

A12 .2 .1 So l ic i ta t ion Language (Pro ject Goal )

The Owner’s award of this contract is conditioned upon Bidder or Offeror satisfying the good faith effort requirements of 49 CFR §26.53.

As a condition of bid responsiveness, the Bidder or Offeror must submit the following information with their proposal on the forms provided herein:

(1) The names and addresses of Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) firms that will participate in the contract;

(2) A description of the work that each DBE firm will perform; (3) The dollar amount of the participation of each DBE firm listed under (1) (4) Written statement from Bidder or Offeror that attests their commitment to use the

DBE firm(s) listed under (1) to meet the Owner’s project goal; (5) If Bidder or Offeror cannot meet the advertised project DBE goal; evidence of good

faith efforts undertaken by the Bidder or Offeror as described in appendix A to 49 CFR Part 26.

The successful Bidder or Offeror must provide written confirmation of participation from each of the DBE firms the Bidder or Offeror lists in their commitment. This Bidder or Offeror must submit the DBE’s written confirmation of participation within 5 days of the bid opening.

A12 .2 .2 Contract C lause

DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISES

Contract Assurance (§ 26.13) - The contractor or subcontractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance of this contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in the award and administration of DOT assisted contracts. Failure by the contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this contract, which may result in the termination of this contract or such other remedy, as the recipient deems appropriate.

Prompt Payment (§26.29) - The prime contractor agrees to pay each subcontractor under this prime contract for satisfactory performance of its contract no later than 30 days from the receipt of each payment the prime contractor receives from the City of Fayetteville. The prime contractor agrees further to return retainage payments to each subcontractor within 30 days after the subcontractor's work is satisfactorily completed. Any delay or postponement of payment from the above referenced time frame may occur only for good cause following written approval of the City of Fayetteville. This clause applies to both DBE and non-DBE subcontractors.



A12 .2 .3 RACE/GENDER NEUTRAL LANGUAGE

The requirements of 49 CFR part 26 apply to this contract. It is the policy of the City of Fayetteville to practice nondiscrimination based on race, color, sex or national origin in the award or performance of this contract. The Owner encourages participation by all firms qualifying under this solicitation regardless of business size or ownership.



A13 D ISTRACTED DRIVING

A13.1 SOURCE


DOT Order 3902.10


TEXTING WHEN DRIVING

In accordance with Executive Order 13513, "Federal Leadership on Reducing Text Messaging While Driving" (10/1/2009) and DOT Order 3902.10 “Text Messaging While Driving” (12/30/2009), the FAA encourages recipients of Federal grant funds to adopt and enforce safety policies that decrease crashes by distracted drivers, including policies to ban text messaging while driving when performing work related to a grant or sub-grant.

In support of this initiative, the Owner encourages the Contractor to promote policies and initiatives for its employees and other work personnel that decrease crashes by distracted drivers, including policies that ban text messaging while driving motor vehicles while performing work activities associated with the project. The Contractor must include the substance of this clause in all sub-tier contracts exceeding $3,500 and involve driving a motor vehicle in performance of work activities associated with the project.



A14 ENERGY CONSERVATION REQUIREMENTS

A14.1 SOURCE

2 CFR § 200, Appendix II(H)


ENERGY CONSERVATION REQUIREMENTS

Contractor and Subcontractor agree to comply with mandatory standards and policies relating to energy efficiency as contained in the state energy conservation plan issued in compliance with the Energy Policy and Conservation Act (42 U.S.C. 6201et seq).



A15 EQUAL EMPLOYEMENT OPPORTUNITY (E .E .O. )

A15.1 SOURCE

2 CFR 200, Appendix II(C)

41 CFR § 60-1.4

41 CFR § 60-4.3


A15.2 MANDATORY CONTRACT CLAUSE

A15 .2 .1 E .E .O. Contract C lause

EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE

During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows:

(1) The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. The contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, color, religion, sex, sexual orientation, gender identify or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause.

(2) The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive considerations for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin.

(3) The contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which he has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice to be provided advising the said labor union or workers' representatives of the contractor's commitments under this section, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment.

(4) The contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and of the rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor.

(5) The contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and by rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit access to his books, records, and accounts by the administering agency and the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations, and orders.

(6) In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of this contract or with any of the said rules, regulations, or orders, this contract may be canceled, terminated, or suspended in whole or in part and the contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government contracts or federally assisted construction contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and such other sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked as provided in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, or by rule, regulation, or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise



provided by law.

(7) The contractor will include the portion of the sentence immediately preceding paragraph (1) and the provisions of paragraphs (1) through (7) in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by rules, regulations, or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to section 204 of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The contractor will take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as the administering agency may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions, including sanctions for noncompliance: Provided, however, That in the event a contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction by the administering agency the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States.

A15 .2 .2 EEO Speci f ica t ion

STANDARD FEDERAL EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS

1. As used in these specifications:

a. "Covered area" means the geographical area described in the solicitation from which this contract resulted;

b. "Director" means Director, Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs (OFCCP), U.S. Department of Labor, or any person to whom the Director delegates authority;

c. "Employer identification number" means the Federal social security number used on the Employer's Quarterly Federal Tax Return, U.S. Treasury Department Form 941;

d. "Minority" includes:

(1) Black (all) persons having origins in any of the Black African racial groups not of Hispanic origin);

(2) Hispanic (all persons of Mexican, Puerto Rican, Cuban, Central or South American, or other Spanish culture or origin regardless of race);

(3) Asian and Pacific Islander (all persons having origins in any of the original peoples of the Far East, Southeast Asia, the Indian Subcontinent, or the Pacific Islands); and

(4) American Indian or Alaskan native (all persons having origins in any of the original peoples of North America and maintaining identifiable tribal affiliations through membership and participation or community identification).

2. Whenever the contractor, or any subcontractor at any tier, subcontracts a portion of the work involving any construction trade, it shall physically include in each subcontract in excess of $10,000 the provisions of these specifications and the Notice which contains the applicable goals for minority and female participation and which is set forth in the solicitations from which this contract resulted.

3. If the contractor is participating (pursuant to 41 CFR 60-4.5) in a Hometown Plan approved by the U.S. Department of Labor in the covered area either individually or through an association, its affirmative action obligations on all work in the Plan area (including goals and timetables) shall be in accordance with that Plan for those trades which have unions participating in the Plan. Contractors shall be able to demonstrate their participation in and compliance with the provisions of any such Hometown Plan. Each contractor or subcontractor participating in an approved plan is individually required to comply with its obligations under the EEO clause and



to make a good faith effort to achieve each goal under the Plan in each trade in which it has employees. The overall good faith performance by other contractors or subcontractors toward a goal in an approved Plan does not excuse any covered contractor's or subcontractor's failure to take good faith efforts to achieve the Plan goals and timetables.

4. The contractor shall implement the specific affirmative action standards provided in paragraphs 7a through 7p of these specifications. The goals set forth in the solicitation from which this contract resulted are expressed as percentages of the total hours of employment and training of minority and female utilization the contractor should reasonably be able to achieve in each construction trade in which it has employees in the covered area. Covered construction contractors performing construction work in a geographical area where they do not have a Federal or federally assisted construction contract shall apply the minority and female goals established for the geographical area where the work is being performed. Goals are published periodically in the Federal Register in notice form, and such notices may be obtained from any Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs office or from Federal procurement contracting officers. The contractor is expected to make substantially uniform progress in meeting its goals in each craft during the period specified.

5. Neither the provisions of any collective bargaining agreement nor the failure by a union with whom the contractor has a collective bargaining agreement to refer either minorities or women shall excuse the contractor's obligations under these specifications, Executive Order 11246 or the regulations promulgated pursuant thereto.

6. In order for the non-working training hours of apprentices and trainees to be counted in meeting the goals, such apprentices and trainees shall be employed by the contractor during the training period and the contractor shall have made a commitment to employ the apprentices and trainees at the completion of their training, subject to the availability of employment opportunities. Trainees shall be trained pursuant to training programs approved by the U.S. Department of Labor.

7. The contractor shall take specific affirmative actions to ensure equal employment opportunity. The evaluation of the contractor's compliance with these specifications shall be based upon its effort to achieve maximum results from its actions. The contractor shall document these efforts fully and shall implement affirmative action steps at least as extensive as the following:

a. Ensure and maintain a working environment free of harassment, intimidation, and coercion at all sites, and in all facilities at which the contractor's employees are assigned to work. The contractor, where possible, will assign two or more women to each construction project. The contractor shall specifically ensure that all foremen, superintendents, and other onsite supervisory personnel are aware of and carry out the contractor's obligation to maintain such a working environment, with specific attention to minority or female individuals working at such sites or in such facilities.

b. Establish and maintain a current list of minority and female recruitment sources, provide written notification to minority and female recruitment sources and to community organizations when the contractor or its unions have employment opportunities available, and maintain a record of the organizations' responses.

c. Maintain a current file of the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each minority and female off-the-street applicant and minority or female referral from a union, a recruitment source, or community organization and of what action was taken with respect to each such individual. If such individual was sent to the union hiring hall for referral and was not referred back to the contractor by the union or, if referred, not employed by the contractor, this shall be documented in the file with the reason therefore along with whatever additional actions



the contractor may have taken.

d. Provide immediate written notification to the Director when the union or unions with which the contractor has a collective bargaining agreement has not referred to the contractor a minority person or female sent by the contractor, or when the contractor has other information that the union referral process has impeded the contractor's efforts to meet its obligations.

e. Develop on-the-job training opportunities and/or participate in training programs for the area which expressly include minorities and women, including upgrading programs and apprenticeship and trainee programs relevant to the contractor's employment needs, especially those programs funded or approved by the Department of Labor. The contractor shall provide notice of these programs to the sources compiled under 7b above.

f. Disseminate the contractor's EEO policy by providing notice of the policy to unions and training programs and requesting their cooperation in assisting the contractor in meeting its EEO obligations; by including it in any policy manual and collective bargaining agreement; by publicizing it in the company newspaper, annual report, etc.; by specific review of the policy with all management personnel and with all minority and female employees at least once a year; and by posting the company EEO policy on bulletin boards accessible to all employees at each location where construction work is performed.

g. Review, at least annually, the company's EEO policy and affirmative action obligations under these specifications with all employees having any responsibility for hiring, assignment, layoff, termination, or other employment decisions including specific review of these items with onsite supervisory personnel such a superintendents, general foremen, etc., prior to the initiation of construction work at any job site. A written record shall be made and maintained identifying the time and place of these meetings, persons attending, subject matter discussed, and disposition of the subject matter.

h. Disseminate the contractor's EEO policy externally by including it in any advertising in the news media, specifically including minority and female news media, and providing written notification to and discussing the contractor's EEO policy with other contractors and subcontractors with whom the contractor does or anticipates doing business.

i. Direct its recruitment efforts, both oral and written, to minority, female, and community organizations, to schools with minority and female students; and to minority and female recruitment and training organizations serving the contractor's recruitment area and employment needs. Not later than one month prior to the date for the acceptance of applications for apprenticeship or other training by any recruitment source, the contractor shall send written notification to organizations, such as the above, describing the openings, screening procedures, and tests to be used in the selection process.

j. Encourage present minority and female employees to recruit other minority persons and women and, where reasonable, provide after school, summer, and vacation employment to minority and female youth both on the site and in other areas of a contractor's workforce.

k. Validate all tests and other selection requirements where there is an obligation to do so under 41 CFR Part 60-3.

l. Conduct, at least annually, an inventory and evaluation at least of all minority and female personnel, for promotional opportunities and encourage these employees to seek or to prepare for, through appropriate training, etc., such opportunities.

m. Ensure that seniority practices, job classifications, work assignments, and other



personnel practices do not have a discriminatory effect by continually monitoring all personnel and employment related activities to ensure that the EEO policy and the contractor's obligations under these specifications are being carried out.

n. Ensure that all facilities and company activities are non-segregated except that separate or single user toilet and necessary changing facilities shall be provided to assure privacy between the sexes.

o. Document and maintain a record of all solicitations of offers for subcontracts from minority and female construction contractors and suppliers, including circulation of solicitations to minority and female contractor associations and other business associations.

p. Conduct a review, at least annually, of all supervisor's adherence to and performance under the contractor's EEO policies and affirmative action obligations.

8. Contractors are encouraged to participate in voluntary associations, which assist in fulfilling one or more of their affirmative action obligations (7a through 7p). The efforts of a contractor association, joint contractor union, contractor community, or other similar groups of which the contractor is a member and participant, may be asserted as fulfilling any one or more of its obligations under 7a through 7p of these specifications provided that the contractor actively participates in the group, makes every effort to assure that the group has a positive impact on the employment of minorities and women in the industry, ensures that the concrete benefits of the program are reflected in the contractor's minority and female workforce participation, makes a good faith effort to meet its individual goals and timetables, and can provide access to documentation which demonstrates the effectiveness of actions taken on behalf of the contractor. The obligation to comply, however, is the contractor's and failure of such a group to fulfill an obligation shall not be a defense for the contractor's noncompliance.

9. A single goal for minorities and a separate single goal for women have been established. The contractor, however, is required to provide equal employment opportunity and to take affirmative action for all minority groups, both male and female, and all women, both minority and non-minority. Consequently, if the particular group is employed in a substantially disparate manner (for example, even though the contractor has achieved its goals for women generally,) the contractor may be in violation of the Executive Order if a specific minority group of women is underutilized.

10. The contractor shall not use the goals and timetables or affirmative action standards to discriminate against any person because of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin.

11. The contractor shall not enter into any subcontract with any person or firm debarred from Government contracts pursuant to Executive Order 11246.

12. The contractor shall carry out such sanctions and penalties for violation of these specifications and of the Equal Opportunity Clause, including suspension, termination, and cancellation of existing subcontracts as may be imposed or ordered pursuant to Executive Order 11246, as amended, and its implementing regulations, by the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs. Any contractor who fails to carry out such sanctions and penalties shall be in violation of these specifications and Executive Order 11246, as amended.

13. The contractor, in fulfilling its obligations under these specifications, shall implement specific affirmative action steps, at least as extensive as those standards prescribed in paragraph 7 of these specifications, so as to achieve maximum results from its efforts to ensure equal employment opportunity. If the contractor fails to comply with the requirements of the Executive Order, the implementing regulations, or these specifications, the Director shall proceed in accordance with 41 CFR 60-4.8.



14. The contractor shall designate a responsible official to monitor all employment related activity to ensure that the company EEO policy is being carried out, to submit reports relating to the provisions hereof as may be required by the Government, and to keep records. Records shall at least include for each employee, the name, address, telephone number, construction trade, union affiliation if any, employee identification number when assigned, social security number, race, sex, status (e.g., mechanic, apprentice, trainee, helper, or laborer), dates of changes in status, hours worked per week in the indicated trade, rate of pay, and locations at which the work was performed. Records shall be maintained in an easily understandable and retrievable form; however, to the degree that existing records satisfy this requirement, contractors shall not be required to maintain separate records.

15. Nothing herein provided shall be construed as a limitation upon the application of other laws which establish different standards of compliance or upon the application of requirements for the hiring of local or other area residents (e.g., those under the Public Works Employment Act of 1977 and the Community Development Block Grant Program).



A16 FEDERAL FAIR LABOR STANDARDS ACT (FEDERAL MINIMUM WAGE)

A16.1 SOURCE

29 U.S.C. § 201, et seq


All contracts and subcontracts that result from this solicitation incorporate by reference the provisions of 29 CFR part 201, the Federal Fair Labor Standards Act (FLSA), with the same force and effect as if given in full text. The FLSA sets minimum wage, overtime pay, recordkeeping, and child labor standards for full and part time workers.

The contractor has full responsibility to monitor compliance to the referenced statute or regulation. The contractor must address any claims or disputes that arise from this requirement directly with the U.S. Department of Labor – Wage and Hour Division



A17 LOBBYING AND INFLUENCING FEDERAL EMPLOYEES

A17.1 SOURCE

31 U.S.C. § 1352 – Byrd Anti-Lobbying Amendment

2 CFR part 200, Appendix II(J)

49 CFR part 20, Appendix A


CERTIFICATION REGARDING LOBBYING

The bidder or offeror certifies by signing and submitting this bid or proposal, to the best of his or her knowledge and belief, that:

(1) No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid, by or on behalf of the Bidder or Offeror, to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of an agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with the awarding of any Federal contract, the making of any Federal grant, the making of any Federal loan, the entering into of any cooperative agreement, and the extension, continuation, renewal, amendment, or modification of any Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement.

(2) If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with this Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement, the undersigned shall complete and submit Standard Form-LLL, “Disclosure Form to Report Lobbying,” in accordance with its instructions.

(3) The undersigned shall require that the language of this certification be included in the award documents for all sub-awards at all tiers (including subcontracts, sub-grants, and contracts under grants, loans, and cooperative agreements) and that all sub-recipients shall certify and disclose accordingly.

This certification is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was made or entered into. Submission of this certification is a prerequisite for making or entering into this transaction imposed by section 1352, title 31, U.S. Code. Any person who fails to file the required certification shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000 and not more than $100,000 for each such failure.



A18 PROHIBIT ION of SEGREGATED FACIL IT IES

A18.1 SOURCE

41 CFR § 60


PROHIBITION of SEGREGATED FACILITIES

(a) The Contractor agrees that it does not and will not maintain or provide for its employees any segregated facilities at any of its establishments, and that it does not and will not permit its employees to perform their services at any location under its control where segregated facilities are maintained. The Contractor agrees that a breach of this clause is a violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in this contract.

(b) “Segregated facilities,” as used in this clause, means any waiting rooms, work areas, rest rooms and wash rooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees, that are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin because of written or oral policies or employee custom. The term does not include separate or single-user rest rooms or necessary dressing or sleeping areas provided to assure privacy between the sexes.

(c) The Contractor shall include this clause in every subcontract and purchase order that is subject to the Equal Opportunity clause of this contract.



A19 OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ACT OF 1970

A19.1 SOURCE

20 CFR part 1910


All contracts and subcontracts that result from this solicitation incorporate by reference the requirements of 29 CFR Part 1910 with the same force and effect as if given in full text. Contractor must provide a work environment that is free from recognized hazards that may cause death or serious physical harm to the employee. The Contractor retains full responsibility to monitor its compliance and their subcontractor’s compliance with the applicable requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (20 CFR Part 1910). Contractor must address any claims or disputes that pertain to a referenced requirement directly with the U.S. Department of Labor – Occupational Safety and Health Administration.



A20 PROCUREMENT OF RECOVERED MATERIALS

A20.1 SOURCE

2 CFR § 200.322

40 CFR part 247


Procurement of Recovered Materials

Contractor and subcontractor agree to comply with Section 6002 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act, as amended by the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, and the regulatory provisions of 40 CFR Part 247. In the performance of this contract and to the extent practicable, the Contractor and subcontractors are to use of products containing the highest percentage of recovered materials for items designated by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) under 40 CFR Part 247 whenever:

a) The contract requires procurement of $10,000 or more of a designated item during the fiscal year; or,

b) The contractor has procured $10,000 or more of a designated item using Federal funding during the previous fiscal year.

The list of EPA-designated items is available at www.epa.gov/epawaste/conserve/tools/cpg/products/.

Section 6002(c) establishes exceptions to the preference for recovery of EPA-designated products if the contractor can demonstrate the item is:

a) Not reasonably available within a timeframe providing for compliance with the contract performance schedule;

b) Fails to meet reasonable contract performance requirements; or

c) Is only available at an unreasonable price.



A21 R IGHT TO INVENTIONS

A21.1 SOURCE

2 CFR § 200, Appendix II(F)

37 CFR §401


RIGHTS TO INVENTIONS

Contracts or agreements that include the performance of experimental, developmental, or research work must provide for the rights of the Federal Government and the Owner in any resulting invention as established by 37 CFR part 401, Rights to Inventions Made by Non-profit Organizations and Small Business Firms under Government Grants, Contracts, and Cooperative Agreements. This contract incorporates by reference the patent and inventions rights as specified within in the 37 CFR §401.14. Contractor must include this requirement in all sub-tier contracts involving experimental, developmental or research work.



A22 SEISMIC SAFETY

A22.1 SOURCE

49 CFR part 41


A22 .2 .1 Construct ion Contracts

Seismic Safety

The contractor agrees to ensure that all work performed under this contract, including work performed by subcontractors, conforms to a building code standard that provides a level of seismic safety substantially equivalent to standards established by the National Earthquake Hazards Reduction Program (NEHRP). Local building codes that model their code after the current version of the International Building Code (IBC) meet the NEHRP equivalency level for seismic safety.



A23 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT

A23.1 SOURCE

2 CFR § 200 Appendix II(B)

FAA Advisory Circular 150/5370-10, Section 80-09


A23 .2 .1 Terminat ion for Convenience

Termination for Convenience (Construction & Equipment Contracts)

The Owner may terminate this contract in whole or in part at any time by providing written notice to the Contractor. Such action may be without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner. Upon receipt of a written notice of termination, except as explicitly directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall immediately proceed with the following obligations regardless of any delay in determining or adjusting amounts due under this clause:

1. Contractor must immediately discontinue work as specified in the written notice.

2. Terminate all subcontracts to the extent they relate to the work terminated under the notice.

3. Discontinue orders for materials and services except as directed by the written notice.

4. Deliver to the owner all fabricated and partially fabricated parts, completed and partially completed work, supplies, equipment and materials acquired prior to termination of the work and as directed in the written notice.

5. Complete performance of the work not terminated by the notice.

6. Take action as directed by the owner to protect and preserve property and work related to this contract that Owner will take possession.

Owner agrees to pay Contractor for:

a) completed and acceptable work executed in accordance with the contract documents prior to the effective date of termination;

b) documented expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing work and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the contract documents in connection with uncompleted work;

c) reasonable and substantiated claims, costs and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors and Suppliers; and

d) reasonable and substantiated expenses to the contractor directly attributable to Owner’s termination action

Owner will not pay Contractor for loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from the Owner’s termination action.

The rights and remedies this clause provides are in addition to any other rights and remedies provided by law or under this contract.

A23 .2 .2 Terminat ion for Defaul t

Termination for Default (Construction)

Section 80-09 of FAA Advisory Circular 150/5370-10 establishes conditions, rights and remedies associated with Owner termination of this contract due default of the Contractor.



Termination for Default (Equipment)

The Owner may, by written notice of default to the Contractor, terminate all or part of this Contract if the Contractor:

1. Fails to commence the Work under the Contract within the time specified in the Notice- to-Proceed;

2. Fails to make adequate progress as to endanger performance of this Contract in accordance with its terms;

3. Fails to make delivery of the equipment within the time specified in the Contract, including any Owner approved extensions;

4. Fails to comply with material provisions of the Contract;

5. Submits certifications made under the Contract and as part of their proposal that include false or fraudulent statements;

6. Becomes insolvent or declares bankruptcy;

If one or more of the stated events occur, the Owner will give notice in writing to the Contractor and Surety of its intent to terminate the contract for cause. At the Owner’s discretion, the notice may allow the Contractor and Surety an opportunity to cure the breach or default.

If within [10] days of the receipt of notice, the Contractor or Surety fails to remedy the breach or default to the satisfaction of the Owner, the Owner has authority to acquire equipment by other procurement action. The Contractor will be liable to the Owner for any excess costs the Owner incurs for acquiring such similar equipment.

Payment for completed equipment delivered to and accepted by the Owner shall be at the Contract price. The Owner may withhold from amounts otherwise due the Contractor for such completed equipment, such sum as the Owner determines to be necessary to protect the Owner against loss because of Contractor default.

Owner will not terminate the Contractor's right to proceed with the Work under this clause if the delay in completing the work arises from unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor. Examples of such acceptable causes include: acts of God, acts of the Owner, acts of another Contractor in the performance of a contract with the Owner, and severe weather events that substantially exceed normal conditions for the location.

If, after termination of the Contractor's right to proceed, the Owner determines that the Contractor was not in default, or that the delay was excusable, the rights and obligations of the parties will be the same as if the Owner issued the termination for the convenience the Owner.

The rights and remedies of the Owner in this clause are in addition to any other rights and remedies provided by law or under this contract.



A24 TRADE RESTRICTION CERTIF ICATION

A24.1 SOURCE

49 USC § 50104

49 CFR part 30


TRADE RESTRICTION CERTIFICATION

By submission of an offer, the Offeror certifies that with respect to this solicitation and any resultant contract, the Offeror -

a. is not owned or controlled by one or more citizens of a foreign country included in the list of countries that discriminate against U.S. firms as published by the Office of the United States Trade Representative (U.S.T.R.);

b. has not knowingly entered into any contract or subcontract for this project with a person that is a citizen or national of a foreign country included on the list of countries that discriminate against U.S. firms as published by the U.S.T.R; and

c. has not entered into any subcontract for any product to be used on the Federal on the project that is produced in a foreign country included on the list of countries that discriminate against U.S. firms published by the U.S.T.R.

This certification concerns a matter within the jurisdiction of an agency of the United States of America and the making of a false, fictitious, or fraudulent certification may render the maker subject to prosecution under Title 18, United States Code, Section 1001.

The Offeror/Contractor must provide immediate written notice to the Owner if the Offeror/Contractor learns that its certification or that of a subcontractor was erroneous when submitted or has become erroneous by reason of changed circumstances. The Contractor must require subcontractors provide immediate written notice to the Contractor if at any time it learns that its certification was erroneous by reason of changed circumstances.

Unless the restrictions of this clause are waived by the Secretary of Transportation in accordance with 49 CFR 30.17, no contract shall be awarded to an Offeror or subcontractor:

(1) who is owned or controlled by one or more citizens or nationals of a foreign country included on the list of countries that discriminate against U.S. firms published by the U.S.T.R. or

(2) whose subcontractors are owned or controlled by one or more citizens or nationals of a foreign country on such U.S.T.R. list or

(3) who incorporates in the public works project any product of a foreign country on such U.S.T.R. list;

Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require establishment of a system of records in order to render, in good faith, the certification required by this provision. The knowledge and information of a contractor is not required to exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the ordinary course of business dealings.

The Offeror agrees that, if awarded a contract resulting from this solicitation, it will incorporate this provision for certification without modification in in all lower tier subcontracts. The contractor may rely on the certification of a prospective subcontractor that it is not a firm from a foreign country included on the list of countries that discriminate against U.S. firms as published by



U.S.T.R, unless the Offeror has knowledge that the certification is erroneous.

This certification is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when making an award. If it is later determined that the Contractor or subcontractor knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, the Federal Aviation Administration may direct through the Owner cancellation of the contract or subcontract for default at no cost to the Owner or the FAA.



A25 VETERAN’S PREFERENCE

A25.1 SOURCE

49 USC § 47112(c)


VETERAN’S PREFERENCE

In the employment of labor (excluding executive, administrative, and supervisory positions), the contractor and all sub-tier contractors must give preference to covered veterans as defined within Title 49 United States Code Section 47112. Covered veterans include Vietnam-era veterans, Persian Gulf veterans, Afghanistan-Iraq war veterans, disabled veterans, and small business concerns (as defined by 15 U.S.C. 632) owned and controlled by disabled veterans. This preference only applies when there are covered veterans readily available and qualified to perform the work to which the employment relates.


Construction Contract CC-1 of 3

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

THIS CONTRACT, made this day of , 2017

by, hereinafter called Contractor, and the City of

Fayetteville, North Carolina, hereinafter called City.

WITNESSETH

THAT WHEREAS, a Contract for Fayetteville Regional Airport – Airline Terminal Improvements – Part 1 has recently been awarded to Contractor by City at

and for $ ____________, a sum equal to the aggregate cost of the work to be

done and for labor, materials, equipment, apparatus, and supplies furnished at the prices

and rates respectively named therefore in the Proposal attached herewith;

AND WHEREAS, it was provided in said Award that a formal contract would be

executed by and between Contractor and City, evidencing the terms of said Award, and

agreement on a date to be specified in a written order of City and would complete all work

as outlined under SPECIAL PROVISIONS and STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS and

would complete all work as required within the schedule as shown in the SPECIAL

PROVISIONS.

NOW, THEREFORE, Contractor doth hereby covenant and agree with City that it

will well and faithfully perform and execute such work and furnish such labor, materials,

equipment, apparatus and supplies, in accordance with each and every one of the

conditions, covenants, stipulations, terms, and provisions contained in said Specifications

and Provisions and in accordance with the Plans, at and for a sum equal to the aggregate

cost of the work done and labor, materials, equipment, apparatus and supplies furnished at

the prices and rates respectively named therefore in the proposal attached thereto, and will

well and faithfully comply with and perform each and every obligation imposed upon it by

said Plans and Specifications and the terms of said Award.

Contractor shall promptly make payments to all persons supplying materials in the

prosecution of the work and to all laborers and others employed thereon.

Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to property of the City of

Fayetteville, North Carolina, that may be consequent upon the normal procedure of its work

or that may be caused by or result from the negligence of Contractor, its employees or

agents, during the progress of or connected with the prosecution of the work, whether

within the limits of the work or elsewhere. Contractor must restore all property so injured

to a condition as good as it was when Contractor entered upon the work.

Contractor shall furthermore be responsible for and required to make good at its

expense any and all damages of whatever nature to persons or property arising during the

period of the Contract, caused by carelessness, neglect, or want of due precaution on the

part of Contractor, its agents, employees or workmen. Contractor shall also indemnify and



save harmless the City of Fayetteville, North Carolina, and the officers and agents thereof

from all claims, suits, and proceedings of every name and description which may be

brought against the City of Fayetteville, North Carolina, or the officers and agents thereof,

for or on account of any injuries or damages to persons or property received or sustained

by any person or persons, firm or corporation, or by or in consequence of any materials

used in said work or by or on account of any improper material or workmanship in its

construction, or by or on account of any accident, or of any other act or omission of

Contractor, its agents, employees, servants or workmen.

It is agreed and understood that the Invitation for Bids, Proposal, Standard

Specifications, Special Provisions, and the enumerated addenda and drawings are parts and

parcels of this Contract to the same extent as if incorporated herein in full.

It is further mutually agreed that if at any time after the execution of this agreement

and the surety bonds hereto attached for its faithful performance, City shall deem the surety

or sureties upon such bonds to be unsatisfactory, or if, for any reason, such bonds cease to

be adequate to cover performance and payment of the work, Contractor shall, at its expense,

within five days after the receipt of notice from the City so to do, furnish an additional

bond or bonds in such form and amount, and with such surety or sureties as shall be

satisfactory to City. In such event, no further payment to Contractor shall be deemed to be

due under this agreement until such new or additional security for the faithful performance

of the work shall be furnished in manner and form satisfactory to City.

It is further agreed that the Contractor will not discriminate against any employee

or applicant because of race, color, creed, sex, or religion.

And City doth hereby covenant and agree with Contractor that it will pay to

Contractor, when due payable under the terms of said Specifications and said Award, the

above mentioned sum, and that it will well and faithfully comply with and perform each

and every obligation imposed upon it by said Specifications and the terms of said Award.

It is also agreed that if the City shall determine that it is in the City's best interest,

the City shall notify the Contractor to terminate the work within seven (7) days. The

Contractor shall be entitled to compensation for all work properly executed and any

expenses incurred in terminating the contract and vacating the construction site. No claim

shall be made by the Contractor for any change order or termination, by reason of any

variation between the approximate quantities and the quantity of work as done, or for lost

profits.

Contractor shall furnish with each pay application on City provided forms,

beginning not later than the second application for payment, an affidavit certifying the total

cost of materials and North Carolina Sales Tax paid on such materials which are included

in the application for payment.



Whenever used herein, the singular shall include the plural, the plural the singular

and the use of any gender shall be applicable to all genders as the context may require.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, said Contractor has hereunto set its hand and seal (or) has

caused these presents to be signed in its corporate name by its corporate seal to be hereto

affixed and attested by its Secretary and the City of Fayetteville, North Carolina, has caused

these presents to be signed in its corporate name by its authorized representative and seal

to be hereto affixed and duly attested by its City Clerk, by authority of the City Council

duly given, all as of the day and year first above written.

(Corporate Seal) (CONTRACTOR)

(SEAL)

BY:

ATTEST: TITLE:

Secretary

CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE, NC

ATTEST: By:

This instrument has been preaudited in the manner required by the Local Government

Budget and Fiscal Control Act.

FINANCE OFFICER

This is to certify that I have examined the attached contract documents, that after such

examination I am of the opinion that such documents conform to the laws of the State of

North Carolina, that the execution of the contract and the contract bonds by

(CONTRACTOR) are in due and proper form and that the foregoing agreements constitute

valid and binding obligations on such parties.

_______________________________________________

ATTORNEY FOR THE CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE, NC




Bonds B-1 of 4

BONDS

PERFORMANCE BOND

Date of Contract:_______________________

`

Date of Execution:______________________

Name/Address of Principal: _______________________________________________

(Contractor) _______________________________________________

Name/Address of Surety: _______________________________________________

_______________________________________________

Name/Address of Contracting Body _________________________________________

_________________________________________

Amount of Bond (Printed): _______________________________________________

Project: Fayetteville Regional Airport – Airline Terminal Improvements – Part 1

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the PRINCIPAL and

SURETY above named, are held and firmly bound unto the above named Contracting

Body, hereinafter called the Contracting Body, in the penal sum of the amount stated

above for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our

heirs, executors, administrators, and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these

presents.

THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that whereas the Principal

entered into a certain contract with the Contracting Body, identified as shown above and

hereto attached:

NOW THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well and truly perform and fulfill all

the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions, and agreements of said contract during the

original term of said contract and any extensions thereof that may be granted by the

Contracting Body, with or without notice to the Surety, and during the life of any

guaranty required under the contract, and shall also well and truly perform and fulfill all

the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions, and agreements of any and all duly

authorized modifications of said contract that may hereafter be made, notice of which

modifications to the Surety being hereby waived, then, this obligation to be void;

otherwise to remain in full force and virtue.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above-bounden parties have executed this

instrument under their several seals on the date indicated above, the name and corporate




Bonds B-2 of 4

seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed by its

undersigned representative, pursuant to authority of its governing body.

Executed in_________________________________________________counterparts.

Witness: _________________________________

(Contractor: Trade or Corporate Name)

_____________________________ By:______________________________

(Proprietorship or Partnership)

Attest: (Corporation) Title:____________________________

(Owner, Partner, or Corp. Pres.

or Vice Pres. Only)

By:____________________________

Title:____________________________

(Corp Sec or Ass't Sec Only)

(Corporate Seal)

___________________________

(Surety Company)

Witness: By:________________________

________________________________ Title:_______________________

(Attorney in Fact)

Countersigned:

_________________________________ (Surety Corporate Seal)

_________________________________

(N.C. Licensed Resident Agent)

_________________________________

_________________________________

_________________________________

(Name and Address - Surety Agency)

_________________________________

_________________________________

_________________________________

(Surety Company Name and NC Regional

or Branch Office Address)




Bonds B-3 of 4

PAYMENT BOND

Date of Contract:_______________________

Date of Execution:______________________

Name/Address of Principal: _______________________________________________

(Contractor) _______________________________________________

Name/Address of Surety: _______________________________________________

_______________________________________________

Name/Address of Contracting Body:__________________________________________

_________________________________________

Amount of Bond (Printed): _______________________________________________

Project: Fayetteville Regional Airport – Airline Terminal Improvements – Part 1

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the PRINCIPAL and

SURETY above named, are held and firmly bound unto the above named Contracting

Body, hereinafter called the Contracting Body, in the penal sum of the amount stated

above for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our

heirs, executors, administrators, and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these

presents.

THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that whereas the Principal

entered into a certain contract with the Contracting Body, identified as shown above and

hereto attached:

NOW THEREFORE, if the Principal shall promptly make payment to all persons

supplying labor and material in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract,

and any and all duly authorized modifications of said contract that may hereafter be made,

notice of which modifications to the Surety being hereby waived, then, this obligation to

be void; otherwise to remain in full force and virtue.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above-bounden parties have executed this

instrument under their several seals on the date indicated above, the name and corporate

seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed by its

undersigned representative, pursuant to authority of its governing body.




Bonds B-4 of 4

Executed in__________________________________________________counterparts.

Witness: __________________________________

(Contractor: Trade or Corporate Name)

_____________________________ By:_______________________________

(Proprietorship or Partnership)

Attest: (Corporation) Title:______________________________

(Owner, Partner, or Corp. Pres.

or Vice Pres. Only)

By:____________________________

Title:____________________________

(Corp Sec or Ass't Sec Only)

(Corporate Seal)

____________________________

(Surety Company)

Witness: By:_________________________

________________________________ Title:_______________________

(Attorney in Fact)

Countersigned:

_________________________________ (Surety Corporate Seal)

_________________________________

(N.C. Licensed Resident Agent)

_________________________________

_________________________________

_________________________________

(Name and Address - Surety Agency)

_________________________________

_________________________________

_________________________________

(Surety Company Name and NC Regional

or Branch Office Address)



Required Forms RF-1 of 7

REQUIRED FORMS (POST AWARD)

Change Order See Supplemental Gen. Provisions para. 15 Standard Form for Payment Requests See Supplemental Gen. Provisions para. 18 Sales & Use Tax Certificate See Supplemental Gen. Provisions para. 22 Claims for Extra Cost/Time See Supplemental Gen. Provisions para. 23 Release of Claims See Supplemental Gen. Provisions para. 28




CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE

CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER

Project: Fayetteville Regional Airport – Airline Terminal

Improvements – Part 1

Public Works Commission Contractor:

Purchasing Department Address:

955 Old Wilmington Road

Fayetteville, NC 28301

(910) 223-4333/4332

(910) 483-1429 (Fax)

Effective Date: Previous Total:

Contract No.: Total Change:

Change Order No.: Revised Total:

Account No.: Time Change:

This change order is being written to:

Except as provided herein, all terms and conditions of the contract referenced above, as

heretofore

changed remains unchanged and in full force and effect.

Contractor Acceptance: City Acceptance:

I certify that my bonding company will be notified

forth-with that my contract has been changed by

the amount of this change order, and that a copy

of the approved change order will be mailed upon

receipt by me to my surety.

This instrument has been pre-audited in

the manner required by the Local

Government and Budget Fiscal Control

Act.

_________________________________

Finance Officer (Signature/Date)

By:______________________________________

(Signature/Date)

__________________________________

City Engineer (Signature/Date)

_______________________________________

Type or Print Name

__________________________________

Contracting Officer (Signature/Date)

_______________________________________




Title

STANDARD FORM FOR PAYMENT REQUESTS

Company Name: Project Name: Company Address: Project Number: Company Phone: Pay Request # PART A

SCHEDULED UNIT SCHEDULED PREVIOUS CURRENT TOTAL

ITEM# DESCRIPTION QUANTITY PRICE VALUE QTY QTY VALUE

1.

2.

3.

4.

SUB-TOTAL SUB-TOTAL

PART B

SCHEDULED UNIT SCHEDULED PREVIOUS CURRENT TOTAL

ITEM# DESCRIPTION QUANTITY PRICE VALUE QTY QTY VALUE

1.

2.

3.

4.

SUB-TOTAL SUB-TOTAL

TOTAL EARNINGS $ CONTRACT SUMMARY Original Contract Value $ Change Orders Approved $ Current Contract Value $ Total Earnings $ Less Retainage $ Less Previous Payments $ Due this estimate $ Balance to finish (+ retainage) $




PROJECT TITLE Fayetteville Regional Airport – Airline Terminal Improvements App #__________

SALES/USE TAX CERTIFICATE

(Use as many sheets as needed/sign affidavit of last sheet per pay estimate)

Analysis of consumed material Manufactured or Purchased by you. Sales and/or Use Tax Regulation Number 41 requires that the City of Fayetteville secure from each contractor certified statements setting forth the cost of the materials and supplies manufactured or purchased by you and consumed in construction. This form is provided for you to list the materials consumed in construction. Please complete this form by inserting the information required below. Vendor Date Invoice Amount Sales Tax Invoice County Name Purchased Number Less Tax 4.75% State/2.25% Local Total Paid

_____________ ___________ _____________ ______________ __________/_________ ___________ ____________ _____________ ___________ _____________ ______________ __________/_________ ____________ ___________ _____________ ___________ _____________ ______________ __________/_________ ____________ ___________ _____________ ___________ _____________ ______________ __________/_________ ____________ ___________ _____________ ___________ _____________ ______________ __________/_________ ____________ ___________ _____________ ___________ _____________ ______________ __________/_________ ____________ ___________ _____________ ___________ _____________ ______________ __________/_________ ____________ ___________ $_______________$_________ $_________ $____________

AFFIDAVIT This is to certify that sales/use tax was or will be paid as stated above on materials and supplies purchased or manufactured by the City of Fayetteville, North Carolina, for the above mentioned project during the period and billed on this payment application #_______________ _____________________________________________________ __________________________ (Contractor) (Authorized Signature/Date) _____________________________________________________ ___________________________ (Address) (Telephone Number)

_____________________________________________________ ___________________________

(City, State, Zip) (Fax Number)

Date:__________________________________ Page _________ of _________




CLAIM FOR EXTRA COST/TIME

PROJECT TITLE: Fayetteville Regional Airport – Airline

Terminal Improvements

CONTRACTOR: ______________________________________

FAX: ______________________________________

Purchasing Department 955 Old Wilmington Road

Fayetteville, NC 28301 Fax (910) 223-4332

CLAIM is made for _______________ additional dollars/_________ additional days for the following reason: By:_____________________________________ Title:__________________________________ Phone:__________________________________ Date:__________________________________

ACCEPTED/DENIED

By:_____________________________________ Title:_________________________________ Phone:__________________________________ Date:_________________________________

If Denied, Explanation or Counter proposal:

Counter Proposal Accepted/Denied

City/Contractor

By____________________________________ Title:__________________________________ Phone:_________________________________ Date___________________________________




RELEASE OF CLAIMS

Contract/Purchase Order Number: Title: Fayetteville Regional Airport – Airline Terminal

Improvements Project Number: To the best of my knowledge and belief, I certify that all items, units, quantities, prices of work and materials and NC Sales taxes shown on the attached final invoice are correct; that all work has been performed and materials supplied in accordance with the terms and conditions of the above stated contract, including any and all change orders, between the City of Fayetteville, and (Contractor) ______________________________________________. I further certify that all subcontracting obligations have been met. Below is a true and correct statement of the contract amount up to and including the last day of the period covered by the attached final invoice, and that no part of the "total amount due" has been received. (a) Total Contract Cost (Including Change Orders) $________________ (b) Total Amount Previously Paid $________________ (c) Total Amount Due (Including retainage) $________________ In consideration of the above stated sum to be paid by the City of Fayetteville for the noted contract, the undersigned contractor does release and discharge the City of Fayetteville, its officers, agents and employees, of and from all liabilities, obligations and claims whatsoever in law and equity arising out of or by virtue of said contract, except specified claims in stated amounts, or in estimated amounts when the amounts are not susceptible of exact statement by the contractor, as follows: IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this release has been executed this _______day of ________________, 2015 (Imprint Corporate Seal below this line) CONTRACTOR BY: TITLE: ATTEST: (Secretary)




ENGINEERING CERTIFICATION OF CHARGES

I certify this _______day of ______________, 2016, that the attached final invoice is correct for payment, and that to the best of my knowledge and belief, it is a true and correct statement of work performed and materials supplied in accordance with the terms and conditions of the above noted contract.

CITY OF FAYETTEVILLE, NC BY___________________________________________________ TITLE________________________________________________

CSPP‐AirlineTerminalImprovements–Part1May2017 Page1

Construction Safety and Phasing Plan (CSPP) Airline Terminal Improvements – Part 1

Fayetteville Regional Airport (FAY)

MAY 2017 Introduction The Airline Terminal Improvements project (short reference: “the terminal project”) involves extensive renovation and reconstruction of the existing airline terminal, affecting virtually all areas of the facility. The construction will proceed in phases to allow all terminal functions to remain operational throughout the project. This Construction Safety and Phasing Plan (CSPP) covers the Part 1 construction contract, encompassing the earlier phases of the overall project. Extensive structural demolition, reconstruction and expansion elements of the Part 1 contract include demolition and replacement of the existing Concourse A and the existing connector structure between the main terminal and the airline gate concourses. Interior improvements in Part 1 include a temporary relocation of the passenger screening operation; new hold room areas, a new restaurant/retail space and new public restrooms. The Part 1 contract will include extensive renovation of electrical, HVAC, plumbing and IT/communications infrastructure, as well as the addition of fire sprinklers throughout the new construction areas of the building. Electrical system improvements include a new service entrance and switchgear and a new standby power system. HVAC improvements include new air handlers, duct work, etc. Civil improvements included in the Part 1 contract are in support of the building work and include site demolition, earthwork, storm drainage, water line improvements, sanitary sewer improvements, concrete and asphalt pavement, electrical and telecommunications/data utility improvements, pavement marking, signage, and related incidentals. The project will include temporary improvements as necessary to support terminal operations through the construction period.

Fayetteville Regional Airport has two runways. Runway 4-22 is the primary runway. It is 7,709 feet long and is equipped with an ILS. Runway 10-28 is the secondary runway. It is 4,802 feet long and is served by non-precision approaches. The terminal project will not affect either runway. This Construction Safety and Phasing Plan has been prepared in accordance with FAA Advisory Circular (AC) 150/5370-2F. The Plan is organized into 18 chapters corresponding to article 204 of Chapter 2 of the AC.


Chapter 1 - COORDINATION

a. Pre-Design Meeting. No formal pre-design meeting was held for this project. The project

scope, which was developed over the course of a master planning effort, has been coordinated with the ADO. The Safety & Phasing Plan submittal and e-7460 process will initiate formal FAA coordination.

b. Safety Management System. FAA ATO has convened SMS conferences for recent construction projects at FAY; the most recent was held on October 15, 2012 for the Runway 4 RSA Improvements & Taxiway ‘A’ Extension project. It is uncertain whether ATO or FAA Airports will call for an SMS conference for this project.

c. Pre-Bid Conference. A pre-bid conference for the project will be held shortly following advertisement for bids.

d. Pre-Construction Conference. A pre-construction conference will be held following contract award and prior to Notice-to-Proceed. Invitees will include representatives of the owner, architectural/engineering (A/E) team, contractor, key sub-contractors and suppliers, FAA-ADO, FAA-ATC, FAA-SSC, TSA, airlines and other interested parties.

e. Construction Progress Meetings. Progress meetings with representatives of the owner, contractor and A/E team will be held throughout the project. Local FAA ATC and SSC personnel and TSA personnel will be invited. These meetings will generally be held twice per month, but may be more frequent during critical phases of the work. The purpose of these meetings will be scheduling and coordination of the work activities and discussion of operational, safety and security matters. The contractor will be required to have a qualified representative at each of these meetings. Safety, security, schedule and local coordination (ATC/SSC/Airport/NOTAMs, etc.) will be standing agenda items.

f. Scope or Schedule Changes. Any work scope and/or schedule changes contemplated will be discussed and coordinated at progress meetings and through correspondence as appropriate prior to implementation. The contractor is required to prepare, submit and regularly update a detailed construction progress schedule for the project. The schedule, and any contemplated changes, will be discussed at the pre-construction conference and all progress meetings.

g. FAA ATO Coordination. Construction of the Airline Terminal Improvements – Part 1 project will involve crane work which will partially and intermittently obscure the view from the ATCT, in the general direction of the Runway 10 approach and Runway 4 left downwind. The final permanent roof top geometry of the terminal building will obscure a larger area from ATCT view than the current configuration. The additional “shadow area” affects visibility of aircraft on the air carrier and cargo


aprons. It is expected that security system camera views of the air carrier apron will be made available in the tower cab. Coordination meetings have taken place and will continue with airport and ATC and SSC representatives.

Chapter 2 - PHASING

a. Phase Elements

In order to maintain public access and terminal operations, construction will be completed in phases. The phasing is described in the project civil and architectural plans.

b. Construction Safety Drawings

The project aviation safety plan and notes are presented on the civil plans.

Chapter 3 - AREAS AND OPERATIONS AFFECTED BY THE CONSTRUCTION

ACTIVITY

a. Identification of Affected Areas

The air operations areas directly affected by the Airline Terminal Improvements – Part 1 project construction include the air carrier apron and the terminal building. A portion of the air carrier apron will be closed to accommodate the work. Temporary apron and gate layout plans have been developed and included in the project plan set to support airline operations.

b. Mitigation of Effects

The project plans depict construction phasing and temporary measures to be implemented through the construction period to allow all terminal functions to be maintained.

Advance communication with airport management, the airlines, TSA and other terminal tenants has been on-going over the past three years and will continue through the construction period.

Chapter 4 - PROTECTION OF NAVIGATION AIDS (NAVAIDs)

Navigation Aids will not be directly impacted by project construction. Utility power and telecommunications infrastructure which serves the terminal area, including the airline terminal, airfield lighting vault, ARFF station, the ATCT and FAA base building, will be affected by the project. The utility power distribution system in the terminal area is robust with redundant 3-phase feeds and has been recently upgraded. All served


facilities have standby power capabilities for critical functions. Coordination with the electrical utility (Fayetteville Public Works Commission, PWC) and the local telephone utility (Century Link) has been initiated and will continue to minimize the potential for service disruption.

Chapter 5 - CONTRACTOR ACCESS

a. Location of Stockpiled Construction Materials

All stockpiles of materials or equipment shall be located in the contractor staging areas and stockpile areas as shown on the plans or as coordinated with the airport. Staging and stockpile areas are shown on the Plans. All loose items within the staging areas shall be secured at all times. Prior to leaving work each day, the Contractor shall return all construction materials and equipment to the staging areas or secured work areas.

The Contractor shall dispose of existing concrete and other construction debris off Airport property in a properly permitted location.

b. Vehicle and Pedestrian Operations

1) Construction site parking. Personal cars shall be parked outside of secured airfield areas.

2) Construction equipment parking. Prior to leaving work each day, Contractor shall return all equipment to the staging areas, secure work areas or other locations as coordinated with the Owner.

3) Access and haul roads. Access roads to be used under this Contract shall be those designated and approved by the Owner. In general, the Contractor shall confine his equipment and hauling where practical to existing roads on the Airport. If exiting pavement or road surface is damage by the Contractor’s operations, it shall be repaired to its original condition at the Contractor’s expense. Metal track vehicles will not be permitted to operate on or across existing pavement without protective matting to prevent marring of the pavement surface.

The Contractor shall conduct his operations in such a manner as to assure that such operations do not impede access to any area of the airfield at any time for the airport’s aircraft rescue and firefighting (ARFF) vehicles and other emergency vehicles. ARFF vehicle access shall be a standing agenda item for all progress meetings. The Contractor shall cooperate fully and immediately with any directives issued by airport or Fire Department safety personnel relative to emergency access.

4) Marking and lighting of vehicles. All vehicles operating in the AOA shall be lighted or flagged in accordance with FAA Advisory Circular 150/5210-5, Painting,


Marking, and Lighting of Vehicles Used on an Airport. Copies of the Advisory Circular will be made available upon request.

5) Description of proper vehicle operations. All construction vehicles must be cleared for access by Airport Management.

6) Required escorts. All Contractor personnel, including but not limited to, general laborers, subcontractors, drivers, and journeymen working within active air operations areas must at all times remain within visual and voice range of contractor personnel badged by the airport. For the purposes of this project, the air operations areas (AOA) refer to all areas within the airport security fence. SIDA access badges will be required.

7) Training requirements for vehicle drivers. All vehicle drivers within the air operations areas (AOA) must be properly badged and trained by airport safety officers.

8) Situational awareness. Personnel, equipment, or other construction-related material are not allowed within the safety area of an open runway or taxiway at any time unless cleared by the airport traffic control tower. For this project, the contractor will not have need for access on active taxiway and runway areas.

Restrict movement of construction vehicles to construction areas by flagging and barricading, erecting temporary fencing, or providing escorts as appropriate.

Ensure that no construction employees, employees of subcontractors or suppliers, or other persons enter any part of the Air Operations Areas (AOA) from the construction site unless authorized.

During construction, adjacent aprons, taxilanes, taxiways, and runways will be open to aircraft unless otherwise noted. Aircraft have the right of way at all times. Contractor shall be aware of the aircraft movements and the jet blast and/or prop-wash associated with these aircraft. The Contractor shall secure loose items.

c. Two-way radio communications

1) General. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of two (2) two-way aviation band radios for use when access across active taxiways or runways is needed. For this project, very little need for such access is contemplated. The Contractor shall also supply a cell phone for emergency contact in the event of radio failure.

The Contractor shall be responsible for all required maintenance included battery replacement if needed. If a radio will be out of service for any period of time, a substitute shall be provided.


2) Non-Movement Area Limits. The air carrier apron is a non-movement area in terms of air traffic control. This means that aircraft, pedestrian and ground vehicle operations on the apron are not controlled by FAA Air Traffic Controllers. The apron entrance/exit taxiways (Taxiway ‘F’, ‘H’, and ‘R’) are part of the movement area; do not enter upon those taxiways without real time radio clearance from ATCT.

3) Areas requiring two-way radio communication with the ATCT. Prior to moving in close proximity to, entering or crossing an active runway or taxiway, the Contractor must clear such action by two-way radio through the Airport Traffic Control Tower, who will then issue the appropriate advisories to aircraft and construction traffic. Contractor will be required to provide two-way radios. If the control tower is not manned, construction activities should be coordinated through the Fire Department (Station 10). Crossing or entering active runways or taxiways without prior approval from Air Traffic Control Tower will subject Contractor to being fined a minimum $10,000 per incursion and loss of privilege of moving across active runways and taxiways.

4) Frequencies to be used. Two-way radio communications with air traffic control tower will be on ground control frequency 121.70 MHZ. Communication with the Airport administrative staff shall be by phone at 910-433-1160 during business hours and with Fire Department personnel at Fire Station 10 (the ARFF station) at 910-433-1624 at other times.

Vehicular traffic crossing active aircraft movement areas (runways and taxiways) and navigational aid critical areas must be controlled by two-way radio with the control tower. The Contractor shall maintain continuous two-way radio contact, on frequency 121.90 MHZ, with the control tower.

d. Airport Security

1) Airport Security Notes are included on the plans:

1. AREA DEFINITIONS AND ACCESS RESTRICTIONS

A. “SECURED AREA” ‐ THE SECURED AREA IS THE AREA OF THE AIRPORT WHERE

MEASURES ARE IN PLACE TO LIMIT ACCESS TO AUTHORIZED PERSONS. THE

SECURED AREA BOUNDARY IS DELINEATED BY THE AIRPORT’S PERIMETER FENCE

AND THE WALLS OF VARIOUS AIRPORT BUILDINGS, INCLUDING THE AIRLINE

TERMINAL BUILDING. ACCESS INSIDE THE SECURED AREA REQUIRES A

SIDA/SECURED AREA BADGE ISSUED BY THE AIRPORT OR ESCORT AT ALL TIMES BY

AN INDIVIDUAL WITH AN AIRPORT ISSUED SIDA/SECURED AREA BADGE WITH

ESCORT PRIVILEGES.


B. “AIR OPERATIONS AREA, AOA” – THE AIR OPERATIONS AREA (AOA) IS ANY AREA OF

THE AIRPORT USED OR INTENDED TO BE USED FOR THE LANDING, TAKEOFF OR

SURFACE MOVEMENT OF AIRCRAFT. THE AOA INCLUDES SUCH PAVED AND

UNPAVED AREAS THAT ARE USED OR INTENDED TO BE USED FOR THE

UNOBSTRUCTED MOVEMENT OF AIRCRAFT IN ADDITION TO THE PAVED RUNWAY,

TAXIWAYS AND APRONS. FOR AIRPORT SECURITY PURPOSES, THIS TERM IS

SOMETIMES USED TO MEAN THE SECURED AREA.

C. “SECURITY IDENTIFICATION DISPLAY AREA, SIDA” – THE SECURITY IDENTIFICATION

DISPLAY AREA (SIDA) IS THE AREA OF THE AIRPORT WHERE SECURITY MEASURES

ASSOCIATED WITH AIRLINE OPERATIONS ARE IN PLACE. THE SIDA INCLUDES THE

ENTIRE AIR CARRIER APRON AND PORTIONS OF THE AIRLINE TERMINAL BUILDING.

ACCESS INSIDE THE SIDA REQUIRES A SIDA/SECURED AREA BADGE ISSUED BY THE

AIRPORT OR ESCORT AT ALL TIMES BY AN INDIVIDUAL WITH AN AIRPORT ISSUED

SIDA/SECURED AREA BADGE WITH ESCORT PRIVILEGES. VEHICLES AND EQUIPMENT

ENTERING THE SIDA MUST BE INSPECTED BY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL PRIOR TO

SUCH ENTRY.

D. “STERILE AREA” – THE STERILE AREA IS THAT PORTION OF THE TERMINAL BUILDING

BEYOND THE TSA PASSENGER SCREENING STATION. ALL PASSENGERS AND CARRY‐

ON BAGS IN THE AREA HAVE PASSED THROUGH THE SCREENING STATION LOCALLY

(DEPARTING PASSENGERS) OR ELSEWHERE (ARRIVING PASSENGERS). ACCESS INSIDE

THE STERILE AREA REQUIRES A SIDA/SECURED AREA BADGE ISSUED BY THE AIRPORT

OR ESCORT AT ALL TIMES BY AN INDIVIDUAL WITH AN AIRPORT ISSUED

SIDA/SECURED AREA BADGE WITH ESCORT PRIVILEGES.

E. “NON‐SIDA WORK AREA” – FOR THIS CONSTRUCTION PROJECT, NON‐SIDA WORK

AREAS WILL BE ESTABLISHED WITHIN THE SECURED AREA FOR THE PURPOSE OF

SEGREGATING MAJOR CONSTRUCTION WORK AREAS FROM ACTIVE SIDA AIRLINE

OPERATIONS AREAS. ACCESS INSIDE THESE NON‐SIDA WORK AREAS REQUIRES A

SIDA/SECURED AREA BADGE ISSUED BY THE AIRPORT OR ESCORT AT ALL TIMES BY

AN INDIVIDUAL WITH AN AIRPORT ISSUED SIDA/SECURED AREA BADGE WITH

ESCORT PRIVILEGES. VEHICLES AND EQUIPMENT ENTERING THE NON‐SIDA WORK

AREAS VIA THE DESIGNATED ACCESS ROUTE FROM AIRPORT GATE 7 WILL NOT

REQUIRE INSPECTION PRIOR TO SUCH ENTRY BUT SHALL BE STRICTLY CONTROLLED

BY SPECIALLY TRAINED AND SIDA BADGED CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL. THE NON‐

SIDA WORK AREAS WILL BE DELINEATED BY TEMPORARY FENCE LINES, GATES, AND


PERMANENT AND TEMPORARY WALLS ALL PROVIDED AND MAINTAINED BY THE

CONTRACTOR.

F. “FAA SECURED AREA” – THE FAA SECURED AREA IS AN AREA DELINEATED BY

FENCING INTO WHICH ACCESS IS CONTROLLED BY FAA AND NOT BY THE AIRPORT.

THE AREA INCLUDES THE AIRPORT TRAFFIC CONTROL TOWER AND RELATED

SUPPORT FACILITIES. ANY ACCESS INTO THE FAA SECURE AREA MUST BE

COORDINATED WITH FAA.

G. “UN‐SECURED AREA” ‐ THE UN‐SECURED AREA INCLUDES THE AREAS OF THE

TERMINAL BUILDING AND AIRPORT GROUNDS FOR WHICH AIRPORT SECURITY

ACCESS CONTROL MEASURES ARE NOT IN PLACE (“OUTSIDE THE FENCE”). THIS

INCLUDES THE ACCESS ROAD, PARKING LOTS AND PUBLIC AREAS OF THE TERMINAL

BUILDING. IT ALSO INCLUDES AREAS OF LIMITED ACCESS SUCH AS AIRPORT

OFFICES, CONFERENCE ROOMS, TENANT OFFICES AND LOCKED STORAGE AND

MAINTENANCE ROOMS. WHILE AIRPORT ACCESS CONTROL MEASURES ARE NOT IN

PLACE FOR THE UN‐SECURED AREA, SUCH SECURITY MEASURES AS VIDEO

SURVEILLANCE, POLICE PATROLS, LOCK MANAGEMENT AND VIGILANCE BY AIRPORT,

TSA AND TENANT PERSONNEL ARE IN PLACE.

2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ESTABLISHING A BADGE AND SECURITY

MANAGEMENT PROGRAM WITH A PRIMARY AND SECONDARY (BACK‐UP) BADGE AND

SECURITY MANAGER. THESE INDIVIDUALS SHALL BE DESIGNATED BY THE CONTRACTOR

AS HAVING SIGNATORY AUTHORITY FOR AIRPORT SECURITY BADGING MATTERS. THIS

DESIGNATION SHALL BE IN THE FORM OF A NOTARIZED LETTER TO THE AIRPORT

DIRECTOR, ON CONTRACTOR LETTERHEAD, SIGNED BY AN OFFICER OF THE COMPANY.

THE SECURITY MANAGERS MUST OBTAIN AND MAINTAIN AIRPORT SIDA/SECURITY

BADGES WITH ESCORT PRIVILEGES AND SHALL UNDERGO INITIAL AND ANNUAL

SIGNATORY AUTHORITY TRAINING BY THE AIRPORT. THE PROGRAM IS INTENDED TO

MANAGE, COORDINATE (WITH AIRPORT MANAGEMENT) AND DOCUMENT: (1) THE

SECURING OF AIRPORT SIDA BADGES FOR CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR

PERSONNEL (THE APPLICATIONS ARE TO BE SIGNED BY THE SIGNATORY AUTHORITY

AFTER THE APPLICANT HAS SIGNED THE FORM), (2) AIRPORT SECURITY AND SAFETY

RELATED TRAINING, (3) AN INVENTORY OF ACTIVE BADGES, (4) IMMEDIATELY TURNING

IN BADGES OF TERMINATED STAFF AND THE STAFF OF TERMINATED SUBCONTRACTORS,

(5) REGULAR REVIEW AND UPDATES OF SECURITY MATTERS, INCLUDING BUT NOT

LIMITED TO ITEMS (1) THROUGH (4), PROJECT MEETING SECURITY RELATED AGENDA

ITEMS, GATE KEEPING AND DOOR MANAGEMENT EFFORTS, TEMPORARY SIDA AND


STERILE AREA LIMITS (INCLUDING TEMPORARY WALLS, FENCES, GATES AND DOORS),

DISCIPLINARY AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS, AND ADVANCE PLANNING FOR CHANGES IN

CONSTRUCTION WORK AREAS AND STERILE AREA/SIDA LIMITS.

3. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL TEAM AND AIRPORT

MANAGEMENT WITH REGARD TO THE ADVANCE SCHEDULING AND TSA REVIEW AND

APPROVAL OF UPCOMING CHANGES IN SECURED AREA, SIDA AND STERILE AREA LIMITS,

BOTH INSIDE AND OUTSIDE OF THE TERMINAL BUILDING. ALLOW 45 CALENDAR DAYS

FOR TSA REVIEW AND APPROVAL OF SUCH CHANGES.

4. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING AT ALL TIMES AN ADEQUATE

NUMBER OF PERSONNEL WITH AIRPORT SIDA BADGES WITH ESCORT PRIVILEGES AND

COMPLETED TRAINING SUCH THAT ALL WORK CREWS ARE ESCORTED AT ALL TIMES BY

BADGED PERSONNEL. ALL UNBADGED PERSONNEL SHALL BE ESCORTED BY BADGED

PERSONNEL AND MUST BE WITHIN VISUAL AND VOICE CONTACT RANGE OF THE

BADGED ESCORT AT ALL TIMES. ALL BADGED PERSONNEL MUST DISPLAY (WEAR) THEIR

BADGE ON THEIR PERSON (BETWEEN THE SHOULDER AND WAIST) AT ALL TIMES WHEN

ON SITE, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THEY ARE PRESENT INSIDE THE SECURED AREA AND

REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT THEY ARE ACTIVELY ESCORTING UNBADGED

PERSONNEL. FOR THIS PROJECT, THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF UNBADGED PERSONNEL

COVERED BY A SINGLE BADGED ESCORT SHALL BE SIX (6) WITHIN THE ACTIVE SIDA AND

STERILE AREAS AND TWELVE (12) WITHIN NON‐SIDA WORK AREAS.

5. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PRACTICABLE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ESTABLISH

PHYSICAL SEPARATION AND/OR TEMPORARY SIDA AND STERILE AREA LIMITS, AS

APPROPRIATE, TO ISOLATE CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES FROM ACTIVE AIRPORT

OPERATIONS. IT IS UNDERSTOOD, HOWEVER, THAT A SIGNIFICANT AMOUNT OF

CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY MUST TAKE PLACE WITHIN ACTIVE SIDA AND STERILE AREAS.

THE CONTRACTOR MUST STRICTLY ADHERE TO PERSONNEL ESCORT AND

VEHICLE/EQUIPMENT INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE

RESPONSIBLE FOR CONTROLLING AND SECURING MATERIALS, TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

IN SIDA AND STERILE AREAS AND SHALL NOT LEAVE TOOLS, EQUIPMENT AND

MATERIALS UNATTENDED UNLESS LOCKED AND/OR SECURED IN A MANNER

ACCEPTABLE TO AIRPORT MANAGEMENT.

6. A CONSTRUCTION ACCESS ROUTE FROM AIRPORT GATE 7 AND RUNNING ACROSS THE

NORTH GENERAL AVIATION APRON AND A DE‐ACTIVATED PORTION OF THE AIR CARRIER

APRON IS DEPICTED ON THE PLANS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ESTABLISH THE


CONSTRUCTION ACCESS ROUTE AND SHALL FURNISH, INSTALL, MAINTAIN AND

ULTIMATELY REMOVE PAVEMENT MARKINGS, LOW PROFILE AVIATION BARRICADES,

TEMPORARY GATES, SIGNS, ETC. AS SHOWN. THE ROUTE LAYOUT SEGREGATES

CONSTRUCTION TRAFFIC FROM AIRCRAFT TRAFFIC AND OPERATIONS. THE

CONSTRUCTION ACCESS ROUTE IS SUBJECT TO CROSSING VEHICULAR TRAFFIC,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TI ARFF (FIRE) TRUCKS, AIRCRAFT FUELING VEHICLES,

FUEL DELIVERY VEHICLES, AIRLINE AND AIRPORT GROUND VEHICLES, BAGGAGE TUGS,

AIRPORT VEHICLES AND FAA VEHICLES. CONSTRUCTION VEHICLES SHALL YIELD TO ALL

OTHER TRAFFIC.

7. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM ALL TEMPORARY WORK ASSOCIATED WITH

TEMPORARY AND FINAL CHANGES IN SECURE AREA, SIDA AND STERILE AREA LIMITS

AND ACCESS POINTS, INCLUDING ALL WORK NECESSARY TO ERECT TEMPORARY WALLS,

FENCES, GATES AND DOORS, CHANGE LOCKS AND SIGNS, RELOCATE SECURITY DEVICES

(ELECTRONIC ACCESS CARD READERS, KEYPADS, SURVEILLANCE CAMERAS, LIGHTING,

ETC.) TO THE SATISFACTION OF AIRPORT MANAGEMENT.

8. GATE KEEPERS SHALL ALLOW PASSAGE TO AUTHORIZED CONSTRUCTION VEHICLES

ONLY. GATE KEEPERS SHALL MAINTAIN A DATE AND TIME LOG OF ALL VEHICLES

ENTERING AND DEPARTING, INCLUDING RECORDS OF THE VEHICLE’S CONTROLLING

ENTITY (CONTRACTOR, SUBCONTRACTOR, SUPPLIER AND/OR TRANSPORT FIRM) AND

VEHICLE NUMBER. CODES, ABBREVIATIONS AND FORMS SHALL BE PREPARED AHEAD

OF ACCESS OPERATIONS AND UPDATED AS NEEDED TO FACILITATE THE LOG KEEPING

EFFORT. THE GATE KEEPER SHALL BE INSTRUCTED TO CHALLENGE AND TURN AWAY

ANY UNAUTHORIZED VEHICLES OR PERSONNEL AND SHALL HAVE IMMEDIATE ACCESS

TO A TELEPHONE AND EMERGENCY CONTACT NUMBERS (AIRPORT MANAGEMENT,

ARFF STATION AND POLICE) TO IMMEDIATELY REPORT SECURITY INCIDENTS.

9. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTRUCT ALL PERSONNEL REGARDING AIRPORT SECURITY

MATTERS, INCLUDING THE NEED FOR VIGILANCE AND IMMEDIATE REPORTING OF

UNAUTHORIZED OR SUSPICIOUS PERSONNEL, VEHICLES, EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS OR

ACTIVITIES.

10. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSPECT TEMPORARY SECURITY LINES (FENCES, GATES,

DOORS, WALLS, LOCKING SYSTEMS) ON A DAILY BASIS (AT THE START AND

COMPLETION OF EACH WORK SHIFT), SHALL IMMEDIATELY REPORT ANY APPARENT

SECURITY BREACHES, SHALL ASSIGN A BADGED GATEKEEPER TO ANY BREACHED AREAS


DISCOVERED, AND SHALL PROMPTLY REPAIR ANY BREACHED AREAS DISCOVERED TO

THE SATISFACTION OF AIRPORT MANAGEMENT.

11. VEHICLES, EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS SHALL NOT BE STORED WITHIN 10 FEET OF ANY

EXISTING OR TEMPORARY FENCE LINE SERVING THE SECURED AREA, SIDA, STERILE AREA

OR FAA SECURED AREA.

12. IN THAT CONTRACT WORK IS MULTI‐YEAR, BADGED CONTRACTOR AND

SUBCONTRACTOR PERSONNEL WITH SHALL BE REQUIRED TO UNDERGO ANNUAL

RECURRENT TRAINING.

2) Fencing and gates. The Contractor shall coordinate ingress-egress

requirements with the Airport Management. All open gates to secured airport areas shall be monitored continuously by Contractor’s personnel to control access to the secured area or shall be closed and locked. Contractor personnel shall not allow any unauthorized personnel, vehicles or animals to enter through the construction gate. The Contractor shall be responsible for securing and locking all gates when not in use and at the end of each day’s operations. Gate monitors must log in and out all vehicles entering and leaving the project areas.

3) Badging requirements. The project area is located within the Secured Area. This is a closely maintained security area with restricted access. The Contractor will be required to meet all requirements for entering and operating in the Secured Area at all times. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to become familiar with all requirements for entering and operating in the Secured Area. Further, it will remain the Contractor’s responsibility to keep abreast of any changes in requirements, to adhere to current regulations, and to adhere to current regulations for security badging of personnel. In order to obtain security badges, personnel will be required to furnish a secure area application, ten-year background employment history record, criminal background check, fingerprints, and attend a one-half day safety training class with the Fire Department at Station 10. Electronic fingerprint images will be prepared by airport administrative personnel and forwarded for federal processing. The Contractor shall arrange to have an adequate number of supervisory and other personnel obtain badges to meet this requirement. All supervisory personnel working within the secured airfield area shall possess and clearly display their security identification badge at all times. All supervisory personnel, escort drivers, and flagmen must additionally complete a one-half day driving and communications safety training class with the Fire Department at Station 10. A


sufficient number of properly badged personnel shall be required to be present on site at all times and within visual and audible range to monitor all employees, subcontractors, and suppliers when the Contractor is working within the limits of the secured airfield area.

Contractor should allow for four weeks to obtain required badges and complete safety training; given the tight timeframe for the project notice to proceed, Contractor must initiate the badging process and sign up for safety and driver training for an adequate number of personnel as required to perform the work immediately upon notice of award.

4) The Fayetteville Regional Airport is subject to 49 CFR Part 1542, Airport Security, and must meet TSA standards for access control, movement of ground vehicles, and identification of construction contractor and tenant personnel.

Chapter 6 - WILDLIFE MANAGEMENT

a. Trash

The Contractor shall clean all construction areas of litter, loose papers, debris, etc. on a daily basis, or as directed by the Engineer. Food scraps must be collected from construction personnel activity. Prior to the close of daily operations, Contractor shall inspect all active Air Operations Areas and construction areas for litter. All debris shall be cleaned up and properly disposed of prior to release of crews from each shift.

b. Standing water

If wet conditions are encountered during construction, Contractor is responsible for dewatering areas to remove standing water.

c. Tall grass and seeds

All seeding shall comply with the seeding specifications to avoid seed mixtures that will attract wildlife. The Contractor shall protect seeded areas against traffic or other use by warning signs or barricades. Surfaces gullied or otherwise damaged following seeding shall be repaired by regrading and reseeding as directed. The Contractor shall mow, water as directed, and otherwise maintain seeded areas in a satisfactory condition until final inspection and acceptance of the work.

d. Poorly maintained fencing and gates


The airport perimeter fencing and gates shall be carefully protected by the Contractor. Any facilities damaged by the Contractor will be repaired immediately and restored to original condition at Contractor’s cost

e. Disruption of existing wildlife habitat

The airport actively manages wildlife. This project is not expected to disrupt any existing wildlife habitat.

Contractor shall notify Airport Management immediately of any wildlife encounters and/or sightings.

Chapter 7 - FOREIGN OBJECT DEBRIS (FOD) MANAGEMENT

1. Waste and loose materials, commonly referred to as FOD, are capable of causing damage to aircraft landing gears, propellers, and jet engines. During construction operations, Contractor is responsible for monitoring and controlling FOD to the satisfaction of Airport Management. Prior to the close of daily operations, Contractor shall inspect all construction areas to ensure that they are clear of FOD.

2. Prior to reopening any construction work area to aircraft traffic, Contractor must perform a walk through with airport personnel and the A/E Project Representative to confirm that the areas are free of FOD or other hazards.

3. When crossing active apron taxilanes, Contractor must inspect and clean area for FOD after each pass of construction equipment and/or vehicles by use of a sweeper truck or other means acceptable to Airport Management.

Chapter 8 - HAZARDOUS MATERIALS (HAZMAT) MANAGEMENT

1. Contractor shall be responsible for oil management and for expeditious containment

and clean-up spills on the airport property resulting from fuel, lubricant or hydraulic fluid leaks from construction vehicles and/or equipment.

2. The Contractor shall furnish to the A/E representative and airport maintenance and safety staff, MSDS sheets for all chemicals used during construction.

3. Transport and handling of other hazardous materials on an airport also requires special procedures. See AC 150/5320-15, Management of Airport Industrial Waste.

Chapter 9 - NOTIFICATION OF CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES

a. Maintenance of a list of responsible representatives/points of contact


1) The Contractor and all subcontractors shall designate a representative and alternate to contact on a 24-hour basis should problems arise. The point of contact provided must be able to coordinate an immediate response to correct any construction-related activity that may adversely affect the operational safety of the airport. The Contractor shall provide a listing of all contact persons of all supervisory personnel and all subcontractors.

2) The Contractor must also provide a safety/construction inspector familiar with airport safety to monitor construction activities.

3) The Contractor shall coordinate with FAA-system support, NOAA and airport management when working in areas containing FAA, weather, or airfield lighting cable. Generally, these types of cables are not located in the work areas of this project.

Contacts are:

Airport Mr. Bradley Whited 910-433-1160

Mr. Toney Coleman 910-433-1160

FAA Facilities (FAY SSC) Mr. Jeffrey Brown 910-484-5948

FAA ATCT Mr. Karl White 910-323-0849

b. Notices to Airmen (NOTAM)

The OWNER will issue the necessary NOTAMS to reflect hazardous and operational conditions. The Contractor shall work with the OWNER to schedule NOTAM issuance and Airport Operations Area (AOA) closures, and shall provide the OWNER with advance notice of the need to issue or close a NOTAM. It is important that NOTAMS be kept current and reflects the actual conditions with respect to construction situations. Active NOTAMS shall be reviewed periodically and revised to reflect the current conditions.

The Contractor shall not begin work unless and until 72 hours prior notice has been given to Airport Management

c. Emergency notification procedures

In an emergency situation the Contractor is to notify Fire Station 10 immediately by phone at 910-433-1624.

d. Coordination with ARFF (Fire Station 10) Personnel

The ARFF building (Fire Station 10) is located adjacent to the air carrier apron opposite Taxiway F. The Station 10 staff will be invited to all project meetings for coordination of safety and security matters.


e. Notification to the FAA

1) Part 77. If Contractor utilizes cranes, bucket trucks, or other equipment exceeding 25’ in height, Contractor is responsible for filing a “Notice of Proposed Construction or Alteration” (FAA Form 7460) with FAA prior to erecting equipment. Contractor should allow at least 30 days for FAA review. Detailed instructions can be found on the FAA website: https://oeaaa.faa.gov/oeaaa/external/portal.jsp.

2) NAVAIDS.

a) This project is not expected to impact any navigational aids.

Chapter 10 - INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS

a. Daily inspections

1) A daily start-up and shut-down checklist will be jointly prepared by the Contractor and Airport Management and included in the Safety Plan Compliance Document (SPCD). The checklist will be followed throughout the project. This checklist shall include, but not be limited to, barricades, flags, haul routes, securing of access gates, clean up, etc. The Contractor’s site supervisor and labor crew shall not leave the work site until such time as the Fire Department (Station 10 personnel) has inspected the area and signed off on the daily checklist.

2) Frequent inspections will be made by the airport staff during critical phases of the work to ensure that the Contractor is following the recommended airfield safety procedures.

b. Final inspections

1) Prior to reopening aircraft apron areas, Contractor must perform a walkthrough of the construction area with airport personnel to confirm that the areas are free of FOD or other hazards.

2) Contractor shall be required to remedy any deficiencies immediately, whether caused by negligence, oversight, or project scope change to the satisfaction of Airport Management.

Chapter 11 - UNDERGROUND UTILITIES

5) Underground utilities are known to be located in the project areas. Existing

underground utilities including but not limited to PWC (utility) power and fiber optic cables, telephone (Century Link), cable TV (Time Warner/Spectrum), water and sewer


(PWC public utility), natural gas, airport/City owned service lines (all utility types), HVAC lines, tenant IT lines (fiber and copper), storm drains and other utilities may be in the path of construction. Locations of utilities as shown on the Plans are approximate only. All utilities and facilities are not necessarily indicated on Plans. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to locate and protect existing utilities and facilities from damage, and to immediately act to restore lines damaged by construction operations.

6) All existing facilities will be carefully protected by the Contractor. Any facilities damaged by the Contractor will be repaired immediately and restored to original condition at the Contractor’s expense. If damaged by the Contractor, these and any other above or below ground facilities shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense, to the satisfaction of the OWNER.

7) The Contractor shall employ a private utility locator service or shall obtain and utilize cable locating equipment in order to field locate existing cable runs not to be disturbed/replaced by this project.

8) It is understood and agreed that the OWNER does not guarantee the accuracy or the completeness of the location information relating to existing utility services, facilities, or structures that may be shown on the plans or encountered in the work. Any inaccuracy or omission in such information shall not relieve the Contractor of his/her responsibility to protect such existing features from damage or unscheduled interruption of service.

9) Should the Contractor damage or interrupt the operations of a utility service or facility outside the project limits by accident or otherwise, he shall immediately notify the proper authority and the Architect and shall take all reasonable measures to prevent further damage or interruption of service. The Contractor, in such events, shall cooperate with the utility service or facility owner and the Architect continuously until such damage has been repaired and service restored to the satisfaction of the utility or facility owner.

10) The Contractor shall bear all costs of damage and restoration of service to any utility service or facility due to his/her operations whether or not due to negligence or accident. The OWNER reserves the right to deduct such costs from any monies due or which may become due to the Contractor.

Chapter 12 - PENALTIES

1. Crossing or entering active taxiways, runways or adjacent areas without prior approval

from Air Traffic Control Tower will subject Contractor to being fined a minimum $10,000 per incursion and loss of privilege of moving across active Air Operations


Areas. If the control tower is not manned, construction activities should be coordinated through the Fire Department (Station 10).

2. For each incident where cables are located within five feet of the position defined on the ground and are cut or damaged and are not able to perform their required function resulting in the diversion of aircraft or the interruption of the normal flow of air traffic and aircraft operations on the Airport, the sum of $10,000.00 per incident shall be deducted from any money due the Contractor. An additional $1,000.00 per day will be deducted from any money due the Contractor until such time as cables are repaired and operational. If no money is due the Contractor, the OWNER shall have the right to recover said sum or sums from the Contractor, from the surety, or from both. The amount of these deductions are to cover liquidated damages to the Sponsor incurred by additional work and other expenses and damages arising from the incident or incidents caused by the Contractor, and such deductions are not to be considered as penalties.

Chapter 13 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS

1. The Contractor’s supervisory personnel are expected to become knowledgeable regarding the airport’s operational, safety and security requirements, actively participate in project meetings, establish effective communications with airport management and safety personnel (ARFF / Fire Station 10) and TSA and FAA ATC and Tech Ops personnel. The Contractor shall cooperate with the airport, TSA and FAA in operational matters and during emergency response situations.

2. The Airport Traffic Control Tower (ATCT) at FAY is normally open on a 24/7 basis.

Chapter 14 - RUNWAY AND TAXIWAY VISUAL AIDS

a. This project is not expected to impact taxiways and runways nor the associated

visual aids. Taxiway edge lighting is in place on the far side of the apron edge taxilane.

Chapter 15 - MARKING AND SIGNS FOR ACCESS ROUTES

1. The contractor access routes are shown on the Plans. Access points and on-airport access routes shall be discussed at the pre-con and at progress meetings to address construction needs and airport operational safety and security considerations. Access route physical conditions shall be regularly reviewed. The Contractor is expected to maintain the haul routes in safe, clean, orderly condition at all times. Many of the


routes are also used for public access, maintenance access, security checks and emergency response; these routes must be passable at all times and in all weather conditions.

2. The Contractor shall provide and maintain signs and markings for access routes on the airport as needed to control and guide the construction traffic. All signs and markings shall be coordinated with airport staff and reviewed for aircraft safety and security considerations.

Chapter 16 - HAZARD MARKINGS AND LIGHTING

a) Purpose. Hazard marking and lighting prevents pilots from entering areas closed to

aircraft, and prevents construction personnel from entering areas open to aircraft. Hazard marking and lighting shall also identify open manholes, small areas under repair, stockpiled material, waste areas, and areas subject to jet blast.

b) Equipment

1) Lighted Fences. Lighted chain link temporary fences are required to establish segregated work zones on the air carrier. The fences shall be anchored/stabilized against wind, jet blast and prop wash. Provide hazard lighting on the fences as detailed on the plans. The fences shall be positioned well clear of the taxilane OFA (see Chapter 17) and active aircraft parking position safety boxes.

2) Lighted Barricades. Low profile aviation barricades shall be constructed of 12” white PVC pipe (cut in half) or other approved material that is 6’ minimum in length. Spacing shall be 6 feet apart or as directed. See detail on the Plans.

3) Lights must be red. A steady burning red light shall be centered on each lighted barricade and at specified intervals along temporary fences and must meet the luminance requirements of the State Highway Department. Lights must be securely mounted on barricades and spaced at no more than 10 feet. Lights must be operated between sunset and sunrise and during periods of low visibility whenever the airport is open for operations.

4) Maintenance. The Contractor must have a person on call 24 hours a day for emergency maintenance of airport hazard lighting and barricades. The Contractor must file the contact person’s information with the airport operations. Lighting should be checked for proper operation at least once per day, preferably at dusk.

Chapter 17 – AIRCRAFT PROTECTION

For this project, the Contractor’s operations within the AOA are limited to the air carrier apron. The Contractor is not authorized to operate on or near active taxiways and


runways, unless specific and limited access is authorized for highly infrequent activities such as a surveyor referencing a PAC/SAC monument or specially arranged oversize construction deliveries (large crane or Passenger Boarding Bridge components may require airside delivery access). In such cases, the work shall be coordinated under the supervision of appropriately trained and badged individuals.

The air carrier apron is used by a variety of commercial aircraft types, including propeller and jet type commuter aircraft and narrow body airline jet aircraft, all with a maximum wingspan of 118 feet (Airplane Design Group III). An aircraft taxilane is marked along the outer edge of the apron (depicted by taxilane centerline striping (solid yellow) and taxilane edge striping (dashed double yellow). Aircraft follow the taxilane between the 3 apron access taxiways (F, H and R) and the aircraft gate parking positions, and back. Aircraft generally arrive at the gate under their own power and are generally pushed back from the gate by aircraft tug (occasionally, aircraft depart from the gate under their own power).

The Taxilane Object Free Area (TLOFA) is 162 feet wide (81 feet offset either side of the taxilane centerline stripe). This is the area which must be kept clear of objects so the aircraft can pass with a small safety margin along the travel path of the wing tip.

No construction may occur within the TLOFA while the taxilane is open for aircraft operations. Generally, the only construction activity for this project occurring immediately adjacent to the TLOFA is application and subsequent removal of pavement marking for a ground vehicle access corridor.

Generally, construction operations are not anticipated immediately adjacent to active aircraft parking positions. The Contractor’s personnel, vehicles and equipment are prohibited from entering into the red outline safety box of any occupied aircraft parking position or within 100 feet (unless separated by temporary fencing) of any aircraft that is maneuvering into or out of the position or which has its engines running except as coordinated in advance with the airline station manager and under coordination in real time with airline ground handling personnel.

During low speed aircraft operation on the apron, five-foot minimum clearance shall be maintained between equipment and materials and any part of an aircraft (includes wingtip overhang). In these situations, flaggers must be used to direct construction equipment, and wing walkers will be necessary to guide aircraft. Wing walkers shall be airline/aviation personnel rather than construction workers.

Use caution with regard to jet blast and prop wash.


Chapter 18 - OTHER LIMITATIONS ON CONSTRUCTION

a. Tall equipment. If Contractor utilizes cranes, bucket trucks, concrete pumps or other equipment exceeding 25’ in height, Contractor is responsible for filing a “Notice of proposed Construction” (7460) with FAA prior to erecting equipment. Contractor should allow at least 30 days for FAA review. Detailed instructions can be found on the FAA website: https://oeaaa.faa.gov/oeaaa/external/portal.jsp.

b. Prohibitions

1) No use of open flame welding or torches unless fire safety precautions are provided and airport management has approved their use.

2) No use of electrical blasting caps on or within 1,000 feet of the airport property.

3) No use of flare pots within the AOA.

END